SlideShare a Scribd company logo
RG

Sustainability Reporting Guidelines




© 2000-2011 GRI                Version 3.1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines      RG


Table of Contents
Preface                                            General Reporting Notes
Sustainable Development and the                    Data Gathering				40
Transparency Imperative	
                                                   Report Form and Frequency 			        40

Introduction                                       Assurance 				41

Overview of Sustainability Reporting
The Purpose of a Sustainability Report		      3    Glossary of Terms				42

Orientation to the GRI Reporting Framework	   3

Orientation to the GRI Guidelines		           4

Applying the Guidelines			                    5

Part 1
Defining Report Content, Quality,
and Boundary
Guidance for Defining Report Content		        7

Principles for Defining Report Content		      8

Principles for Defining Report Quality		      13

Guidance for Report Boundary Setting		        17

Part 2
Standard Disclosures
Strategy and Profile			                       20

      1.	 Strategy and Analysis		             20

      2.	 Organizational Profile		            21

      3.	Parameters			21
        Report

      4.	 Governance, Commitments,
          and Engagement			22

      5.	 Management Approach and
          Performance Indicators		            24

Economic				25

Environmental 				27

Social:

Labor Practices and Decent Work		             30

Human Rights				32

Society					36

Product Responsibility 			                    39




                                                                                             Version 3.1   1
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Preface
            Sustainable Development and the
            Transparency Imperative
            The goal of sustainable development is to “meet the             The urgency and magnitude of the risks and threats
            needs of the present without compromising the ability           to our collective sustainability, alongside increasing
            of future generations to meet their own needs.”1 As             choice and opportunities, will make transparency
            key forces in society, organizations of all kinds have an       about economic, environmental, and social impacts
            important role to play in achieving this goal.                  a fundamental component in effective stakeholder
                                                                            relations, investment decisions, and other market
            Yet in this era of unprecedented economic growth,               relations. To support this expectation, and to
            achieving this goal can seem more of an aspiration than         communicate clearly and openly about sustainability,
            a reality. As economies globalize, new opportunities            a globally shared framework of concepts, consistent
            to generate prosperity and quality of life are arising          language, and metrics is required. It is the Global
            though trade, knowledge-sharing, and access to                  Reporting Initiative’s (GRI) mission to fulfil this need
            technology. However, these opportunities are not always         by providing a trusted and credible framework
            available for an ever-increasing human population,              for sustainability reporting that can be used by
            and are accompanied by new risks to the stability of            organizations of any size, sector, or location.
            the environment. Statistics demonstrating positive
            improvements in the lives of many people around the             Transparency about the sustainability of organizational
            world are counter-balanced by alarming information              activities is of interest to a diverse range of stakeholders,
            about the state of the environment and the continuing           including business, labor, non-governmental
            burden of poverty and hunger on millions of people.             organizations, investors, accountancy, and others. This
            This contrast creates one of the most pressing dilemmas         is why GRI has relied on the collaboration of a large
            for the 21st century.                                           network of experts from all of these stakeholder groups
                                                                            in consensus-seeking consultations. These consultations,
            One of the key challenges of sustainable development            together with practical experience, have continuously
            is that it demands new and innovative choices and ways          improved the Reporting Framework since GRI’s founding
            of thinking. While developments in knowledge and                in 1997. This multi-stakeholder approach to learning
            technology are contributing to economic development,            has given the Reporting Framework the widespread
            they also have the potential to help resolve the risks          credibility it enjoys with a range of stakeholder groups.
            and threats to the sustainability of our social relations,
            environment, and economies. New knowledge and
            innovations in technology, management, and public
            policy are challenging organizations to make new
            choices in the way their operations, products, services,
            and activities impact the earth, people, and economies.




            1 
              World Commission on Environment and Development. Our
              Common Future. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987, p.43.


2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines        RG


Overview of Sustainability
Reporting
                                                                                                      Orientation to the GRI Reporting
The Purpose of a Sustainability Report                                                                Framework
Sustainability reporting is the practice of measuring,                                                All GRI Reporting Framework documents are developed
disclosing, and being accountable to internal and                                                     using a process that seeks consensus through dialogue
external stakeholders for organizational performance                                                  between stakeholders from business, the investor
towards the goal of sustainable development.                                                          community, labor, civil society, accounting, academia,
‘Sustainability reporting’ is a broad term considered                                                 and others. All Reporting Framework documents are
synonymous with others used to describe reporting on                                                  subject to testing and continuous improvement.
economic, environmental, and social impacts (e.g., triple
bottom line, corporate responsibility reporting, etc.).                                               The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to serve
                                                                                                      as a generally accepted framework for reporting on
A sustainability report should provide a balanced                                                     an organization’s economic, environmental, and social
and reasonable representation of the sustainability                                                   performance. It is designed for use by organizations of
performance of a reporting organization – including                                                   any size, sector, or location. It takes into account the
both positive and negative contributions.                                                             practical considerations faced by a diverse range of
                                                                                                      organizations – from small enterprises to those with
Sustainability reports based on the GRI Reporting                                                     extensive and geographically dispersed operations.
Framework disclose outcomes and results that occurred                                                 The GRI Reporting Framework contains general and
within the reporting period in the context of the                                                     sector-specific content that has been agreed by a wide
organization’s commitments, strategy, and management                                                  range of stakeholders around the world to be generally
approach. Reports can be used for the following                                                       applicable for reporting an organization’s sustainability
purposes, among others:                                                                               performance.

•	   Benchmarking and assessing sustainability                                                        The Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (the
     performance with respect to laws, norms, codes,                                                  Guidelines) consist of Principles for defining report
     performance standards, and voluntary initiatives;                                                content and ensuring the quality of reported
                                                                                                      information. It also includes Standard Disclosures made
•	   Demonstrating how the organization influences                                                    up of Performance Indicators and other disclosure
     and is influenced by expectations about                                                          items, as well as guidance on specific technical topics in
     sustainable development; and                                                                     reporting.
                   G3 Reporting Framework
•	   Comparing performance within an organization
     and between different organizations over time.
                                                                                                                            Ho
                                                                                                                            wt




                                                                                              s a n d Gui d
                                                                                                                             oR




                                                                                      ip le
                                                                               in c                           a
                                                                                                                                 epo
                                                                                                              nc
                                                                    Pr




                                                                                                                                  rt
                                                                                                                  e




                                                                                        Reporting
                                                          S t a n d a rd D




                                                                                       Framework
                                           S e c to r S




                                                                                                                     ls
                                                                                                                   to c o
                                   por t




                                                                                                                  P ro




                                                                             osu
                                                                 isc
                                               upp
                                    o Re



                                                                      l




                                                                                   re s
                                                    lem




                                                            en
                                         tt




                                                                   ts
                                      ha   W




Figure 1: The GRI Reporting Framework




                                                                                                                                                               Version 3.1   3
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Indicator Protocols exist for each of the Performance                                           Orientation to the GRI Guidelines
            Indicators contained in the Guidelines. These Protocols                                         The Sustainability Reporting Guidelines consist of
            provide definitions, compilation guidance, and other                                            Reporting Principles, Reporting Guidance, and Standard
            information to assist report preparers and to ensure                                            Disclosures (including Performance Indicators). These
            consistency in the interpretation of the Performance                                            elements are considered to be of equal in weight and
            Indicators. Users of the Guidelines should also use the                                         importance.
            Indicator Protocols.
                                                                                                            Part 1 – Reporting Principles and Guidance
            Sector Supplements complement the Guidelines
                                                                                                            Three main elements of the reporting process are
            with interpretations and guidance on how to apply the
                                                                                                            described in Part 1. To help determine what to report
            Guidelines in a given sector, and include sector-specific
                                                                                                            on, this section covers the Reporting Principles of
            Performance Indicators. Applicable Sector Supplements
                                                                                                            materiality, stakeholder inclusiveness, sustainability
            should be used in addition to the Guidelines rather than
                                                                                                            context, and completeness, along with a brief set of
            in place of the Guidelines.
                                                                                                            tests for each Principle. Application of these Principles
                                                                                                            with the Standard Disclosures determines the topics
            Technical Protocols are created to provide guidance on
                                                                                                            and Indicators to be reported. This is followed by
            issues in reporting, such as setting the report boundary.
                                                                                                            Principles of balance, comparability, accuracy, timeliness,
            They are designed to be used in conjunction with the
                                                                                                            reliability, and clarity, along with tests that can be used
            Guidelines and Sector Supplements and cover issues
                                                                                                            to help achieve the appropriate quality of the reported
            that face most organizations during the reporting
                                                                                                            information. This section concludes with guidance for
            process.
                                                                                                            reporting organizations on how to define the range of
                           Orientation to the Reporting Guidelines                                          entities represented by the report (also called the ‘Report
                                                                                                            Boundary’).


                                                                                          Options for Reporting

                                                     Guidance for Defining
                                                                               INPUT




                                                     Report Content
                           Principles and Guidance




                                                     Principles for Defining
                                                                               INPUT




                                                     Report Content


                                                     Principles for Ensuring
                                                                               INPUT




                                                     Report Quality


                                                     Guidance for Report
                                                                               INPUT




                                                     Boundary Setting
                           Standard Disclosures




                                                                                                   Management




                                                                                                                 Performance
                                                                                                                 Indicators
                                                                                                   Approach
                                                                                          Profile




                                                                                         OUTPUT    OUTPUT       OUTPUT




                                                                                       Focused Sustainability Report
            Figure 2: Overview of the GRI Guidelines


4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines               RG


Part 2 – Standard Disclosures                                Applying the Guidelines
Part 2 contains the Standard Disclosures that should         Getting Started
be included in sustainability reports. The Guidelines
                                                             All organizations (private, public, or non-profit) are
identify information that is relevant and material to most
                                                             encouraged to report against the Guidelines whether they
organizations and of interest to most stakeholders for
                                                             are beginners or experienced reporters, and regardless of
reporting the three types of Standard Disclosures:
                                                             their size, sector, or location. Reporting can take various
                                                             forms, including web or print, stand alone or combined
•	   Strategy and Profile: Disclosures that set the
                                                             with annual or financial reports.
     overall context for understanding organizational
     performance such as its strategy, profile, and
                                                             The first step is to determine report content. Guidance for
     governance.
                                                             this is provided in Part 1. Some organizations may choose
                                                             to introduce reporting against the full GRI Reporting
•	   Management Approach: Disclosures that
                                                             Framework from the outset, while others may want to
     cover how an organization addresses a given
                                                             start with the most feasible and practical topics first and
     set of topics in order to provide context for
                                                             phase in reporting on other topics over time. All reporting
     understanding performance in a specific area.
                                                             organizations should describe the scope of their reporting
                                                             and are encouraged to indicate their plans for expanding
•	   Performance Indicators: Indicators that elicit
                                                             their reporting over time.
     comparable information on the economic,
     environmental, and social performance of the
                                                             GRI Application Levels
     organization.
                                                             Upon finalization of their report, preparers should declare
                                                             the level to which they have applied the GRI Reporting
                                                             Framework via the “GRI Application Levels” system. This
                                                             system aims to provide:

                                                             •	       Report readers with clarity about the extent to
                                                                      which the GRI Guidelines and other Reporting
                                                                      Framework elements have been applied in the
                                                                      preparation of a report.

                                                             •	       Report preparers with a vision or path for
                                                                      incrementally expanding application of the GRI
                                                                      Reporting Framework over time.

                                                             Declaring an Application Level results in a clear communi-
                                                             cation about which elements of the GRI Reporting Frame-
                                                             work have been applied in the preparation of a report. To
                                                             meet the needs of new beginners, advanced reporters, and
                                                             those somewhere in between, there are three levels in the
                                                             system. They are titled C, B, and A, The reporting criteria
                                                             found in each level reflects an increasing application or
                                                             coverage of the GRI Reporting Framework. An organization
                                                             can self-declare a “plus” (+) at each level (ex., C+, B+, A+) if
                                                             they have utilized external assurance.2

                                                             An organization self-declares a reporting level based
                                                             on its own assessment of its report content against the
                                                             criteria in the GRI Application Levels.




                                                             2
                                                                  S
                                                                   ee the assurance section under General Reporting Notes
                                                                  for more information on options for assurance.

                                                                                                                          Version 3.1   5
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            In addition to the self declaration, reporting organizations      Part 1: Defining Report Content, Quality,
            can choose one or both of the following options:                  and Boundary
                                                                              This section provides Reporting Principles and Reporting
            •	    Have an assurance provider offer an opinion on the
                                                                              Guidance regarding defining report content, ensuring
                  self-declaration.
                                                                              the quality of reported information, and setting the
                                                                              Report Boundary.
            •	    Request that the GRI check the self-declaration.
                                                                              Reporting Guidance describes actions that can be taken,
            For more information on Application Levels, and
                                                                              or options that the reporting organization can consider
            the complete criteria, see the GRI Applications Level
                                                                              when making decisions on what to report on, and
            information pack available as an insert to this document,
                                                                              generally helps interpret or govern the use of the GRI
            or found online at www.globalreporting.org.
                                                                              Reporting Framework. Guidance is provided for defining
                                                                              report content and setting report Boundary.
            Request for notification of use
            Organizations that have used the Guidelines and/or other          Reporting Principles describe the outcomes a report
            elements of the GRI Reporting Framework as the basis for          should achieve and guide decisions throughout the
            their report are requested to notify the Global Reporting         reporting process, such as selecting which topics and
            Initiative upon its release. While notifying GRI, organizations   Indicators to report on and how to report on them. Each
            can choose any or all of the following options:                   of the Principles consists of a definition, an explanation,
                                                                              and a set of tests for the reporting organization to assess
            •	    Simply notify the GRI of the report and provide             its use of the Principles. The tests are intended to serve
                  hard and/or soft copy                                       as tools for self-diagnosis, but not as specific disclosures
                                                                              to report against. Tests can, however, serve as a reference
            •	    Register their report in GRI’s online database of reports   for explaining decisions about the application of the
                                                                              Principles
            •	    Request GRI check their self-declared Application
                  Level.                                                      Together, the Principles are intended to help achieve
                                                                              transparency – a value and a goal that underlies all
            Maximizing Report Value                                           aspects of sustainability reporting. Transparency can
                                                                              be defined as the complete disclosure of information
            Sustainability reporting is a living process and tool,
                                                                              on the topics and Indicators required to reflect impacts
            and does not begin or end with a printed or online
                                                                              and enable stakeholders to make decisions, and the
            publication. Reporting should fit into a broader process
                                                                              processes, procedures, and assumptions used to
            for setting organizational strategy, implementing
                                                                              prepare those disclosures. The Principles themselves are
            action plans, and assessing outcomes. Reporting
                                                                              organized into two groups:
            enables a robust assessment of the organization’s
            performance, and can support continuous improvement
                                                                              •	    Principles for determining the topics and Indicators
            in performance over time. It also serves as a tool for
                                                                                    on which the organization should report; and
            engaging with stakeholders and securing useful input to
            organizational processes.
                                                                              •	    Principles for ensuring the quality and appropriate
                                                                                    presentation of reported information.

                                                                              The Principles have been grouped in this way to help
                                                                              clarify their role and function, but this does not impose a
                                                                              rigid restriction on their use. Each Principle can support a
                                                                              range of decisions, and may prove useful in considering
                                                                              questions beyond just defining report content or ensuring
                                                                              the quality of reported information.




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines             RG


1.1 Defining Report Content                                                          •	    The specific methods or processes used for
                                                                                           assessing materiality should:
In order to ensure a balanced and reasonable
presentation of the organization’s performance, a
                                                                                           •	   Differ for, and can be defined by, each
determination must be made about what content the
                                                                                                organization;
report should cover. This determination should be
made by considering both the organization’s purpose
                                                                                           •	   Always take into account the guidance and
and experience, and the reasonable expectations and
                                                                                                tests found in the GRI Reporting Principles; and
interests of the organization’s stakeholders. Both are
important reference points when deciding what to
                                                                                           •	   Be disclosed.
include in the report.

                                                                                     In applying this approach:
Reporting Guidance for Defining Content
The following approach governs the use of the GRI                                    •	    Differentiate between Core and Additional
Reporting Framework in preparing sustainability reports.                                   Indicators. All Indicators have been developed
More detailed guidance on defining content can be                                          through GRI’s multi-stakeholder processes, and
found in the Technical Protocol – Applying the Report                                      those designated as Core are generally applicable
Content Principles.                                                                        Indicators and are assumed to be material for most
                                                                                           organizations. An organization should report on
•	       Identify the topics and related Indicators that are                               these unless they are deemed not material on
         relevant, and therefore might be appropriate to                                   the basis of the Reporting Principles. Additional
         report, by undergoing an iterative process using the                              Indicators may also be determined to be material.
         Principles of materiality, stakeholder inclusiveness,
                                                                                     •	    The Indicators in final versions of Sector
         sustainability context, and guidance on setting the                               Supplements are considered to be Core Indicators,
         Report Boundary.                                                                  and should be applied using the same approach as
                                                                                           the Core Indicators found in the Guidelines.
•	       When identifying topics, consider the relevance of
         all Indicator Aspects identified in the GRI Guidelines                      •	    All other information (e.g., company specific
         and applicable Sector Supplements. Also consider                                  Indicators) included in the report should be
         other topics, if any, that are relevant to report.                                subject to the same Reporting Principles and
                                                                                           have the same technical rigor as GRI Standard
•	       From the set of relevant topics and Indicators                                    Disclosures.
         identified, use the tests listed for each Principle to
         assess Principles for Defining are material,
                which topics and Indicators Report Content                           •	    Confirm that the information to be reported and
         and therefore should be reported3.                                                the Report Boundary are appropriate by applying
                                                                                           the Principle of completeness.
•	       Use the Principles to prioritize selected topics and
         decide which will be emphasized.
                                                                           Options for Reporting
                Principles and Guidance




                                                                                                                • Materiality
                                          Principles for Defining                                                • Stakeholder
                                                                   INPUT




                                          Report Content                                                          Inclusiveness
                                                                                                                • Sustainability
                                                                                                                  Context
                                                                                                                • Completeness




Figure 3: Principles for defining report Content
 3
     GRI Organizational Profile Disclosures (1-4) apply to all
     reporting organizations.

                                                                                                                                             Version 3.1   7
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Reporting Principles for Defining Content                                                                     A combination of internal and external factors should
                                                                                                                          be used to determine whether information is material,
            Each of the Reporting Principles consists of a definition,
                                                                                                                          including factors such as the organization’s overall
            an explanation, and a set of tests to guide the use of
                                                                                                                          mission and competitive strategy, concerns expressed
            the Principles. The tests are intended to serve as tools
                                                                                                                          directly by stakeholders, broader social expectations,
            for self-diagnosis, but not as specific Disclosure items to
                                                                                                                          and the organization’s influence on upstream (e.g.,
            report against. The Principles should be used together
                                                                                                                          supply chain) and downstream (e.g., customers) entities.
            with the guidance on defining content.
                                                                                                                          Assessments of materiality should also take into account
                                                                                                                          the basic expectations expressed in the international
            Materiality
                                                                                                                          standards and agreements with which the organization
            Definition: The information in a report should cover                                                          is expected to comply.
            topics and Indicators that:
                                                                                                                          These internal and external factors should be considered
            •	      reflect the organization’s significant economic,                                                      when evaluating the importance of information for
                    environmental, and social impacts or that                                                             reflecting significant economic, environmental, and
                                                                                                                          social impacts, or stakeholder decision making.5 A range
            •	      would substantively influence the assessments and                                                     of established methodologies can be used to assess the
                    decisions of stakeholders.                                                                            significance of impacts. In general, ‘significant impacts’
                                                                                                                          refer to those that are a subject of established concern
            Explanation: Organizations are faced with a wide range                                                        for expert communities, or that have been identified
            of topics on which it could report. Relevant topics and                                                       using established tools such as impact assessment
            Indicators are those that may reasonably be considered                                                        methodologies or life cycle assessments. Impacts that
            important for reflecting the organization’s economic,                                                         are considered important enough to require active
            environmental, and social impacts, or influencing the                                                         management or engagement by the organization can
            decisions of stakeholders, and, therefore, potentially merit                                                  likely be considered to be significant.
            inclusion in the report. Materiality is the threshold at
            which topics or Indicators become sufficiently important        Establishing Materiality
            that they should be reported. Beyond this threshold, not
            all material topics will be of equal importance and the
            emphasis within a report should reflect the relative priority
            of these material topics and Indicators.

            In financial reporting, materiality is commonly thought
            of as a threshold for influencing the economic decisions
                                                                              Influence on Stakeholder Assessments and Decisions




            of those using an organization’s financial statements,
                                                                                                                                                                                          gh




            investors in particular. The concept of a threshold is also
                                                                                                                                                                                          Hi




            important in sustainability reporting, but it is concerned
                                                                                                                                                                             s
                                                                                                                                                                          ic


                                                                                                                                                                                     y
                                                                                                                                                                    op


                                                                                                                                                                                    rit




            with a wider range of impacts and stakeholders.
                                                                                                                                                                                    io
                                                                                                                                                                  lT


                                                                                                                                                                                 Pr
                                                                                                                                                                 ria


                                                                                                                                                                              g




            Materiality for sustainability reporting is not limited only
                                                                                                                                                                           tin
                                                                                                                                                                e
                                                                                                                                                             at


                                                                                                                                                                          or
                                                                                                                                                                          p
                                                                                                                                                             M


                                                                                                                                                                       Re




            to those sustainability topics that have a significant
                                                                                                                                                                      e
                                                                                                                                                                   tiv
                                                                                                                                                                 la




            financial impact on the organization. Determining
                                                                                                                                                               Re




            materiality for a sustainability report also includes
                                                                                                                                                         w
                                                                                                                                                       Lo




            considering economic, environmental, and social
            impacts that cross a threshold in affecting the ability to
                                                                                                                                  No
                                                                                                                                     n-




            meet the needs of the present without compromising
                                                                                                                                        M
                                                                                                                                       at




            the needs of future generations.4 These material topics
                                                                                                                                          e ria
                                                                                                                                             lT




            will often have a significant financial impact in the near-
                                                                                                                                              op
                                                                                                                                                  ic
                                                                                                                                                  s




            term or long-term on an organization. They will therefore
            also be relevant for stakeholders who focus strictly on
            the financial condition of an organization.                                                                           Significance of Economic, Environmental, and Social Impacts



                                                                                                                        Figure 4: Defining Materiality


            4
                World Commission on Environment and Development. Our Common Future. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987, p. 43.
            5
                See the principle of stakeholder inclusion for a discussion of stakeholders.

8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                RG


The report should emphasize information on performance          R	    The main topics and future challenges for the
regarding the most material topics. Other relevant topics             sector reported by peers and competitors.
can be included, but should be given less prominence in
the report. The process by which the relative priority of       R	    Relevant laws, regulations, international
topics was determined should be explained.                            agreements, or voluntary agreements with
                                                                      strategic significance to the organization and its
In addition to guiding the selection of topics to report, the         stakeholders.
Materiality Principle also applies to the use of Performance
Indicators. When disclosing performance data, there are         Significance to the Organization, including:
varying degrees of comprehensiveness and detail that
could be provided in a report. In some cases, GRI               R	    Key organizational values, policies, strategies,
guidance exists on the level of detail generally considered           operational management systems, goals, and
appropriate for a specific Indicator. Overall, decisions on           targets.
how to report data should be guided by the importance
of the information for assessing the performance of the         R	    The interests/expectations of stakeholders
organization, and facilitating appropriate comparisons.               specifically invested in the success of the organi-
                                                                      zation (e.g., employees, shareholders, and suppliers).
Reporting on material topics may involve disclosing
information used by external stakeholders that differs          R	    Significant risks to the organization.
from the information used internally for day-to-day
management purposes. However, such information                  R	    Critical factors for enabling organizational success.
does indeed belong in a report, where it can inform
assessments or decision-making by stakeholders, or              R	    The core competencies of the organization and the
support engagement with stakeholders that can result in               manner in which they can or could contribute to
actions that would significantly influence performance                sustainable development.
or address key topics of stakeholder concern.
                                                                Prioritizing
Tests
                                                                R	    The report prioritizes material topics and Indicators.
In defining material topics, take into account the
following:

R	      Reasonably estimable sustainability impacts, risks,
        or opportunities (e.g., global warming, HIV-AIDS,
        poverty) identified through sound investigation
        by people with recognized expertise, or by expert
        bodies with recognized credentials in the field.

Significance to Stakeholders, including:

R	      Main sustainability interests/topics and Indicators
        raised by stakeholders (e.g., vulnerable groups
        within local communities, civil society).




                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   9
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Stakeholder Inclusiveness                                   Stakeholder engagement processes can serve as tools
                                                                        for understanding the reasonable expectations and
            Definition: The reporting organization should identify      interests of stakeholders. Organizations typically initiate
            its stakeholders and explain in the report how it has       different types of stakeholder engagement as part of
            responded to their reasonable expectations and interests.   their regular activities, which can provide useful inputs for
                                                                        decisions on reporting. These may include, for example,
            Explanation: Stakeholders are defined as entities or
                                                                        stakeholder engagement for the purpose of compliance
            individuals that can reasonably be expected to be
                                                                        with internationally-agreed standards, or informing
            significantly affected by the organization’s activities,
                                                                        ongoing organizational/ business processes. In addition,
            products, and/or services; and whose actions can
                                                                        stakeholder engagement may also be implemented
            reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the
                                                                        specifically to inform the report preparation process.
            organization to successfully implement its strategies
                                                                        Organizations can also use other means such as the
            and achieve its objectives. This includes entities or
                                                                        media, the scientific community, or collaborative activities
            individuals whose rights under law or international
                                                                        with peers and stakeholders. These means can help the
            conventions provide them with legitimate claims vis-à-
                                                                        organization better understand stakeholders’ reasonable
            vis the organization.
                                                                        expectations and interests.

            Stakeholders can include those who are invested in the
                                                                        For a report to be assurable, the process of stakeholder
            organization (e.g., employees, shareholders, suppliers)
                                                                        engagement should be documented. When stakeholder
            as well as those who have other relationships to the
                                                                        engagement processes are used for reporting purposes,
            organization (e.g., vulnerable groups within local
                                                                        they should be based on systematic or generally-
            communities, civil society).
                                                                        accepted approaches, methodologies, or principles.
                                                                        The overall approach should be sufficiently effective
            The reasonable expectations and interests of
                                                                        to ensure that stakeholders’ information needs are
            stakeholders are a key reference point for many
                                                                        properly understood. The reporting organization should
            decisions in the preparation of a report, such as
                                                                        document its approach for defining which stakeholders
            the scope, boundary, application of Indicators,
                                                                        it engaged with, how and when it engaged with them,
            and assurance approach. However, not all of an
                                                                        and how engagement has influenced the report content
            organization’s stakeholders will use the report. This
                                                                        and the organization’s sustainability activities. These
            presents challenges in balancing the specific interests/
                                                                        processes should be capable of identifying direct input
            expectations of stakeholders who can reasonably be
                                                                        from stakeholders as well as legitimately established
            expected to use the report with broader expectations of
                                                                        societal expectations. An organization may encounter
            accountability to all stakeholders.
                                                                        conflicting views or differing expectations among its
                                                                        stakeholders, and will need to be able to explain how it
            For some decisions, such as the report scope or
                                                                        balanced these in reaching its reporting decisions.
            boundary of a report, the reasonable expectations and
            interests of a wide range of stakeholder will need to be
                                                                        Failure to identify and engage with stakeholders is
            considered. There may be, for example, stakeholders
                                                                        likely to result in reports that are not suitable, and
            who are unable to articulate their views on a report
                                                                        therefore not fully credible, to all stakeholders. In
            and whose concerns are presented by proxies. There
                                                                        contrast, systematic stakeholder engagement enhances
            may also be stakeholders who choose not to express
                                                                        stakeholder receptivity and the usefulness of the
            views on reports because they rely on different means
                                                                        report. Executed properly, it is likely to result in ongoing
            of communication and engagement. The reasonable
                                                                        learning within the organization and by external
            expectations and interests of these stakeholders should
                                                                        parties, as well as increase accountability to a range of
            still be acknowledged in decisions about the content
                                                                        stakeholders. Accountability strengthens trust between
            of the report. However, other decisions, such as the
                                                                        the reporting organization and its stakeholders.
            level of detail required to be useful to stakeholders, or
                                                                        Trust, in turn, fortifies report credibility.
            expectations of different stakeholders about what is
            required to achieve clarity, may require greater emphasis
            on those who can reasonably be expected to use the
            report. It is important to document the processes and
            approach taken in making these decisions.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                RG


Tests:                                                    Sustainability Context	

                                                          Definition: The report should present the organization’s
R	   The organization can describe the stakeholders to
                                                          performance in the wider context of sustainability.
     whom it considers itself accountable.

                                                          Explanation: Information on performance should
R	   The report content draws upon the outcomes
                                                          be placed in context. The underlying question of
     of stakeholder engagement processes used by
                                                          sustainability reporting is how an organization
     the organization in its ongoing activities, and as
                                                          contributes, or aims to contribute in the future, to
     required by the legal and institutional framework
                                                          the improvement or deterioration of economic,
     in which it operates.
                                                          environmental, and social conditions, developments,
                                                          and trends at the local, regional, or global level.
R	   The report content draws upon the outcomes
                                                          Reporting only on trends in individual performance (or
     of any stakeholder engagement processes
                                                          the efficiency of the organization) will fail to respond
     undertaken specifically for the report.
                                                          to this underlying question. Reports should therefore
                                                          seek to present performance in relation to broader
R	   The stakeholder engagement processes that
                                                          concepts of sustainability. This will involve discussing
     inform decisions about the report are consistent
                                                          the performance of the organization in the context of
     with the scope and boundary of the report.
                                                          the limits and demands placed on environmental or
                                                          social resources at the sectoral, local, regional, or global
                                                          level. For example, this could mean that in addition to
                                                          reporting on trends in eco-efficiency, an organization
                                                          might also present its absolute pollution loading in
                                                          relation to the capacity of the regional ecosystem to
                                                          absorb the pollutant.

                                                          This concept is often most clearly articulated in the
                                                          environmental arena in terms of global limits on
                                                          resource use and pollution levels. However, it can also be
                                                          relevant with respect to social and economic objectives
                                                          such as national or international socio-economic
                                                          and sustainable development goals. For example, an
                                                          organization could report on employee wages and
                                                          social benefit levels in relation to nation-wide minimum
                                                          and median income levels, and the capacity of social
                                                          safety nets to absorb those in poverty or those living
                                                          close to the poverty line. Organizations operating in a
                                                          diverse range of locations, sizes, and sectors will need to
                                                          consider how to best frame their overall organizational
                                                          performance in the broader context of sustainability.
                                                          This may require distinguishing between topics or
                                                          factors that drive global impacts (such as climate
                                                          change) and those that have more regional or local
                                                          impacts (such as community development). When
                                                          reporting on topics that have positive or negative local
                                                          impacts, it is important to provide insight into how the
                                                          organization affects communities in different locations.
                                                          Similarly, distinctions might need to be made between
                                                          trends or patterns of impacts across the range of
                                                          operations versus contextualizing performance location
                                                          by location.

                                                          The organization’s own sustainability and business
                                                          strategy provides the context in which to discuss




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   11
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            performance. The relationship between sustainability and       Completeness
            organizational strategy should be made clear, as should
                                                                           Definition: Coverage of the material topics and
            the context within which performance is reported.
                                                                           Indicators and definition of the report boundary
            Tests:                                                         should be sufficient to reflect significant economic,
                                                                           environmental, and social impacts and enable
            R     T
                   he organization presents its understanding of
                                                                           stakeholders to assess the reporting organization’s
                  sustainable development and draws on objective
                                                                           performance in the reporting period.
                  and available information as well as measures of
                  sustainable development for the topics covered in        Explanation: Completeness primarily encompasses the
                  the report.                                              dimensions of scope, boundary, and time. The concept
                                                                           of completeness can also be used to refer to practices
            R	    The organization presents its performance with           in information collection (for example, ensuring that
                  reference to broader sustainable development             compiled data includes results from all sites within the
                  conditions and goals, as reflected in recognized         Report Boundary) and whether the presentation of
                  sectoral, local, regional, and/or global publications.   information is reasonable and appropriate. These topics
                                                                           are related to report quality, and are addressed in greater
            R	    The organization presents its performance in             detail under the Principles of accuracy and balance later
                  a manner that attempts to communicate the                in Part 1.
                  magnitude of its impact and contribution in
                  appropriate geographical contexts.                       Scope refers to the range of sustainability topics covered
                                                                           in a report. The sum of the topics and Indicators reported
            R	    The report describes how sustainability topics           should be sufficient to reflect significant economic,
                  relate to long-term organizational strategy, risks,      environmental, and social impacts. It should also enable
                  and opportunities, including supply-chain topics.        stakeholders to assess the organization’s performance.
                                                                           In determining whether the information in the report
                                                                           is sufficient, the organization should consider both the
                                                                           results of stakeholder engagement processes and broad-
                                                                           based societal expectations that may not have surfaced
                                                                           directly through stakeholder engagement processes.

                                                                           ‘Boundary’ refers to the range of entities (e.g.,
                                                                           subsidiaries, joint ventures, sub-contractors, etc.) whose
                                                                           performance is represented by the report. In setting the
                                                                           boundary for its report, an organization must consider
                                                                           the range of entities over which it exercises control
                                                                           (often referred to as the ‘organizational boundary’, and
                                                                           usually linked to definitions used in financial reporting)
                                                                           and over which it exercises influence (often called the
                                                                           ‘operational boundary’). In assessing influence, the
                                                                           organization will need to consider its ability to influence
                                                                           entities upstream (e.g., in its supply chain) as well as
                                                                           entities downstream (e.g., distributors and users of its
                                                                           products and services). The boundary may vary based
                                                                           on the specific Aspect or type of information being
                                                                           reported.

                                                                           ‘Time’ refers to the need for the selected information to
                                                                           be complete for the time period specified by the report.
                                                                           As far as practicable, activities, events, and impacts
                                                                           should be presented for the reporting period in which
                                                                           they occur. This includes reporting on activities that
                                                                           produce minimal short-term impact, but which have




12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


a significant and reasonably foreseeable cumulative           1.2 Reporting Principles for
effect that may become unavoidable or irreversible in         Defining Quality
the longer term (e.g., bio-accumulative or persistent
                                                              This section contains Principles that guide choices on
pollutants). In making estimates of future impacts (both
                                                              ensuring the quality of reported information, including
positive and negative), the reported information should
                                                              its proper presentation. Decisions related to the
be based on well-reasoned estimates that reflect the
                                                              process of preparing information in a report should be
likely size, nature, and scope of impacts. Although such
                                                              consistent with these Principles. All of these Principles
estimates are by nature subject to uncertainty, they can
                                                              are fundamental for effective transparency. The quality
provide useful information for decision-making as long
                                                              of information enables stakeholders to make sound
as the basis for estimates is clearly disclosed and the
                                                              and reasonable assessments of performance, and take
limitations of the estimates are clearly acknowledged.
                                                              appropriate action.
Disclosing the nature and likelihood of such impacts,
even if they may only materialize in the future, is
                                                              Reporting Principles for Defining Quality
consistent with the goal of providing a balanced
and reasonable representation of the organization’s           Balance
economic, environmental, and social performance.
                                                              Definition: The report should reflect positive and
                                                              negative aspects of the organization’s performance to
Tests:
                                                              enable a reasoned assessment of overall performance.
R	   The report was developed taking into account the
                                                              Explanation: The overall presentation of the report’s
     entire chain of entities upstream and downstream,
                                                              content should provide an unbiased picture of the
     and covers and prioritizes all information that
                                                              reporting organization’s performance. The report should
     should reasonably be considered material on the
                                                              avoid selections, omissions, or presentation formats
     basis of the principles of materiality, sustainability
                                                              that are reasonably likely to unduly or inappropriately
     context, and stakeholder inclusiveness.
                                                              influence a decision or judgment by the report
                                                              reader. The report should include both favorable and
R	   The report includes all entities that meet the
                                                              unfavorable results, as well as topics that can influence
     criteria of being subject to control or significant
                                                              the decisions of stakeholders in proportion to their
     influence of the reporting organization unless
                                                              materiality. Reports should clearly distinguish between
     otherwise declared.
                                                              factual presentation and the reporting organization’s
                                                              interpretation of information.
R	   The information in the report includes all
     significant actions or events in the reporting
                                                              Tests:
     period, and reasonable estimates of significant
     future impacts of past events when those impacts
                                                              R	   The report discloses both favorable and
     are reasonably foreseeable and may become
                                                                   unfavorable results and topics.
     unavoidable or irreversible.

                                                              R	   The information in the report is presented in
R	   The report does not omit relevant information
                                                                   a format that allows users to see positive and
     that would influence or inform stakeholder
                                                                   negative trends in performance on a year-to-year
     assessments or decisions, or that would reflect
                                                                   basis.
     significant economic, environmental, and social
     impacts.
                                                              R 	 The emphasis on the various topics in the report is
                                                                  proportionate to their relative materiality.




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1   13
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Comparability
                                                                                                 content of reports will also evolve. However, within the
            Definition: Issues and information should be selected,                               confines of the Principle of Materiality, organizations
            compiled, and reported consistently. Reported                                        should aim for consistency in their reports over time.
            information should be presented in a manner that                                     An organization should include total numbers (i.e.,
            enables stakeholders to analyze changes in the                                       absolute data such as tons of waste) as well as ratios (i.e.,
            organization’s performance over time, and could                                      normalized data such as waste per unit of production) to
            support analysis relative to other organizations.                                    enable analytical comparisons.

            Explanation: Comparability is necessary for evaluating
                                                                                                 When changes occur with the boundary, scope, length
            performance. Stakeholders using the report should be
                                                                                                 of the reporting period, or content (including the design,
            able to compare information reported on economic,
                                                                                                 definitions, and use of any Indicators in the report),
            environmental, and social performance against the
                                                                                                 reporting organizations should, whenever practicable,
            organization’s past performance, its objectives, and, to
                                                                                                 restate current disclosures alongside historical data
            the degree possible, against the performance of other
                                                                                                 (or vice versa). This ensures that information and
            organizations. Consistency in reporting allows internal
                                                                                                 comparisons are both reliable and meaningful over
            and external parties to benchmark performance and
                                                                                                 time. Where such restatements are not provided, the
            assess progress as part of rating activities, investment
                                                                                                 report should explain the reasons and implications for
            decisions, advocacy programs, and other activities.
                                                                                                 interpreting current disclosures.
            Comparisons between organizations require sensitivity
            to factors such as differences in organizational size,
                                                                                                 Tests:
            geographic influences, and other considerations that
            may affect the relative performance of an organization.
                                                                                                 R	    The report and the information contained within it
            Where necessary, report preparers should consider
                                                                                                       can be compared on a year-to-year basis.
            providing context that will help report users understand
            the factors that may contribute to differences in
                                                                                                 R	    The organization’s performance can be compared
            performance between organizations.
                                                                                                       with appropriate benchmarks.

            Maintaining consistency with the methods used to
                                                                                                 R         ny significant variation between reporting
                                                                                                          A
            calculate data, with the layout of the report, and with
                                                                                                          periods in the boundary, scope, length of
            explaining the methods and assumptions used to
                                                                                                          reporting period, or information covered in the
            prepare information, all facilitates comparability over
                                                                                                          report can be identified and explained.
            time. As Principlesimportance of topics to a given
                     the relative for Ensuring Report Quality
            organization and its stakeholders change over time, the



                                                                                   Options for Reporting
                       Principles and Guidance




                                                                                                                        • Balance
                                                 Principles for Ensuring                                                • Clarity
                                                                           INPUT




                                                 Report Quality                                                         • Accuracy
                                                                                                                        • Timeliness
                                                                                                                        • Comparability
                                                                                                                        • Reliability




            Figure 5: Principles for Ensuring Report Quality




14   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                  RG



R    W
      here they are available, the report utilizes         Accuracy
     generally accepted protocols for compiling,
                                                            Definition: The reported information should be
     measuring, and presenting information, including
                                                            sufficiently accurate and detailed for stakeholders to
     the GRI Technical Protocols for Indicators contained
                                                            assess the reporting organization’s performance.
     in the Guidelines.
                                                            Explanation: Responses to economic, environmental,
R	   The report uses GRI Sector Supplements, where
                                                            and social topics and Indicators can be expressed
     available.
                                                            in many different ways, ranging from qualitative
                                                            responses to detailed quantitative measurements.
                                                            The characteristics that determine accuracy vary
                                                            according to the nature of the information and the
                                                            user of the information. For example, the accuracy of
                                                            qualitative information is largely determined by the
                                                            degree of clarity, detail, and balance in presentation
                                                            within the appropriate Report Boundary. The accuracy
                                                            of quantitative information, on the other hand, may
                                                            depend on the specific methods used to gather, compile,
                                                            and analyze data. The specific threshold of accuracy that
                                                            is necessary will depend partly on the intended use of
                                                            the information. Certain decisions will require higher
                                                            levels of accuracy in reported information than others.

                                                            Tests:

                                                            R	   The report indicates the data that has been
                                                                 measured.

                                                            R	   The data measurement techniques and bases for
                                                                 calculations are adequately described, and can be
                                                                 replicated with similar results.

                                                            R	   The margin of error for quantitative data is not
                                                                 sufficient to substantially influence the ability of
                                                                 stakeholders to reach appropriate and informed
                                                                 conclusions on performance.

                                                            R	   The report indicates which data has been
                                                                 estimated and the underlying assumptions and
                                                                 techniques used to produce the estimates, or
                                                                 where that information can be found.

                                                            R	   The qualitative statements in the report are valid
                                                                 on the basis of other reported information and
                                                                 other available evidence.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   15
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines




            Timeliness                                                   Clarity

            Definition: Reporting occurs on a regular schedule and       Definition: Information should be made available in
            information is available in time for stakeholders to make    a manner that is understandable and accessible to
            informed decisions.                                          stakeholders using the report.

            Explanation: The usefulness of information is                Explanation: The report should present information
            closely tied to whether the timing of its disclosure to      in a way that is understandable, accessible, and usable
            stakeholders enables them to effectively integrate it into   by the organization’s range of stakeholders (whether
            their decision-making. The timing of release refers both     in print form or through other channels). A stakeholder
            to the regularity of reporting as well as its proximity to   should be able to find desired information without
            the actual events described in the report.                   unreasonable effort. Information should be presented
                                                                         in a manner that is comprehensible to stakeholders who
            Although a constant flow of information is desirable for     have a reasonable understanding of the organization
            meeting certain purposes, reporting organizations should     and its activities. Graphics and consolidated data
            commit to regularly providing a consolidated disclosure      tables can help make the information in the report
            of their economic, environmental, and social performance     accessible and understandable. The level of aggregation
            at a single point in time. Consistency in the frequency      of information can also affect the clarity of a report
            of reporting and the length of reporting periods is also     if it is either significantly more or less detailed than
            necessary to ensure comparability of information over        stakeholders expect.
            time and accessibility of the report to stakeholders. It
            can be of value for stakeholders if the schedules for        Tests:
            sustainability reporting and financial reporting are
            aligned. The organization should balance the need            R	   The report contains the level of information
            to provide information in a timely manner with the                required by stakeholders, but avoids excessive and
            importance of ensuring that the information is reliable.          unnecessary detail.

            Tests:                                                       R	   Stakeholders can find the specific information they
                                                                              want without unreasonable effort through tables
            R	    Information in the report has been disclosed while          of contents, maps, links, or other aids.
                  it is recent relative to the reporting period.
                                                                         R	   The report avoids technical terms, acronyms,
            R	    The collection and publication of key performance           jargon, or other content likely to be unfamiliar to
                  information is aligned with the sustainability              stakeholders, and should include explanations
                  reporting schedule.                                         (where necessary) in the relevant section or in a
                                                                              glossary.
            R	    The information in the report (including web-
                  based reports) clearly indicates the time period to    R	   The data and information in the report is available
                  which it relates, when it will be updated, and when         to stakeholders, including those with particular
                  the last updates were made.                                 accessibility needs (e.g., differing abilities,
                                                                              language, or technology).




16   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                 RG


                                                                     1.3 Reporting Guidance for
Reliability
                                                                     Boundary Setting6
Definition: Information and processes used in the
preparation of a report should be gathered, recorded,                In parallel with defining the content of a report, an
compiled, analyzed, and disclosed in a way that could be             organization must determine which entities’ (e.g.,
subject to examination and that establishes the quality              subsidiaries and joint ventures) performance will be
and materiality of the information.                                  represented by the report. The Sustainability Report
                                                                     Boundary should include the entities over which the
Explanation: Stakeholders should have confidence that                reporting organization exercises control or significant
a report could be checked to establish the veracity of its           influence both in and through its relationships with
contents and the extent to which it has appropriately                various entities upstream (e.g., supply chain) and
applied Reporting Principles. The information and data               downstream (e.g., distribution and customers).
included in a report should be supported by internal
controls or documentation that could be reviewed                     For the purpose of setting boundaries, the following
by individuals other than those who prepared the                     definitions should apply7:
report. Disclosures about performance that are not
substantiated by evidence should not appear in a                     •	    Control: the power to govern the financial and
sustainability report unless they represent material                       operating policies of an enterprise so as to obtain
information, and the report provides unambiguous                           benefits from its activities.
explanations of any uncertainties associated with the
information. The decision-making processes underlying                •	    Significant influence: the power to participate in
a report should be documented in a manner that                             the financial and operating policy decisions of the
allows the basis of key decisions (such as processes                       entity but not the power to control those policies.
for determining the report content and boundary or
stakeholder engagement) to be examined. In designing                 The guidance below on setting the Report Boundary
information systems, reporting organizations should                  pertains to the report as a whole as well as setting the
anticipate that the systems could be examined as part of             boundary for individual Performance Indicators.
an external assurance process.
                                                                     Not all entities within the Report Boundary must be
Tests:                                                               reported on in the same manner. The approach to
                                                                     reporting on an entity will depend on a combination
R	      The scope and extent of external assurance is                of the reporting organization’s control or influence
        identified.                                                  over the entity, and whether the disclosure relates to
                                                                     operational performance, management performance,
R	      The original source of the information in the report         or narrative/descriptive information.
        can be identified by the organization.
                                                                     The Report Boundary guidance is based on the
R	      Reliable evidence to support assumptions or                  recognition that different relationships involve differing
        complex calculations can be identified by the                degrees of access to information and the ability to affect
        organization.                                                outcomes. For example, operational information such
                                                                     as emissions data can be reliably compiled from entities
R	      Representation is available from the original data           under the control of an organization, but may not be
        or information owners, attesting to its accuracy             available for a joint venture or a supplier. The Report
        within acceptable margins of error.                          Boundary guidance below sets minimum expectations
                                                                     for the inclusion of entities upstream and downstream
                                                                     when reporting on Indicators and management
                                                                     disclosures. However, an organization may determine
                                                                     that it is necessary to extend the boundary for an
                                                                     Indicator(s) to include entities upstream or downstream.



6
    T
     he guidance on Report Boundary has been derived from the Boundary Protocol. Future updates to the Guidelines will
    incorporate any further lessons or guidance developed from experience with the Reporting Boundary Protocol.
7
    Further discussion of these terms can be found in the Boundary Protocol.


                                                                                                                                Version 3.1   17
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Determining the significance of an entity when                          Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting
            collecting information or considering the extension of a
            boundary depends on the scale of its sustainability                     •	        A sustainability report should include in its
            impacts. Entities with significant impacts typically                              boundary all entities that generate significant
            generate the greatest risk or opportunity for an                                  sustainability impacts (actual and potential) and/
            organization and its stakeholders, and therefore are the                          or all entities over which the reporting organization
            entities for which the organization is most likely to be                          exercises control or significant influence with regard
            perceived as being accountable or responsible.                                    to financial and operating policies and practices.

                                                                                    •	        These entities can be included using either
                                                                                              Indicators of operational performance, Indicators
                                                                                              of management performance, or narrative
                                                                                              descriptions.

                                                                                    •	        At a minimum, the reporting organization should
                                                                                              include the following entities in its report using
                                                                                              these approaches:

                                                                                              •	     Entities over which the organization exercises
                                                                                                     control should be covered by Indicators of
                        Establishing Reporting Boundaries                                            Operational Performance; and

                                                                                              •	     Entities over which the organization exercises
                                                                                                     significant influence should be covered by
                                                                                                     Disclosures on Management Approach.



                                                                                  No                Do you have control
                                                                                                     over the entity?



                                                       No          Do you have significant                       Yes
                                                                         influence?



                                  No                                                                                          No
                                         Do you have influence?           Yes                       Does it have significant
                                                                                                          impacts?



                              Exclude                                                               No                          Not
                                               Yes                 Does it have significant
                                                                          impacts?                              Yes          necessary
                                                                                                                             to report


                                  No                                                                  Not
                                         Does it have significant
                                                                         Yes                       necessary
                                                impacts?
                                                                                                   to report


                                Not
                             necessary         Yes
                             to report

                                                                                                                      Performance Data


                                                                                               Disclosures on Management Approach


                                                                                         Narrative reportinng on Issues and Dilemmas



            Figure 6: Decision Tree for Boundary Setting




18   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines               RG


•	    The boundaries for narrative disclosures should                            Part 2: Standard Disclosures
      include entities over which the organization does
      not exercise control/significant influence, but                            This section specifies the base content that should
      which are associated with key challenges for the                           appear in a sustainability report, subject to the guidance
      organization because their impacts are significant                         on determining content in Part 1 of the Guidelines.

•	    The report should cover all entities within its                            There are three different types of disclosures contained
      Report Boundary. In the process of preparing its                           in this section.
      report, an organization may choose not to gather
      data on a particular entity or group of entities                           •	      Strategy and Profile: Disclosures that set the
      within the defined boundary on the basis of                                        overall context for understanding organizational
      efficiency as long as such a decision does not sub-                                performance such as its strategy, profile, and
      stantively change the final result of a Disclosure                                 governance.
      or Indicator.
                                                                                 •	      Management Approach: Disclosures that
                                                                                         cover how an organization addresses a given
                                                                                         set of topics in order to provide context for
         Orientation to the Reporting Guidelines                                         understanding performance in a specific area.

                                                                               Performance Indicators: Indicators that elicit
                                                                                 •	
                                                                               comparable information on the economic,
                                                                               environmental, and social performance of the
                                                           Options for Reporting
                                                                               organization.

                                                                                         Reporting organizations are encouraged to follow
                                                                                         this structure in compiling their reports, however,
                                                                                         other formats may be chosen.




                                Context                                                                 Results
         Standard Disclosures




                                • Strategy  Analysis                                                   • Economic
                                • Report Parameters                                                     • Environmental
                                • Governance,                                                           • Labor Practices and
                                  Commitments, and                                                        Decent Work
                                  Engagement                                                            • Human Rights
                                • Management Approach                                                   • Society
                                                                    Management




                                                                                      Performance




                                                                                                        • ProductResponsibility
                                                                                      Indicators
                                                                    Approach
                                                           Profile




                                                          OUTPUT    OUTPUT            OUTPUT




                                                        Focused Sustainability Report
Figure 7: Overview of GRI Standard Disclosures


                                                                                                                                            Version 3.1   19
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Profile                                                          1.2	   Description of key impacts, risks, and opportunities.

            1. Strategy and Analysis
                                                                             	      The reporting organization should provide two
            This section is intended to provide a high-level, strategic             concise narrative sections on key impacts, risks,
            view of the organization’s relationship to sustainability               and opportunities.
            in order to provide context for subsequent and more
            detailed reporting against other sections of the                 	      Section One should focus on the organization’s key
            Guidelines. It may draw on information provided in                      impacts on sustainability and effects on
            other parts of the report, but this section is intended to              stakeholders, including rights as defined by
            produce insight on strategic topics rather than simply                  national laws and relevant internationally agreed
            summarize the contents of the report. The strategy and                  standards. This should take into account the range
            analysis should consist of the statement outlined in 1.1                of reasonable expectations and interests of the
            and a concise narrative outlined in 1.2.                                organization’s stakeholders. This section should
                                                                                    include:
            1.1	   Statement from the most senior decision-
                   maker of the organization (e.g., CEO, chair, or                  •	   A description of the significant impacts
                   equivalent senior position) about the relevance of                    the organization has on sustainability and
                   sustainability to the organization and its strategy.                  associated challenges and opportunities. This
                                                                                         includes the effect on stakeholders’ rights as
            	      The statement should present the overall vision                       defined by national laws and the expectations
                   and strategy for the short-term, medium-term (e.g.,                   in internationally-agreed standards and norms;
                   3-5 years), and long-term, particularly with regard
                   to managing the key challenges associated with                   •	   An explanation of the approach to prioritizing
                   economic, environmental, and social performance.                      these challenges and opportunities;
                   The statement should include:
                                                                                    •	   Key conclusions about progress in addressing
                   •	   Strategic priorities and key topics for the short/               these topics and related performance in the
                        medium-term with regard to sustainability,                       reporting period. This includes an assessment
                        including respect for internationally agreed                     of reasons for underperformance or over-
                        standards and how they relate to long-term                       performance; and
                        organizational strategy and success;
                                                                                    •	   A description of the main processes in place to
                   •	   Broader trends (e.g., macroeconomic or                           address performance and/or relevant changes.
                        political) affecting the organization and
                        influencing sustainability priorities;               	      Section Two should focus on the impact of
                                                                                    sustainability trends, risks, and opportunities on
                   •	   Key events, achievements, and failures during               the long-term prospects and financial performance
                        the reporting period;                                       of the organization. This should concentrate
                                                                                    specifically on information relevant to financial
                   •	   Views on performance with respect to targets;               stakeholders or that could become so in the future.
                                                                                    Section Two should include the following:
                   •	   Outlook on the organization’s main challenges
                        and targets for the next year and goals for the             •	   A description of the most important risks and
                        coming 3-5 years; and                                            opportunities for the organization arising from
                                                                                         sustainability trends;
                   •	   Other items pertaining to the organization’s
                        strategic approach.                                         •	   Prioritization of key sustainability topics as
                                                                                         risks and opportunities according to their
                                                                                         relevance for long-term organizational
                                                                                         strategy, competitive position, qualitative, and
                                                                                         (if possible) quantitative financial value drivers;




20   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                RG


       •	   Table(s) summarizing:                                        •	   Quantity of products or services provided.

            •	   Targets, performance against targets, and        	      In addition to the above, reporting organizations are
                 lessons-learned for the current reporting               encouraged to provide additional information, as
                 period; and                                             appropriate, such as:

            •	   Targets for the next reporting period and               •	   Total assets;
                 mid-term objectives and goals (i.e., 3-5
                 years) related to key risks and opportunities.          •	   Beneficial ownership (including identity and
                                                                              percentage of ownership of largest shareholders);
       •	   Concise description of governance mechanisms                      and
            in place to specifically manage these risks and
            opportunities, and identification of other related           •	   Breakdowns by country/region of the following:
            risks and opportunities.
                                                                              •	   Sales/revenues by countries/regions that
2. Organizational Profile                                                          make up 5 percent or more of total revenues;
2.1	   Name of the organization.
                                                                              •	   Costs by countries/regions that make up 5
                                                                                   percent or more of total revenues; and
2.2	   Primary brands, products, and/or services.

                                                                              •	   Employees.
	      The reporting organization should indicate the
       nature of its role in providing these products
                                                                  2.9	   Significant changes during the reporting period
       and services, and the degree to which it utilizes
                                                                         regarding size, structure, or ownership including:
       outsourcing.

                                                                         •	   The location of, or changes in operations,
2.3	   Operational structure of the organization,
                                                                              including facility openings, closings, and
       including main divisions, operating companies,
                                                                              expansions; and
       subsidiaries, and joint ventures.

                                                                         •	   Changes in the share capital structure and
2.4	   Location of organization’s headquarters.
                                                                              other capital formation, maintenance, and
                                                                              alteration operations (for private sector
2.5	   Number of countries where the organization
                                                                              organizations).
       operates, and names of countries with either major
       operations or that are specifically relevant to the
                                                                  2.10	 Awards received in the reporting period.
       sustainability issues covered in the report.

                                                                  3. Report Parameters
2.6	   Nature of ownership and legal form.
                                                                  Report Profile
2.7	 Markets served (including geographic breakdown,
                                                                  3.1	 Reporting period (e.g., fiscal/calendar year) for
     sectors served, and types of customers/beneficiaries).
                                                                       information provided.

2.8	   Scale of the reporting organization, including:
                                                                  3.2	   Date of most recent previous report (if any).

       •	   Number of employees;
                                                                  3.3	   Reporting cycle (annual, biennial, etc.)

       •	   Number of operations;
                                                                  3.4	   Contact point for questions regarding the report or
                                                                         its contents.
       •	   Net sales (for private sector organizations) or
            net revenues (for public sector organizations);
                                                                  Report Scope and Boundary

       •	   Total capitalization broken down in terms             3.5	   Process for defining report content, including:
            of debt and equity (for private sector
            organizations); and                                          •	   Determining materiality;




                                                                                                                               Version 3.1   21
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



                    •	   Prioritizing topics within the report; and                     •	   Strategy and Analysis 1.1 – 1.2;

                    •	   Identifying stakeholders the organization                      •	   Organizational Profile  2.1 – 2.10;
                         expects to use the report.
                                                                                        •	   Report Parameters 3.1 – 3.13;
            	       Include an explanation of how the organization has
                    applied the ‘Guidance on Defining Report Content’,                  •	   Governance, Commitments, and Engagement
                    the associated Principles and the Technical Protocol –                   4.1 – 4.17;
                    Applying the Report Content Principles.
                                                                                        •	   Disclosure of Management Approach, per
            3.6	    Boundary of the report (e.g., countries, divisions,                      category;
                    subsidiaries, leased facilities, joint ventures, suppliers).
                    See GRI Boundary Protocol for further guidance.                     •	   Core Performance Indicators;  

            3.7	    State any specific limitations on the scope or                      •	   Any GRI Additional Indicators that were
                    boundary of the report8.                                                 included; and

            	       If boundary and scope do not address the full range                 •	   Any GRI Sector Supplement Indicators
                    of material economic, environmental, and social                          included in the report.
                    impacts of the organization, state the strategy and
                    projected timeline for providing complete coverage.            Assurance

                                                                                   3.13	 Policy and current practice with regard to seeking
            3.8	    Basis for reporting on joint ventures, subsidiaries,
                                                                                         external assurance for the report. If not included
                    leased facilities, outsourced operations, and other
                                                                                         in the assurance report accompanying the
                    entities that can significantly affect comparability
                                                                                         sustainability report, explain the scope and basis of
                    from period to period and/or between organizations.
                                                                                         any external assurance provided. Also explain the
                                                                                         relationship between the reporting organization
            3.9	 Data measurement techniques and the bases of
                                                                                         and the assurance provider(s).
                 calculations, including assumptions and techniques
                 underlying estimations applied to the compilation of
                                                                                   4. Governance, Commitments, and Engagement
                 the Indicators and other information in the report.
                                                                                   Governance
            	       Explain any decisions not to apply, or to substantially
                                                                                   4.1	 Governance structure of the organization, including
                    diverge from, the GRI Indicator Protocols.
                                                                                        committees under the highest governance body
                                                                                        responsible for specific tasks, such as setting
            3.10	 Explanation of the effect of any re-statements
                                                                                        strategy or organizational oversight.
                  of information provided in earlier reports, and
                  the reasons for such re-statement (e.g., mergers/
                                                                                   	    Describe the mandate and composition (including
                  acquisitions, change of base years/periods, nature
                                                                                        number of independent members and/or non-
                  of business, measurement methods).
                                                                                        executive members) of the highest governance body
                                                                                        and its committees, and indicate each individual’s
            3.11	 Significant changes from previous reporting
                                                                                        position and any direct responsibility for economic,
                  periods in the scope, boundary, or measurement
                                                                                        social, and environmental performance.
                  methods applied in the report.
                                                                                   	    Report the percentage of individuals by gender within
            GRI Content Index
                                                                                        the organization’s highest governance body and its
            3.12	 Table identifying the location of the Standard                        committees, broken down by age group and minority
                  Disclosures in the report.                                            group membership and other indicators of diversity.

            	       Identify the page numbers or web links where the               	    Refer to definitions of age and minority group
                    following can be found:                                             in the Indicator Protocol for LA13 and note that
                                                                                        the information reported under 4.1 can be cross
                                                                                        referenced against that reported for LA13.
            8
                See completeness Principle for explanation of scope.


22   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                   RG


4.2	 Indicate whether the Chair of the highest                     economic, environmental, and social performance
     governance body is also an executive officer                  and the status of their implementation.
     (and, if so, their function within the organization’s
     management and the reasons for this arrangement).       	     Explain the degree to which these:

4.3	 For organizations that have a unitary board                   •	   Are applied across the organization in different
     structure, state the number and gender of                          regions and department/units; and
     members of the highest governance body that are
     independent and/or non-executive members.                     •	   Relate to internationally agreed standards.

	      State how the organization defines ‘independent’      4.9	 Procedures of the highest governance body for
       and ‘non-executive’. This element applies only for         overseeing the organization’s identification and
       organizations that have unitary board structures.          management of economic, environmental, and
       See the glossary for a definition of ‘independent’.        social performance, including relevant risks and
                                                                  opportunities, and adherence or compliance
4.4	   Mechanisms for shareholders and employees to               with internationally agreed standards, codes of
       provide recommendations or direction to the                conduct, and principles.
       highest governance body.
                                                             	     Include frequency with which the highest
	      Include reference to processes regarding:                   governance body assesses sustainability
                                                                   performance.
       •	   The use of shareholder resolutions or
            other mechanisms for enabling minority           4.10	 Processes for evaluating the highest governance
            shareholders to express opinions to the                body’s own performance, particularly with respect to
            highest governance body; and                           economic, environmental, and social performance.

       •	   Informing and consulting employees about         Commitments to External Initiatives
            the working relationships with formal
                                                             4.11 	 Explanation of whether and how the precautionary
            representation bodies such as organization
                                                                    approach or principle is addressed by the
            level ‘work councils’, and representation of
                                                                    organization.
            employees in the highest governance body.

                                                             	     Article 15 of the Rio Principles introduced the
	      Identify topics related to economic, environmental,
                                                                   precautionary approach. A response to 4.11
       and social performance raised through these
                                                                   could address the organization’s approach to
       mechanisms during the reporting period.
                                                                   risk management in operational planning or the
                                                                   development and introduction of new products.
4.5	   Linkage between compensation for members
       of the highest governance body, senior
                                                             4.12	 Externally developed economic, environmental,
       managers, and executives (including departure
                                                                   and social charters, principles, or other initiatives
       arrangements), and the organization’s
                                                                   to which the organization subscribes or endorses.
       performance (including social and environmental
       performance).
                                                             	     Include date of adoption, countries/operations
                                                                   where applied, and the range of stakeholders
4.6	 Processes in place for the highest governance
                                                                   involved in the development and governance
     body to ensure conflicts of interest are avoided.
                                                                   of these initiatives (e.g., multi-stakeholder, etc.).
                                                                   Differentiate between non-binding, voluntary
4.7	 Process for determining the composition,
                                                                   initiatives and those with which the organization
     qualifications, and expertise of the members of
                                                                   has an obligation to comply.
     the highest governance body and its committees,
     including any consideration of gender and other
                                                             4.13	 Memberships in associations (such as industry
     indicators of diversity.
                                                                   associations) and/or national/international
                                                                   advocacy organizations in which the
4.8	 Internally developed statements of mission or
                                                                   organization:
     values, codes of conduct, and principles relevant to



                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   23
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



                  •	   Has positions in governance bodies;                     whether any of the engagement was undertaken
                                                                               specifically as part of the report preparation process.
                  •	   Participates in projects or committees;
                                                                          4.17	 Key topics and concerns that have been raised
                  •	   Provides substantive funding beyond routine              through stakeholder engagement, and how the
                       membership dues; or                                      organization has responded to those key topics
                                                                                and concerns, including through its reporting.
                  •	   Views membership as strategic.
                                                                          5. Management Approach and Performance
            	     This refers primarily to memberships maintained at      Indicators
                  the organizational level.
                                                                          The section on sustainability Performance Indicators
            Stakeholder Engagement                                        is organized by economic, environmental, and social
                                                                          categories. Social Indicators are further categorized
            The following Disclosure Items refer to general
                                                                          by Labor, Human Rights, Society, and Product
            stakeholder engagement conducted by the organization
                                                                          Responsibility. Each category includes a Disclosure on
            over the course of the reporting period. These
                                                                          Management Approach (‘Management Approach’) and
            Disclosures are not limited to stakeholder engagement
                                                                          a corresponding set of Core and Additional Performance
            implemented for the purposes of preparing a
                                                                          Indicators.
            sustainability report.
                                                                          Core Indicators have been developed through GRI’s
            4.14	 List of stakeholder groups engaged by the
                                                                          multi-stakeholder processes, which are intended to
                  organization.
                                                                          identify generally applicable Indicators and are assumed
                                                                          to be material for most organizations. An organization
            	     Examples of stakeholder groups are:
                                                                          should report on Core Indicators unless they are
                                                                          deemed not material on the basis of the GRI Reporting
                  •	   Civil society;
                                                                          Principles. Additional Indicators represent emerging
                                                                          practice or address topics that may be material for some
                  •	   Customers;
                                                                          organizations, but are not material for others. Where
                                                                          final versions of Sector Supplements exist, the Indicators
                  •	   Employees, other workers, and their trade
                                                                          should be treated as Core Indicators. See Guidance on
                       unions;
                                                                          Defining Report Content for further details.

                  •	   Local communities;
                                                                          The Disclosure(s) on Management Approach should
                                                                          provide a brief overview of the organization’s
                  •	   Shareholders and providers of capital; and
                                                                          management approach to the Aspects defined under
                                                                          each Indicator Category in order to set the context for
                  •	   Suppliers.
                                                                          performance information. The organization can structure
                                                                          its Disclosure(s) on Management Approach to cover the
            4.15	 Basis for identification and selection of
                                                                          full range of Aspects under a given Category or group
                  stakeholders with whom to engage.
                                                                          its responses on the Aspects differently. However, the
                                                                          Disclosure should address all of the Aspects associated
            	     This includes the organization’s process for defining
                                                                          with each category regardless of the format or grouping.
                  its stakeholder groups, and for determining the
                  groups with which to engage and not to engage.
                                                                          Within the overall structure of the Standard Disclosures,
                                                                          Strategy and Profile items 1.1 and 1.2 in ‘Strategy and
            4.16	 Approaches to stakeholder engagement, including
                                                                          Analysis’ are intended to provide a concise overview of
                  frequency of engagement by type and by
                                                                          the risks and opportunities facing the organization as
                  stakeholder group.
                                                                          a whole. The Disclosure(s) on Management Approach
                                                                          is intended to address the next level of detail of the
            	     This could include surveys, focus groups, community
                                                                          organization’s approach to managing the sustainability
                  panels, corporate advisory panels, written
                                                                          topics associated with risks and opportunities.
                  communication, management/union structures,
                  and other vehicles. The organization should indicate




24   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


In reporting on the Performance Indicators, the           Economic
following guidance on data compilation applies:           The economic dimension of sustainability concerns the
                                                          organization’s impacts on the economic conditions of its
•	   Reporting on Trends: Information should be           stakeholders and on economic systems at local, national,
     presented for the current reporting period (e.g.,    and global levels. The Economic Indicators illustrate:
     one year) and at least two previous periods, as
     well as future targets, where they have been         •	    Flow of capital among different stakeholders; and
     established, for the short- and medium-term.
                                                          •	    Main economic impacts of the organization
•	   Use of Protocols: Organizations should use                 throughout society.
     the Protocols that accompany the Indicators
     when reporting on the Indicators. These give         Financial performance is fundamental to understanding
     basic guidance on interpreting and compiling         an organization and its own sustainability. However,
     information.                                         this information is normally already reported in
                                                          financial accounts. What is often reported less, and is
•	   Presentation of Data: In some cases, ratios          frequently desired by users of sustainability reports, is
     or normalized data are useful and appropriate        the organization’s contribution to the sustainability of a
     formats for data presentation. If ratios or          larger economic system.
     normalized data are used, absolute data should
     also be provided.                                    Disclosure on Management Approach
                                                          Provide a concise disclosure on the Management
•	   Data aggregation: Reporting organizations
                                                          Approach items outlined below with reference to the
     should determine the appropriate level of
                                                          following Economic Aspects:
     aggregation of information. See additional
     guidance in the General Reporting Notes section
                                                          •	    Economic Performance;
     of the Guidelines.

                                                          •	    Market Presence; and
•	   Metrics: Reported data should be presented
     using generally accepted international metrics
                                                          •	    Indirect Economic Impacts.
     (e.g., kilograms, tonnes, litres) and calculated
     using standard conversion factors. Where specific
                                                          Goals and Performance
     international conventions exist (e.g., GHG
     equivalents), these are typically specified in the   Organization-wide goals regarding performance
     Indicator Protocols.                                 relevant to the Economic Aspects.

                                                          Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed)
                                                          in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to
                                                          demonstrate the results of performance against goals.

                                                          Policy

                                                          Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines
                                                          the organization’s overall commitment relating to the
                                                          Economic Aspects listed above, or state where this can
                                                          be found in the public domain (e.g., web link).

                                                          Additional Contextual Information

                                                          Additional relevant information required to understand
                                                          organizational performance, such as:

                                                          •	    Key successes and shortcomings;

                                                          •	    Major organizational risks and opportunities;




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   25
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            •	    Major changes in the reporting period to systems   Economic Performance Indicators
                  or structures to improve performance; and
                                                                     Aspect: Economic Performance

            •	    Key strategies for implementing policies or               EC1	 Direct economic value generated and
                  achieving performance.                                         distributed, including revenues, operating
                                                                                 costs, employee compensation, donations
                                                                                 and other community investments, retained




                                                                     Core
                                                                                 earnings, and payments to capital providers
                                                                                 and governments.

                                                                            EC2	 Financial implications and other risks and




                                                                     Core
                                                                                 opportunities for the organization’s activities
                                                                                 due to climate change.




                                                                     Core
                                                                            EC3	 Coverage of the organization’s defined benefit
                                                                                 plan obligations.

                                                                     Core   EC4	 Significant financial assistance received from
                                                                                 government.

                                                                     Aspect: Market Presence

                                                                            EC5 	 Range of ratios of standard entry level wage
                                                                                  by gender compared to local minimum wage
                                                                     A dd




                                                                                  at significant locations of operation.

                                                                            EC6 	 Policy, practices, and proportion of spending
                                                                     Core




                                                                                  on locally-based suppliers at significant
                                                                                  locations of operation.

                                                                            EC7	 Procedures for local hiring and proportion
                                                                                 of senior management hired from the
                                                                     Core




                                                                                 local community at locations of significant
                                                                                 operation.

                                                                     Aspect: Indirect Economic Impacts

                                                                            EC8	 Development and impact of infrastructure
                                                                                 investments and services provided primarily
                                                                     Core




                                                                                 for public benefit through commercial, in-
                                                                                 kind, or pro bono engagement.

                                                                            EC9	 Understanding and describing significant
                                                                                 indirect economic impacts, including the
                                                                     A dd




                                                                                 extent of impacts.




26   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


Environmental                                                Organizational responsibility

The environmental dimension of sustainability concerns       The most senior position with operational responsibility
an organization’s impacts on living and non-living           for Environmental Aspects or explain how operational
natural systems, including ecosystems, land, air, and        responsibility is divided at the senior level for these
water. Environmental Indicators cover performance            Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses
related to inputs (e.g., material, energy, water) and        on structures at the governance level.
outputs (e.g., emissions, effluents, waste). In addition,
they cover performance related to biodiversity,              Training and awareness
environmental compliance, and other relevant
                                                             Procedures related to training and raising awareness in
information such as environmental expenditure and the
                                                             relation to the Environmental Aspects.
impacts of products and services.

                                                             Monitoring and Follow-Up
Disclosure on Management Approach
                                                             Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and
Provide a concise disclosure on the Management
                                                             preventive actions, including those related to the
Approach items outlined below with reference to the
                                                             supply chain.
following Environmental Aspects:

                                                             List of certifications for environment-related
•	    Materials;
                                                             performance or certification systems, or other
                                                             approaches to auditing/verification for the reporting
•	    Energy;
                                                             organization or its supply chain.

•	    Water;
                                                             Additional Contextual Information

•	    Biodiversity;                                          Additional relevant information required to understand
                                                             organizational performance, such as:
•	    Emissions, Effluents, and Waste;
                                                             •	   Key successes and shortcomings;
•	    Products and Services;
                                                             •	   Major organizational environmental risks and
•	    Compliance;                                                 opportunities related to issues;

•	    Transport; and                                         •	   Major changes in the reporting period to systems
                                                                  or structures to improve performance; and
•	    Overall
                                                             •	   Key strategies and procedures for implementing
Goals and Performance                                             policies or achieving goals.

Organization-wide goals regarding performance
relevant to the Environment Aspects.

Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed)
in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to
demonstrate the results of performance against goals.

Policy

Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines
the organization’s overall commitment related to the
Environmental Aspects listed above or state where this
can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link).




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   27
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Environmental Performance Indicators                                    EN14	 Strategies, current actions, and future plans




                                                                             A dd
                                                                                          for managing impacts on biodiversity.
            Aspect: Materials

                   EN1 	 Materials used by weight or volume.                        EN15	 Number of IUCN Red List species and national
            Core




                                                                                          conservation list species with habitats in areas
                                                                                          affected by operations, by level of extinction




                                                                             A dd
                   EN2	 Percentage of materials used that are recycled                    risk.
            Core




                        input materials.
                                                                             Aspect: Emissions, Effluents, and Waste
            Aspect: Energy
                                                                                    EN16	 Total direct and indirect greenhouse gas




                                                                             Core
                   EN3 	 Direct energy consumption by primary energy                      emissions by weight.
            Core




                         source.
                                                                                    EN17	 Other relevant indirect greenhouse gas




                                                                             Core
                   EN4	 Indirect energy consumption by primary                            emissions by weight.
            Core




                        source.
                                                                                    EN18	 Initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas

                                                                             A dd
                   EN5 	 Energy saved due to conservation and                             emissions and reductions achieved.
            A dd




                         efficiency improvements.
                                                                             Core

                                                                                    EN19	 Emissions of ozone-depleting substances by
                   EN6	 Initiatives to provide energy-efficient                           weight.
                        or renewable energy based products
                                                                             Core




                        and services, and reductions in energy                      EN20	 NO, SO, and other significant air emissions by
            A dd




                        requirements as a result of these initiatives.                    type and weight.	
                                                                             Core




                   EN7 	 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy                      EN21	 Total water discharge by quality and
            A dd




                         consumption and reductions achieved.                             destination.
                                                                             Core




            Aspect: Water	                                                          EN22	 Total weight of waste by type and disposal
                                                                                          method.
                   EN8	 Total water withdrawal by source.
            Core




                                                                             Core




                                                                                    EN23	 Total number and volume of significant spills.
                   EN9	 Water sources significantly affected by
            A dd




                        withdrawal of water.                                        EN24	 Weight of transported, imported, exported, or
                                                                                          treated waste deemed hazardous under the
                   EN10	 Percentage and total volume of water                             terms of the Basel Convention Annex I, II, III,
            A dd




                         recycled and reused.                                             and VIII, and percentage of transported waste
                                                                             A dd




                                                                                          shipped internationally.
            Aspect: Biodiversity
                                                                                    EN25	 Identity, size, protected status, and
                   EN11	 Location and size of land owned, leased,
                                                                                          biodiversity value of water bodies and related
                         managed in, or adjacent to, protected areas
                                                                                          habitats significantly affected by the reporting
                                                                             A dd
            Core




                         and areas of high biodiversity value outside
                                                                                          organization’s discharges of water and runoff.
                         protected areas.

                   EN12	 Description of significant impacts of activities,
                         products, and services on biodiversity in
            Core




                         protected areas and areas of high biodiversity
                         value outside protected areas.

                   EN13	 Habitats protected or restored.
            A dd




28   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines           RG


Aspect: Products and Services                                 Social Performance Indicators
       EN26	 Initiatives to mitigate environmental impacts    The social dimension of sustainability concerns the
Core




             of products and services, and extent of impact   impacts an organization has on the social systems within
             mitigation.                                      which it operates.

       EN27	 Percentage of products sold and their            The GRI Social Performance Indicators identify key
Core




             packaging materials that are reclaimed by        Performance Aspects surrounding labor practices,
             category. 	                                      human rights, society, and product responsibility.

Aspect: Compliance

       EN28	 Monetary value of significant fines and total
             number of non-monetary sanctions for non-
Core




             compliance with environmental laws and
             regulations.

Aspect: Transport

       EN29	 Significant environmental impacts of
             transporting products and other goods
             and materials used for the organization’s
             operations, and transporting members of the
A dd




             workforce.

Aspect: Overall

       EN30	 Total environmental protection expenditures
A dd




             and investments by type.




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   29
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Labor Practices and Decent Work                                Goals and Performance

            The specific Aspects under the category of Labor               Organization–wide goals regarding performance
            Practices are based on internationally recognized              relevant to the Labor Aspects, indicating their linkage to
            universal standards, including:                                the internationally recognized universal standards.

            •	    United Nations Universal Declaration of Human            Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed)
                  Rights;                                                  in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to
                                                                           demonstrate the results of performance against goals.
            •	    United Nations Convention: International
                  Covenant on Civil and Political Rights;                  Policy

                                                                           Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines
            •	    United Nations Convention: International
                                                                           the organization’s overall commitment related to the
                  Covenant on Economic, Social, and Cultural Rights;
                                                                           Labor Aspects, or state where this can be found in the
                                                                           public domain (e.g., web link). Also reference their
            •	    Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of
                                                                           linkage to the international standards indicated above.
                  Discrimination against Women (CEDAW);

                                                                           Organizational responsibility
            •	    ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles
                  and Rights at Work (in particular the eight core         The most senior position with operational responsibility for
                  Conventions of the ILO consisting of Conventions         Labor Aspects or explain how operational responsibility is
                  100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105); and                divided at the senior level for these Aspects. This differs
                                                                           from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses on structures at the
            •	    The Vienna Declaration and Programme of Action.          governance level.

            The Labor Practices Indicators also draw upon the              Training and awareness
            two instruments directly addressing the social
                                                                           Procedures related to training and raising awareness in
            responsibilities of business enterprises: the ILO Tripartite
                                                                           relation to the Labor Aspects. Include information on
            Declaration Concerning Multinational Enterprises and
                                                                           who participates in diversity, equal opportunities and
            Social Policy, and the Organisation for Economic Co-
                                                                           gender sensitization training (e.g., highest governance
            operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for
                                                                           bodies, senior management), and the topics addressed
            Multinational Enterprises.
                                                                           by training and any informal awareness raising.

            Disclosure on Management Approach
                                                                           Monitoring and Follow-Up
            Provide a concise disclosure on the following
                                                                           Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and pre-
            Management Approach items with reference to the
                                                                           ventive actions, including those related to the supply chain.
            Labor Aspects listed below. The ILO Tripartite Declaration
            Concerning Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy
                                                                           List of certifications for labor-related performance or
            (in particular the eight core Conventions of the ILO)
                                                                           certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/
            and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
                                                                           verifying the reporting organization or its supply chain.
            Development Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
            should be the primary reference points.
                                                                           Include procedures for equal remuneration reviews/
                                                                           audits and for action to redress any gender
            •	    Employment;
                                                                           remuneration gaps.
            •	    Labor/Management Relations;

            •	    Occupational Health and Safety;

            •	    Training and Education;

            •	    Diversity and Equal Opportunity; and

            •	    Equal remuneration for women and men.



30   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


Additional Contextual Information                          Labor Practices and Decent Work
                                                           Performance Indicators
Additional relevant information required to understand
organizational performance, such as:                       Aspect: Employment

                                                                  LA1 	 Total workforce by employment type,
•	   Key successes and shortcomings;




                                                           Core
                                                                        employment contract, and region, broken
                                                                        down by gender.
•	   Major organizational risks and opportunities;
                                                                  LA2 	 Total number and rate of new employee hires
•	   Major changes in the reporting period to systems




                                                           Core
                                                                        and employee turnover by age group, gender,
     or structures to improve performance; and
                                                                        and region.

•	   Key strategies and procedures for implementing
                                                                  LA3	 Benefits provided to full-time employees
     policies or achieving goals.
                                                                       that are not provided to temporary or part-
                                                                       time employees, by significant locations of



                                                           A dd
•	    A description of the legal and socio-economic
                                                                       operation.
     environment that provides opportunities for,
     and barriers to, gender equity in the workforce,
                                                           Core   LA15	 Return to work and retention rates after
     including but not limited to women’s workforce
                                                                        parental leave, by gender.
     participation rates, their participation at highest
     governance level, and equal remuneration.
                                                           Aspect: Labor/Management Relations

                                                                  LA4 	 Percentage of employees covered by
                                                           Core




                                                                        collective bargaining agreements.

                                                                  LA5	 Minimum notice period(s) regarding
                                                           Core




                                                                       operational changes, including whether it is
                                                                       specified in collective agreements.

                                                           Aspect: Occupational Health and Safety

                                                                  LA6	 Percentage of total workforce represented in
                                                                       formal joint management–worker health and
                                                                       safety committees that help monitor and advise
                                                           A dd




                                                                       on occupational health and safety programs.


                                                                  LA7 	 Rates of injury, occupational diseases, lost
                                                                        days, and absenteeism, and total number
                                                           Core




                                                                        of work-related fatalities, by region and by
                                                                        gender.

                                                                  LA8 	 Education, training, counseling, prevention,
                                                                        and risk-control programs in place to assist
                                                           Core




                                                                        workforce members, their families, or community
                                                                        members regarding serious diseases.

                                                                  LA9	 Health and safety topics covered in formal
                                                           A dd




                                                                       agreements with trade unions.

                                                           Aspect: Training and Education

                                                                  LA10	 Average hours of training per year per
                                                           Core




                                                                        employee by gender, and by employee
                                                                        category.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   31
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



                   LA11	 Programs for skills management and                       Human Rights
                         lifelong learning that support the continued
                                                                                  There is growing global consensus that organizations have
                         employability of employees and assist them in
            A dd




                                                                                  the responsibility to respect human rights. Human rights
                         managing career endings.
                                                                                  Performance Indicators require organizations to report on
                                                                                  the extent to which processes have been implemented,
                   LA12	 Percentage of employees receiving regular
                                                                                  on incidents of human rights violations and on changes
                         performance and career development
            A dd




                                                                                  in the stakeholders’ ability to enjoy and exercise their
                         reviews, by gender.
                                                                                  human rights, occurring during the reporting period.
            Aspect: Diversity and Equal Opportunity                               Among the human rights issues included are non-
                                                                                  discrimination, gender equality, freedom of association,
                   LA13	 Composition of governance bodies and
                                                                                  collective bargaining, child labor, forced and compulsory
                         breakdown of employees per employee
                                                                                  labor, and indigenous rights.
                         category according to gender, age group,
            Core




                         minority group membership, and other
                                                                                  The international legal framework for human rights
                         indicators of diversity.
                                                                                  is comprised of a body of law made up of treaties,
                                                                                  conventions, declarations and other instruments. The
            ASPECT: 	EQUAL REMUNERATION FOR WOMEN AND
                                                                                  corner stone of human rights is the International Bill of
            	MEN
                                                                                  Rights which is formed by three instruments:
                   LA14	 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of
            Core




                         women to men by employee category, by                    i)	     the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948);
                         significant locations of operation.
                                                                                  ii)	    the International Covenant on Civil and Political
                                                                                          Rights (1966); and

                                                                                  iii)	   the International Covenant on Economic, Social and
                                                                                          Cultural Rights (1966).

                                                                                  These are the first reference points for any organization
                                                                                  reporting on human rights. In addition to these three key
                                                                                  instruments, the international legal framework for human
                                                                                  rights is underpinned by over 80 other instruments:
                                                                                  ranging from soft declarations and guiding principles
                                                                                  to binding treaties and conventions, and ranging from
                                                                                  universal instruments to regional.

                                                                                  Organizations can affect a wide range of human rights. In
                                                                                  assessing which human rights are relevant for reporting,
                                                                                  an organization should consider all human rights.
                                                                                  Some additional instruments which may be useful for a
                                                                                  reporting organization to reflect upon are:

                                                                                  •	      ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
                                                                                          Rights at Work (1998) (which builds upon the
                                                                                          eight core Conventions of the ILO consisting of
                                                                                          Conventions 100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105)9;

                                                                                  •	      The regional conventions, adhering to the principle
                                                                                          of universality in the International Bill of Rights, for
                                                                                          areas where the organization operates, including:
                                                                                          the African Charter on Human and Peoples Rights
                                                                                          (1981), the Arab Charter on Human Rights (1994),



             Conventions 100 and 111 pertain to non-discrimination; Conventions 87 and 98 pertain to freedom of association and collective
            9

             bargaining; Conventions 138 and 182 pertain to the elimination of child labor; and Conventions 29 and 105 pertain to the prevention
             of forced and compulsory labor.
32   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


     the American Convention on Human Rights (1969),         Goals and Performance
     the European Convention on Human Rights (ECHR)
                                                             Organization-wide goals regarding performance relevant
     (1950); and
                                                             to the human rights Aspects, indicating their linkage to
                                                             the international declarations and standards listed in the
•	   Conventions protecting the rights of individuals
                                                             introduction.
     who may be impacted by the organization’s work,
     including but not limited to the Convention on
                                                             Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed)
     the Elimination of Discrimination Against Women
                                                             in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to
     (CEDAW) (1979), the Convention on the Rights of
                                                             demonstrate the results of performance against goals.
     the Child (1989), the International Convention on
     the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination
                                                             Policy
     (1966), ILO Convention 107 Indigenous and Tribal
     Populations Convention (1957), ILO Convention           Brief, organization-wide policy or policies that define the
     169 Concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples            organization’s overall commitment to the human rights
     in Independent Countries (1991), UN Declaration         Aspects including:
     on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (2007)
     and Convention on the Rights of Persons with            •	    Rights identified as priorities;
     Disabilities (2007).
                                                             •	    Application of the policy or policies in terms of
It is important to note that many Aspects that provide             country of operations and business partners; and
insight into human rights performance can be found in
other Indicator Categories in the Guidelines, and are not    •	    Policy or policies which may reasonably be
limited to the Human Rights Indicators Category.                   considered likely to affect employees’ decisions to
                                                                   join a trade union, or bargain collectively.
Disclosure on Management Approach
                                                             Alternatively, state where a policy or policies can
Provide concise disclosure on the implementation of
                                                             be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Also,
due diligence processes on the following Management
                                                             reference the linkage between organizational policy or
Approach items, with reference to the human rights
                                                             policies and international human rights Conventions and
Aspects listed below.
                                                             Declarations.

The primary reference points should be the ILO
                                                             The relevant policies for this disclosure may be stand-
Tripartite Declaration Concerning Multinational
                                                             alone human rights policy, or may require disclosing
Enterprises and Social Policy and the Organisation for
                                                             criteria that are integrated into a combination of policies.
Economic Cooperation and Development Guidelines for
Multinational Enterprises.
                                                             Strategies for extending and embedding human rights
•	   Investment and Procurement Practices;                   policies, goals and processes across the organization,
                                                             and strategies for extending applicable policies and
•	   Non-discrimination;                                     procedures to external parties such as joint ventures,
                                                             subsidiaries and suppliers. Specifically, the organization
•	   Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining;       should explain its approach for using human rights
                                                             criteria or clauses in contracts, including the types of
•	   Child Labor;                                            clauses and the types of contracts and agreements in
                                                             which they are commonly applied (e.g., investments,
•	   Prevention of Forced and Compulsory Labor;
                                                             purchasing contracts, joint ventures).
•	   Security Practices;
                                                             ORGANIZATIONAL RISK ASSESSMENT
•	   Indigenous Rights;
                                                             Describe risk assessment procedures that include human
                                                             rights, including the use of industry guidance and
•	   Assessment; and
                                                             practices.
•	   Remediation.
                                                             Identify other processes for analyzing and
                                                             understanding human rights issues that are relevant to




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1   33
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            the organization and its stakeholders, and the frequency    •	    Listing of human rights issues that have been
            with which they are undertaken.                                   raised at board or senior executive level during the
                                                                              reporting period;
            Identify any specific organizational or sectoral
            opportunities and risks that relate to human rights,        •	    The inclusion of human rights criteria in employee
            considering internal drivers or practices that could              performance assessments, annual bonus schemes
            promote or undermine efforts to uphold human rights               and other incentive mechanisms; and
            (e.g., purchasing practices).
                                                                        •	     Any agreements/partnerships with external
            IMPACT ASSESSMENT                                                 parties that are designed to help the organization
                                                                              identify and meet its human rights responsibilities
            Processes and procedures for assessing, reviewing or
                                                                              (for example, international framework agreements
            tracking human rights impacts at the level of individual
                                                                              with trade unions/global union federations,
            operations, or for assessing specific business decisions,
                                                                              external grievance procedures established with
            including the review of projects, operations, or other
                                                                              local/international NGOs or national human rights
            activities with specific business lines (e.g., sourcing
                                                                              commissions).
            strategies). This is distinct from organizational risk
            assessment, which assesses the organization as a whole.
                                                                        The above points differ from Disclosure 4.1, which
                                                                        focuses on structures at the governance level.
            •	    Degree to which internal and external stakeholder
                  engagement is included in the process;
                                                                        Training and awareness

            •	    Degree to which minorities and vulnerable groups      Procedures related to training and raising awareness
                  are considered in the process;                        in relation to the human rights Aspects, including
                                                                        descriptions of the strategy for embedding awareness
            •	    Whether and how the organization assesses its         of human rights, of major operations that are the focus
                  relationships with other parties such as workers      of internal training, of the methods and resources
                  and their trade unions, suppliers, business           used for human rights training, and of training on the
                  partners, governments, security providers in order    availability and accessibility of grievance mechanisms
                  to evaluate the potential of its being associated     and remediation processes.
                  with, or considered complicit in, human rights
                  abuse;                                                Monitoring, Follow-Up AND REMEDIATION

                                                                        Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and pre-
            •	    Which parameters are used to implement the
                                                                        ventive actions, including those related to the supply chain.
                  assessment (e.g., country of operation, relevant
                  human rights law, organizational human rights
                                                                        List of certifications for human rights-related performance,
                  policies and commitments); and
                                                                        or certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/
                                                                        verifying the reporting organization or its supply chain.
            •	    How and when the results of impact assessment
                  inform processes that investigate alternatives and/
                                                                        Procedures describing how the results of monitoring
                  or assist in the development of mitigation and
                                                                        are applied, and procedures to determine remedies for
                  remediation strategies.
                                                                        negative human rights impacts, including remediation
                                                                        processes associated with grievance procedures, and
            Organizational responsibility
                                                                        responses to complaints from local community/workers’
            The most senior position with operational responsibility    representatives, and other stakeholders.
            for human rights Aspects, or an explanation of how
            operational responsibility is divided at senior level for   Describe processes for monitoring internal and
            these Aspects, including:                                   external parties (e.g., use of internal audit, third-party
                                                                        monitoring, prioritizing risk locations). In addition,
            •	    The distribution of responsibilities for the          the organization should describe the availability and
                  implementation of human rights policies and           accessibility of grievance mechanisms and remediation
                  practices, including any involvement of the highest   processes, and the involvement of local community/
                  governance body;                                      workers’ representatives’ engagement in monitoring
                                                                        performance.



34   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                   RG


Additional Contextual Information                        Human Rights Performance Indicators
Additional relevant information required to understand   Aspect: Investment and Procurement Practices
organizational performance, such as:
                                                                HR1	 Percentage and total number of significant
                                                                     investment agreements and contracts that
•	   Key successes and shortcomings;
                                                                     include clauses incorporating human rights




                                                         Core
                                                                     concerns, or that have undergone human
•	   Major organizational risks and opportunities;
                                                                     rights screening. 	

•	   Major changes in the reporting period to systems
                                                                HR2	 Percentage of significant suppliers,
     or structures to improve performance; and
                                                                     contractors, and other business partners that




                                                         Core
                                                                     have undergone human rights screening, and
•	   Key strategies and procedures for implementing
                                                                     actions taken.
     policies or achieving goals.
                                                                HR3	 Total hours of employee training on policies
                                                                     and procedures concerning aspects of human


                                                         Core
                                                                     rights that are relevant to operations, including
                                                                     the percentage of employees trained.

                                                         Aspect: Non-discrimination	

                                                                HR4 	 Total number of incidents of discrimination
                                                         Core




                                                                      and corrective actions taken.

                                                         Aspect: 	Freedom of Association and Collective
                                                         	Bargaining	

                                                                HR5 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
                                                                      in which the right to exercise freedom of
                                                                      association and collective bargaining may
                                                         Core




                                                                      be violated or at significant risk, and actions
                                                                      taken to support these rights.

                                                         Aspect: Child Labor

                                                                HR6 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
                                                                      as having significant risk for incidents of child
                                                         Core




                                                                      labor, and measures taken to contribute to the
                                                                      effective abolition of child labor.

                                                         Aspect: Forced and Compulsory Labor	

                                                                HR7 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
                                                                      as having significant risk for incidents of
                                                                      forced or compulsory labor, and measures to
                                                         Core




                                                                      contribute to the elimination of all forms of
                                                                      forced or compulsory labor.

                                                         Aspect: Security Practices

                                                                HR8 	 Percentage of security personnel trained
                                                                      in the organization’s policies or procedures
                                                                      concerning aspects of human rights that are
                                                         A dd




                                                                      relevant to operations.




                                                                                                                          Version 3.1   35
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Aspect: Indigenous Rights 	
                                                                             Society
                   HR9 	 Total number of incidents of violations involving
                                                                             Society Performance Indicators focus attention on the
            A dd




                         rights of indigenous people and actions taken.
                                                                             impacts organizations have on the local communities
                                                                             in which they operate, and disclosing how the risks that
            Aspect: Assessment
                                                                             may arise from interactions with other social institutions
                   HR10 	Percentage and total number of operations           are managed and mediated. In particular, information
            Core




                         that have been subject to human rights              is sought on the risks associated with bribery and
                         reviews and/or impact assessments.                  corruption, undue influence in public policy-making,
                                                                             and monopoly practices.
            Aspect: Remediation
                                                                             Community members have individual rights based on:
                   HR11 	Number of grievances related to human rights
            Core




                         filed, addressed and resolved through formal
                                                                             •	    Universal Declaration of Human Rights;
                         grievance mechanisms.
                                                                             •	    International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights;

                                                                             •	    International Covenant on Economic, Social and
                                                                                   Cultural Rights; and

                                                                             •	    Declaration on the Right to Development.

                                                                             While there is ongoing debate about collective
                                                                             community rights, indigenous and tribal peoples have
                                                                             collective rights recognized by ILO Conventions 107 and
                                                                             169 and the UN Declaration on Indigenous Rights. In
                                                                             terms of identity, these peoples’ rights are based on both
                                                                             the collective and the individual. Their right to free, prior
                                                                             and informed consultation in order to seek consent is a
                                                                             fundamental right expressly recognized in the reference
                                                                             points above.

                                                                             Disclosure on Management Approach
                                                                             Provide a concise disclosure on the following
                                                                             Management Approach items with reference to the
                                                                             Society Aspects:

                                                                             •	    Local Communities;

                                                                             •	    Corruption;

                                                                             •	    Public Policy;

                                                                             •	    Anti-Competitive Behavior; and

                                                                             •	    Compliance.

                                                                             Goals and Performance

                                                                             Organization-wide goals regarding performance
                                                                             relevant to the Aspects indicated above.




36   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                RG


Use organization-specific Indicators as needed               section (Disclosure 4.1), and in the mechanisms for
in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to             employees and shareholders to provide direction to
demonstrate the results of performance against goals.        the highest governance body (Disclosure 4.4). Inform
                                                             if and how works councils, occupational health and
Address the extent to which organization-wide goals          safety committees and/or other independent employee
contribute to or interfere with the collective rights of     representation bodies are empowered to deal with and
local communities.                                           have dealt with impacts on local communities.

Policy                                                       Training and awareness

Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that define    Procedures related to training and raising awareness in
the organization’s overall commitment relating to the        relation to the Society Aspects.
Society Aspects or state where this can be found in the
public domain (e.g., web link).                              Refer specifically to formal and informal training that
                                                             addresses impacts on local communities including, but
Organization-wide policy or policies, or standards,          not limited to, parties that are trained or with whom
related to assessing the risks to local communities, and     the organization communicates its policy or policies,
managing impacts on local communities. Address the           including those external to the organization.
areas listed below covering the whole life cycle of the
organization’s operations (including entering, operating,    Procedures directed at the training and awareness
and exiting):                                                of employees and contractors (including security
                                                             personnel) for managing impacts on local communities.
•	    References/statements regarding the collective
      rights of local communities;                           Monitoring and Follow-Up

                                                             Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and
•	    Risk assessment for impacts on local communities,
                                                             preventive actions, including those related to the supply
      through the whole life cycle;
                                                             chain.
•	    Mitigation of impacts on local communities;
                                                             List of certifications for performance or certification
                                                             systems, or other approaches to auditing/verifying the
•	    Engagement with both women and men in local
                                                             reporting organization or its supply chain.
      communities; and

                                                             Procedures related to assessing the risks and managing
•	    Application of the policy within different levels of
                                                             impacts on local communities, including entering,
      the organization.
                                                             operating, and exiting. This should include information
                                                             on how data was collected and the process for selecting
Organizational responsibility
                                                             the local community members (individual or group)
The most senior position with operational responsibility     from whom information was gathered.
for Society Aspects or explain how operational
responsibility is divided at the senior level for these      Additional Contextual Information
Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses
                                                             Additional relevant information required to understand
on structures at the governance level.
                                                             organizational performance, such as:
Explain the division of responsibility for impacts on
                                                             •	   Key successes and shortcomings;
local communities in the highest governance body.
For organizations that do not have a single policy or
                                                             •	   Major organizational risks and opportunities;
standard, explain the roles of different departments in
the overall process of managing the impacts. Indicate
                                                             •	   Major changes in the reporting period to systems
the extent to which the impacts are addressed in the
                                                                  or structures to improve performance; and
organizational structures identified in the Governance

                                                             •	   Key strategies and procedures for implementing
                                                                  policies or achieving goals.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   37
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Society Performance Indicators                                  Product Responsibility
            Aspect: Local Communities                                       Product Responsibility Performance Indicators address
                                                                            the aspects of a reporting organization’s products and
                   SO1	 Percentage of operations with implemented
                                                                            services that directly affect customers, namely, health
            Core




                        local community engagement, impact
                                                                            and safety, information and labeling, marketing, and
                        assessments, and development programs.
                                                                            privacy.
            Core




                   SO9	 Operations with significant potential or actual
                                                                            These aspects are chiefly covered through disclosure
                        negative impacts on local communities.
                                                                            on internal procedures and the extent to which these
                                                                            procedures are not complied with.
                   SO10	 Prevention and mitigation measures
                         implemented in operations with significant
                                                                            Disclosure on Management Approach
            Core




                         potential or actual negative impacts on local
                         communities.                                       Provide a concise disclosure on the following
                                                                            Management Approach items with reference to the
            Aspect: Corruption                                              Product Responsibility Aspects:
            Core




                   SO2	 Percentage and total number of business
                                                                            •	    Customer Health and Safety;
                        units analyzed for risks related to corruption.

                                                                            •	    Product and Service Labeling;
                   SO3 	 Percentage of employees trained in
            Core




                         organization’s anti-corruption policies and
                                                                            •	    Marketing Communications;
                         procedures.

                                                                            •	    Customer Privacy; and
            Core




                   SO4	 Actions taken in response to incidents of
                        corruption.
                                                                            •	    Compliance.
            Aspect: Public Policy
                                                                            Goals and Performance
                   SO5 	 Public policy positions and participation in
            Core




                                                                            Organization-wide goals regarding performance
                         public policy development and lobbying.
                                                                            relevant to the Product Responsibility Aspects.

                   SO6 	 Total value of financial and in-kind
                                                                            Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed)
                         contributions to political parties, politicians,
            A dd




                                                                            in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to
                         and related institutions by country.
                                                                            demonstrate the results of performance against goals.

            Aspect: Anti-Competitive Behavior	
                                                                            Policy
                   SO7	 Total number of legal actions for anti-
                                                                            Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines
                        competitive behavior, anti-trust, and
            A dd




                                                                            the organization’s overall commitment to the Product
                        monopoly practices and their outcomes.
                                                                            Responsibility Aspects, or state where this can be found
                                                                            in the public domain (e.g., web link).
            Aspect: Compliance

                   SO8	 Monetary value of significant fines and total       Organizational responsibility
            Core




                        number of non-monetary sanctions for non-
                                                                            The most senior position with operational responsibility
                        compliance with laws and regulations.
                                                                            for Product Responsibility Aspects, or explain how
                                                                            operational responsibility is divided at the senior level
                                                                            for Product Responsibility Aspects. This differs from
                                                                            Disclosure 4.1, which focuses on structures at the
                                                                            governance level.

                                                                            Training and awareness

                                                                            Procedures related to training and raising awareness in
                                                                            relation to the Product Responsibility Aspects.



38   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


Monitoring and Follow-Up                                    Product Responsibility Performance Indicators
Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and
                                                            Aspect: Customer Health and Safety
preventive actions, including those related to the supply
chain.                                                             PR1	 Life cycle stages in which health and safety
                                                                        impacts of products and services are
List of certifications for product responsibility-                      assessed for improvement, and percentage of




                                                            Core
related performance or certification systems, or                        significant products and services categories
other approaches to auditing/verifying the reporting                    subject to such procedures.
organization or its supply chain.
                                                                   PR2	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance
Additional Contextual Information                                       with regulations and voluntary codes concerning
                                                                        health and safety impacts of products and services




                                                            A dd
Additional relevant information required to understand
                                                                        during their life cycle, by type of outcomes.
organizational performance, such as:

                                                            Aspect: Product and Service Labeling	
•	   Key successes and shortcomings;
                                                                   PR3	 Type of product and service information
•	   Major organizational risks and opportunities;          Core        required by procedures, and percentage of
                                                                        significant products and services subject to
•	   Major changes in the reporting period to systems                   such information requirements.
     or structures to improve performance; and
                                                                   PR4 	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance
•	   Key strategies and procedures for implementing                      with regulations and voluntary codes
     policies or achieving goals.                                        concerning product and service information
                                                            A dd




                                                                         and labeling, by type of outcomes.

                                                                   PR5	 Practices related to customer satisfaction,
                                                                        including results of surveys measuring
                                                            A dd




                                                                        customer satisfaction.

                                                            Aspect: Marketing Communications 	

                                                                   PR6 	 Programs for adherence to laws, standards,
                                                                         and voluntary codes related to marketing
                                                            Core




                                                                         communications, including advertising,
                                                                         promotion, and sponsorship.

                                                                   PR7	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance
                                                                        with regulations and voluntary codes
                                                                        concerning marketing communications,
                                                                        including advertising, promotion, and
                                                            A dd




                                                                        sponsorship by type of outcomes.

                                                            Aspect: Customer Privacy

                                                                   PR8	 Total number of substantiated complaints
                                                                        regarding breaches of customer privacy and
                                                            A dd




                                                                        losses of customer data.

                                                            Aspect: Compliance

                                                                   PR9 	 Monetary value of significant fines for non-
                                                            Core




                                                                         compliance with laws and regulations concerning
                                                                         the provision and use of products and services.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   39
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            General Reporting Notes                                       Medium of Reporting

            Data Gathering                                                Electronic (e.g., CD-ROM) or web-based reporting and
                                                                          paper reports are appropriate media for reporting.
            Feasibility Assessment
                                                                          Organizations may choose to use a combination of
            The process of defining report content will result in a       web and paper-based reports or use only one medium.
            set of topics and Indicators on which the organization        For example, an organization may choose to provide
            should report. However, practical challenges such as          a detailed report on their website and provide an
            the availability of data, the cost of gathering it, the       executive summary including their strategy and analysis
            confidentiality of information, privacy or other legal        and performance information in paper form. The choice
            concerns, the reliability of available information, and       will likely depend on the organization’s decisions on
            other factors, may result in a legitimate decision not to     its reporting period, its plans for updating content, the
            disclose certain information. Where material information      likely users of the report, and other practical factors such
            is omitted, the report should clearly indicate this and the   as its distribution strategy. At least one medium (web or
            reasons why.                                                  paper) should provide users with access to the complete
                                                                          set of information for the reporting period.
            Data Aggregation and Disaggregation
                                                                          Frequency of Reporting
            Reporting organizations will need to determine the
            level of aggregation at which to present information.         Organizations should define a consistent and periodic
            This requires balancing the effort required against the       cycle for issuing a report. For many organizations, this
            added meaningfulness of information reported on a             will be an annual cycle, although some organizations
            disaggregated basis (e.g., country or site). Aggregation      choose to report biannually. An organization may
            of information can result in the loss of a significant        choose to update information on a regular basis
            amount of meaning, and can also fail to highlight             between the issuing of consolidated accounts
            particularly strong or poor performance in specific areas.    of performance. This has advantages in terms of
            On the other hand, unnecessary disaggregation of data         providing stakeholders with more immediate access
            can affect the ease of understanding the information.         to information, but has disadvantages in terms of
            Reporting organizations should disaggregate                   comparability of information. However, organizations
            information to an appropriate level using the                 should still maintain a predictable cycle in which all of
            principles and the guidance in the reporting Indicators.      the information that is reported covers a specific time
            Disaggregation may vary by Indicator, but will generally      period.
            provide more insight than a single, aggregated figure.
                                                                          Reporting on economic, environmental, and social
            Report Form and Frequency                                     performance could coincide or be integrated with
                                                                          other organizational reporting, such as annual financial
            Definition of a Sustainability Report
                                                                          statements. Coordinated timing will reinforce the
            A sustainability report refers to a single, consolidated      linkages between financial performance and economic,
            disclosure that provides a reasonable and balanced            environmental, and social performance.
            presentation of performance over a fixed time period.
            Stakeholders should be able to directly access all of         Updating Report Content
            the report information from a single location, such
                                                                          When preparing a new report, an organization may
            as a GRI content index. Other publications should
                                                                          identify areas of information that have not changed
            not be referenced as the information source for a GRI
                                                                          since the prior report (e.g., a policy that has not been
            Standard Disclosure Item (ex., a Performance Indicator)
                                                                          amended). The organization may choose to only update
            unless the means for a stakeholder to directly access
                                                                          the topics and Indicators that have changed and to
            the information is provided (e.g., a link to a specific
                                                                          re-publish the Disclosures that have not changed. For
            web page or the page number of the corresponding
                                                                          example, an organization may choose to reproduce
            publication). There is no minimum length for a report
                                                                          the information on policies that have not changed and
            using the GRI Framework as long as the organization
                                                                          only update its Performance Indicators. The flexibility to
            has properly applied the Guidelines and Framework
                                                                          take such an approach will depend in large part on the
            documents it has chosen to use.
                                                                          organization’s choice of reporting medium. Topics such
                                                                          as strategy and analysis and Performance Indicators
                                                                          are likely to show changes each reporting period, while
                                                                          other topics such as organizational profile or governance



40   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines               RG


may change at a slower pace. Regardless of the strategy           •	    Utilizes groups or individuals to conduct the
used, the full set of applicable information for the                    assurance who are not unduly limited by
reporting period should be accessible in a single location              their relationship with the organization or its
(either a paper or web-based document).                                 stakeholders to reach and publish an independent
                                                                        and impartial conclusion on the report;
Assurance
                                                                  •	    Assesses the extent to which the report preparer
Choices on assurance
                                                                        has applied the GRI Reporting Framework
Organizations use a variety of approaches to enhance                    (including the Reporting Principles) in the course
the credibility of their reports. Organizations may have                of reaching its conclusions; and
systems of internal controls in place, including internal
audit functions, as part of their processes for managing          •	    Results in an opinion or set of conclusions that is
and reporting information. These internal systems are                   publicly available in written form, and a statement
important to the overall integrity and credibility of a report.         from the assurance provider on their relationship
However, GRI recommends the use of external assurance for               to the report preparer.
sustainability reports in addition to any internal resources.
                                                                  As indicated in Profile Disclosure 3.13, organizations
A variety of approaches are currently used by report              should disclose information on their approach to
preparers to implement external assurance, including              external assurance.
the use of professional assurance providers, stakeholder
panels, and other external groups or individuals.
However, regardless of the specific approach, it should be
conducted by competent groups or individuals external
to the organization. These engagements may employ
groups or individuals that follow professional standards
for assurance, or they may involve approaches that follow
systematic, documented, and evidence-based processes
but are not governed by a specific standard.

GRI uses the term ‘external assurance’ to refer to activities
designed to result in published conclusions on the quality
of the report and the information contained within it. This
includes, but is not limited to, consideration of underlying
processes for preparing this information. This is different
from activities designed to assess or validate the quality
or level of performance of an organization, such as issuing
performance certifications or compliance assessments.

Overall, the key qualities for external assurance of
reports using the GRI Reporting Framework are that it:

•	    Is conducted by groups or individuals external to
      the organization who are demonstrably competent
      in both the subject matter and assurance practices;

•	    Is implemented in a manner that is systematic,
      documented, evidence-based, and characterized
      by defined procedures;

•	    Assesses whether the report provides a reasonable
      and balanced presentation of performance, taking
      into consideration the veracity of data in a report
      as well as the overall selection of content;




                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   41
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Glossary of Terms                                            GRI Reporting Framework
            Additional Indicators                                        The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to provide
                                                                         a generally accepted framework for reporting on an
            Additional Indicators are those Indicators identified in
                                                                         organization’s economic, environmental, and social
            the GRI Guidelines that represent emerging practice
                                                                         performance. The Framework consists of the Sustainability
            or address topics that may be material to some
                                                                         Reporting Guidelines, the Indicator Protocols, Technical
            organizations but not generally for a majority.
                                                                         Protocols, and the Sector Supplements.

            Boundary
                                                                         Independent Board Member
            The boundary for a sustainability report refers to the
                                                                         Definitions for ‘independent’ can vary between legal
            range of entities whose performance is covered in the
                                                                         jurisdictions. Independent usually implies that the
            organization’s sustainability report.
                                                                         member has no financial interest in the organization or
                                                                         other potential benefits that could create a conflict of
            Content Index
                                                                         interest. Organizations using the Guidelines should state
            A GRI content index is a table or matrix that lists all      the definition used for ‘independent’.
            of the Standard Disclosures, and where responses to
            the Disclosures can be found (page number or URL).           Indicator Categories
            Reporting organizations can also add reference to
                                                                         Broad areas or groupings of sustainability topics. The
            organization-specific (non-GRI Guidelines) Indicators.
                                                                         categories included in the GRI Guidelines are: economic,
            The Content Index provides users with a quick overview
                                                                         environmental, and social. The social grouping is
            of what has been reported and increases ease of report
                                                                         categorized in terms of Labor Practices, Human Rights,
            use. A Content Index is especially important if some
                                                                         Society, and Product Responsibility. A given category
            of the Disclosures appear in other reports, such as a
                                                                         may have several Indicator Aspects.
            financial report or previous sustainability reports.

                                                                         Indicator Aspects
            Core Indicator
                                                                         The general types of information that are related to a specific
            Core Indicators are those Indicators identified in the GRI
                                                                         Indicator category (e.g., energy use, child labor, customers).
            Guidelines to be of interest to most stakeholders and
            assumed to be material unless deemed otherwise on the
                                                                         Performance Indicator
            basis of the GRI Reporting Principles.
                                                                         Qualitative or quantitative information about results
            Downstream                                                   or outcomes associated with the organization that is
                                                                         comparable and demonstrates change over time.
            The term ‘downstream entities’ is based on the concept
            of a production chain that extends from the extraction
                                                                         Profile Disclosures
            of raw materials to the use of a good or service by an
            end-user. ‘Downstream’ refers to those organizations         The numbered information requirements in Part 2 of the
            that play a role in the distribution or use of goods and     Guidelines that set the overall context for reporting and
            services provided by the reporting organization, or, more    understanding organizational performance (e.g., 2.1, 3.13).
            generally, play a role in a later step in the production
            chain than the organization itself.                          Reporting Principle
                                                                         Concepts that describe the outcomes a report should
            Global Reporting Initiative
                                                                         achieve and that guide decisions made throughout the
            GRI’s vision is of a sustainable global economy where        reporting process, such as which Indicators to respond
            organizations manage their economic, environmental,          to, and how to respond to them.
            social and governance performance and impacts
            responsibly and report transparently. GRI accomplishes       Sector Supplement
            this vision by providing guidance and support that
                                                                         Sector Supplements are versions of the GRI Guidelines
            enables organizations to report transparently and with
                                                                         tailored for particular sectors. Some sectors face unique
            accountability, as drivers of the change to a sustainable
                                                                         issues. Sector Supplements capture these issues, which
            global economy. All GRI Reporting Framework
                                                                         may not be covered in the original Guidelines. Sector
            components are developed using a multi-stakeholder
                                                                         Supplements feature integrated commentary and new
            consensus-seeking approach.



42   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines              RG


Performance Indicators, ensuring that sustainability reports   Unitary Board
cover key sectoral concerns.
                                                               Refers to a board structure that has only one governing
                                                               body responsible for the organization.
Stakeholder
Stakeholders are defined broadly as those groups or            Upstream
individuals: (a) that can reasonably be expected to be
                                                               The term ‘upstream entities’ is based on the concept of
significantly affected by the organization’s activities,
                                                               a production chain that extends from the extraction of
products, and/or services; or (b) whose actions can
                                                               raw materials to the use of a good or service by an end-
reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the
                                                               user. ‘Upstream’ refers to those organizations that play
organization to successfully implement its strategies and
                                                               a role in the supply chain of the reporting organization
achieve its objectives.
                                                               or, more generally, play a role in an earlier step in the
                                                               production chain than the organization itself.
Standard Disclosures	
                                                               For definitions of words or concepts contained directly in
The Guidelines present topics and information for
                                                               the wording of the Indicators, see the Indicator Protocols.
reporting that are material to most organizations and
of interest to most stakeholders. These are captured in
three types of Standard Disclosures:

•	    Strategy and Profile Disclosures set the overall
      context for reporting and for understanding
      organizational performance, such as its strategy,
      profile, governance, and management approach;

•	    Disclosures on Management Approach cover how
      an organization addresses a given set of topics
      in order to provide context for understanding
      performance in a specific area.

•	    Performance Indicators that elicit comparable
      information on the economic, environmental, and
      social performance of the organization

Sustainability Report
Sustainability reporting is the practice of measuring,
disclosing, and being accountable for organizational
performance while working towards the goal of
sustainable development. A sustainability report
provides a balanced and reasonable representation
of the sustainability performance of the reporting
organization, including both positive and negative
contributions.

Indicator Protocol
An Indicator Protocol provides definitions,
compilation guidance, and other information to
assist report preparers, and to ensure consistency in
the interpretation of the Performance Indicators. An
Indicator Protocol exists for each of the Performance
Indicators contained in the Guidelines.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   43
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            G3 Guidelines Acknowledgements:                             Indicators Working Group (IWG) Members
            A Global Effort                                             The Indicators Working Group was responsible for
                                                                        reviewing the indicators set as a whole; ensuring quality
            The following organizations provided funds or in-kind
                                                                        and consistency of the indicators’ design; and designing
            contributions for the G3 development process
                                                                        overall fit with the TAC guidance.

            G3 Consortium:                                              •	    Mr. Neil Anderson, Union Network International, UNI

                                                                        •	    Mr. David Bent, Forum for the Future

                                                                        •	    Mr. William R. Blackburn, William Blackburn Consulting

                                                                        •	    Ms. Julie-Anne Braithwaite, Rio Tinto/ICMM

                                                                        •	    Ms. Sarah Forrest, Goldman Sachs International

                                                                        •	    Ms. Somporn Kamolsiripichaiporn, Chulalongkorn
                                                                              University
            G3 ad hoc support:                                          •	    Mr. Robert Langford, The Federation des Experts
                                                                              Comptables Europeens (FEE)
            The United Kingdom Department for Environment, Food
            and Rural Affairs (DEFRA) and the Netherlands Ministry      •	    Ms. Stephanie Maier, Ethical Investment Research
            of Foreign Affairs also contributed to the G3 Guidelines          Service (EIRIS)
            Development.
                                                                        •	    Ms. Asako Nagai, Sony Corporation

                                                                        •	    Mr. Ron Nielsen, Alcan Inc.
            G3 Online supported by:
                                                                        •	    Mr. Michael Rae, World Wide Fund Australia

                                                                        •	    Ms. Ulla Rehell, Kesko Corporation

                                                                        •	    Mr. George Nagle, Bristol-Myers Squibb

                                                                        •	    Ms. Filippa Bergin, Amnesty International
            G3 printed by:
                                                                        •	    Ms. Giuliana Ortega Bruno, Ethos Institute  

                                                                        The IWG worked with six issue-specific Advisory Groups
                                                                        that were responsible for reviewing indicators and
                                                                        creating technical protocols for indicators in their area of
                                                                        expertise.
            G3 Guidelines and Protocols Content
            Development                                                 Society Advisory Group Members
            Volunteers from business, non-governmental
                                                                        •	    Ms. Anne Gambling, Holcim
            organizations, labor, accountancy, investment, academia,
            and others came together and create all aspects of the G3   •	    Mr. Sachin  Joshi, Center For Social Markets (CSM)
            Guidelines and Protocols. The following multi-stakeholder
            technical working groups were convened between              •	    Mr. Craig Metrick, Investor Responsibility Research
            January and November 2005, and each delivered a                   Center (IRRC)
            different part of the content of the G3 Guidelines.         •	    Mr. Keith Miller, 3M

                                                                        •	    Ms. Ruth Rosenbaum, Center for Reflection,
                                                                              Education and Action (CREA)

                                                                        •	    Ms. Glaucia Terreo, Instituto Ethos

                                                                        •	    Mr. Peter Wilkinson, Transparency International




44   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines                RG


Human Rights Advisory Group Members                         Labor Advisory Group Members
•	   Ms. Marina d’Engelbronner, Humanist Committee          •	   Ms. Michiko Arikawa, Matsushita Electric Industrial
     on Human Rights (HOM)                                       (Panasonic)

•	   Ms. Bethany Heath, Chiquita Brands                     •	   Mr. Stephen Frost, Southeast Asia Research Centre
•	   Mr. Jorge Daniel Taillant, The Center for Human
                                                            •	   Ms. Kyoko Sakuma, Sustainability Analysis 
     Rights and Environement (CEDHA)
                                                                 Consulting
•	   Rev. Mr. David M. Schilling, Interfaith Center on
                                                            •	   Mr. Sean Ansett, Gap Inc.
     Corporate Responsibility
                                                            •	   Ms. Deborah Evans, Lloyd’s Register of Quality
•	   Ms. Susan Todd, Solstice Sustainability Works Inc.
                                                                 Assurance (LRQA)
•	   Mr. Hirose Chuichiro, Canon
                                                            •	   Mr. Pierre Mazeau, Electricité de France  (EDF)
•	   Mr. Steve Ouma, Kenyan Human Rights Commission
                                                            •	   Mr. Dan Viederman, Verité
•	   Mr. Björn Edlund, ABB Ltd.

•	   Ms. Marleen van Ruijven, Amnesty International
                                                            Economic Advisory Group Members
                                                            •	   Ms. Christine Jasch, Institute for Environmental
                                                                 Management and Economics(IOEW)
Environment (Biodiversity and Water)
Advisory Group                                              •	   Mr. Martin Tanner, Novartis International AG

•	   Mr. Ian Blythe, Boots Group PLC                        •	   Ms. Helen Campbell, former AccountAbility

•	   Mr. Ian Dutton, The Nature Conservancy                 •	   Mr. Eric Israel, KPMG LLP

•	   Ms. Annelisa Grigg, Fauna  Flora International        •	   Ms. Martina Japy, BMJ CoreRatings

•	   Ms. Nancy Kamp-Roelands, Ernst  Young                 •	   Ms. Michelle Smith, Rohm and Haas
     Netherlands/ Royal NIVRA
                                                            •	   Ms. Lisa Acree, Business for Social Responsibility
•	   Ms. Erin Musk, City West Water
                                                            •	   Mr. Johan Verburg, NOVIB/Oxfam Netherlands
•	   Mr. Mike Rose, SASOL
                                                            Reporting as a Process Working Group
•	   Mr. Fernando Toledo, Codelco
                                                            (RPWG) Members
Environment (Pollution) Advisory Group                      The Reporting as a Process Working Group was tasked
Members                                                     with updating and further developing the reporting
•	   Ms. Tanja D. Carroll, Coalition for Environmentally    principles, and other guidance on the process of
     Responsible Economies (CERES)                          applying the G3 Guidelines.

•	   Mr. Yutaka Okayama, Toyota Motor Corporation           •	   Ms. Amy Anderson, Starbucks Coffee

•	   Ms. Maria Fatima Reyes, Philippine Institute of        •	   Mr. Pankaj Bhatia, World Resources Institute (WRI)
     Certified Public Accountants (PICPA)                   •	   Mr. Bill Boyle, BP
•	   Mr. Yogendra Kumar Saxena, Gujarat Ambuja Cements      •	   Dr. Uwe Brekau, Bayer AG
•	   Mr. David Stangis, Intel Corporation                   •	   Ms. Debra Hall, Coalition for Environmentally
•	   Ms. Sonia Valdivia, The Catholic University of Peru         Responsible Economies (CERES)

•	   Mr. Eric Shostal, Institutional Shareholder Services   •	   Mr. Dunstan Hope, Business for Social
                                                                 Responsibility
•	   Ms. Lucian Turk, Dell, Inc.
                                                            •	   Dr. Aqueel Khan, Association for Stimulating Know
                                                                 How (ASK)




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1   45
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            •	    Ms. Judy Kuszewski, SustainAbility Ltd.
                                                                        G3.1 Acknowledgements:
            •	    Mr Brian Kohler, Communications, Energy 
                  Paperworkers Union of Canada                          Community Impacts Working Group
                                                                        •	   Ms. Luz Barragan, CEMEX
            •	    Mr Ken Larson, Hewlett Packard
                                                                        •	   Mr. Derk Byvanck, Oxfam/Novib
            •	    Mr. Steve Lippman, Trillium Invest
                                                                        •	   Mr. Pierre Habbard, TUAC (Trade Union Advisory
            •	    Mr Luis Perera, PriceWaterHouseCoopers                     Committee to the OECD)
            •	    Mr. Dante Pesce, Vincular, Pontificia Universidad     •	   Ms. Constance Kane, World Education
                  Católica de Valparaíso
                                                                        •	   Ms. Helen Macdonald, Newmont Mining
            •	    Ms Mizue Unno, So-Tech Consulting, Inc.                    Corporation
            •	    Mr Cornis van der Lugt, UNEP Division of              •	   Ms. Liane Lohde, International Finance
                  Technology, Industry, and Economics (DTIE)                 Corporation, United States of America
            •	    Mr. Robert Walker, The Ethical Funds Company          •	   Mr. Manohar Paralkar, Tata Motors
            •	    Mr. Ian Whitehouse, Manaaki Whenua Landcare           •	   Mr. Claude Perras, Rio Tinto
                  Research
                                                                        •	   Mr. Johan Verburg, Oxfam/Novib
            •	    Mr Alan Willis, Alan Willis  Associates

            •	    Although not a member of the group, Jennifer
                                                                        Human Rights Working Group
                  Iansen-Rogers, KPMG, The Netherlands, provided        •	   Mr. Tom Etty, Former FNV Netherlands
                  ongoing advice on process matters.
                                                                        •	   Ms. Karin Ireton, Standard Bank

            Public comments                                             •	   Ms. Margaret Jungk, The Danish Institute for
                                                                             Human Rights
            270 submissions were received in response to its call for
            comments on the draft G3 Guidelines between January         •	   Mr. Stephen Ouma Akoth, Former Human Rights
            and March 2006. These comments significantly shaped              Commission, Kenya
            the final G3 Guidelines.
                                                                        •	   Ms. Jeehye Park, SK Telecom

            Consultants                                                 •	   Mr. Dante Pesce, Vincular: Centre for CSR – Chile

            The GRI secretariat enlisted the (paid) help of the         •	   Ms. Anna Pot, APG All Pensions Group
            following consultants during the G3 process:
                                                                        •	   Mr. Ed Potter, Coca-Cola Company
            •	    csrnetwork (Lead consultant – Mark Line)
                                                                        •	   Ms. Soraya Ramoul, NovoNordisk
            •	    Just Solutions (Lead consultant – Vic Thorpe)
                                                                        •	   Ms. Jo Render, Newmont Mining Corporation /
            •	    onValues (Lead consultant - Ivo Knoepfel)                  ERM

            •	    Ove Arup (Lead consultant - Jean Rogers)              •	   Mr. Martin Summers, British American Tobacco

            •	    Responsibility Matters (Lead consultant – Mark        •	   Ms. Jet Urmeneta, Verité Southeast Asia
                  Brownlie)
                                                                        •	   Mr. Bob Walker, Northwest  Ethical Investments
            •	    Sandra Pederson, Editor
                                                                        •	   Mr. John Wilson, TIAA-CREF
            •	    Source-Asia (Lead consultant – Paul Wenman)

            •	    Triple Innova (Lead consultant - Michael Kundt)

            •	    University of Amsterdam (Lead consultant - Jeffrey
                  Harrod)




46   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines               RG


Gender Working Group                                     Public comments
•	   Ms. Gemma Adaba , International Confederation of    The development of G3.1 followed established due
     Free Trade Unions (ICFTU)                           process, including a call for public comment. 358
•	   Ms. Amy Augustine, Calvert /CERES                   responses were received during the Public Comment
                                                         Period. Recommendations and concerns were
•	   Mr. Stefan Chojnicki, Standard Chartered Bank       considered and addressed by the Working Groups and
                                                         GRI’s governance bodies, significantly shaping G3.1’s
•	   Ms. Heloisa Covolan, Itaipu Binacional
                                                         design.
•	   Ms. Janet Geddes, KPMG India

•	   Ms. Jane Gronow, Rio Tinto

•	   Ms. Kate Grosser, Nottingham University Business
     School

•	   Ms. Cecily Joseph, Symantec

•	   Ms. Tahereh Kharestani, CSR Iran

•	   Mr. Tur-Od Lkhagvajav, XacBank

•	   Ms. Jyoti Macwan, SEWA

•	   Ms. Laraine Mills, UNIFEM

•	   Ms. Alisha Miranda, Standard Chartered Bank

•	   Ms. Carmen Niethammer, International Finance
     Corporation (IFC)

•	   Ms. Pratibha Pandya, SEWA

•	   Ms. Liz Potter, LendLease

•	   Ms. Srimathi Shivashankar, Infosys Technologies
     India

•	   Ms. Ines Smyth, Oxfam GB

•	   Ms. Anne Stenhammer, UNIFEM

•	   Ms. Annie Tennant, LendLease

•	   Ms. Noortje Verhart, KIT Royal Tropical Institute

•	   Mr. Vusa Vundla, AMSCO

•	   Mr. Jean-Paul Zalaquett Falaha, Chilectra

•	   Ms. Jo Zaremba, Oxfam GB




                                                                                                                 Version 3.1   47
RG   Sustainability Reporting Guidelines



            Acknowledgements Technical                               GRI Governance Bodies
            Protocol                                                 Technical Advisory Committee
            Report Content  Materiality Working                     This group of a maximum of 15 experts assists in
            Group                                                    maintaining the overall quality and coherence of the
                                                                     GRI Reporting Framework by providing high level
            •	    Mr. Glenn Frommer, MTR Corporation
                                                                     technical advice and expertise. Their key function in
            •	    Mr. Bradley Googins, Carroll School of             the Guidelines’ development is to recommend the
                  Management - Boston College                        direction of guidance, resolve key issues that emerge
                                                                     around content, ensure the development follows
            •	    Mr. Jong Ho Hong, Graduate School of
                                                                     sound due process, and submit a concur/non-concur
                  Environmental Studies Seoul National University
                                                                     recommendation to the Board on whether to approve
            •	    Ms. Daisy Kambalame, African Institute of          the Guidelines for release.
                  Corporate Citizenship (AICC)
                                                                     Stakeholder Council
            •	    Mr. David Kingma, Holcim                           This group of a maximum of 50 constitutes the formal
            •	    Mr. Carlos Eduardo Lessa Brandão - Brazilian       stakeholder policy forum within the GRI governance
                  Institute of Corporate Governance                  structure. The Council advises the Board on policy and
                                                                     strategy issues. Some individual SC members participate
            •	    Mr. Jason Morrison, Pacific Institute              in Guidelines Working Groups.

            •	    Mr. Graham Terry, The South African Institute of   Board of Directors:
                  Chartered Accountants (SAICA)
                                                                     This group of a maximum of 16 has the ultimate
            •	    Mr. Luis Perera, PriceWaterHouseCoopers            fiduciary, financial and legal responsibility for GRI, and
                                                                     is the final decision making authority on Guidelines
            •	    Mr. Cornis van der Lugt - United Nations           revisions, organizational strategy and work plans.
                  Environment Programme (UNEP)
                                                                     GRI Secretariat:
            •	    Ms. Janet Williamson, TUC
                                                                     The Secretariat works to drive GRI’s Mission to make
            Public comments                                          sustainability reporting standard practice. The
                                                                     Secretariat implements the Guidelines and technical
            The development of the Technical Protocol – Applying     work plan approved by the Board of Directors. It also
            the Report Content Principles followed established due   manages communications, outreach, stakeholder
            process, including a call for public comment.            relations, learning and research services and financial
            40 responses were received during the Public             administration. The Secretariat supports the operations
            Comment Period. Recommendations and concerns             of the Board of Directors, Stakeholder Council and
            were considered and addressed by the Working Group       Technical Advisory Committee.
            and GRI’s governance bodies, significantly shaping the
            Technical Protocol’s design.




48   © 2000-2011 GRI
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines      RG


Legal Liability

This document, designed to promote sustainability           Further information on the GRI and the
reporting, has been developed through a unique              Sustainability Reporting Guidelines may be
multi-stakeholder consultative process involving            obtained from:
representatives from reporting organizations and
                                                            www.globalreporting.org
report information users from around the world. While
the GRI Board of Directors encourage use of the GRI
                                                            info@globalreporting.org
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (GRI Guidelines)
by all organizations, the preparation and publication
of reports based fully or partially on the GRI Guidelines
is the full responsibility of those producing them.
Neither the GRI Board of Directors nor Stichting Global
Reporting Initiative can assume responsibility for
any consequences or damages resulting directly or
indirectly, from the use of the GRI Guidelines in the
                                                            Global Reporting Initiative
preparation of reports or the use of reports based on the
GRI Guidelines.
                                                            PO Box 10039

Request for Notification of Use                             1001 EA Amsterdam
Organizations that have used the Guidelines and/or
                                                            The Netherlands
other elements of the Reporting Framework as the basis
for their report are requested to notify GRI upon its
                                                            Tel: +31 (0) 20 531 00 00
release. When notifying GRI, organizations can choose
the following options:
                                                            Fax: +31 (0) 20 531 00 31
•	    Register their report in GRI’s online database of
      reports

                                                            © 2000-2011 Global Reporting Initiative.
•	    Request that GRI publicize their report with the
                                                            All rights reserved.
      Featured Report Service

•	    Request a GRI Application Level Check to confirm
      their self-declared Application Level.


Copyright and Trademark Notice
This document is copyright-protected by Stichting
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). The reproduction and
distribution of this document for information and/or
use in preparing a sustainability report is permitted
without prior permission from GRI. However, neither this
document nor any extract from it may be reproduced,
stored, translated, or transferred in any form or by any
means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded,
or otherwise) for any other purpose without prior
written permission from GRI.

Global Reporting Initiative, the Global Reporting
Initiative logo, Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and
GRI are trademarks of the Global Reporting Initiative.




                                                                                                             Version 3.1   49
GRI Application Levels      AL




                  AL


GRI Application Levels




© 2000-2011 GRI          Version 3.1      Version 3.1   1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
GRI Application Levels          AL


GRI Application Levels
Brief overview                                                 Value of the Levels
To indicate that a report is GRI-based, report makers          The Levels aim to provide:
should declare the level to which they have applied the
GRI Reporting Framework via the “Application Levels”           •	   Report readers with a measure of the extent to
system.                                                             which the GRI Guidelines and other Reporting
                                                                    Framework elements have been applied in the
To meet the needs of beginners, advanced reporters,                 preparation of a report.
and those somewhere in between, there are three levels
in the system. They are titled C, B, and A. The reporting      •	   Report makers with a vision or path for
criteria at each level reflect a measure of the extent of           incrementally expanding application of the GRI
application or coverage of the GRI Reporting Framework.             Reporting Framework over time.
A “plus” (+) is available at each level (ex., C+, B+, A+) if
external assurance was utilized for the report.                Declaring an Application Level clearly communicates
                                                               which elements of the GRI Reporting Framework have
                                                               been applied in the preparation of a report.
How the system works
A report maker self-declares a Level based on its own          •	   Incentives for beginners: The Levels provide a
assessment of its report content against the criteria in            starting point for first-time report makers, and
the GRI Application Levels (see overleaf ).                         also reinforce the importance and value of an
                                                                    incremental approach to reporting which expands
In addition to the self-declaration, reporting                      over time.
organizations can choose one or both of the following
options:                                                       •	   Recognizing advanced reporters: A growing
                                                                    number of organizations have developed
•	    Have a third party offer an opinion on the self-              sophisticated reporting systems based on the
      declaration                                                   GRI Framework, that include assurance, and are
                                                                    looking to communicate this to readers in a quick
•	    Request that the GRI check the self-declaration.              and easy-to-understand way.




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   1
AL   GRI Application Levels



            Application Level Criteria
            Reports intended to qualify for level C, C+, B, B+, A or A+                                                                       GRI recommends reporting organizations include the
            must contain each of the criteria that are presented in                                                                           Application Level table in their report as it illustrates the
            the column for the relevant Level.                                                                                                value and requirements of the system to report readers.

                                    APPENDIX A – FINAL VERSION GRI APPLICATION LEVELS APPROVED BY THE GRI BOARD OF DIRECTORS JULY 2006

                                                    Report
                                          Application Level                                      C                C+                                                   B                                B+                                          A                       A+
                                                                          Report on:                                                          Report on all criteria listed for                                                     Same as requirement for Level B
                                                                          1.1                                                                 Level C plus:
                                                        Profile
                                                                 OUTPUT




                                                                          2.1 - 2.10                                                          1.2
                                                   Disclosures            3.1 - 3.8, 3.10 - 3.12                                              3.9, 3.13
                                                                          4.1 - 4.4 , 4.14 - 4.15                                             4.5 - 4.13, 4.16 - 4.17


                                                                                                                  Report Externally Assured




                                                                                                                                                                                                        Report Externally Assured




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Report Externally Assured
             Standard Disclosures




                                                                          N o t R e q u i re d                                                M a n a g e m e n t A p p ro a c h D i s c l o s u re s                               Management Approach disclosed for
                                                                                                                                              for each Indicator Category                                                           each Indicator Category
                                                Disclosures on
                                                                 OUTPUT




                                                 Management
                                                     Approach


                                                                          Report fully on a minimum of any 10                                 Report fully on a minimum of any 20                                                   Respond on each core and Sector
                                                 Performance              Performance Indicators, including                                   Performance Indicators, at least                                                      Supplement* indicator with due
                                                  Indicators             at least one from each of: social,                                  one from each of: economic,                                                           regard to the materiality Principle
                                                                 OUTPUT




                                                                          economic, and environment.**                                        environment, human rights, labor,                                                     by either: a) reporting on the
                                           Sector Supplement                                                                                  society, product responsibility.***                                                   indicator or b) explaining the reason
                                       Performance Indicators                                                                                                                                                                       for its omission.


                                                                          * Sector supplement in final version
                                                                          ** Performance Indicators may be selected from any finalized Sector Supplement, but 7 of the 10 must be from the original GRI Guidelines
                                                                          *** Performance Indicators may be selected from any finalized Sector Supplement, but 14 of the 20 must be from the original GRI Guidelines




            Declaring an Application Level

            A GRI Application Level declaration should be included                                                                            The GRI Application Level Check Statement serves as the
            in the report. It needs to be indicated who has made this                                                                         formal confirmation of the Application Level Check.
            assessment.                                                                                                                       GRI recommends reporting organizations publish this
                                                                                                                                              Statement near the GRI Content Index.
            Reporting organizations may exercise their option
            to seek opinions from a third party or request a GRI                                                                              GRI will only recognize reports on its website as GRI-
            Application Level Check to confirm their self-declaration.                                                                        based if they contain, at minimum, a GRI Content Index.

            Both self-declarations and third party statements should                                                                          The GRI Content Index lists every Guidelines disclosure
            be indicated in the report by including appropriate text.                                                                         addressed in a report. The Index complements, and
            More information on ‘Options for Declaration’ can be                                                                              should correspond to, an Application Level declaration.
            found at www.globalreporting.org.                                                                                                 It communicates which GRI disclosures have been
                                                                                                                                              reported, and the reason why certain disclosures have
            Having successfully completed a GRI Application Level                                                                             not been reported. The Index is also the gateway for
            Check, reporting organizations should include the                                                                                 finding all reported sustainability information. It should
            customized GRI Application Level Check Statement in                                                                               be able to easily have clear and direct referencing, and
            their report, which incorporates the special GRI-Checked                                                                          if used online, can be an interactive navigation tool. By
            icon.                                                                                                                             using the Index, report users should be able to easily
                                                                                                                                              find specific data.




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
GRI Application Levels            AL


Application Level check methodology                        Application Levels and assurance
The most important aspect of the GRI Application           GRI recommends the use of external assurance.
Level Check revolves around the GRI Content Index.
This Index is the basis for determining whether or not     For each of the Application Levels, a “+” can be added
an organization has reported on the required set and       to the Level when a reporting organization has had its
number of standard disclosures (Profile Disclosures,       reporting externally assured. GRI has identified six key
Disclosures on Management Approach, Performance            qualities for external assurance of reports. The external
Indicators) for a particular Application Level.            assurance:

When GRI finds that the Index does not meet the            •	    should be conducted by groups or individuals
requirements for the Application Level declared by the           external to the organization who are demonstrably
organization, a set of action points will be provided to         competent in both the subject matter and
the reporting organization in order to correct this.             assurance practices;

A GRI Content Index template (Excel file) can be           •	    is implemented in a manner that is systematic,
downloaded from GRI’s website, which a reporting                 documented, evidence-based, and is characterized
organization is required to complete for the GRI                 by defined procedures;
Application Level Check and can also be included in its
report.                                                    •	    assesses whether the report provides a reasonable
                                                                 and balanced presentation of performance, taking
As a secondary step, GRI takes a sample of the standard          into consideration the veracity of the data in a
disclosures and determines whether the reporting                 report as well as the overall selection of content;
claims made in the Index can be substantiated. For this
purpose, GRI checks the text to see if:                    •	    utilizes groups or individuals to conduct the
                                                                 assurance who are not unduly limited by
•	   A quantitative standard disclosure has been                 their relationship with the organization or its
     answered with a quantitative response in-line with          stakeholders to reach and publish an independent
     the disclosure.                                             and impartial conclusion on the report;

•	   A qualitative standard disclosure has been            •	    assesses the extent to which the report preparer
     answered with a qualitative response in-line with           has applied the GRI Reporting Framework
     the disclosure.                                             (including the Reporting Principles) in the course
                                                                 of reaching its conclusions; and

                                                           •	    results in an opinion or set of conclusions that is
                                                                 publicly available in written form, and a statement
                                                                 from the assurance provider on their relationship
                                                                 to the report preparer.

                                                           If GRI is requested to check a “plus” (+) level report it
                                                           will check for the presence of a statement from the
                                                           assurance provider but will not conduct reviews to
                                                           determine whether external assurance has met the
                                                           above-listed criteria.

                                                           The Application Levels are intended to demonstrate a
                                                           pathway for incrementally expanding approaches to
                                                           reporting using the GRI Reporting Framework. They are
                                                           in no way intended as substitutes for or equivalents to
                                                           external assurance.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   3
Indicator Protocols Set: EC     IP




                  IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Economic (EC)




© 2000-2011 GRI            Version 3.1      Version 3.1   1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: EC     IP


Economic
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Economic Performance

         EC1 	  irect economic value generated and
               D
               distributed, including revenues, operating
               costs, employee compensation, donations
               and other community investments, retained
Co r e




               earnings, and payments to capital providers
               and governments.

         EC2 	 Financial implications and other risks and
Co r e




               opportunities for the organization’s activities
               due to climate change.

         EC3 	 Coverage of the organization’s defined benefit
Co r e




               plan obligations.


         EC4 	 Significant financial assistance received from
Co r e




               government.

Aspect: Market Presence

         EC5	 Range of ratios of standard entry level wage
              by gender compared to local minimum wage
Add




              at significant locations of operation.

         EC6 	 Policy, practices, and proportion of spending
Co r e




               on locally-based suppliers at significant
               locations of operation.

         EC7 	 Procedures for local hiring and proportion of
Co r e




               senior management hired from the local
               community at significant locations of operation.

Aspect: Indirect Economic Impacts

         EC8 	 Development and impact of infrastructure
               investments and services provided primarily for
Co r e




               public benefit through commercial, in-kind, or
               pro bono engagement.

         EC9 	 Understanding and describing significant
               indirect economic impacts, including the
Add




               extent of impacts.




                                                                                    Version 3.1   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            Relevance                                                    The Economic Indicators are also closely related to
                                                                         Indicators in other Protocols, including:
            Performance data generated in response to the
            Indicators in this section are expected to illustrate:
                                                                         • 
                                                                           	   EC1-2.1c, EC5, and LA14 regarding wages;

            •	    T
                   he flow of capital amongst different stakeholders;
                                                                         • 
                                                                           	   EC1-2.1c, EC3, and LA3 regarding employee
                  and
                                                                               benefits;

            •	    T
                   he major economic impacts of the organization
                                                                           	
                                                                         •    EC1-2.1f, EC6, EC8, and SO1 regarding interactions
                  throughout society.
                                                                               with local communities;

            An organization’s economic performance is fundamental
                                                                         • 
                                                                           	   EC2 (climate change risk) and EN3 (direct energy
            to understanding the organization and its basis for
                                                                               consumption); and
            sustainability. However, this information is already well
            reported in many countries in annual financial accounts
                                                                           	
                                                                         •    EC10 (indirect economic impacts) and SO1 (socio-
            and reports. Financial statements provide information
                                                                               economic impacts on communities).
            about the financial position, performance, and changes
            in the financial position of an entity. They also indicate
            the results achieved in managing the financial capital       Definitions
            provided to the organization.
                                                                         Significant locations of operation
            What is reported less frequently, but often desired by       Locations where single-market revenues, costs, stake-
            readers of sustainability reports, is the organization’s     holder payments, production, or employee numbers
            contribution to the sustainability of the economic           represent a significant share of the organization’s global
            systems in which the organization operates. An               total, and are sufficient to be particularly important to
            organization may be financially viable, but this may         decision-making by the organization or its stakeholders.
            have been achieved by creating significant externalities     Combined, these locations would likely represent the
            that impact other stakeholders. Economic Performance         majority of the above figures. Reporting organizations
            Indicators are intended to measure the economic              should identify and explain the specific criteria used to
            outcomes of an organization’s activities and the effect of   determine what is significant. Reporting organizations
            these outcomes on a broad range of stakeholders.             should use International Accounting Standards 14 (IAS14)
                                                                         as a reference in defining significant locations of operation.
            The Indicators in this section are divided into three
            categories:                                                  General References

            1.  conomic Performance. This category of Indicators
               E                                                         • 
                                                                           	   T
                                                                                he International Accounting Standards Board
               addresses the direct economic impacts of the                    (IASB) website (www.iasb.org) provides information
               organization’s activities and the economic value                about relevant International Financial Reporting
               added by these activities.                                      Standards (IFRS).

            2.  arket Presence. These Indicators provide
               M                                                         •	    I
                                                                                n preparing responses to the Economic Indicators,
               information about interactions in specific markets.             data should be compiled from figures in the
                                                                               organization’s audited financial accounts or
            3.  ndirect Economic Impacts. These Indicators measure
               I                                                               its internally audited management accounts,
               the economic impacts created as a result of the                 wherever possible. In all cases, the data should be
               organization’s economic activities and transactions.            compiled using either:

            There are several linkages between different Economic        • 
                                                                           	   T
                                                                                he relevant International Financial Reporting
            Indicators. Elements of the value-added table in EC1 are           Standards (IFRS) and Interpretations of Standards,
            related to other Economic Indicators, and there are also           published by the International Accounting
            connections between wages and benefits (EC1-2.1c and               Standards Board (IASB) (some Indicator Protocols
            EC5), transactions with governments (EC1-2.1e and EC4),            reference specific International Accounting
            and community investments (EC1-2.1f and EC8).                      Standards, which should be consulted); or




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC     IP


•	          ational or regional standards recognized
           N
           inter-nationally for the purpose of financial
           reporting.

The reporting organization should clearly indicate which
standards were applied and provide clear references to
the relevant sources.

Segmental reporting
Reporting organizations should use International
Accounting Standards 14 (IAS14) as a reference in
defining ‘local’, as required by Indicators EC1, EC5, EC6,
and EC7.




                                                                               Version 3.1   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            EC1 Direct economic value generated                                     organization’s global operations as included
                                                                                    in the table below. Data can also be presented
            and distributed, including revenues,                                    on a cash basis where this can be justified and
            operating costs, employee compensation,                                 disclosed in a table that includes the basic
                                                                                    components as listed below.
            donations and other community invest-
            ments, retained earnings, and payments                         	    To better assess local economic impacts, EVGD
                                                                                should be presented separately at country,
            to capital providers and governments.                               regional, or market levels, where significant.
                                                                                Reporting organizations should identify and
            1. Relevance
                                                                                explain their criteria for defining significance.
            Data on the creation and distribution of economic value
            provide a basic indication of how the organization has         2.2	 Guidance on EVGD Table Line Entries
            created wealth for stakeholders. Several components of
            the Economic Value Generated and Distributed (EVGD)                a) Revenues:
            table also provide an economic profile of the reporting
                                                                                    •       et sales equal gross sales from products
                                                                                            N
            organization, which may be useful for normalizing
                                                                                            and services minus returns, discounts, and
            other performance figures. If presented in country-level
                                                                                            allowances.
            detail, EVGD can provide a useful picture of the direct
            monetary value added to local economies.
                                                                                    •       evenue from financial investments
                                                                                            R
                                                                                            includes cash received as interest
            2. Compilation
                                                                                            on financial loans, as dividends from
            2.1	Presentation:                                                               shareholdings, as royalties, and as direct
                                                                                            income generated from assets (e.g.,
                  • 	  he EVGD data should be compiled, where
                      T                                                                     property rental).
                      possible, from data in the organization’s audited
                      financial or profit and loss (PL) statement, or              •       evenues from sale of assets include
                                                                                             R
                      its internally audited management accounts. It                         physical assets (property, infrastructure,
                      is also recommended that the economic value                            equipment) and intangibles (e.g.,
                      data be presented on an accruals basis in a table                      intellectual property rights, designs, and
                      that includes the basic components for the                             brand names).




                       Component                                           Comment
                       Direct economic value generated
                       a) Revenues                                         Net sales plus revenues from financial investments and
                                                                           sales of assets
                       Economic value distributed
                       b) Operating costs                                  Payments to suppliers, non-strategic investments,
                                                                           royalties, and facilitation payments
                       c) Employee wages and benefits                      Total monetary outflows for employees (current
                                                                           payments, not future commitments)
                       d) Payments to providers of capital                 All financial payments made to the providers of the
                                                                           organization’s capital.
                       e)  ayments to government (by country – see note
                          P                                                Gross taxes
                          below)
                       f ) Community investments                           Voluntary contributions and investment of funds in the
                                                                           broader community (includes donations)
                       Economic value retained (calculated as Economic     Investments, equity release, etc.
                       value generated less Economic value distributed)




4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC              IP


b)   Operating costs:                                               f ) 	 Community investments:

    •    ash payments made outside the reporting
         C                                                              •    oluntary donations and investment of funds
                                                                             V
         organization for materials, product                                 in the broader community where the target
         components, facilities, and services                                beneficiaries are external to the company.
         purchased. This includes property rental,                           These include contributions to charities,
         license fees, facilitation payments (since                          NGOs and research institutes (unrelated
         these have a clear commercial objective),                           to the company’s commercial RD), funds
         royalties, payments for contract workers,                           to support community infrastructure (e.g.,
         employee training costs (where outside trainers                     recreational facilities) and direct costs of social
         are used), employee protective clothing, etc.                       programs (including arts and educational
                                                                             events). The amount included should account
c) 	 Employee wages and benefits:                                            for actual expenditures in the reporting
                                                                             period, not commitments.
    •    otal payroll means employee salaries,
        T
        including amounts paid to government                        	   •    or infrastructure investments, the calculation
                                                                             F
        institutions (employee taxes, levies,                                of the total investment should include costs
        and unemployment funds) on behalf of                                 of goods and labor in addition to capital costs.
        employees. Non-employees working in an                               For support of ongoing facilities or programs
        operational role should normally not be                              (e.g., an organization funds the daily
        included here, but rather under Operating                            operations of a public facility), the reported
        Costs as a service purchased.                                        investment should include operating costs.

	   •    otal benefits include regular contributions
        T                                                           	   •    his excludes legal and commercial activities
                                                                            T
        (e.g., to pensions, insurance, company vehicles,                    or where the purpose of the investment is
        and private health), as well as other employee                      exclusively commercial. Donations to political
        support such as housing, interest-free loans,                       parties are included but are also addressed
        public transport assistance, educational grants,                    separately in more detail in SO6.
        and redundancy payments. They do not
        include training, costs of protective equipment,            	   •    ny infrastructure investment that is driven
                                                                            A
        or other cost items directly related to the                         primarily by core business needs (e.g., building
        employee’s job function.                                            a road to a mine or factory) or to facilitate the
                                                                            business operations of the organization should
d) 	 Payments to providers of funds:                                        not be included. The calculation of investment
                                                                            may include infrastructure built outside the
    •   Dividends to all shareholders;                                     main business activities of the reporting
                                                                            organization, such as a school or hospital for
	   •   nterest payments made to providers of loans.
         I                                                                  employees and their families.

	   •   his includes interest on all forms of debt and
       T                                                     3. Definitions
       borrowings (not only long-term debt) and also
                                                             None
       arrears of dividends due to preferred shareholders.

                                                             4. Documentation
e)	 Payments to government:
                                                             Finance, treasury, or accounting departments should
    •    ll company taxes (corporate, income,
         A                                                   have the information required by this Indicator.
         property, etc.) and related penalties paid at
         the international, national, and local levels.      5. References
         This figure should not include deferred
                                                             •	     International Accounting Standard (IAS) 12 on
         taxes because they may not be paid. For
                                                                    Income Taxes, IAS 14 on segment Reporting, IAS
         organizations operating in more than one
                                                                    18 on Revenues, and IAS 19 on Employee Benefits
         country, report taxes paid by country. The
                                                                    should be consulted.
         organization should report which definition
         of segmentation has been used.



                                                                                                                             Version 3.1   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            EC2 Financial implications and                                         •	   P
                                                                                         otential competitive advantages created
                                                                                        for the organization by regulatory or other
            other risks and opportunities for the                                       technology changes linked to climate change.
            organization’s activities due to climate
                                                                             2.3 	 Report whether management has quantitatively
            change.                                                                estimated the financial implications (e.g., cost of
            1. Relevance                                                           insurance and carbon credits) of climate change
                                                                                   for the organization. Where possible, quantification
            Climate change presents risks and opportunities to
                                                                                   would be beneficial. If quantified, disclose financial
            organizations, their investors, and their stakeholders.
                                                                                   implications and the tools used to quantify.
            Organizations may face physical risks due to changes
            in the climate system and weather patterns. These risks
                                                                             3. Definitions
            may include the impact of increased storms; changes in
            sea level, ambient temperature, and water availability;          None.
            impacts on the workforce such as health effects (e.g.,
            heat-related illness or disease); or the need to relocate        4. Documentation
            operations.
                                                                             Records or minutes of the organization’s governance
                                                                             bodies, including environmental committees may have
            As governments move to regulate activities that
                                                                             the information required by this Indicator.
            contribute to climate change, organizations that are
            directly or indirectly responsible for emissions face
                                                                             5. References
            regulatory risk through increased costs or other factors
            impacting competitiveness. Limits on greenhouse gas              None.
            emissions can also create opportunities for organizations
            as new technologies and markets are created. This is
            especially the case for organizations that can use or
            produce energy and energy products more efficiently.

            EN16 allows for disclosure on total amount of greenhouse
            gas emissions, while EN18 discloses total reductions
            achieved and initiatives for reducing the amount of
            emissions the reporting organization produces.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report whether the organization’s senior
                 governance body considered climate change
                 and the risks and opportunities it presents to the
                 organization.

            2.2	 Report risks and/or opportunities posed by climate
                 change that have potential financial implications
                 for the organization, including:

                  •	   R
                        isks due to physical changes associated with
                       climate change (e.g., impacts of modified
                       weather patterns and heat-related illness);

                  •	   R
                        egulatory risks (e.g., the cost of activities and
                       systems to comply with new regulations);

                  •	   O
                        pportunities to provide new technologies,
                       products, or services to address challenges
                       related to climate change; and




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC            IP


EC3 Coverage of the organization’s                          2.5  here a fund set up to pay the plan’s pension
                                                                W
                                                                liabilities is not fully covered, explain the strategy, if
defined benefit plan obligations.                               any, adopted by the employer to work towards full
1. Relevance                                                    coverage, and the timescale, if any, by which the
                                                                employer hopes to achieve full coverage.
When an organization provides a retirement plan for its
workforce, these benefits could become commitments
                                                            2.6 	 Report the percentage of salary contributed by
that members of the schemes plan on for their long-
                                                                  employee or employer.
term economic well-being. Defined benefits plans have
potential implications for employers in terms of the
                                                            2.7 Report the level of participation in retirement plans
obligations that need to be met. Other types of plans,
                                                                 (e.g., participation in mandatory or voluntary
like defined contributions, do not guarantee access to
                                                                 schemes, regional or country-based schemes, or
a retirement plan or the quality of benefits. The type of
                                                                 those with financial impact).
plan chosen has implications for both employees and
employers. Conversely, a properly funded pension plan
                                                            2.8   Different jurisdictions (e.g., countries) have
can help to attract and maintain a stable workforce and
                                                                   varying interpretations and guidance regarding
support long-term financial and strategic planning on
                                                                   calculations used to determine plan coverage.
the part of the employer.
                                                                   Calculate in accordance with the regulations and
                                                                   methods for relevant jurisdictions, and report
2. Compilation
                                                                   aggregated totals. Consolidation techniques
2.1	 Identify whether the structure of retirement plans            should be the same as those applied in preparing
     offered to employees are based on:                            the financial accounts of the organization.
                                                                   Note that benefit pension plans are part of the
     •	   Defined benefit plans; or                                International Accounting Standard (IAS) 19,
                                                                   however, IAS 19 covers more issues.
     •	   Other types of benefits.
                                                            3. Definitions
2.2 	 For defined benefit plans, identify whether the
      employer’s obligations to pay pensions under the      Full coverage
      plan are to be met directly by the organization’s
                                                            Plan assets that meet or exceed plan obligations.
      general resources or through a fund held and
      maintained separately from the resources of the       4. Documentation
      organization.
                                                            Finance or accounting departments should have the
                                                            information required by this Indicator.
2.3	 Where the plan’s liabilities are met by the
     organization’s general resources, report the
                                                            5. References
     estimated value of those liabilities.
                                                            •	   I
                                                                  nternational Accounting Standard (IAS) 19 on
2.4	 Where a separate fund exists to pay the plan’s              Employee Benefits .
     pension liabilities, report:

     •	   T
           he extent to which the scheme’s liabilities
          are estimated to be covered by the assets that
          have been set aside to meet them;

     •	   T
           he basis on which that estimate has been
          arrived at; and

     •	   When that estimate was made.   




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            EC4 Significant financial assistance                            4. Documentation
            received from government.                                       Financial accountants include items of IAS 20 individually
                                                                            but these are not consolidated, as this Indicator requires.
            1. Relevance
            This Indicator provides a measure of host governments’          5. References
            contributions to the reporting organization. The
                                                                            •    	   I
                                                                                      nternational Accounting Standard (IAS) 20 on
            significant financial assistance received from a
                                                                                     Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure
            government, in comparison with taxes paid, can
                                                                                     of Government Assistance.
            be useful for developing a balanced picture of the
            transactions between the reporting organization and
            government.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report significant estimated aggregate financial
                 value on an accruals basis for the following:

                  •	   Tax relief/credits;

                  •	   Subsidies;

                  •	   I
                        nvestment grants, research and development
                       grants, and other relevant types of grants;

                  •	   Awards;

                  •	   Royalty holidays;

                  •	   F
                        inancial assistance from Export Credit
                       Agencies (ECAs);

                  •	   Financial incentives; and

                  •	   O
                        ther financial benefits received or receivable
                       from any government for any operation.

            2.2 	 Report whether the government is present in the
                  shareholding structure.

            3. Definitions

            Significant financial assistance

            Significant direct or indirect financial benefits that do not
            represent a transaction of goods and services, but which
            are an incentive or compensation for actions taken, the
            cost of an asset, or expenses incurred. The provider of
            financial assistance does not expect a direct financial
            return from the assistance offered.




8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC          IP


EC5 Range of ratios of standard entry
                                                               3. Definitions
level wage by gender compared to local                         Local minimum wage
minimum wage at significant locations of                       Minimum wage refers to compensation per hour or other
operation.                                                     unit of time for employment allowed under law. Since
                                                               some countries have numerous minimum wages (e.g.,
1. Relevance
                                                               by state/province or by employment category), identify
Economic well-being is one of the ways in which an             which minimum wage is being used.
organization invests in its employees. This Indicator
                                                               Entry level wage
helps demonstrate how an organization contributes to
the economic well-being of employees in significant            Entry level wage should be defined by the full-time
locations of operation. The Indicator also provides an         wage offered to an employee in the lowest employment
indication of the competitiveness of the organization’s        category. Intern or apprentice wages should not be
wages, and information relevant for assessing the effect       considered.
of wages on the local labor market. Offering wages
                                                               4. Documentation
above the minimum can be one factor in building
strong community relations, employee loyalty, and              Potential sources of information include the payroll
strengthening an organization’s social license to operate.     department of the organization or finance, treasury,
This Indicator is most relevant for organizations in which     or accounting departments. Pertinent legislation in
a substantial portion of their workforce is compensated        each country/region of operation may also provide
in a manner or scale that is closely linked to laws or         information for this Indicator.
regulations on minimum wage.
                                                               5. References
2. Compilation
                                                               •	   Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of
2.1	 Identify whether a significant proportion of the               Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979.
     workforce is compensated based on wages subject
     to minimum wage rules.

2.2	 In percentage terms, compare local minimum
     wage to the reporting organization’s entry
     level wage by gender at significant locations of
     operation.

2.3	 Identify the variation in the ratios across significant
     locations of operation.

2.4	 Report the distribution of the ratio of the entry
     level wage by gender to the minimum wage.

2.5	 Report the definition used for ‘significant locations’.

2.6	 For organizations that only offer salaried
     employment, the salary should be converted into
     an hourly estimate.

2.7	 Indicate whether a local minimum wage is absent
     or variable in significant locations of operation,
     by gender. In circumstances in which different
     minimums could be used as a reference, explain
     which minimum wage is being used.




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            EC6 Policy, practices, and proportion of                    3. Definitions
            spending on locally-based suppliers at                      Locally-based suppliers

            significant locations of operation.                         Providers of materials, products, and services that are
                                                                        based in the same geographic market as the reporting
            1. Relevance
                                                                        organization (i.e., no trans-national payments to the
            The influence an organization can have on a local           supplier are made). The geographic definition of ‘local’
            economy goes beyond direct jobs and payment of              may vary because, in some circumstances, cities, regions
            wages and taxes. By supporting local business in the        within a country, and even small countries could be
            supply chain, an organization can indirectly attract        reasonably viewed as ‘local’.
            additional investment to the local economy.
                                                                        4. Documentation
            Reporting organizations can gain or retain their ‘social
                                                                        None.
            license to operate’ in part by demonstrating positive
            local economic impacts. Local sourcing can be a strategy
                                                                        5. References
            to help ensure supply, support a stable local economy,
            and can prove to be more efficient for remote settings.     None.
            The proportion of local spending can also be an
            important factor in contributing to the local economy
            and maintaining community relations. However, the
            overall impact of local sourcing will also depend on the
            sustainability of the supplier over the long term.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report the organization’s geographic definition of
                 ‘local’.

            2.2	    For the following calculations, note that
                   percentages should be based on invoices or
                   commitments made during the reporting period
                   (i.e., accruals accounting).

            2.3	    Report whether the organization has a policy or
                   common practices for preferring locally based
                   suppliers either organization-wide or for specific
                   locations.

            2.4	    If so, state the percentage of the procurement
                   budget used for significant locations of operation
                   that is spent on suppliers local to that operation
                   (e.g., % of goods and supplies purchased locally).
                   Local purchases can be made either from a budget
                   managed at the location of operation or at the
                   organization’s headquarters.

            2.5	    Indicate the factors that influence supplier
                   selection (e.g., costs, environmental and social
                   performance) in addition to their geographic
                   location.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC     IP


EC7 Procedures for local hiring and
proportion of senior management hired
from the local community at significant
locations of operation.
1. Relevance
Selection of staff and senior management is based
on a range of considerations. Ensuring that senior
management is populated with local residents can
benefit the local community and the organization’s
ability to understand local needs. Diversity within a
management team and the inclusion of members from
the local area can enhance human capital, the economic
benefit to the local community, and the organization’s
ability to understand local needs.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Report whether the organization has a global
     policy or common practices for granting
     preference to local residents when hiring in
     significant locations of operation.

2.2	 If so, report the proportion of senior management
     in significant locations of operation from the local
     community. Use data on full-time employees to
     calculate this percentage.

2.3	 Report the definition of ‘senior management’ used.

3. Definitions
Local
Local refers to individuals either born in or who have the
legal right to reside indefinitely (e.g., naturalized citizens
or permanent visa holders) in the same geographic
market as the operation. Reporting organizations can
choose their own definition of ‘local’ because, in some
cases, cities, regions, and even small countries could
be reasonably viewed as local. However, the definition
should be clearly disclosed.

4. Documentation
Personnel or human resources departments should have
the information required by this Indicator.

5. References
None.




                                                                                   Version 3.1   11
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EC



            EC8 Development and impact of infra-
            structure investments and services
            provided primarily for public benefit
            through commercial, in-kind, or pro bono
            engagement.
            1. Relevance
            As well as generating and distributing economic value, an
            organization can affect an economy through its investments
            in infrastructure. The impacts of infrastructure investment
            can extend beyond the scope of the organization’s own
            business operations and over a longer timescale. This might
            include transport links, utilities, community social facilities,
            sports centers, health and welfare centers, etc. Along with
            investment in its own operations, this is one measure of an
            organization’s capital contribution to the economy.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Explain the extent of development (e.g., size, cost,
                 duration) of significant investments and support,
                 and the current or expected impacts (positive or
                 negative) on communities and local economies.
                 Indicate whether these investments and services
                 are commercial, in-kind, or pro bono engagement.

            2.2	 Report whether the organization conducted
                 a community needs assessment to determine
                 infrastructure and other services needed. If so,
                 briefly explain the results of the assessment.

            3. Definitions

            Infrastructure

            Facilities (e.g., water supply facility, road, school, or hospital)
            built primarily to provide a public service or good
            rather than a commercial purpose, and from which the
            organization does not seek to gain direct economic benefit.

            Services supported

            Providing a public benefit either through direct payment
            of operating costs or through staffing the facility/service
            with the reporting organization’s own employees. Public
            benefit can also include public services.

            4. Documentation
            Finance, treasury, or accounting departments should
            have the information required by this Indicator.

            5. References
            None.




12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EC            IP


EC9 Understanding and describing                                          pharmaceuticals contributes to a healthier
                                                                          population that can participate more fully in
significant indirect economic impacts,                                    the economy; pricing structures that exceed the
including the extent of impacts.                                          economic capacity of those on low incomes);

1. Relevance
                                                                     •	   E
                                                                           nhancing skills and knowledge amongst a
Indirect economic impacts are an important part of                        professional community or in a geographical
an organization’s economic influence in the context of                    region (e.g., need for a supplier base creates
sustainable development. Whereas direct economic impacts                  a magnet for companies with skilled workers,
and market influence tend to focus on the immediate                       which in turn engenders new learning institutes);
consequences of monetary flows to stakeholders, indirect
economic impacts include the additional impacts generated            •	   J
                                                                           obs supported in the supply chain or distribution
as money circulates through the economy.                                  chain (e.g., assessing the impacts of growth or
                                                                          contraction of the organization on its suppliers)
Direct economic impacts are often measured as the value
of transactions between the reporting organization and               •	   S
                                                                           timulating, enabling, or limiting foreign direct
its stakeholders, while indirect economic impacts are the                 investment (e.g., expansion or closure of an infra-
results - sometimes non-monetary - of the transaction.                    structure service in a developing country can lead
Indirect impacts are an important aspect of an organization’s             to increased or reduced foreign direct investment);
role as a participant or agent in socio-economic change,
particularly in developing economies. Indirect impacts are           •	   E
                                                                           conomic impact of change in location of 	
particularly important to assess and report in relation to                operations or activities (e.g., outsourcing of
local communities and regional economies.                                 jobs to an overseas location); and

For management purposes, indirect economic impacts                   •	   E
                                                                           conomic impact of the use of products and
are an important indication of where risks to reputation                  services (e.g., linkage between economic
may develop, or where opportunities may emerge to                         growth patterns and use of particular products
expand market access or a social license to operate.                      and services).

2. Compilation                                                  2.3	 Report the significance of the impacts in the
                                                                     context of external benchmarks and stakeholder
2.1	 Explain work undertaken to understand the
                                                                     priorities, such as national and international
     indirect economic impacts the organization has at
                                                                     standards, protocols, and policy agendas
     the national, regional, or local level.

                                                                3. Definitions
2.2 	 Report examples of indirect economic impacts,
      both positive and negative, such as:                      Indirect economic impact

                                                                An additional consequence of the direct impact of
      •	   C
            hanging the productivity of organizations,
                                                                financial transactions and the flow of money between an
           sectors, or the whole economy (e.g., through
                                                                organization and its stakeholders.
           greater adoption or distribution of information
           technology);
                                                                Economic impact
      •	   E
            conomic development in areas of high               A change in the productive potential of the economy that
           poverty (e.g., number of dependents                  can have an influence on a community’s or stakeholder’s
           supported through income from one job);              well-being and longer-term prospects for development.

      •	   E
            conomic impact of improving or deteriorating       4. Documentation
           social or environmental conditions (e.g.,
                                                                None.
           changing job market in an area converted from
           small family farms to large plantations or the
                                                                5. References
           economic impacts of pollution);
                                                                None.
      •	   A
            vailability of products and services for those
           on low incomes (e.g., preferential pricing of



                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   13
Indicator Protocols Set: EN      IP




                  IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Environment (EN)




© 2000-2011 GRI            Version 3.1       Version 3.1   1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


Environment
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Materials                                               Aspect: Biodiversity

         EN1 	 Materials used by weight or volume.                       EN11 	Location and size of land owned, leased,
Co r e




                                                                               managed in, or adjacent to, protected areas




                                                                Co r e
                                                                               and areas of high biodiversity value outside
         EN2 	 Percentage of materials used that are recycled                  protected areas.
Co r e




               input materials.
                                                                         EN12 	Description of significant impacts of activities,
Aspect: Energy                                                                 products, and services on biodiversity in




                                                                Co r e
                                                                               protected areas and areas of high biodiversity
         EN3 	 Direct energy consumption by primary energy
Co r e




                                                                               value outside protected areas.
               source.

                                                                         EN13 	Habitats protected or restored.
         EN4 	 Indirect energy consumption by primary
                                                                Add
Co r e




               source.

                                                                         EN14 	Strategies, current actions, and future plans for
         EN5	 Energy saved due to conservation and
                                                                               managing impacts on biodiversity.
Add




                                                                Add




              efficiency improvements.

         EN6 	 Initiatives to provide energy-efficient                   EN15 	Number of IUCN Red List species and national
               or renewable energy-based products                              conservation list species with habitats in areas
               and services, and reductions in energy                          affected by operations, by level of extinction
Add




                                                                Add




               requirements as a result of these initiatives.                  risk.

                                                                Aspect: Emissions, Effluents, and Waste
         EN7 	 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy
Add




               consumption and reductions achieved.                      EN16 	Total direct and indirect greenhouse gas
                                                                               emissions by weight.
                                                                Co r e




Aspect: Water

         EN8 	 Total water withdrawal by source.
                                                                         EN17 	Other relevant indirect greenhouse gas
Co r e




                                                                Co r e




                                                                               emissions by weight.

         EN9 	 Water sources significantly affected by
                                                                         EN18 	Initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas emissions
               withdrawal of water.
Add




                                                                               and reductions achieved.
                                                                Add




         EN10 	Percentage and total volume of water recycled             EN19 	Emissions of ozone-depleting substances by
                                                                Co r e




               and reused.                                                     weight.
Add




                                                                         EN20 	NOx, SOx, and other significant air emissions by
                                                                Co r e




                                                                               type and weight.


                                                                         EN21 	Total water discharge by quality and
                                                                Co r e




                                                                               destination.




                                                                                                                               Version 3.1   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



                     EN22 	Total weight of waste by type and disposal
            Co r e




                           method.


                     EN23 	Total number and volume of significant spills.
            Co r e




                     EN24 Weight of transported, imported, exported, or
                          treated waste deemed hazardous under the
                          terms of the Basel Convention Annex I, II, III,
                          and VIII, and percentage of transported waste
            Add




                          shipped internationally.

                     EN25 	Identity, size, protected status, and
                           biodiversity value of water bodies and related
                           habitats significantly affected by the reporting
            Add




                           organization’s discharges of water and runoff.

            Aspect: Products and Services

                     EN26 	Initiatives to mitigate environmental impacts
            Co r e




                           of products and services, and extent of impact
                           mitigation.

                     EN27 	Percentage of products sold and their
            Co r e




                           packaging materials that are reclaimed by
                           category.

            Aspect: Compliance

                     EN28 	Monetary value of significant fines and total
                           number of non-monetary sanctions for non-
            Co r e




                           compliance with environmental laws and
                           regulations.

            Aspect: Transport

                     EN29 	Significant environmental impacts of
                           transporting products and other goods
                           and materials used for the organization’s
                           operations, and transporting members of the
            Add




                           workforce.

            Aspect: Overall

                     EN30 	Total environmental protection expenditures
                           and investments by type.
            Add




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


Relevance                                                     Measurement of energy consumption is relevant to
                                                              greenhouse gas emissions and climate change. The
The Aspects in the Environment Indicator set are
                                                              burning of fossil fuels to generate energy creates
structured to reflect the inputs, outputs, and modes of
                                                              emissions of carbon dioxide (a greenhouse gas). To meet
impact an organization has on the environment. Energy,
                                                              the aims formulated in the Kyoto Protocol and to reduce
water, and materials represent three standard types of
                                                              the risk of severe climate change, energy demand needs
inputs used by most organizations. These inputs result
                                                              to be lowered. This can be achieved through more
in outputs of environmental significance, which are
                                                              efficient energy use (measured under EN5 and EN6) and
captured under the Aspects of Emissions, Effluents, and
                                                              replacing fossil fuel energy sources with renewable ones
Waste. Biodiversity is also related to the concepts of
                                                              (measured under EN3 and EN4). In addition to lowering
inputs to the extent that it can be viewed as a natural
                                                              the direct consumption of energy, designing energy-
resource. However, biodiversity is also directly impacted
                                                              efficient product and services (EN6) and reducing
by outputs such as pollutants.
                                                              indirect energy consumption (EN7) (e.g., the selection of
                                                              low energy-intensive raw materials or the use of services
The Aspects of Transport and Products and Services
                                                              such as travel) are important strategies.
represent areas in which an organization can further
impact the environment, but often through other parties
                                                              Emissions Aspect
such as customers or suppliers of logistics services.
                                                              The ‘emissions, effluents, and waste’ aspect includes
Compliance and Overall Aspects are specific measures          Indicators that measure standard releases to the
the organization takes to manage environmental                environment considered to be pollutants. These
performance.                                                  Indicators include different types of pollutants (e.g.,
                                                              air emissions, effluents, solid waste) that are typically
The Aspects of Energy, Water, Emissions, and Biodiversity     recognized in regulatory frameworks (EN20-EN23,
each contain several Indicators whose relationships are       EN24). In addition, there are Indicators for two types
explained in more detail below:                               of emissions that are the subject of international
                                                              conventions- greenhouse gases (EN16 and EN17)
Energy Aspect                                                 and ozone depleting substances (EN19). EN16 can be
                                                              calculated using the data reported under EN3 and EN4.
The Energy Indicators cover the five most important
                                                              EN18 addresses the emissions reductions achieved and
areas of organizational energy use, which include both
                                                              initiatives to reduce emissions.
direct and indirect energy. Direct energy use is energy
consumed by the organization and its products and
services. Indirect energy use, on the other hand, is
                                                              Definitions
energy that is consumed by others who are serving the
                                                              Direct energy
organization. The five different areas of energy use are to
be reported as follows:                                       Forms of energy that enter the reporting organization’s
                                                              operational boundaries. It can be consumed either
•  n EN3, the direct energy consumption of the reporting
  I                                                           by the organization within its boundaries, or it can be
  organization is reported, including energy produced         exported to another user. Direct energy can appear
  on-site (e.g., through the burning of gas).                 in either primary (e.g., natural gas for heating) or
                                                              intermediate (e.g., electricity for lighting) forms. It can
•  N4 provides information on energy consumption
  E                                                           be purchased, extracted (e.g., coal, natural gas, oil),
  required to produce energy purchased externally, such       harvested (e.g., biomass energy), collected (e.g., solar,
  as electricity.                                             wind), or brought into the reporting organization’s
                                                              boundaries by other means.
•  N5 asks for energy saved due to conservation and
  E
  efficiency improvements.                                    Greenhouse gas emissions (GHG)
                                                              The six main greenhouse gas emissions are:
•  N6 addresses the development of energy-efficient
  E
  products and services.
                                                              •  arbon dioxide (CO2);
                                                                C
•  inally, EN7 covers the indirect energy consumption of
  F
                                                              •  ethane (CH4);
                                                                M
  the reporting organization’s activities.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            •  itrous oxide (N2O);
              N

            •  ydrofluorocarbons (HFCs- a group of several
              H
              compounds);

            •  erfluorocarbons (PFCs- a group of several
              P
              compounds); and

            •  ulphur hexafluoride (SF6).
              S

            Indirect energy
            Energy produced outside the reporting organization’s
            organizational boundary that is consumed to supply
            energy for the organization’s intermediate energy
            needs (e.g., electricity or heating and cooling). The
            most common example is fuel consumed outside the
            reporting organization’s boundary in order to generate
            electricity to be used inside the organization’s boundary.

            Intermediate energy
            Forms of energy that are produced by converting
            primary energy into other forms. For most
            organizations, electricity will be the only significant
            form of intermediate energy. For a small percentage of
            organizations, other intermediate energy products might
            also be important, such as steam or water provided from
            a district heating plant or chilled water plant, or refined
            fuels such as synthetic fuels, biofuels, etc.

            Primary source
            The initial form of energy consumed to satisfy the
            reporting organization’s energy demand. This energy
            is used either to provide final energy services (e.g.,
            space heating, transport) or to produce intermediate
            forms of energy, such as electricity and heat. Examples
            of primary energy include non-renewable sources
            such as coal, natural gas, oil, and nuclear energy. It also
            includes renewable sources such as biomass, solar, wind,
            geothermal, and hydro energy. Primary energy might be
            consumed on-site (e.g., natural gas to heat the reporting
            organization’s buildings) or off-site (e.g., natural gas
            consumed by the power plants that provide electricity to
            the reporting organization’s facilities).

            Renewable energy
            Renewable energy is derived from natural processes that
            are replenished constantly. This includes electricity and
            heat generated from solar, wind, ocean, hydropower,
            biomass, geothermal resources, biofuels, and hydrogen
            derived from renewable resources.




4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN       IP


EN1 Materials used by weight or volume.                       3. Definitions
1. Relevance                                                  Direct materials

This Indicator describes the reporting organization’s         Materials that are present in a final product.
contribution to the conservation of the global resource
base and efforts to reduce the material intensity and         Non-renewable materials
increase the efficiency of the economy. These are
                                                              Resources that do not renew in short time periods, such
expressed goals of the OECD Council and various
                                                              as minerals, metals, oil, gas, coal, etc.
national sustainability strategies. For internal managers
and others interested in the financial state of the
                                                              4. Documentation
organization, material consumption relates directly to
overall costs of operation. Tracking this consumption         Potential information sources include billing and
internally, either by product or product category,            accounting systems, and the procurement or supply
facilitates the monitoring of material efficiency and cost    management department.
of material flows.
                                                              5. References
2. Compilation
                                                              •	    OECD, Recommendation of the Council on Material
2.1	 Identify total materials used, including materials             Flows and Resource Productivity, 2004.
     purchased from external suppliers and those
     obtained from internal sources (captive production
     and extraction activities). This can include:

      •	   Raw materials (i.e., natural resources used for
           conversion to products or services such as ores,
           minerals, wood, etc.);

      •	   Associated process materials (i.e., materials
           that are needed for the manufacturing process
           but are not part of the final product, such as
           lubricants for manufacturing machinery);

      •	   Semi-manufactured goods or parts, including
           all forms of materials and components other
           than raw materials that are part of the final
           product; and

      •	   Materials for packaging purposes.

2.2	 Identify non-renewable and direct materials used.
     Convert any measurements into estimated weight
     or volume, calculated ‘as is’ rather than by ‘dry
     substance/weight’.

2.3	 Report the total weight or volume of :

      •	   Non-renewable materials used; and

      •	   Direct materials used.




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN2 Percentage of materials used that
            are recycled input materials.
            1. Relevance

            This Indicator seeks to identify the reporting
            organization’s ability to use recycled input materials.
            Using these materials helps to reduce the demand for
            virgin material and contribute to the conservation of the
            global resource base. For internal managers and others
            interested in the financial condition of the reporting
            organization, substituting recycled materials can
            contribute to lowering overall costs of operation.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify the total weight or volume of materials
                 used as reported under EN1.

            2.2	 Identify the total weight or volume of recycled
                 input materials. If estimation is required, state the
                 estimation methods.

            2.3	 Report the percentage of recycled input materials
                 used by applying the following formula:

                 EN2= Total recycled input materials used x100
                             Input matertials used


            3. Definitions

            Recycled input materials

            Materials that replace virgin materials that are purchased
            or obtained from internal or external sources, and that
            are not by-products and non-product outputs (NPO)
            produced by the reporting organization.

            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include billing and
            accounting systems, the procurement or supply
            management department, and internal production and
            waste disposal records.

            5. References
            •	    OECD Working Group on Waste Prevention and
                  Recycling.




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN             IP


EN3 Direct energy consumption by                                      •	   Fuel distilled from crude oil, including
                                                                           gasoline, diesel, liquefied petroleum gas
primary energy source.                                                     (LPG), compressed natural gas (CNG),
1. Relevance                                                               liquefied natural gas (LNG), butane,
                                                                           propane, ethane, etc.
The ability of the reporting organization to use energy
efficiently can be revealed by calculating the amount of
                                                                 •	   Direct renewable energy sources including:
energy it consumes. Energy consumption has a direct
effect on operational costs and exposure to fluctuations
                                                                      •	   Biofuels;
in energy supply and prices. The environmental footprint
of the organization is shaped in part by its choice of
                                                                      •	   Ethanol; and
energy sources. Changes in the balance of these sources
can indicate the organization’s efforts to minimize its
                                                                      •	   Hydrogen.
environmental impacts.

                                                                           Note: Biomass is excluded from direct
Information on the consumption of primary energy
                                                                           renewable energy sources for the purpose of
sources supports an assessment of how the organization
                                                                           reporting to the WRI/WBCSD GHG Protocol.
might be affected by emerging environmental
                                                                           For alignment with the WRI/WBCSD GHG
regulations such as the Kyoto Protocol. The consumption
                                                                           Protocol, direct CO2 emissions from the
of fossil fuels is a major source of greenhouse gas
                                                                           combustion of biomass should be reported
emissions, and energy consumption is directly linked to
                                                                           separately.
the organization’s greenhouse gas emissions.

                                                           2.2	 Direct energy sources produced
Replacing fossil fuel energy sources with renewable
                                                                Identify the amount of primary energy the
ones is essential for combating climate change and
                                                                reporting organization acquires by producing,
other environmental impacts created by the extraction
                                                                extracting, harvesting, collecting, or converting it
and processing of energy. Supporting renewable and
                                                                from other forms of energy into joules or multiples.
efficient energy technology also reduces the reporting
                                                                This can include the same energy sources listed
organization’s current and future dependency on non-
                                                                under 2.1.
renewable energy sources, and its exposure to potential
volatility in prices and supply.
                                                           2.3 	 Direct energy sources sold
                                                                 Identify the amount of primary energy exported
This Indicator measures the reporting organization’s
                                                                 outside the reporting boundary in joules or
consumption of direct primary energy sources. The
                                                                 multiples.
Indicator covers scope 1 of the WRI/WBCSD GHG
Protocol. Indicator EN4 measures the consumption
                                                           2.4 	 Calculate total energy consumption in joules or
of primary energy sources to supply the reporting
                                                                 multiples such as gigajoules (one billion joules or
organization with intermediate energy such as
                                                                 109 joules) using the following equation:
electricity, heating and cooling, etc.

                                                           	     Total direct energy consumption = direct
2. Compilation
                                                                 primary energy purchased + direct primary
2.1	 Direct energy sources purchased                             energy produced- direct primary energy sold
     Identify primary energy sources purchased by the
     reporting organization for its own consumption.       	     Refer to the following table to convert volumes of
     This includes:                                              primary sources to gigajoules:

     •	   Direct non-renewable energy sources
          including:

          •	   Coal;

          •	   Natural gas; and




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



              Coal             GJ      Crude Oil        GJ      Gasoline         GJ      Natural Gas         GJ       Electricity     GJ

              tonne (metric)   26,00   barrel           6,22    US gallon        0,125   therm               0,1055   kilowatt-hour   0,0036

              ton (short)      23,59   tonne (metric)   44,80   tonne (metric)   44,80   1000 cubic feet     1,1046   megawatt-hour   3,6000

              ton (long)       26,42   ton (short)      40,64   Diesel                   1000 cubic meters   39,01    gigawatt-hour   3600,0

                                       ton (long)       45,52   US gallon        0,138   MMBtu               1,055

                                                                tonne (metric)   43,33

                                                                Fuel Oil

                                                                US gallon        0,144

                                                                tonne (metric)   40,19




            2.5 	 Report total direct energy consumption in joules
                  or multiples by renewable primary source.

            2.6 	 Report total direct energy consumption in joules
                  or multiples by non-renewable primary source.

            3. Definitions
            Renewable resources

            Resources capable of being replenished within a short
            time through ecological cycles (as opposed to resources
            such as minerals, metals, oil, gas, coal that do not renew
            in short time periods).

            4. Documentation
            Information can be obtained from invoices, measured (or
            calculated) heat/fuel accounting, estimations, defaults,
            etc. Amounts of joules can be taken directly or converted
            from invoices or delivery notes. Information about
            the combination of primary sources used to generate
            intermediate energy can be obtained from suppliers.

            5. References
            •	       The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative -
                     A corporate accounting and reporting standard
                     (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources
                     Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for
                     Sustainable Development (WBCSD).




8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN            IP


EN4 Indirect energy consumption by                             	      Intermediate energy purchased and consumed
                                                                      from renewable energy sources including:
primary source.
1. Relevance                                                          •	   Solar;
The amount and primary source of energy the reporting
                                                                      •	   Wind;
organization uses indirectly through the purchase of
electricity, heat, or steam, can indicate efforts by the
                                                                      •	   Geothermal;
organization to manage environmental impacts and
reduce its contribution to climate change. The particular
                                                                      •	   Hydro energy;
effect indirect energy usage has on climate change
depends on the type of primary energy used to generate
                                                                      •	   Biomass based intermediate energy; and
intermediate energy.

                                                                      •	   Hydrogen based intermediate energy.
Intermediate energy refers to forms of energy that are
produced by converting primary energy into other
                                                               2.2	 Identify the amount of primary fuels consumed
forms. For most organizations, electricity will be the
                                                                    to produce intermediate energy based on the
only significant form of intermediate energy. For a small
                                                                    total amount of energy purchased from external
percentage of organizations, other intermediate energy
                                                                    suppliers (EN3- Energy Purchased). To estimate the
products might also be important, such as steam or
                                                                    fuels consumed to produce purchased energy, use
water provided from a district heating plant or chilled
                                                                    either:
water plant, or refined fuels such as synthetic fuels,
biofuels, etc.
                                                                      •	   Fuel consumption data acquired from the
                                                                           electricity provider if these data are available;
This Indicator measures the energy required to produce
and deliver purchased electricity and any other
                                                                      •	   Default data for electricity and heat; or
intermediate energy products (such as district heat) that
involve significant energy consumption upstream from
                                                                      •	   Estimations where default figures are not
the organization’s reporting boundary. This information
                                                                           available.
also enables calculations of indirect greenhouse gas
emissions. It covers Scope 2 of the WRI/WBCSD GHG
                                                               2.3	   Using data from 2.1, report:
Protocol.

                                                                      •	   The total amount of indirect energy used by
2. Compilation
                                                                           indirect non-renewable sources and indirect
2.1	 Identify the amount of intermediate energy                            renewable sources in terms of intermediate
     purchased and consumed from sources external to                       energy; and
     the reporting organization in joules or multiples,
     such as gigajoules (one billion joules, or 109 joules).          •	   The corresponding primary energy consumed
     This includes:                                                        in its production.

	     Intermediate energy purchased and consumed                           Note: The sum of primary energy sources
      from non-renewable energy sources as listed                          (expressed in joules) used to generate
      under EN3, including:                                                intermediate energy will, depending on the
                                                                           primary source used, significantly exceed the
      •	   Electricity;                                                    amount of intermediate energy purchased (in
                                                                           joules) due to grid and efficiency losses when
      •	   Heating and Cooling;                                            converting and transporting energy.

      •	   Steam;                                              3. Definitions
                                                               None.
      •	   Nuclear energy; and

      •	   Other forms of imported energy.




                                                                                                                            Version 3.1   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            4. Documentation
            Suppliers of energy and related services are the most
            important informational source for this Indicator. Other
            information can be obtained from invoices, measured (or
            calculated) heat/fuel accounting, estimations, defaults,
            etc. Besides default data drawn from the International
            Energy Agency (IEA), information can be obtained from
            the annual reports submitted by governments to the
            United Nations Framework Convention on Climate
            Change (UNFCC). These reports will detail country
            energy use and associated emissions for country specific
            defaults, etc.

            5. References
            •	    International Energy Agency’s (IAE) annual
                  publication of Energy Balances for OECD and non-
                  OECD countries.

            •	    The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative -
                  A corporate accounting and reporting standard
                  (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources
                  Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for
                  Sustainable Development (WBCSD).

            •	    Kyoto Protocol, 1997.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


EN5 Energy saved due to conservation                        4. Documentation
and efficiency improvements.                                Information can be obtained from internal energy
                                                            measurements and supplier information (e.g., energy
1. Relevance
                                                            related specification of new machinery, light bulbs, etc.).
This Indicator demonstrates the results of proactive
efforts to improve energy-efficiency through                5. References
technological improvements of processes and other
                                                            None.
energy conservation initiatives. Improved energy
efficiency can result in cost savings and can lead to
competitive advantages and market differentiation.
Supporting efficient energy technology has a direct
impact on operational costs, and reduces the reporting
organization’s future dependency on non-renewable
energy sources. Efficient energy use is one key strategy
in combating climate change and other environmental
impacts created by the extraction and processing of
energy.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify total energy saved by efforts to reduce
     energy use and increase energy efficiency.
     Reduced energy consumption from reduced
     production capacity or outsourcing should not be
     included in this Indicator.

2.2	 Report the total amount of energy saved in joules
     or multiples, such as gigajoules (one billion joules
     or 109 joules). Take into consideration energy saved
     due to:

     •	   Process redesign;

     •	   Conversion and retrofitting of equipment; and

     •	   Changes in personnel behavior.

3. Definitions
Energy saved

The reduced amount of energy needed to carry out
the same processes or tasks. The term does not include
overall reduction in energy consumption from reduced
organizational activities (e.g., partial outsourcing of
production).

Conservation and efficiency improvements

Organizational or technological innovations that allow
a defined process or task to be carried out at a reduced
level of energy consumption. This includes process
redesign, the conversion and retrofitting of equipment
(e.g., energy-efficient lighting), or the elimination of
unnecessary energy use due to changes in behavior.




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   11
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN6 Initiatives to provide energy-                          5. References
            efficient or renewable energy based                         •	   Energy efficiency standards and relevant testing
                                                                             procedures are available from the International
            products and services, and reductions in                         Organization for Standardization (ISO).
            energy requirements as a result of these
                                                                        •	   Energy efficiency standards and relevant testing
            initiatives.                                                     procedures are available from the International
            1. Relevance                                                     Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

            Energy consumption is a major contributor to climate
            change since the burning of fossil fuel energy sources
            ultimately generates carbon dioxide (a greenhouse gas).
            Using energy more efficiently is essential to combating
            climate change, which is the aim of the Kyoto Protocol.
            Providing energy efficient products and services is an
            important part of product stewardship initiatives.
            These products and services can be a source of
            competitive advantage by enhancing product
            differentiation and reputation. Energy-efficient
            technologies can also reduce the cost of consumer
            goods. When initiatives of different organizations in the
            same sector are compared, it can give an indication of
            likely trends in the market for a product or service.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report existing initiatives to reduce the energy
                 requirements of major products/product groups or
                 services.

            2.2	 Report quantified reductions in the energy
                 requirements of products and services achieved
                 during the reporting period.

            2.3	 If use-oriented figures are employed (e.g., energy
                 requirements of a computer), clearly report any
                 assumptions about underlying consumption
                 patterns or normalization factors (e.g., 10% less
                 energy use per average working day, assuming
                 operation for 8 hours with changing processor
                 load). Refer to available industry standards (e.g.,
                 fuel consumption of cars for 100 km at 90 km/h).

            3. Definitions
            None.

            4. Documentation
            Information can be obtained from internal product
            testing/measurements, research concerning usage
            patterns, industry standards, etc.




12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


EN7 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy                     3. Definitions
consumption and reductions achieved.                          None.

1. Relevance
                                                              4. Documentation
Indirect energy use occurs through purchasing
                                                              Relevant data can be drawn from supplier information,
materials and components or services such as travel,
                                                              life-cycle calculations/estimations (carried out internally
commuting, and subcontracted production. When
                                                              or by research organizations), etc.
monitored comprehensively, indirect energy use can be
reduced effectively (e.g., by carefully selecting energy-
                                                              5. References
efficient materials, services, or production capacities, or
substituting phone or video conferences for travel).          •	    International Energy Agency’s (IAE) annual
                                                                    publication of Energy Balances for OECD and non-
Quantifying indirect energy use provides a basis for                OECD countries.
calculating ‘other relevant indirect greenhouse gas
emissions’ as requested in EN17. Tracking and reducing
indirect energy use can improve the overall life-cycle
performance of products and services, and serve as part
of a comprehensive design-for-environment program.

Finally, this Indicator covers energy savings achieved
in the indirect energy consumption of the reporting
organization’s activities.

2. Compilation
2.1	 For this Indicator, exclude indirect energy use
     associated with the purchase of intermediate
     energy sources as reported in EN4.

2.2	 Identify relevant upstream/downstream indirect
     energy use in the following four areas:

      •	   Use of energy-intensive materials;

      •	   Subcontracted production;

      •	   Business-related travel; and

      •	   Employee commuting.

2.3 	 Report initiatives to reduce indirect energy use.

2.4 	 Report quantitatively the extent to which indirect
      energy use has been reduced during the reporting
      period for the four areas listed in 2.2.

2.5	 Indicate underlying assumptions and
     methodologies used to calculate other indirect
     energy use and indicate the source of information.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   13
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN8 Total water withdrawal by source.                         3. Definitions
            1. Relevance                                                  Total water withdrawal

            Reporting the total volume of water withdrawn by              The sum of all water drawn into the boundaries of
            source contributes to an understanding of the overall         the reporting organization from all sources (including
            scale of potential impacts and risks associated with the      surface water, ground water, rainwater, and municipal
            reporting organization’s water use. The total volume          water supply) for any use over the course of the
            withdrawn provides an indication of the organization’s        reporting period.
            relative size and importance as a user of water, and
                                                                          4. Documentation
            provides a baseline figure for other calculations relating
            to efficiency and use.                                        Information on organizational water withdrawal can
                                                                          be drawn from water meters, water bills, calculations
            The systematic effort to monitor and improve the              derived from other available water data or (if neither
            efficient use of water in the reporting organization          water meters nor bills or reference data exist) the
            is directly linked to water consumption costs. Total          organization’s own estimates.
            water use can also indicate the level of risk posed by
            disruptions to water supplies or increases in the cost        5. References
            of water. Clean freshwater is becoming increasingly
                                                                          None.
            scarce, and can impact production processes that rely
            on large volumes of water. In regions where water
            sources are highly restricted, the organization’s water
            consumption patterns can also influence relations with
            other stakeholders.

            2. Compilation
            2.1 	 Identify the total volume of water withdrawn
                  from any water source that was either withdrawn
                  directly by the reporting organization or through
                  intermediaries such as water utilities. This includes
                  the abstraction of cooling water.

            2.2 	 Report the total volume of water withdrawn in
                  cubic meters per year (m3/year) by the following
                  sources:

                  •	   Surface water, including water from wetlands,
                       rivers, lakes, and oceans;

                  •	   Ground water;

                  •	   Rainwater collected directly and stored by the
                       reporting organization;

                  •	   Waste water from another organization; and

                  •	   Municipal water supplies or other water
                       utilities.




14   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN              IP


EN9 Water sources significantly affected                     2.2	 Report the total number of significantly affected
                                                                  water sources by type according to the criteria
by withdrawal of water.                                           above, indicating the following:
1. Relevance
                                                                  •	   Size of water source in cubic meters (m3);
Withdrawals from a water system can affect the
environment by lowering the water table, reducing
                                                                  •	   Whether or not the source is designated
volume of water available for use, or otherwise altering
                                                                       as a protected area (nationally and/or
the ability of an ecosystem to perform its functions. Such
                                                                       internationally); and
changes have wider impacts on the quality of life in the
area, including economic and social consequences.
                                                                  •	   Biodiversity value (e.g., species diversity and
                                                                       endemism, number of protected species).
This Indicator measures the scale of impacts associated
with the organization’s water use. In terms of relations
                                                                  •	   Value/importance of water source to local
with other users of the same water sources, this
                                                                       communities.
Indicator also enables an assessment of specific areas
of risk or improvement, as well as the stability of the
                                                             3. Definitions
organization’s own water sources.
                                                             None.
2. Compilation
                                                             4. Documentation
2.1	 Identify water sources significantly affected by
     water withdrawal by the reporting organization.         Information on the characteristics of a water source or
     Significant withdrawals meet one or more of the         protected area can be obtained from local or national
     following criteria:                                     water-related ministries or government departments, or
                                                             research such as environmental impact assessments.
     •	   Withdrawals that account for an average of
          5 percent or more of the annual average            5. References
          volume of a given water body;
                                                             •	   IUCN Red List of Threatened Species.
     •	   Withdrawals from water bodies that are
                                                             •	   Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971.
          recognized by professionals to be particularly
          sensitive due to their relative size, function,
          or status as a rare, threatened, or endangered
          system (or to their support of a particular
          endangered species of plant or animal); or

     •	   Any withdrawal from a Ramsar-listed wetland
          or any other nationally or internationally
          proclaimed conservation area regardless of the
          rate of withdrawal.

          Note: If the water is provided by a public or
          private water supplier, the original water body/
          source should be identified and reported.




                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   15
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN10 Percentage and total volume of                         4. Documentation
            water recycled and reused.                                  Information can be obtained from water meters,
                                                                        water bills, or (if neither water meters nor bills exist)
            1. Relevance
                                                                        calculations based on a water audit or inventory, or from
            The rate of water reuse and recycling can be a measure      water retailer.
            of efficiency and can demonstrate the success of the
            organization in reducing total water withdrawals and        5. References
            discharges. Increased reuse and recycling can result
                                                                        None.
            in a reduction of water consumption, treatment, and
            disposal costs. The reduction of water consumption
            through reuse and recycling can also contribute to local,
            national, or regional goals for managing water supplies.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 This Indicator measures both water that was
                 treated prior to reuse and water that was not
                 treated prior to reuse. Grey water (i.e., collected
                 rainwater and wastewater generated by household
                 processes such as washing dishes, laundry, and
                 bathing) is included.

            2.2	 Calculate the volume of recycled/reused water
                 based on the volume of water demand satisfied
                 by recycled/reused water rather than further
                 withdrawals. For example, if the organization has a
                 production cycle that requires 20 cubic meters of
                 water per cycle, the organization withdraws
                 20 cubic meters of water for one production
                 process cycle and then reuses it for an additional
                 three cycles. The total volume of water recycled/
                 reused for that process is 60 cubic meters.

            2.3	 Report the total volume of water recycled/reused
                 by the organization in cubic meters per year (m3/
                 year) and also as a percentage of the total water
                 withdrawal reported under Indicator EN8.

            3. Definitions
            Recycling/Reuse

            The act of processing used water/wastewater through
            another cycle before discharge to final treatment and/or
            discharge to the environment. In general, there are three
            types of water recycling/re-use:

            •	    Wastewater recycled back in the same process or
                  higher use of recycled water in the process cycle;

            •	    Wastewater recycled/re-used in a different process,
                  but within the same facility; and

            •	    Wastewater re-used at another of the reporting
                  organization’s facilities.



16   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


EN11 Location and size of land owned,                            3. Definitions
leased, managed in, or adjacent to,                              Protected area

protected areas and areas of high bio-                           A geographically defined area that is designated, regulated,
                                                                 or managed to achieve specific conservation objectives.
diversity value outside protected areas.
                                                                 Areas of high biodiversity value
1. Relevance
                                                                 Areas not subject to legal protection but recognized
By reporting on the potential impact on land that lies within,
                                                                 for important biodiversity features by a number of
contains, or is adjacent to legally protected areas, as well
                                                                 governmental and non-governmental organizations. These
as areas of high biodiversity value outside protected areas,
                                                                 include habitats that are a priority for conservation (often
an organization can identify and understand certain risks
                                                                 defined in National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans
associated with biodiversity. Monitoring which activities
                                                                 prepared under the Convention on Biological Diversity). In
are taking place in both protected areas and areas of high
                                                                 addition, several international conservation organizations
biodiversity value outside protected areas makes it possible
                                                                 have identified particular areas of high biodiversity value.
for the reporting organization to reduce the risks of impacts.
It also makes it possible for the organization to manage         4. Documentation
impacts on biodiversity or avoid mismanagement. Failure to
                                                                 Sources of information for the required data could
adequately manage such impacts may result in reputational
                                                                 include purchase contracts, lease contracts, or the
damage, delays in obtaining planning permission, and the
                                                                 national/regional land registry.
loss of a social license to operate.

                                                                 On the national level, public agencies responsible for
2. Compilation
                                                                 environmental protection and conservation might keep
2.1	 Identify operational sites owned, leased, managed           information on internationally and nationally protected
     in, located in, adjacent to, or that contain protected      areas and areas of high biodiversity value. In addition,
     areas and areas of high biodiversity value outside          National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans often
     protected areas. Include sites for which future             include information and registers of protected areas and
     operations have been formally announced.                    areas of high biodiversity value.

2.2	 Report the following information for each                   5. References
     operational site identified above:
                                                                 •	    Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971.
      •	   Geographic location;
                                                                 •	    UNESCO World Heritage Sites.
      •	   Subsurface and/or underground land that may be
           owned, leased, or managed by the organization;
                                                                 •	    United Nations Biosphere Reserves.
      •	   Position in relation to protected area (in the
           area, adjacent to, or containing portions of the      •	    National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans
           protected area) and high biodiversity value                 prepared under the Convention on Biological
           area outside protected area;                                Diversity.

      •	   Type of operation (office, manufacturing/
                                                                 •	    Conservation International’s Biodiversity Hotspots
           production, or extractive);
                                                                       and Wilderness Areas.
      •	   Size of operational site in km2;
                                                                 •	    WWF’s Global 200 Ecoregion.
      •	   Biodiversity value characterized by:
                                                                 •	    Bird Life International’s Important Bird Areas.
           -	   T
                 he attribute of the protected area and high
                biodiversity value area outside protected
                                                                 •	    IUCN’s Centres of Plant Diversity.
                area (terrestrial, freshwater, or maritime
                ecosystem); and

           -	   Listing of protected status (e.g., IUCN
                Protected Area Management Category,
                Ramsar Convention, national legislation,
                Natura 2000 site, etc.).



                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   17
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN12 Description of significant impacts                      2.3 	 Report significant direct and indirect positive and
                                                                               negative impacts with reference to the following:
            of activities, products, and services
            on biodiversity in protected areas and                            •	   Species affected;

            areas of high biodiversity value outside
                                                                              •	   Extent of areas impacted (this may not be
            protected areas.                                                       limited to areas that are formally protected
                                                                                   and should include consideration of impacts
            1. Relevance
                                                                                   on buffer zones as well as formally designated
            This Indicator provides information on the significant                 areas of special importance or sensitivity);
            direct and indirect impacts of the reporting organization
            on biodiversity in protected areas and areas of high              •	   Duration of impacts; and
            biodiversity value outside protected areas. It also
            provides the background for understanding (and                    •	   Reversibility or irreversibility of the impacts.
            developing) an organizational strategy to mitigate
            these impacts. By asking for structured, qualitative         3. Definitions
            information, the Indicator enables comparison across
                                                                         Significant impact
            organizations and over time of the relative size, scale,
            and nature of impacts.                                       Impacts that may adversely affect the integrity of a
                                                                         geographical area/region, either directly or indirectly.
            2. Compilation                                               This occurs by substantially changing its ecological
                                                                         features, structures, and functions across its whole area
            2.1	 Identify significant impacts on biodiversity
                                                                         and over the long term. This means that the habitat, its
                 associated with activities, products, and services of
                                                                         population level, and/or the particular species that make
                 the reporting organization, including both direct
                                                                         that habitat important cannot be sustained.
                 impacts as well as indirect impacts (e.g., in the
                 supply chain).                                          On a species level, a significant impact causes a
                                                                         population decline and/or change in distribution so that
            2.2	 Report the nature of significant direct and indirect    natural recruitment (reproduction or immigration from
                 impacts on biodiversity with reference to one or        unaffected areas) cannot return to former levels within a
                 more of the following:                                  limited number of generations. A significant impact can
                                                                         also affect subsistence or commercial resource use to the
                  •	   Construction or use of manufacturing plants,      degree that the well-being of users is affected over the
                       mines, and transport infrastructure;              long term.

                  •	   Pollution (introduction of substances that do     4. Documentation
                       not naturally occur in the habitat from point
                                                                         Information for this Indicator can be found in the
                       and non-point sources);
                                                                         reporting organization’s environmental management
                                                                         system or other internal documentation. If available,
                  •	   Introduction of invasive species, pests, and
                                                                         information can also be obtained from environmental
                       pathogens;
                                                                         and social impact assessments and/or lifecycle
                                                                         assessments, and from other organizations upstream/
                  •	   Reduction of species;
                                                                         downstream in the supply chain.

                  •	   Habitat conversion; and
                                                                         5. References
                  •	   Changes in ecological processes outside the       •	   GRI Cross-Reference: GRI Biodiversity Resource
                       natural range of variation (e.g., salinity or          Document.
                       changes in groundwater level).




18   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN            IP


EN13 Habitats protected or restored.                          4. Documentation
1. Relevance
                                                              Information on protected areas can be found in the
A biodiversity strategy contains a combination of             documentation of the organization’s environmental
elements related to the prevention, management, and           management system, site plans, environmental and
remediation of damage to natural habitats resulting           social impact assessments, or organizational policies.
from the organization’s activities. This Indicator measures
the implementation of a specific strategy for preventing      Information on land restoration (i.e., requirements for
or redressing negative impacts associated with activities.    land restoration) can be found in lease, rent, or purchase
Ensuring the integrity of natural habitats can enhance        contracts of the land, or in environmental and social
the reputation of the organization, the stability of its      impact assessments or risk registers.
surrounding natural environment and resources, and its
acceptance by surrounding communities.                        5. References
                                                              None.
2. Compilation
2.1	 This Indicator refers to areas in which remediation
     has been completed or the area is actively
     protected (see Definitions). Areas in which
     operations are still active can be counted if
     they conform to the definitions of ’restored’ or
     ’protected’.

2.2	 Assess the status of the area based on its condition
     at the close of the reporting period.

2.3	 Report the size and location of all habitat
     protected areas and/or restored areas (in hectares),
     and whether the success of the restoration
     measure was/is approved by independent external
     professionals. If the area is larger than one km2,
     report in km2.

2.4	 Report whether partnerships exist with third
     parties to protect or restore habitat areas distinct
     from where the organization has overseen and
     implemented restoration or protection measures.

3. Definitions
Area restored

Areas that were used during or affected by operational
activities, and where remediation measures have either
restored the environment to its original state or to a
state where it is a healthy and functioning ecosystem.

Area protected

Areas that are protected from any harm during
operational activities, and the environment remains in its
original state with a healthy functioning ecosystem.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   19
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN14 Strategies, current actions, and                       2.3	 Report actions underway to manage biodiversity
                                                                             risks identified in EN11 and EN12, or plans to
            future plans for managing impacts on                             undertake such activities in the future.
            biodiversity.
                                                                        3. Definitions
            1. Relevance
                                                                        None.
            Performance against biodiversity policies, objectives,
            and commitments depends on having structured
                                                                        4. Documentation
            programs in place for managing impacts. The presence
            and structure of programs is particularly important         Information on programs and targets can be found
            when national regulations do not provide clear reference    in management guidelines or obtained from the
            points for an organization planning its biodiversity        organization’s Environmental Management System,
            management.                                                 Environmental and Social Impact Assessments,
                                                                        Corporate Social Responsibility policies, or Risk Registers.
            Members of local communities often have unique
            knowledge of biodiverse areas and their value to local      5. References
            communities that is important for managing impacts on
                                                                        None.
            biodiversity.

            This Indicator enables both internal and external
            stakeholders to analyze how well the reporting
            organization’s strategies, current actions, and future
            plans address potential impacts on biodiversity. The
            quality of the organization’s approach to managing
            impacts on biodiversity (as identified in EN11 and EN12)
            will affect its exposure to risks such as reputational
            damage, fines, or rejection of planning or operating
            permissions. Actions to protect or restore habitats and
            species are of particular relevance.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 If national regulations have influenced the specific
                 strategies, actions, or plans reported under this
                 Indicator, this should be noted.

            2.2	 Report the organization’s strategy for achieving its
                 policy on biodiversity management including:

                  •	   Integration of biodiversity considerations in
                       analytical tools such as environmental site
                       impact assessments;

                  •	   Engagement with relevant stakeholders;

                  •	   Methodology for establishing risk exposure to
                       biodiversity;

                  •	   Setting specific targets and objectives;

                  •	   Monitoring processes; and

                  •	   Public reporting.




20   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN          IP


EN15 Number of IUCN Red List species                        4. Documentation
and national conservation list species                      Information on the presence of species on the IUCN
                                                            Red List and national conservation lists can be obtained
with habitats in areas affected by                          from national/regional conservation agencies, local
operations, by level of extinction risk.                    authorities, or environmental NGOs. For organizations
                                                            operating in or adjacent to protected areas or areas
1. Relevance
                                                            of high-biodiversity value, planning studies or other
This Indicator helps the reporting organization to          permit materials may also contain information about the
identify where its activities can pose a threat to          biodiversity within the protected areas.
endangered plant and animal species. By identifying
these threats, the organization can initiate appropriate    5. References
steps to avoid harm and to prevent the extinction of
                                                            •	   IUCN Red List of Threatened Species.
species. The IUCN Red List and national conservation
list species can serve as authorities on the sensitivity
of habitat in areas affected by operations, and on
the relative importance of these habitats from a
management perspective.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify the location of habitats affected by the
     operations of the reporting organization that
     include species on the IUCN Red List and on
     national conservation lists.

2.2	 Report the number of species in habitats identified
     as affected by the reporting organization,
     indicating one of the following levels of extinction
     risk:

     •	   Critically endangered;

     •	   Endangered;

     •	   Vulnerable;

     •	   Near threatened; and

     •	   Least concern.

3. Definitions
IUCN Red List species

An inventory of the global conservation status of plant
and animal species developed by the International
Union for the Conservation of Nature and Natural
Resources (IUCN).




                                                                                                                  Version 3.1   21
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN16 Total direct and indirect green-                                 •	   Transportation of materials, products, and waste;
            house gas emissions by weight.
                                                                                  •	   Venting; and
            1. Relevance
                                                                                  •	   Fugitive emissions.
            Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate
            change and are governed by the United Nations Frame-
                                                                            	     Emissions from combustion processes and sources
            work Convention on Climate Change (UNFCC) and the
                                                                                  will correspond to the direct primary energy from
            subsequent Kyoto Protocol. As a result, different national
                                                                                  non-renewable and renewable sources as reported
            and international regulations and incentive systems (such
                                                                                  in EN3. Note that the direct CO2 emissions from the
            as trading climate certificates) aim to control the volume
                                                                                  combustion of biomass shall not be included but
            and reward the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions.
                                                                                  reported separately under GHG Protocol Corporate
                                                                                  Standard (revised edition).
            This Indicator can be used in combination with EN17
            to explain targets for regulations or trading systems
                                                                            2.3	 Identify indirect emissions of greenhouse gases
            at international or national levels. The combination of
                                                                                 resulting from the generation of purchased
            direct and indirect emissions also provides insights into
                                                                                 electricity, heat, or steam (this corresponds with
            the potential cost implications of taxation or trading
                                                                                 energy consumption reported under EN4).
            systems for reporting organizations.

                                                                                  Other indirect emissions (e.g., from organizational
            2. Compilation
                                                                                  travel) are not included since they are accounted
            2.1	 Different conversion methodologies are available                 for in EN17.
                 to calculate the amount of greenhouse gas
                 emissions per source. Indicate the standard used,          2.4	 Report total greenhouse gas emissions as the sum
                 and indicate the methodology associated with the                of direct and indirect emissions (as identified in 2.2
                 data with reference to the following categories:                and 2.3) in tonnes of CO2 equivalent.

                  •	   Direct measurement (e.g., continuous online          3. Definitions
                       analyzers, etc.);
                                                                            Direct emissions
                  •	   Calculation based on site specific data (e.g., for   Emissions from sources that are owned or controlled
                       fuel composition analysis, etc.);                    by the reporting organization. For example, direct
                                                                            emissions related to combustion would arise
                  •	   Calculation based on default data; and               from burning fuel for energy within the reporting
                                                                            organization’s operational boundaries.
                  •	   Estimations. If estimations are used due to a
                                                                            Indirect emissions
                       lack of default figures, indicate which basis
                       figures were obtained.                               Emissions that result from the activities of the reporting
                                                                            organization but are generated at sources owned or
            Further details on the compilation of this Indicator are        controlled by another organization. In the context of
            available in the WRI /WBCSD GHG Protocol and in the             this Indicator, indirect emissions refer to greenhouse
            IPCC document as listed under references.                       gas emissions from the generation of electricity, heat, or
                                                                            steam that is imported and consumed by the reporting
            2.2	 Identify direct emissions of greenhouse gases from         organization.
                 all sources owned or controlled by the reporting
                                                                            Carbon dioxide equivalent
                 organization, including:
                                                                            CO2 (Carbon Dioxide) equivalent is the measure used to
                  •	   Generation of electricity, heat, or steam (as        compare the emissions from various greenhouse gases
                       reported in EN3);                                    based on their global warming potential (GWP). The CO2
                                                                            equivalent for a gas is derived by multiplying the tonnes
                  •	   Other combustion processes such as flaring;          of the gas by the associated GWP.

                  •	   Physical or chemical processing;




22   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN      IP


4. Documentation
Emissions resulting from direct and indirect energy use
can be calculated from the data reported in EN3 and EN4.

5. References
•	   The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative -
      A corporate accounting and reporting standard
     (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources
     Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for
     Sustainable Development (WBCSD).

•	   Kyoto Protocol, 1997.

•	   Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
     (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The
     Scientific Basis.




                                                                              Version 3.1   23
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN17 Other relevant indirect green-                           Carbon dioxide equivalent

            house gas emissions by weight.                                CO2 (Carbon Dioxide) equivalent is the measure used
                                                                          to compare emissions from various greenhouse gases
            1. Relevance
                                                                          based on their global warming potential (GWP). The CO2
            Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate        equivalent for a gas is derived by multiplying the tonnes
            change and are governed by the United Nations Frame-          of the gas by the associated GWP.
            work Convention on Climate Change (UNFCC) and the
            subsequent Kyoto Protocol. For some organizations,            4. Documentation
            indirect greenhouse gas emissions are significantly greater
                                                                          Information can be obtained from external suppliers
            than their direct emissions. They are also sufficiently
                                                                          of products and services. For certain types of indirect
            under the influence of the organization that changes in its
                                                                          emissions such as business travel, the organization may
            practices can lead to significant reductions. Measuring and
                                                                          need to combine its own records with data from external
            demonstrating efforts to reduce indirect emissions can
                                                                          sources to arrive at an estimate.
            demonstrate leadership in combating climate change and
            can enhance the organization’s reputation.
                                                                          5. References
            2. Compilation                                                •	   The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative -
                                                                               A corporate accounting and reporting standard
            2.1	 Identify the greenhouse gas emissions resulting
                                                                               (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources
                 from indirect energy use. Exclude indirect
                                                                               Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for
                 emissions from imported electricity, heat, or steam,
                                                                               Sustainable Development (WBCSD).
                 as these are covered by EN16.

                                                                          •	   Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
            2.2	 Additionally, identify which of the reporting
                                                                               (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The
                 organization’s activities cause indirect emissions
                                                                               Scientific Basis.
                 and assess their amounts (e.g., employee
                 commuting, business travel, etc).
                                                                          •	   Kyoto Protocol, 1997.
                  When deciding on the relevance of these activities,
                  consider whether emissions of the activity:

                  •	   Are large compared to other activities
                       generating direct emissions or energy related
                       indirect emissions (as reported in EN16);

                  •	   Are judged to be critical by stakeholders;

                  •	   Could be substantially reduced through
                       actions taken by the reporting organization.

            2.3	 Report the sum of indirect GHG emissions
                 identified in tonnes of CO2 equivalent.

            3. Definitions
            Indirect emissions

            Emissions that are consequences of the activities of the
            reporting organization but are generated at sources
            owned or controlled by another organization. In the
            context of this Indicator, indirect emissions do not
            include those generated from imported electricity, heat,
            or steam consumed by the reporting organization (e.g.,
            transport, packaging).




24   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


EN18 Initiatives to reduce greenhouse                       4. Documentation
gas emissions and reductions achieved.                      Information can be drawn from data reported under
                                                            EN16 and EN17, from emissions measurements,
1. Relevance
                                                            calculated from accounting data and defaults, or from
Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate      estimates. Information on initiatives can likely be found
change and are governed by the United Nations agreed        in records maintained by departments responsible for
on the Framework Convention on Climate Change               environmental management.
(UNFCC) and the subsequent Kyoto Protocol. As a result,
different national and international regulations and        5. References
incentive systems (such as trading climate certificates)
                                                            •	   The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative- A
aim to control the volume and reward the reduction
                                                                 corporate accounting and reporting standard
of greenhouse gas emissions. When monitored
                                                                 (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources
comprehensively, emissions can be reduced effectively
                                                                 Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for
(e.g., by carefully selecting energy-efficient materials,
                                                                 Sustainable Development (WBCSD).
services, or production capacities).

                                                            •	   Kyoto Protocol, 1997.
This Indicator can be used in combination with
EN16 and EN17 to set and monitor reduction targets
                                                            •	   Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
with reference to regulations or trading systems at
                                                                 (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The
international or national levels.
                                                                 Scientific Basis.
Tracking and reducing greenhouse gas emissions can
improve the overall life cycle performance of products
and services, and serve as part of a comprehensive
design-for-environment program.

2. Compilation
2.1 	 Identify emissions reductions from all sources
      owned or controlled by the reporting organization
      as reported under EN16 and resulting from
      indirect energy use and activities of the reporting
      organization as reported under EN17. Distinguish
      between mandatory and voluntary emissions
      reductions.

2.2 	 Report initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas
      emissions, include the areas where the initiatives
      were implemented.

2.3 	 Report quantitatively the extent greenhouse
      gas emissions reductions achieved during
      the reporting period as a direct result of the
      initiative(s) in tonnes of CO2 equivalent.

3. Definitions
None.




                                                                                                                    Version 3.1   25
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN19 Emissions of ozone-depleting                                3. Definitions
            substances by weight.                                            Ozone-depleting substance (ODS)

            1. Relevance                                                     Any substance with an ozone depletion potential (ODP)
                                                                             greater than 0 that can deplete the stratospheric ozone
            The ozone layer (O3) filters out most of the sun’s
                                                                             layer. Most ozone-depleting substances are controlled
            biologically harmful ultraviolet (UV-B) radiation. The
                                                                             under the Montreal Protocol and its amendments, and
            Montreal Protocol regulates the phase-out of ozone-
                                                                             include CFCs, HCFCs, halons, and methyl bromide.
            depleting substances (ODS) internationally. Measuring
            ODS emissions enables an assessment of how well                  CFC-11 equivalent
            the reporting organization complies with current and
                                                                             CFC-11 is a measure used to compare various substances
            future legislation, and its likely risks in this area. This is
                                                                             based on their relative ozone depletion potential. The
            particularly relevant for organizations whose processes,
                                                                             reference level of 1 is the potential of CFC-11 and CFC-12
            products, and services have used ODS and must
                                                                             to cause ozone depletion.
            transition to new technologies in order to comply with
            phase-out commitments. The reporting organization’s              4. Documentation
            results on ODS phase-out can help indicate its level
                                                                             Information can be derived from internal measurements
            of technology leadership and competitive position in
                                                                             and accounting.
            markets for products and services affected by ODS rules.

                                                                             5. References
            2. Compilation
                                                                             •	   The Montreal Protocol on substances that deplete
            2.1 	 Ozone-depleting substances contained or emitted
                                                                                  the ozone layer.
                  from products during their usage and disposal are
                  not covered by this Indicator.
                                                                             •	   United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)
                                                                                  Halon Handbook.
            2.2	 Emissions of substances covered in Annexes A, B,
                 C, and E of the Montreal Protocol on Substances
                 that Deplete the Ozone Layer are included.

            2.3	 Identify emissions of ozone-depleting substances
                 using the following formulas:

            	     Emissions = Production + Imports- Exports of
                  Substances

            	     Production = Substances Produced- Substances
                  Destroyed by Technology- Substances used
                  entirely as feedstock in the manufacture of other
                  chemicals

                  Note: ODS that is recycled and reused is not
                  considered production.

            2.4 	 Report the emissions of specific ozone-depleting
                  substances in tonnes and tonnes of CFC-11
                  equivalent.




26   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN         IP


EN20 NOx, SOx, and other significant air                           •	   Volatile organic compounds (VOC);
emissions by type and weight.
                                                                   •	   Hazardous air pollutants (HAP);
1. Relevance
                                                                   •	   Stack and fugitive emissions;
This Indicator measures the scale of the organization’s
air emissions and can demonstrate the relative size
                                                                   •	   Particulate matter (PM); or
and importance of these emissions compared to other
organizations.
                                                                   •	   Other standard categories of air emissions
                                                                        identified in regulations.
Air pollutants have adverse effects on habitats and
human and animal health. Deterioration of air quality,
                                                              3. Definitions
acidification, forest degradation, as well as public health
concerns has led to local and international regulations to    Significant air emissions
control air emissions. Reductions in regulated pollutants
                                                              Air emissions that are regulated under international
lead to improved health conditions for workers and
                                                              conventions and/or national laws or regulations,
neighboring communities. Reductions or demonstrated
                                                              including those listed on environmental permits for the
performance beyond compliance can enhance relations
                                                              reporting organization’s operations.
with affected communities and workers, and the ability
to maintain or expand operations. In regions with             4. Documentation
emission caps, the volume of emissions also has direct
                                                              Information can be drawn from emissions
cost implications for the organization.
                                                              measurements, calculated from accounting data and
                                                              defaults, or estimated.
2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify significant air emissions and calculate their   5. References
     weight.
                                                              •	   Geneva Protocol to the Convention on Long-Range
                                                                   Transboundary Air Pollution, 1979.
2.2	 Since calculating certain air emissions such as NOx
     requires complex quantification efforts, indicate
                                                              •	   Helsinki Protocol to the Convention on Long-
     the methodology used for calculations, selecting
                                                                   Range Transboundary Air Pollution, 1985.
     one of the following approaches:

                                                              •	   Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed
      •	   Direct measurement of emissions (e.g., online
                                                                   Consent (PIC) Procedure, 1998.
           analyzers, etc.);

                                                              •	   Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
      •	   Calculation based on site specific data;
                                                                   Pollutants (POPs) (Annex A, B, and C), 2001.

      •	   Calculation based on default data; or
                                                              •	   Sofia Protocol to the Convention on Long-Range
                                                                   Transboundary Air Pollution, 1988.
      •	   Estimation (if estimations are used due to a
           lack of default figures, indicate on what basis
                                                              •	   Gothenburg Protocol to the 1979 Convention on
           figures were obtained).
                                                                   Long-Range Transboundary Air Pollution to abate
                                                                   acidification, eutrophication, and ground-level
2.3	 Report the weight of significant air emissions (in
                                                                   ozone.
     kilograms or multiples such as tonnes) for each of
     the following categories:

      •	   NOx;

      •	   SOx;

      •	   Persistent organic pollutants (POP);




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   27
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN21 Total water discharge by quality                               services/operations. The selection of parameters
                                                                                should be consistent with those used in the
            and destination.                                                    organization’s sector.
            1. Relevance
                                                                          Clean water refers to water that meets national
            The amount and quality of the water discharged by the
                                                                          regulations for freshwater quality when leaving the
            reporting organization is directly linked to ecological
                                                                          boundaries of the reporting organization. This can be
            impact and operational costs. By progressively improving
                                                                          either freshwater whose quality has not been affected by
            the quality of discharged water and/or reducing volumes,
                                                                          the organization’s use, or wastewater that is treated to
            the reporting organization has the potential to reduce
                                                                          meet freshwater standards prior to discharge.
            its impact on the surrounding environment. Unmanaged
            discharge of effluents with a high chemical or nutrient
                                                                          3. Definitions
            load (principally nitrogen, phosphorous, or potassium)
            can have a significant impact on receiving waters. This, in   Total water discharge
            turn, can affect the quality of the water supply available
                                                                          The sum of water effluents discharged over the course
            to the organization and its relationship with communities
                                                                          of the reporting period to subsurface waters, surface
            and other water users.
                                                                          waters, sewers that lead to rivers, oceans, lakes, wetlands,
                                                                          treatment facilities, and ground water either through:
            Discharging effluents or process water to a facility
            for treatment not only reduces pollution levels, but          •	    A defined discharge point (point source discharge);
            can also lower the organization’s financial costs and
            the risk of regulatory action for non-compliance with         •	    Over land in a dispersed or undefined manner
            environmental regulation. All of this enhances the                  (non-point source discharge); or
            reporting organization’s social license to operate.
                                                                          •	    Wastewater removed from the reporting
            2. Compilation                                                      organization via truck. Discharge of collected
                                                                                rainwater and domestic sewage is not regarded as
            2.1 	 Identify planned and unplanned water discharges
                                                                                water discharge.
                  (excluding collected rainwater and domestic
                  sewage) by destination and indicate how it is
                                                                          4. Documentation
                  treated. If the reporting organization does not
                  have a meter to measure water discharges, this          Information sources about the volume of water
                  figure needs to be estimated by subtracting the         discharged by the reporting organization include flow
                  approximate volume consumed on-site from the            meters (point-source discharges or when discharges are
                  volume withdrawn as reported in EN8.                    released through a pipe) and regulatory permits.

            2.2	 Report the total volume of planned and unplanned         5. References
                 water discharges in cubic meters per year
                                                                          •	    MARPOL Convention (International Convention for
                 (m3/year) by:
                                                                                the Prevention of Pollution of Ships), 1973.

                  •	   Destination;
                                                                          •	    Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic
                                                                                Pollutants (POPs), 2001.
                  •	   Treatment method; and

                  •	   Whether it was reused by another
                       organization.

            2.3 	 Reporting organizations that discharge effluents
                  or process water should report water quality in
                  terms of total volumes of effluent using standard
                  effluent parameters such as Biological Oxygen
                  Demand (BOD), Total Suspended Solids (TSS),
                  etc. The specific choice of quality parameters will
                  vary depending on the organization’s products/




28   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN            IP


EN22 Total weight of waste by type and                              ·	   Landfill;
disposal method.
                                                                    ·	   On-site storage; and
1. Relevance
                                                                    ·	   Other (to be specified by the reporting
Data on waste generation figures over several years
                                                                         organization).
can indicate the level of progress the organization has
made toward waste reduction efforts. It can also indicate
                                                              2.4	 Report how the method of disposal has been
potential improvements in process efficiency and
                                                                   determined:
productivity. From a financial perspective, the reduction
of waste contributes directly to lower costs for materials,
                                                                    •	   Disposed directly by the reporting
processing, and disposal.
                                                                         organization or otherwise directly confirmed;
Information about the disposal destination reveals the
                                                                    •	   Information provided by the waste disposal
extent to which a reporting organization has managed
                                                                         contractor; or
the balance between disposal options and uneven
environmental impacts. For example, land filling and
                                                                    •	   Organizational defaults of the waste disposal
recycling create very different types of environmental
                                                                         contractor.
impacts and residual effects. Most waste minimization
strategies emphasize prioritizing options for reuse,
                                                              3. Definitions
recycling, and then recovery over other disposal options.
                                                              Disposal method
2. Compilation
                                                              The method by which waste is treated or disposed,
2.1	 Identify the amount of waste created by the              including composting, reuse, recycling, recovery,
     organization’s operations, by:                           incineration, landfill, deep well injection, and on-site
                                                              storage.
      •	   Hazardous waste (as defined by national
                                                              4. Documentation
           legislation at the point of generation); and
                                                              Potential information sources include external waste
      •	   Non-hazardous waste (all other forms of solid      audits by providers of disposal services or waste balance
           or liquid waste excluding wastewater).             sheets from these providers, as well as internal billing
                                                              and accounting systems, and the procurement or supply
2.2	 If no weight data are available, estimate the weight     management department.
     using available information on waste density
     and volume collected, mass balances, or similar          5. References
     information.
                                                              •	    Ban Amendment to the Basel Convention on
                                                                    the Control of Transboundary Movements of
2.3	 Report the total amount of waste in tonnes by
                                                                    Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, 1989.
     type as identified in 2.1 for each of the following
     methods:
                                                              •	    London Dumping Convention, 1972.

      ·	   Reuse;
                                                              •	    MARPOL Convention (International Convention for
                                                                    the Prevention of Pollution of Ships), 1973.
      ·	   Recycling;

      ·	   Composting;

      ·	   Recovery, including Energy Recovery;

      ·	   Incineration (mass burn);

      ·	   Deep well injection;




                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   29
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN23 Total number and volume of                                Significant spill

            significant spills.                                            All spills that are included in the reporting organization’s
                                                                           financial statement (e.g., due to resulting liabilities) or
            1. Relevance
                                                                           recorded as a spill by the reporting organization.
            Spills of chemicals, oils, and fuels can have significant
                                                                           4. Documentation
            negative impacts on the surrounding environment,
            potentially affecting soil, water, air, biodiversity,          Potential information sources regarding spills of fuel, oils,
            and human health. The systematic effort to avoid               and chemicals can be internal records within an existing
            spills of hazardous materials is directly linked to the        environmental management system as well as official
            organization’s compliance with regulations, its financial      statements made to/by the relevant environmental
            risk from the loss of raw materials, remediation costs,        regulatory agency.
            the risk of regulatory action, as well as damage to
            reputation. This Indicator also serves as an indirect          5. References
            measure for evaluating the monitoring skills of the
                                                                           None.
            organization.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify all recorded significant spills and the
                 volume of these spills.

            2.2	 Report the total number and total volume of
                 recorded significant spills.

            2.3 	 For spills that were reported in the organization’s
                  financial statement, report the additional following
                  information for each such spill:

                    •	   Location of spill;

                    •	   Volume of spill; and

                    •	   Material of spill, categorized by:

                         -	   Oil spills (soil or water surfaces);

                         -	   Fuel spills (soil or water surfaces);

                         -	   Spills of wastes (soil or water surfaces);

                         -	   Spills of chemicals (mostly soil or water
                              surfaces); and

                         -	Other.

            2.4	 Report the impacts of significant spills.

            3. Definitions

            Spill

            Accidental release of a hazardous substance that can
            affect human health, land, vegetation, water bodies, and
            ground water.




30   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN             IP


EN24 Weight of transported, imported,                                 organization, by destination. Waste transported
                                                                      between different locations of the organization is
exported, or treated waste deemed                                     not counted as imported.
hazardous under the terms of the Basel
                                                                 2.4	 Identify the proportion of the total amount of
Convention Annex I, II, III, and VIII,                                transported hazardous waste by destination that
and percentage of transported waste                                   is transported from the reporting organization to
                                                                      locations abroad. Include all wastes that leave the
shipped internationally.                                              boundaries of the reporting organization to cross
1. Relevance                                                          international borders, excluding transportation
                                                                      between different locations of the reporting
Hazardous waste management is a key area of concern
                                                                      organization.
for many stakeholders. Improper transport of dangerous
wastes, particularly to countries that lack the infrastructure
                                                                 2.5	 Identify the portion of the total amount of
and national regulations to handle such waste, can pose
                                                                      transported and exported waste by destination
harm to both human health and the environment. In
                                                                      that the organization has treated.
addition, poor management of hazardous waste creates
liabilities associated with non-compliance with national
                                                                 2.6	 Identify the portion of the total amount of waste
and international regulations, as well as potential damage
                                                                      by destination that is treated by external sources/
to reputation.
                                                                      suppliers, that has been transported, exported, or
                                                                      imported by the organization.
2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify hazardous wastes transported by or on              2.7	 Convert volumes to an estimate of weight with a
     behalf of the reporting organization within the                  brief explanation of the methodology used.
     reporting period by destination.
                                                                 2.8	 Report the following information in kilograms or
2.2	 Identify the total weight of transported hazardous               tonnes:
     waste using the following equation:
                                                                      •	   Total weight of hazardous waste transported;
	     Total weight of hazardous waste transported by
      destination                                                     •	   Total weight of imported hazardous waste;
      	=
                                                                      •	   Total weight of exported hazardous waste; and
      Weight of hazardous waste transported to the
      reporting organization by destination from                      •	   Total weight of treated hazardous waste.
      external sources/suppliers not owned by the
      reporting organization                                     3. Definitions
      	+
                                                                 None.
      Weight of hazardous waste transported from the
                                                                 4. Documentation
      reporting organization by destination to external
      sources/suppliers not owned by the reporting               Potential information sources include billing data from
      organization                                               logistic or disposal contractors, accounting systems,
      	+                                                         as well as the procurement or supply management
                                                                 department. Some countries require documentation
      Weight of hazardous waste transported nationally           to accompany hazardous waste shipments that would
      and/or internationally by destination between              supply all relevant data for this Indicator.
      locations owned, leased, or managed by the
      reporting organization                                     5. References
                                                                 •	   Ban Amendment to the Basel Convention on
2.3	 Identify the total weight of hazardous waste
                                                                      the Control of Transboundary Movements of
     transported across international borders and
                                                                      Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, 1989.
     which enters the boundaries of the reporting




                                                                                                                           Version 3.1   31
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN25 Identity, size, protected status, and                      2.2	 Report water bodies significantly affected by water
                                                                                 discharges based on the criteria above, adding
            biodiversity value of water bodies and                               information on:
            related habitats significantly affected by
                                                                                 •	   Size of water body in cubic meters (m3);
            the reporting organization’s discharges
            of water and runoff.                                                 •	   Whether the source is designated as
                                                                                      a protected area (nationally and/or
            1. Relevance
                                                                                      internationally); and
            This Indicator is a qualitative counterpart to quantitative
            Indicators of water discharge that helps to describe                 •	   Biodiversity value (e.g., number of protected
            the impact of these discharges. Discharges and runoff                     species).
            affecting aquatic habitats can have a significant impact
            on the availability of water resources. Identifying water       3. Definitions
            bodies affected by discharges provides an opportunity
                                                                            None.
            to identify activities in regions of significant concern,
            or areas where the reporting organization may face
                                                                            4. Documentation
            specific risks due to community concerns, limited water
            resources, etc.                                                 Information on the status of a water source or protected
                                                                            area can be obtained from local or national water-
            2. Compilation                                                  related ministries or government departments, or
                                                                            through research initiated by the organization or other
            2.1	 Identify water bodies significantly affected by the
                                                                            institutions, such as environmental impact studies.
                 reporting organization’s water discharges that
                 meet one of more of the following criteria:
                                                                            5. References
                  •	   Discharges account for an average of 5% or           •	   IUCN Red List of Threatened Species.
                       more of the annual average volume of the
                       water body;                                          •	   Ramsar Convention on Wetlands.

                  •	   Discharges that, on the advice of appropriate
                       professionals (e.g., municipal authorities), are
                       known to have or are highly likely to have
                       significant impacts on the water body and
                       associated habitats;

                  •	   Discharges to water bodies that are recognized
                       by professionals to be particularly sensitive
                       due to their relative size, function, or status as
                       a rare, threatened, or endangered system (or
                       support a particular endangered species of
                       plant or animal); or

                  •	   Any discharge to a Ramsar-listed wetland
                       or any other nationally or internationally
                       proclaimed conservation area regardless of the
                       rate of discharge.




32   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN             IP


EN26 Initiatives to mitigate                                     •	   Effluents (e.g., quality of water used during
                                                                      production and/or use);
environmental impacts of products
and services, and extent of impact                               •	   Noise; and

mitigation.
                                                                 •	   Waste (e.g., non-reclaimable, toxic materials/
1. Relevance                                                          compounds).

For some sectors, the impacts of products and services
                                                            2.3	 Report quantitatively the extent to which
during their use phase (e.g., water consumption of a
                                                                 environmental impacts of products and services
washing machine) and at the end of their useful life
                                                                 have been mitigated during the reporting period.
can be equal to or greater in significance than the
                                                                 If use-oriented figures are employed (e.g., water
production phase. The significance of such impacts is
                                                                 use of washing machine), clearly indicate the
determined by both customer behavior and general
                                                                 underlying assumptions regarding consumption
product/service design. Organizations are expected
                                                                 patterns or normalization factors (e.g., 10% less
to take more proactive approaches to assessing and
                                                                 water use per 5 kg of laundry).
improving the environmental impacts of their products
and services.
                                                            3. Definitions
This measure assesses the actions the reporting             None.
organization has taken to reduce the negative
environmental impacts and enhance the positive              4. Documentation
impacts of its product and service design and delivery.
                                                            Information can be drawn from product Lifecycle
Design for environment can help identify new business
                                                            Assessments (LCA) or documents related to product
opportunities, differentiate products and services,
                                                            design, development, and testing.
and stimulate innovation in technology. Integrating
environmental considerations into product and service
                                                            5. References
design can also decrease the risk of incompatibility with
future environmental legislation, as well as enhance        None.
reputation.

2. Compilation
2.1	 In this Indicator, the following impacts are
     excluded since they are covered in other
     Environmental Indicators:

     •	   reclaiming of products and product packaging
          (EN27); and

     •	   Impacts on biodiversity (EN12).

2.2	 Report initiatives in the reporting period to
     mitigate the most significant environmental
     impacts of products/service groups in relation to:

     •	   Materials use (e.g., use of non-renewable,
          energy-intensive, toxic materials);

     •	   Water use (e.g., volumes used during
          production and/or use);

     •	   Emissions (e.g., GHG, toxic, ozone-depleting
          emissions);




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   33
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN27 Percentage of products sold                              3. Definitions
            and their packaging materials that are                        Reclaimed

            reclaimed by category.                                        Refers to collecting, reusing, or recycling products and
                                                                          their packaging materials at the end of their useful life.
            1. Relevance
                                                                          Collection and treatment can be carried out by the
            The disposal of products and packaging materials at the       manufacturer of the product or by a contractor. This
            end of a use phase is a steadily growing environmental        refers to products and their packaging materials that are:
            challenge. Establishing effective recycling and reuse
                                                                          •	   Collected by or on behalf of the reporting
            systems to close product cycles can contribute
                                                                               organization;
            significantly to increased material and resource
            efficiency. It also mitigates problems and costs related to
                                                                          •	   Separated into raw materials (e.g., steel, glass,
            disposal.
                                                                               paper, some kinds of plastic, etc.) or components;
                                                                               and
            This Indicator provides insight into the extent to which
            the reporting organization’s products, components,
                                                                          •	   Used by the reporting organization or other users.
            or materials are collected and successfully converted
            into useful materials for new production processes.
                                                                          4. Documentation
            It also provides insight into the degree to which the
            organization has designed products and packages               None.
            capable of being recycled or reused. This measure can
            be a particular source of competitive differentiation in      5. References
            sectors facing formal requirements to recycle products
                                                                          None.
            and their packaging materials.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify the amount of products and their
                 packaging materials reclaimed (i.e., recycled or
                 reused) at the end of their useful life within the
                 reporting period. Rejects and recalls of products
                 should not be counted. Recycling or reuse of
                 packaging should also be reported separately.

            2.2	   Report the percentage of reclaimed products and
                   their packaging materials for each category of
                   products (i.e., a group of related products sharing
                   a common, managed set of features that satisfy
                   the specific needs of a selected market) using the
                   following formula:

                           products and their packaging
            	              materials reclaimed within
            % of reclaimed the reporting period
            products = 				                                       x100	
                           products sold within the
            	              reporting period

            2.3	 Given potential variations in data sources, report
                 how the data for this Indicator has been collected
                 (e.g., data is gathered from an internal collection
                 system or data is provided by external collection
                 systems reclaiming products on behalf of the
                 organization).




34   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN             IP


EN28 Monetary value of significant                          2.3 	 Where reporting organizations have not identified
                                                                  any non-compliance with laws or regulations, a
fines and total number of non-monetary                            brief statement to this fact is sufficient.
sanctions for non-compliance with
                                                            3. Definitions
environmental laws and regulations.
                                                            Environmental laws and regulations
1. Relevance
                                                            Refers to regulations related to all types of
The level of non-compliance within the organization
                                                            environmental issues (i.e., emissions, effluents, and
helps indicate the ability of management to ensure
                                                            waste, as well as material use, energy, water, and
that operations conform to certain performance
                                                            biodiversity) applicable to the reporting organization.
parameters. From an economic perspective, ensuring
                                                            This includes binding voluntary agreements that are
compliance helps to reduce financial risks that occur
                                                            made with regulatory authorities and developed
either directly through fines or indirectly through
                                                            as a substitute for implementing a new regulation.
impacts on reputation. In some circumstances, non-
                                                            Voluntary agreements can be applicable if the
compliance can lead to clean-up obligations or other
                                                            reporting organization directly joins the agreement or
costly environmental liabilities. The strength of the
                                                            if public agencies make the agreement applicable to
organization’s compliance record can also affect its
                                                            organizations in their territory through legislation or
ability to expand operations or gain permits.
                                                            regulation.

2. Compilation                                              4. Documentation
2.1	 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions for      Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking
     failure to comply with environmental laws and          systems operated by the legal department. Information
     regulations, including:                                regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting
                                                            departments.
     •	   International declarations/conventions/
          treaties, and national, sub-national, regional,   5. References
          and local regulations. Include non-compliances
                                                            None.
          related to spills as disclosed under EN23 that
          meet the criteria for EN28;

     •	   Voluntary environmental agreements with
          regulating authorities that are considered
          binding and developed as a substitute for
          implementing new regulations. In certain
          jurisdictions, such agreements are referred to
          as ‘covenants’; and

     •	   Cases brought against the organization
          through the use of international dispute
          mechanisms or national dispute mechanisms
          supervised by government authorities.

2.2 	 Report significant fines and non-monetary
      sanctions in terms of:

     •	   Total monetary value of significant fines;

     •	   Number of non-monetary sanctions; and

     •	   Cases brought through dispute resolution
          mechanisms.




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1   35
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            EN29 Significant environmental                                    2.4	 Report how the environmental impacts
                                                                                   of transporting products, members of the
            impacts of transporting products and                                   organization’s workforce, and other goods and
            other goods and materials used for                                     materials are mitigated.

            the organization’s operations, and                                3. Definitions
            transporting members of the workforce.                            Transportation
            1. Relevance
                                                                              The act of transferring resources and goods from one
            The environmental impacts of transportation systems               location to another (between suppliers, production
            have a wide reach, from global warming to local smog              plants, warehouses, and the customer) using different
            and noise. For some companies, particularly those                 modes of transport, including passenger transportation
            with extensive supply and distribution networks,                  (e.g., employee commuting and business traveling).
            environmental impacts associated with logistics can
                                                                              Logistical purposes
            represent a major part of their environmental footprint.
            Assessing the impacts of transporting products, goods,            The forward or reverse flow and storage of goods and
            and materials for logistical purposes, and transporting           services between the point of origin and the point of
            members of the organization’s workforce, is part of a             consumption.
            comprehensive approach to planning environmental
                                                                              Transportation of the members of the
            management strategies.
                                                                              organization’s workforce

            2. Compilation                                                    Transportation used for commuting to work by members
                                                                              of the workforce or travel for business purposes
            2.1	 Identify the significant environmental impacts
                                                                              including air, train, bus, and other forms of motorized
                 of the modes of transportation used by the
                                                                              and non-motorized travel.
                 organization, including:
                                                                              4. Documentation
                  •	   Energy use (e.g., oil, kerosene, fuel, electricity);
                                                                              Potential sources of data include invoices from logistical
                                                                              service providers and suppliers, reports from the logistics
                  •	   Emissions (e.g., greenhouse gas emissions,
                                                                              department, records of vehicle usage and maintenance,
                       ozone-depleting substances, NOx, SOx, and
                                                                              and monitoring/measurement conducted by, for
                       other air emissions);
                                                                              example, the environment department.

                  •	   Effluents (e.g., different kinds of chemicals);
                                                                              5. References
                  •	   Waste (e.g., different types of packaging              •	   United Nations Recommendations on the
                       material);                                                  Transport of Dangerous Goods.

                  •	   Noise; and

                  •	   Spills (e.g., spills of chemicals, oils, and fuels).

            2.2	 Report the significant environmental impacts of
                 transportation used for logistical purposes and for
                 transportation of members of the organization’s
                 workforce. Where quantitative data is not stated in
                 the report, disclose the reason.

            2.3	 Indicate the criteria and methodology used to
                 determine which environmental impacts are
                 significant.




36   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: EN           IP


EN30 Total environmental protection                             •	   Insurance for environmental liability; and

expenditures and investments by type.                           •	   Clean-up costs, including costs for remediation
1. Relevance                                                         of spills as reported in EN23.

Measuring environmental mitigation and protection
                                                           2.3	 Identify prevention and environmental
expenditures allows organizations to assess the
                                                                management costs based on expenditures related
efficiency of their environmental initiatives. It also
                                                                to the following items:
provides valuable input for internal cost-benefit
analyses. Data on environmental performance measured
                                                                •	   Personnel employed for education and training;
against environmental mitigation and protection
expenditures offers insights into how effectively the
                                                                •	   External services for environmental
organization uses resources to improve performance.
                                                                     management;
When tracked and analyzed in a comprehensive
fashion over time, this expenditures data allows the
                                                                •	   External certification of management systems;
reporting organization to judge the value of complex
organizational or technological investments for
                                                                •	   Personnel for general environmental
improving environmental performance.
                                                                     management activities;
It is possible to establish a full environmental
                                                                •	   Research and development;
management accounting system within an organization
that tracks multiple categories of information. This
                                                                •	   Extra expenditures to install cleaner
Indicator focuses on waste disposal, emissions
                                                                     technologies (e.g., additional cost beyond
treatment, remediation costs, as well as prevention and
                                                                     standard technologies);
environmental management costs.

                                                                •	   Extra expenditures on green purchases; and
2. Compilation
2.1	 The compilation of the expenditures in this                •	   Other environmental management costs.
     Indicator should exclude the following categories
     as defined in the IFAC ‘International Guidance        2.4	 Report total environmental protection
     Document on Environmental Management                       expenditures broken down by:
     Accounting’ document:
                                                                •	   Waste disposal, emissions treatment, and
     •	   Costs of non-product output; and                           remediation costs; and

     •	   Fines for non-compliance with environmental           •	   Prevention and environmental management
          regulation.                                                costs.

2.2	 Identify waste disposal, emissions treatment, and     3. Definitions
     remediation costs based on expenditures related
                                                           Environmental protection expenditures
     to the following items:
                                                           All expenditures on environmental protection by the
     •	   Treatment and disposal of waste;                 reporting organization, or on its behalf, to prevent,
                                                           reduce, control, and document environmental aspects,
     •	   Treatment of emissions (e.g., expenditures for   impacts, and hazards. It also includes disposal,
          filters, agents);                                treatment, sanitation, and clean-up expenditure.

                                                           4. Documentation
     •	   Expenditures for the purchase and use of
          emissions certificates;                          Potential information sources include billing and
                                                           accounting systems (e.g., Environmental Management
     •	   Depreciation of related equipment,               Accounting) as well as procurement, human resource,
          maintenance, and operating material and          and legal departments.
          services, and related personnel costs;




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   37
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: EN



            5. References
            •	    IFAC- The International Federation of Accountants
                  (2005) ‘International Guidance Document on
                  Environmental Management Accounting’.

            •	    UNDSD- United Nations Division for Sustainable
                  Development (2003): Environmental Management
                  Accounting Procedures and Principles (EMARIC
                  Environmental Management Accounting Research
                  and Information Center, 2003).




38   © 2000-2011 GRI
IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Labor Practices and Decent Work (LA)




© 2000-2011 GRI               Version 3.1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: LA        IP


Labor Practices  Decent Work
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Employment
                                                                       LA9	 Health and safety topics covered in formal
         LA1 	 Total workforce by employment type,                          agreements with trade unions.Health and
Co r e




               employment contract, and region, broken                      safety topics covered in formal agreements




                                                              Add
               down by gender.                                              with trade unions.

                                                              Aspect: Training and Education
         LA2 	 Total number and rate of new employee hires
Co r e




               and employee turnover by age group, gender,             LA10 	 Average hours of training per year per




                                                              Co r e
               and region.                                                    employee, by gender, and by employee
                                                                              category.
         LA3	 Benefits provided to full-time employees
              that are not provided to temporary or part-              LA11	 Programs for skills management and
              time employees, by significant locations of                    lifelong learning that support the continued
Add




              operation.                                      Add            employability of employees and assist them in
                                                                             managing career endings.
         LA15 	 Return to work and retention rates after
Co r e




                parental leave, by gender.                             LA12	 Percentage of employees receiving regular
                                                                             performance and career development
                                                              Add




Aspect: Labor/ Management Relations                                          reviews, by gender.

         LA4 	 Percentage of employees covered by             Aspect: Diversity and Equal Opportunity
Co r e




               collective bargaining agreements.
                                                                       LA13 	 Composition of governance bodies and
                                                                              breakdown of employees per employee
                                                                              category according to gender, age group,
         LA5 	 Minimum notice period(s) regarding
                                                              Co r e




                                                                              minority group membership, and other
               significant operational changes, including
                                                                              indicators of diversity.
Co r e




               whether it is specified in collective
               agreements.                                    Aspect: Equal Remuneration for Women and Men

Aspect: Occupational Health and Safety                                 LA14	 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of
                                                              Co r e




                                                                             women to men by employee category, by
         LA6	 Percentage of total workforce represented
                                                                             significant locations of operation.
              in formal joint management-worker health
              and safety committees that help monitor
              and advise on occupational health and safety
Add




              programs.

         LA7 	 Rates of injury, occupational diseases, lost
               days, and absenteeism, and total number
Co r e




               of work-related fatalities, by region and by
               gender.

         LA8 	 Education, training, counseling, prevention,
               and risk-control programs in place to
               assist workforce members, their families,
Co r e




               or community members regarding serious
               diseases.




                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            Relevance                                                     Employee
            The ILO Decent Work Agenda is framed within the context       An individual who is, according to national law or
            of fair globalization, which aims to achieve both economic    practices, recognized as an employee of the reporting
            growth and equity through a combination of social and         organization.
            economic goals. The Agenda has four elements:
                                                                          Supervised worker
            •	    Employment;
                                                                          An individual who performs regular work on-site for, or on
                                                                          behalf of, the reporting organization but is not recognized
            •	    Dialogue;
                                                                          as an employee under national law or practice.

            •	    Rights; and
                                                                          Independent contractor
            •	    Protection.                                             An individual legally recognized as being self-employed.

            The structure of the Labor Indicators is broadly based        Collective bargaining agreements
            on the concept of decent work. The set begins with
                                                                          There are two types of collective bargaining agreements,
            disclosures on the scope and diversity of the reporting
                                                                          aimed either at employers or workers. Those aimed at
            organization’s workforce, emphasizing aspects of gender
                                                                          employers are agreements in writing regarding working
            and age distribution.
                                                                          conditions and terms of employment concluded
                                                                          between an employer, a group of employers, or one or
            The approach to dialogue between the organization and
                                                                          more employers’ organizations. Those aimed at workers
            its employees, and the degree to which employees
                                                                          are agreements between one or more representative
            are organized in representative bodies are covered by
                                                                          workers’ organizations, or, in the absence of such
            Indicators LA4 (which complements Indicator HR5 on
                                                                          organizations, the representatives of the workers duly
            Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining) and LA5.
                                                                          elected and authorized by them in accordance with
                                                                          national laws and regulations.
            The physical protection and well-being of people at work
            is covered by Occupational Health and Safety Indicators
                                                                          Employee categories
            (LA6, LA7, LA8, LA9), which address both the scope of
            programs as well as statistical performance on health         Breakdown of employees, by level (e.g., highest governance
            and safety.                                                   bodies, senior management, middle management, etc)
                                                                          and function (e.g., technical, administrative, production,
            The scope of employee benefits and contributions toward       etc). Derived from an organization’s own human resources
            a broad social goal of diversity and equal treatment is       system.
            addressed by LA14 (Pay Equity), LA13 (Diversity) and
            LA3 (Benefits). Indicators in the Economics category also     General References
            provide relevant information. The support organizations
                                                                          •	    Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of
            provide to employees to enhance personal skills and
                                                                                Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979.
            potential (which also improves the organization’s human
            capital) is represented in Indicators LA10, LA11, and LA12.   •	    I
                                                                                LO Convention 135, ‘Workers’ Representatives
                                                                                Convention’, 1971.
            Definitions
                                                                          •	    I
                                                                                LO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and
            Total workforce                                                     Protection of the Right to Organise’, 1948.

            The total number of persons working for the reporting
                                                                          •	    I
                                                                                LO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and
            organization at the end of the reporting period (i.e., the
                                                                                Collective Bargaining’, 1949.
            sum of all employees and supervised workers as defined
            above).
                                                                          •	    I
                                                                                LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
                                                                                Rights at Work, 1998.
            Worker
            Generic term for any person performing work, regardless       •	    ILO Decent Work Agenda, 1999.
            of the contractual relationship.




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA     IP


•	   I
     LO Tripartite Declaration Concerning Multi-
     nationals and Social Policy, 1977, amended 2000.

•	   O
      ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004.

•	   O
      ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
     Revision 2000.

•	   UNIFEM  UNGC Women’s Empowerment
     Principles, 2010.

•	   United Nations Millennium Declaration, 2000.




                                                                          Version 3.1   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA1 Total workforce by employment                                2.5 	 If a substantial portion of the organization’s work is
                                                                                   performed by workers who are legally recognized
            type, employment contract, and region,                                 as self-employed, or by individuals other than
            broken down by gender.                                                 employees or supervised workers, this should be
                                                                                   reported.
            1. Relevance
                                                                             2.6   R
                                                                                    eport the total number of employees broken
            The size of a workforce provides insight into the scale
                                                                                   down by employment contract and gender.
            of impacts created by labor issues. Breaking down the
            workforce by employment type, employment contract,
                                                                             2.7	 Report the total number of permanent employees
            and region (region refers to ‘country’ or ‘geographical
                                                                                  broken down by employment type and gender.
            area’) demonstrates how the organization structures
            its human resources to implement its overall strategy.
                                                                             2.8	 Report the total workforce broken down by
            It also provides insight into the organization’s business
                                                                                  region and gender, based on the scale of the
            model, and offers an indication of job stability and
                                                                                  organization’s operations.
            the level of benefits the organization offers. Breaking
            down this data by gender enables an understanding of
                                                                             2.9	 If applicable, explain any significant seasonal
            gender representation across an organization, and of
                                                                                  variations in employment numbers (e.g., in the
            the optimal use of available labor and talent. As a basis
                                                                                  tourism or agricultural industries).
            for calculations in several other Indicators, the size of
            the workforce is a standard normalizing factor for many
                                                                             3. Definitions
            integrated Indicators. A rise or fall in net employment,
            evidenced by data reported over the course of three or
                                                                             Employment types
            more years, is an important element of the organization’s
            contribution to the overall economic development and             Full time: A ‘full-time employee’ is defined according to
            sustainability of the workforce.1                                national legislation and practice regarding working time
                                                                             (e.g., national legislation defines that ‘full-time’ means a
            2. Compilation                                                   minimum of nine months per year and a minimum of 30
                                                                             hours per week).
            2.1	 Identify the total workforce (employees and
                 supervised workers) broken down by gender
                                                                             Part-time: A ‘part-time employee’ is an employee whose
                 working for the reporting organization at the end
                                                                             working hours per week, month, or year are less than ‘full
                 of the reporting period. Supply chain workers are
                                                                             time’ as defined above.
                 not included in this Indicator.

                                                                             Employment Contract
            2.2	 Identify the contract type and full-time and part-
                 time status of employees based on the definitions           An employment contract as recognized under national
                 under the national laws of the country where they           law or practice that may be written, verbal, or implicit
                 are based.                                                  (i.e., when all the characteristics of employment are
                                                                             present but without a written or witnessed verbal
            2.3 	 Combine country statistics to calculate global             contract).
                  statistics and disregard differences in legal
                  definitions. Although the definitions of what              Indefinite or Permanent Contract:
                  constitutes types of contract and a full-time or           A permanent contract of employment is a contract
                  part-time employment relationship may vary                 with an employee for full-time or part-time work for an
                  between countries, the global figure will still reflect    indeterminate period.
                  the relationships under law.
                                                                             Fixed Term or Temporary Contract:
            2.4	 Report the total workforce broken down by                   A fixed term contract is a contract of employment as
                 employees and supervised workers, and by gender.            defined above that ends when a specific time period
                                                                             expires, or when a specific task that has a time estimate
                                                                             attached is completed.

            1
                S
                 ee GRI Guidelines on expectations regarding reporting of
                multiple years’ data.




4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA     IP


A temporary contract of employment is of limited
duration and terminated by a specific event, including
the end of a project or work phase, return of replaced
personnel, etc.

4. Documentation

Payroll information available at the national or site level
should provide data for this Indicator.

5. References
•	    ILO: International Classification of Status in
      Employment.

•	    ILO: Key Indicators of the Labour Market.

•	    ILO: LABORSTA Internet Indicators.

•	    United Nations: World Macro Regions and
      Components.




                                                                                Version 3.1   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA2 Total number and rate of new                              New employee hires

            employee hires and employee turnover                          New employees joining the organization for the first
                                                                          time.
            by age group, gender, and region.
            1. Relevance                                                  4. Documentation
            A high turnover rate can indicate levels of uncertainty       Potential sources of information include payroll
            and dissatisfaction among employees, or may signal            information available at the national or site level.
            a fundamental change in the structure of the                  Operational plans and restatements of the organization’s
            organization’s core operations. An uneven pattern of          key strategic targets may provide explanations for large
            turnover by age or gender can indicate incompatibility        variations in this figure.
            or potential inequity in the workplace. Turnover results
            in changes to the human and intellectual capital of the       5. References
            organization and can impact productivity. Turnover has
                                                                          None.
            direct cost implications either in terms of reduced payroll
            or greater expenses for recruitment of workers.

            The number, age, gender, and region of new employee
            hires of the reporting organization can indicate the
            organization’s strategy and ability to attract diverse
            qualified employees. This information can signify the
            organization’s efforts to implement inclusive recruitment
            practices based on age and gender, and the optimal use
            of available labor and talent in different regions.

            Employment net creation can be estimated using the
            data reported under Indicator LA1.

            2. Compilation
            2.1 	 Identify the total number of new employee hires
                  during the reporting period, broken down by age
                  group, gender and region.

            2.2	   Identify the total number of new employee hires
                   leaving employment during the reporting period,
                   broken down by age group, gender and region.

            2.3 	 Report the total number and rate of new employee
                  hires entering and employees leaving employment
                  during the reporting period, broken down by age
                  group (e.g., 30;30-50;50), gender and region.

                   Rates should be calculated using the total
                   employee numbers at the end of the reporting
                   period.

            3. Definitions
            Employee Turnover

            Number of employees who leave the organization
            voluntarily or due to dismissal, retirement, or death in
            service.




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA          IP


LA3 Benefits provided to full-time                               4. Documentation
employees that are not provided to                               Potential sources of information include local or central
                                                                 collective agreements, which may provide examples of
temporary or part-time employees, by                             benefits paid beyond legal minimums. Other reference
significant locations of operation.                              tools may include benefits summaries, employee
                                                                 orientation/commencement materials, and employee
1. Relevance
                                                                 contracts.
Data reported under this Indicator provides a measure
of the organization’s investment in human resources and          5. References
the minimum benefits it offers its full time employees.
                                                                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 102, ‘Social Security
The quality of benefits for full-time staff is a key factor in
                                                                      (Minimum Standards) Convention’, 1952.
retaining employees. The Indicator also measures relative
investment in different parts of the workforce.
                                                                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 121, ‘Employment Injury Benefits
                                                                      Convention’, 1964.
2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify benefits offered to all employees.                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 128, ‘Invalidity, Old-Age and
                                                                      Survivors’ Benefits Convention’, 1967.
2.2 	 Report which of the following benefits are standard
      for full-time employees of the organization but are        •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 130, ‘Medical Care and Sickness
      not provided to temporary or part-time employees,               Benefits Convention’, 1969.
      broken down by significant locations of operation:
                                                                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 132, ‘Holidays with Pay Convention
      •	   Life insurance;
                                                                      (Revised)’ 1970.
      •	   Health care;
                                                                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 140, ‘Paid Educational Leave
      •	   Disability/invalidity coverage;
                                                                      Convention’, 1974.
      •	   Parental leave;
                                                                 •	   ILO Convention 156, ‘Workers with Family
      •	   Retirement provision;
                                                                      Responsibilities Convention’, 1981.
      •	   Stock ownership; and
                                                                 •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 157, ‘Maintenance of Social
      •	   Others.                                                    Security Rights’, 1982.

2.3 	 Standard benefits refer to those typically offered         •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 168, ‘Employment Promotion and
      to at least the majority of full-time employees. This           Protection against Unemployment Convention’,
      should not be interpreted as being offered to every             1988.
      single full-time employee of the organization. The
      intention of the Indicator is to disclose what full-       •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 183, ‘Maternity Protection
      time employees can reasonably expect.                           Convention’, 2000.

3. Definitions                                                   •	   O
                                                                       ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                                                                      Revision 2000.
Benefits

This refers to either direct benefit provided in the form
of financial contributions, care paid for by the reporting
organization, or the reimbursement of expenses borne
by the employee. Redundancy payments over and
above legal minimums, lay-off pay, extra employment
injury benefit, survivors’ benefits, and extra paid holiday
entitlements could also be included under this Indicator.
In-kind benefits such as provision of sports or child day
care facilities, free meals during working time, and
similar general employee welfare programs are excluded
from this Indicator.


                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA15 Return to work and retention                           4. Documentation
            rates after parental leave, by gender.                      Potential sources of information include the human
                                                                        resources departments.
            1. Relevance
            Many countries have introduced legislation to               5. References
            provide a specific length of parental leave. However,
                                                                        •	   ILO Convention 156, ‘Workers with Family
            the application of legislation will vary according
                                                                             Responsibilities Convention’, 1981
            to interpretation by government, employers and
            employees.
                                                                        •	   ILO Convention 183, ‘Maternity Protection
                                                                             Convention’, 2000.
            The aim of the legislation is to allow employees to take
            leave and return to work to the same or a comparable
            position. However, many women are discouraged from
            taking leave and returning to work by employer practices
            that affect their employment security, remuneration and
            career path. Many men are not encouraged to take the
            leave to which they are entitled.

            Equitable gender choice for maternity and paternity
            leave, and other leave entitlements, can lead to the
            greater recruitment and retention of qualified staff, and
            boost employee morale and productivity. Men’s uptake
            of paternity leave options can indicate the degree to
            which an organization encourages fathers to take such
            leave. More men taking advantage of leave entitlements
            has a positive effect for women in taking such leave
            without prejudicing their career path.

            2. Compilation
            2.1 	 Report the number of employees by gender that
                  were entitled to parental leave.

            2.2 	 Report the number of employees by gender that
                  took parental leave.

            2.3 	 Report the number of employees who returned to
                  work after parental leave ended, by gender.

            2.4 	 Report the number of employees who returned
                  to work after parental leave ended who were still
                  employed twelve months after their return to work,
                  by gender.

            2.5 	 Report the return to work and retention rates
                  of employees who returned to work after leave
                  ended, by gender.

            3. Definitions
            Parental Leave

            Leave granted to men and women workers on the
            grounds of the birth of a child.




8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA             IP


LA4 Percentage of employees covered                            4. Documentation
by collective bargaining agreements.                           Records of formal recognition agreements and signed
                                                               collective agreements with independent trade unions
1. Relevance
                                                               will normally be held by the human resources or
Freedom of association is a human right as defined by          personnel department of the reporting organization.
international declarations and conventions, particularly
ILO Core Conventions 87  98. Collective bargaining            5. References
is an important form of stakeholder engagement and
                                                               •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and
particularly relevant for reporting guidelines. It is a form
                                                                    Protection of the Right to Organise’, 1948.
of stakeholder engagement that helps build institutional
frameworks and is seen by many as contributing to a
                                                               •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and
stable society. Together with corporate governance,
                                                                    Collective Bargaining’, 1949.
collective bargaining is part of an overall framework
that contributes to responsible management. It is an
                                                               •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 135, ‘Workers’ Representatives
instrument used by parties to facilitate collaborative
                                                                    Convention’, 1971.
efforts to enhance the positive social impacts of an
organization. The percentage of employees covered by
                                                               •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 154, ‘Collective Bargaining
collective bargaining agreements is the most direct way
                                                                    Convention’, 1981 and Recommendations 91,
to demonstrate an organization’s practices in relation to
                                                                    ‘Collective Agreements Recommendation’ 1951,
freedom of association.
                                                                    and 163, ‘Collective Bargaining Recommendation’,
                                                                    1981.
2. Compilation
2.1	 Use data from LA1 as the basis for calculating            •	   I
                                                                    LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
     percentages for this Indicator.                                Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998, Article 2 (a).

2.2	 Binding collective bargaining agreements include          •	   O
                                                                     ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
     those signed by the reporting organization itself or           Section IV, Paragraph 2 (a).
     by employer organizations of which it is a member.
     These agreements can be at the sector, national,
     regional, organizational, or workplace level.

2.3	 Identify the total number of employees covered by
     collective bargaining agreements.

2.4	 Report the percentage of total employees covered
     by collective bargaining agreements.

3. Definitions
None.




                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA5 Minimum notice period(s) regarding                     4. Documentation
            significant operational changes,                           Agreements specific to the organization will provide data
                                                                       for this Indicator.
            including whether it is specified in
            collective agreements.                                     5. References
            1. Relevance                                               •	   D
                                                                             eclaration concerning the aims and purposes of
                                                                            the International Labour Organisation (Declaration
            This Indicator provides insight into an organization’s
                                                                            of Philadelphia), 1944 - Annex to the ILO
            practice of ensuring timely discussion of significant
                                                                            Constitution – Articles I (a) and III (e).
            operational changes, and engaging with its employees
            and their representatives to negotiate and implement
                                                                       •	   I
                                                                            LO Convention 158, ‘Termination of Employment
            these changes (which may have positive or negative
                                                                            Convention’, 1982.
            implications for workers). Timely and effective
            consultation with workers and other relevant parties,
                                                                       •	   I
                                                                            LO Tripartite Declaration of Principles Concerning
            where practicable (such as with governmental
                                                                            Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy, 1997.
            authorities), helps to minimize any adverse impacts from
            operating changes on workers and related communities.
                                                                       •	   I
                                                                            LO Recommendation 94, ‘Co-operation at the
                                                                            Level of the Undertaking Recommendation’, 1952.
            Minimum notice period(s) are an Indicator of an
            organization’s ability to maintain employee satisfaction
                                                                       •	   I
                                                                            LO Recommendation 135, ‘Workers’
            and motivation while implementing significant
                                                                            Representatives’ Convention’, 1971.
            changes to operations. This Indicator also allows an
            assessment of an organization’s consultation practices
                                                                       •	   O
                                                                             ECD Guidelines for Multinational Companies,
            in relation to expectations expressed in relevant
                                                                            Revision 2000, Article IV, (2)  (3).
            international norms. Consultative practices that result
            in good industrial relations can help provide positive
                                                                       •	   O
                                                                             ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004
            working environments, reduce turnover, and minimize
                                                                            (notably Article IV, C, D  E).
            operational disruptions.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report the minimum number of weeks notice
                 typically provided to employees and their elected
                 representatives prior to the implementation
                 of significant operational changes that could
                 substantially affect them.

            2.2	 For organizations with collective bargaining
                 agreements, report whether the notice period and/
                 or provisions for consultation and negotiation are
                 specified in collective agreements.

            3. Definitions

            Significant operational changes

            Alterations to the reporting organization’s pattern
            of operations that will have substantial positive or
            negative consequences for its employees. Such changes
            may include, for example, restructuring, outsourcing
            of operations, closures, expansions, new openings,
            takeovers, sale of all or part of the organization, or
            mergers.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA         IP


LA6 Percentage of total workforce                              4. Documentation
represented in formal joint management-                        Potential sources of information include organizational
                                                               procedures and minutes of occupational health  safety
worker health and safety committees                            committee(s).
that help monitor and advise on                                5. References
occupational health and safety programs.                       •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and
1. Relevance                                                        Health Convention’ and Protocol 155, 1981.

A health and safety committee with joint representation
                                                               •	   I
                                                                    LO Convention 161, ‘Occupational Health Services
can facilitate a positive health and safety culture. The use
                                                                    Convention’, 1985.
of committees is one way to involve workers in driving
the improvement of occupational health and safety in
the workplace. This Indicator provides one measure of
the extent to which the workforce is actively involved in
health and safety.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify formal health and safety committees that
     help monitor and advise on occupational safety
     programs at the facility level or higher with joint
     management/labor representation. ‘Formal’ refers
     to committees whose existence and function
     are integrated in the reporting organization’s
     organizational and authority structure, and that
     operate according to certain agreed, written rules.

2.2	 Report the percentage of the total workforce
     represented in formal joint management-worker
     health and safety committees:

      •	   None;

      •	   Up to 25%;

      •	   Between 25% and 50%;

      •	   Between 50% and 75%; and

      •	   Over 75%.

2.3	 Report the level(s) at which the committee(s)
     typically operates (e.g., at facility level and/or at
     multi-facility, region, group, or company levels). This
     may either be a result of a formal policy, procedure,
     or informal practice within the organization.

3. Definitions
None.




                                                                                                                    Version 3.1   11
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA7 Rates of injury, occupational                                        •	    Occupational diseases rate (ODR)

            diseases, lost days, and absenteeism, and                          ODR=
                                                                                          Total # of Occupational diseases cases
                                                                                                                                 x 200,000
            total number of work-related fatalities,                                                 Total hours worked

            by region and by gender.                                                 •	    Lost day rate (LDR)

            1. Relevance                                                                         Total # of lost days
                                                                                     LDR=                             x 200,000
            Health and safety performance is a key measure of an                                Total hours worked
            organization’s duty of care. Low injury and absentee
            rates are generally linked to positive trends in staff morale            •	    Absentee rate (AR)
            and productivity. This Indicator will show whether health
                                                                                        Total # of missed (absentee) days
            and safety management practices are resulting in fewer
                                                                                        		 over the period
            occupational health and safety incidents. An evaluation of              AR=                                   x 200,000
                                                                                        Total # of workforce days worked
            trends and patterns may also indicate potential workplace
                                                                                                 for same period
            inequity.
                                                                                     Note: The factor 200,000 is derived from 50 working
            2. Compilation                                                           weeks @ 40 hours per 100 employees.
            2.1	 This Indicator should provide a regional                            By using this factor, the resulting rate is related to the
                 breakdown for the following, by gender:                             number of employees, not the number of hours.

                                                                               2.5	 Report fatalities in the reporting period by gender,
                  •	   The total workforce (i.e., total employees plus
                                                                                    using an absolute number, not a rate.
                       supervised workers); and

                                                                               2.6	 Report the system of rules applied in recording
                  •	   Independent contractors working on-site to
                                                                                    and reporting accident statistics. The ‘ILO Code
                       whom the reporting organization is liable for
                                                                                    of Practice on Recording and Notification of
                       the general safety of the working environment.
                                                                                    Occupational Accidents and Diseases’ was
                                                                                    developed for the reporting, recording, and
            2.2	 Since some reporting organizations include minor
                                                                                    notification of workplace accidents. Where
                 (first-aid level) injuries in their data, indicate
                                                                                    national law follows the ILO recommendations, it is
                 whether such injuries are included or excluded.
                                                                                    sufficient to state that fact and that practice follows
                                                                                    the law. In situations where national law does not
            2.3	 In calculating ‘lost days’ indicate:
                                                                                    comply, indicate which system of rules it applies
                                                                                    and their relationship to the ILO code.
                  •	   Whether ‘days’ means ‘calendar days’ or
                       ‘scheduled work days’; and
                                                                               3. Definitions
                  •	   At what point the ‘lost days’ count begins (e.g., the
                                                                               Injury
                       day after the accident or 3 days after the accident).
                                                                               A non-fatal or fatal injury arising out of or in the course
            2.4	Report regional breakdown and total of injury,                 of work.
                occupational diseases, lost days, and absentee
                                                                               Injury rate
                rates in the reporting period by gender, using the
                following formula:                                             The frequency of injuries relative to the total time
                                                                               worked by the total workforce in the reporting period.
                  •	   Injury rate (IR)
                                                                               Occupational disease
                              Total # of injuries
                       IR=                        x 200,000                    A disease arising from the work situation or activity (e.g.,
                             Total hours worked                                stress or regular exposure to harmful chemicals), or from
                       Note: The injury rate should capture fatalities.        a work-related injury.

                                                                               Occupational disease rate

                                                                               The frequency of occupational diseases relative to the
                                                                               total time worked by the total workforce in the reporting
                                                                               period.


12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA     IP


Lost day

Time (‘days’) that could not be worked (and is thus
‘lost’) as a consequence of a worker or workers being
unable to perform their usual work because of an
occupational accident or disease. A return to limited
duty or alternative work for the same organization does
not count as lost days.

Lost day rate

The impact of occupational accidents and diseases as
reflected in time off work by the affected workers. It
is expressed by comparing the total lost days to the
total number of hours scheduled to be worked by the
workforce in the reporting period.

Absentee

An employee absent from work because of incapacity
of any kind, not just as the result of work-related injury
or disease. Permitted leave absences such as holidays,
study, maternity/paternity, and compassionate leave are
excluded.
Absentee rate

Refers to a measure of actual absentee days lost as
defined above, expressed as a percentage of total days
scheduled to be worked by the workforce for the same
period.
Fatality

The death of a worker occurring in the current
reporting period, arising from an occupational injury or
disease sustained or contracted while in the reporting
organization’s employ.

4. Documentation
Employee records, employee contracts, attendance
records, and accident records will provide relevant data
for this Indicator.

5. References
•	   I
     LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Health  Safety
     Convention’ and Protocol 155, 1981.

•	   I
     LO Code of Practice on Recording and Notification
     of Occupational Accidents and Diseases, 1995.

•	   I
     LO Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health
     Management Systems, 2001.




                                                                               Version 3.1   13
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA8 Education, training, counseling,                                Serious diseases

            prevention, and risk-control programs                               Occupational or non-occupational related impairment of
                                                                                health with serious consequences for employees, their
            in place to assist workforce members,                               families, and communities, such as HIV/AIDS, diabetes,
            their families, or community members                                RSI, and stress.

            regarding serious diseases.                                         4. Documentation
            1. Relevance
                                                                                Potential sources of information include organizational
            As part of a preventative strategy for managing the                 policies and operating procedures, minutes of internal
            health and safety of its workforce, this Indicator is               occupational health committee(s), and human resource
            relevant for any organization. It also has specific                 and health center records.
            relevance for organizations working in countries with
            a high risk or incidence of communicable diseases,                  5. References
            and those in professions that have a high incidence
                                                                                •	   G
                                                                                      RI Cross-Reference: Reporting Guidance on
            of specific diseases. The Indicator helps demonstrate
                                                                                     HIV/AIDS: A GRI Resource Document. LA8 is
            the extent to which such issues have been addressed
                                                                                     a standard Indicator relevant for HIV/AIDS.
            in organizational programs and the degree to which
                                                                                     Reporting organizations operating in areas with
            best practices are applied. Preventing serious diseases
                                                                                     high prevalence should consider expanding
            contributes to the health, satisfaction, and stability of the
                                                                                     their reporting on this issue and can view the GRI
            workforce, and helps maintain the organization’s social
                                                                                     Resource Document for examples.
            license to operate in a community or region.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report the programs related to assisting workforce
                 members, their families, or community members
                 regarding serious diseases using the table below:

              Assistance Programs

                           Education/   Counseling   Prevention/    Treatment
                            Training                 Risk Control


              Program
                           Yes   No     Yes   No     Yes    No      Yes   No
              recipients

              Workers

              Workers’
              families

              Com-
              munity
              members


            2.2	 Report whether there are workers who are
                 involved in occupational activities who have
                 a high incidence or high risk of specific diseases.

            3. Definitions

            Risk control

            Practices that seek to limit exposure and transmission of
            diseases.




14   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA         IP


LA9 Health and safety topics covered in                          3. Definitions
formal agreements with trade unions.                             Formal agreements

1. Relevance                                                     Written documents signed by both parties declaring
                                                                 a mutual intention to abide by what is contained in
This Indicator demonstrates one of the ways in which
                                                                 the documents. These can include, for example, local
the health and safety of the workforce is ensured.
                                                                 collective bargaining agreements as well as national and
Formal agreements can promote the acceptance of
                                                                 international framework agreements.
responsibilities by both parties and the development of a
positive health and safety culture. This Indicator will reveal
                                                                 4. Documentation
the extent to which the workforce is actively involved in
formal, labor-management agreements that determine               Potential sources of information include collective
health and safety management arrangements.                       agreements with trade unions.

2. Compilation                                                   5. References
2.1	 Report whether formal agreements (either local or           •	   I
                                                                      LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and
     global) with trade unions cover health and safety.               Health Convention’ and its Protocol 155, 1981.
     (Yes/No)

2.2 	 If yes, report the extent to which various health
      and safety topics are covered by local and global
      agreements signed by the organization.

	     Agreements at the local level typically address
      topics such as:

      •	   Personal protective equipment;

      •	   Joint management-employee health and safety
           committees;

      •	   Participation of worker representatives in
           health and safety inspections, audits, and
           accident investigations;

      •	   Training and education;

      •	   Complaints mechanism;

      •	   Right to refuse unsafe work; and

      •	   Periodic inspections.

	     Agreements at the global level typically address
      topics such as:

      •	   Compliance with the ILO;

      •	   Arrangements or structures for resolving
           problems; and

      •	   Commitments regarding target performance
           standards or level of practice to apply.




                                                                                                                       Version 3.1   15
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA10 Average hours of training per                            •	   P
                                                                                aid educational leave provided by the reporting
                                                                               organization for its employees;
            year per employee, by gender, and by
            employee category.                                            •	   T
                                                                                raining or education pursued externally and
                                                                               paid for in whole or in part by the reporting
            1. Relevance
                                                                               organization; and
            Maintaining and improving human capital, particularly
            through training that expands the knowledge base              •	   T
                                                                                raining on specific topics such as health and safety.
            of employees, is a key element in organizational
                                                                          Training does not include on-site coaching by
            development. This Indicator provides insight into the
                                                                          supervisors.
            scale of the organization’s investment in this area and the
            degree to which the investment is made across the entire
                                                                          Employee Category
            employee base. Access to training opportunities can also
            support progress in other areas of social performance,        Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest
            such as ensuring equal opportunity in the workplace.          governance bodies, senior management, middle
            It also contributes to motivating improvement at the          management, etc) and function (e.g., technical,
            personal and organizational level.                            administrative, production, etc). Derived from an
                                                                          organization’s own human resources system.
            2. Compilation
                                                                          4. Documentation
            2.1	 Identify the total number of employees, by
                 gender in each employee category across the              Potential sources of information include employee
                 organization’s operations at the end of the              records and training schedules.
                 reporting year.
                                                                          5. References
            2.2	 Identify total hours devoted to training personnel
                                                                          •	   I
                                                                               LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources
                 within each employee category.
                                                                               Development Convention’, 1975.

            2.3	 Report the average number of hours of training per
                                                                          •	   I
                                                                               LO Convention 140, ‘Paid Educational Leave
                 year per employee by employee category using
                                                                               Convention’, 1974.
                 the following formula:

                   Total number of hours per employee category            •	   I
                                                                               LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and
                                                                               Health Convention’, 1981.
                             Total number of employees per
                                    employee category                     •	   O
                                                                                ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                                                                               Revision 2000, Articles II, 4  IV, 2 (c), 3  5.
            2.4 	 Identify total hours devoted to training personnel
                  per gender.

            2.5 	 Report the average number of training per year per
                  gender using the following formula:

                           Total number of hours by gender

                         Total number of employees by gender


            3. Definitions
            Training

            Refers to:

            •	    All types of vocational training and instruction;




16   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA             IP


LA11 Programs for skills management                          3. Definitions
and lifelong learning that support the                       Continued employability

continued employability of employees and                     Adaptation to the changing demands of the workplace
                                                             through the acquisition of new skills.
assist them in managing career endings.
1. Relevance                                                 Career endings

Programs for skills management allow organizations to        Retirement by reaching statutory national retiring age
plan skills acquisitions that will equip employees to meet   or termination in the face of restructuring.
strategic targets in a changing work environment. A more
skilled and aware workforce enhances the organization’s      Skills management
human capital and contributes to employee satisfaction,
                                                             Policies and programs that focus on developing
which correlates strongly with improved performance. For
                                                             employees’ skills to meet the evolving strategic needs
those facing retirement, confidence and quality of work
                                                             of the organization and/or the industry.
relations is improved by the knowledge that they will be
supported in their transition from work to retirement. The
                                                             Lifelong learning
goal of lifelong learning is to promote the development
of knowledge and competencies that will enable each          Acquiring and updating abilities, knowledge,
citizen to adapt to a rapidly-changing labor market and to   qualifications, and interests throughout life, from pre-
participate actively in all spheres of economic life.        school years to post-retirement.

2. Compilation                                               4. Documentation
2.1	 Do employee training or assistance programs to          Potential sources of information include organizational
     upgrade skills provide any of the following?            procedures for termination and employee records.

	    •	   Internal training courses;                         5. References
                                                             •	    I
                                                                   LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources
	    •	   F
           unding support for external training or
                                                                   Development Convention’, 1975.
          education; and	

                                                             •	    I
                                                                   LO Convention 168, ‘Employment Promotion and
	    •	   T
           he provision of sabbatical periods with
                                                                   Protection against Unemployment Convention’,
          guaranteed return to employment.	
                                                                   1988.
          	

2.2	 Do transition assistance programs to support
     employees who are retiring or who have been
     terminated provide any of the following:

	    •	   Pre-retirement planning for intended retirees;

	    •	   R
           etraining for those intending to continue
          working;	

	    •	   Severance pay;

	    •	   I
           f severance pay is provided, does it take into
          account employee age and years of service;

	    •	   Job placement services; and

	    •	   A
           ssistance (e.g., training, counseling) on
          transitioning to a non-working life.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   17
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            LA12 Percentage of employees receiving                       5. References
            regular performance and career                               •	   I
                                                                              LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources
                                                                              Development’, 1975.
            development reviews, by gender.
            1. Relevance
            Appraising employee performance against
            common targets aids the personal development of
            individual employees and contributes to both skills
            management and the development of human capital
            within the organization. Employee satisfaction can
            also be enhanced, which correlates with improved
            organizational performance. This Indicator indirectly
            demonstrates how the reporting organization works
            to monitor and maintain the skill sets of its employees.
            When reported in conjunction with LA12, the Indicator
            helps illustrate how the organization approaches skills
            enhancement. The percentage of employees receiving
            regular performance and career development reviews
            broken down by gender demonstrates the extent to
            which this system is applied throughout the organization
            and if there is inequity of access to these opportunities.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify the total number of employees broken
                 down by gender. The total number of employees
                 should match that reported under LA1.

            2.2	 Report the percentage of total employees by
                 gender who received a formal performance
                 appraisal and review during the reporting period.

            3. Definitions

            Regular performance and career development
            review

            Performance targets and reviews are based on criteria
            known to the employee and his/her superior. This review
            is undertaken with the knowledge of the employee at
            least once per year. It can include an evaluation by the
            employee’s direct superior, peers, or a wider range of
            employees. The review may also involve personnel from
            the human resources department.

            4. Documentation
            Potential sources of information include personnel
            records.




18   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA          IP


LA13 Composition of governance                                      •	   Gender;	

bodies and breakdown of employees per                               •	   Minority groups; and	
employee category according to gender,
                                                                    •	   A
                                                                          ge groups: Under 30 years old, 30-50 years
age group, minority group membership,                                    old, over 50 years old.
and other indicators of diversity.
                                                               3. Definitions
1. Relevance
This Indicator provides a quantitative measure of diversity    Employee Category
within an organization and can be used in conjunction
                                                               Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest
with sectoral or regional benchmarks. The level of diversity
                                                               governance bodies, senior management, middle
within an organization provides insights into the human
                                                               management, etc) and function (e.g., technical,
capital of the organization. Comparisons between broad
                                                               administrative, production, etc). Derived from an
workforce diversity and management team diversity
                                                               organization’s own human resources system.
also offer information on equal opportunity. Detailed
information on the composition of the workforce can
                                                               Governance bodies
also help in assessing which issues may be of particular
relevance to certain segments of the workforce.                The committees or boards responsible for the strategic
                                                               guidance of the organization, the effective monitoring of
2. Compilation                                                 management, and the accountability of management to
                                                               the broader organization and its stakeholders.
2.1	 Identify the diversity Indicators used by the
     reporting organization in its own monitoring and
                                                               Indicators of diversity
     recording that may be relevant for reporting.
                                                               Indicators for which the reporting organization gathers
2.2	 Identify the total number of employees in                 data may include, for example, citizenship, ancestry and
     each employee category. The total number of               ethnic origin, creed, and disability.
     employees should match that reported in LA1.
                                                               4. Documentation
2.3	 Report the percentage of employees per employee
                                                               Potential sources of information include employee
     category in each of the following diversity
                                                               records and minutes of equal opportunity committees.
     categories: (% of employees)

                                                               5. References
      •	   Gender;
                                                               •	   C
                                                                     onvention on the Elimination of All Forms of
      •	   Minority groups; and	                                    Discrimination Against Women: UN GA: Resolution
                                                                    34/180 of 18 December 1979.
      •	   A
            ge groups: Under 30 years old, 30-50 years
           old, over 50 years old.                             •	   D
                                                                     eclaration on the Elimination of All Forms of
                                                                    Intolerance and of Discrimination based on
2.4 	 Report the percentage of employees by gender for              Religion or Belief: UN GA: Resolution 36/55 of 26
      the minority and age groups identified in 2.3.                November 1981.

    	 The categories should be broken down by gender           •	   D
                                                                     eclaration on Race and Racial Prejudice: General
      as per the diversity categories above.                        Conference UNESCO 20th session on 27 November
                                                                    1978.
2.5	 Report the percentage of individuals within the
     organization’s governance bodies (e.g., the board
     of directors, management committee, or similar
     body for non-corporate reporting organizations) in        •	   D
                                                                     eclaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging
     each of the following diversity categories:                    to National or Ethnic, Religious and Linguistic
     (% of Individuals within Governance Bodies)                    Minorities: UN GA Resolution 47/135 of 18
                                                                    December 1992.




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   19
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: LA



            •	    I
                  LO Tripartite Declaration of Principles Concerning
                  Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy: Art. 21,
                  22, 23, 1977.

            •	    I
                  LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
                  Rights at Work, 1998.

            •	    I
                  LO Convention concerning Discrimination in
                  Respect of Employment and Occupation, 1958
                  (No.111).

            •	    I
                   nternational Convention on the Elimination of All
                  Forms of Racial Discrimination of 4 January 1969.

            •	    O
                   ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                  Revision 2000 (Employment and Industrial
                  Relations Section).

            •	    U
                   nited Nations Global Compact: Principle 6,
                  26 July 2000.

            •	    U
                   nited Nations Declaration on the Elimination
                  of All Forms of Racial Discrimination: UN GA
                  Resolution 1904 (XVlll) of 20 November 1963.




20   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: LA          IP


LA14 Ratio of basic salary and                             Remuneration

remuneration of women to men by                            Basic salary plus additional amounts such as those
                                                           based on years of service, bonuses including cash and/
employee category, by significant                          or equity such as stocks and shares, benefit payments,
locations of operation.                                    overtime, time owed, and any additional allowances (e.g.,
                                                           transportation, living and childcare allowances).
1. Relevance
                                                           4. Documentation
Many countries have introduced legislation to enforce
the principle of equal pay for work of equal value. This   Sources of information for this Indicator include
issue is supported by ILO Convention 100 on ‘Equal         employee and payment records.
Remuneration for Men and Women Workers for Work
of Equal Value’. Equality of remuneration is a factor      5. References
in retaining qualified employees in the workforce.
                                                           •	   I
                                                                LO Convention 100, ‘Equal Remuneration for Men
Where imbalances exist, an organization runs a risk
                                                                and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value’, 1951.
to its reputation and legal challenges on the basis of
discrimination.
                                                           •	   I
                                                                LO Convention 111, ‘Discrimination in Respect of
                                                                Employment and Occupation’, 1958.
2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify the total number of employees in             •	   I
                                                                LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
     each employee category across the reporting                Rights at Work, 1998.
     organization’s operations, broken down by gender
     using the information from LA13. Employee
     categories should be defined based on the
     reporting organization’s own human resources
     system. The total number of employees should
     match that reported in LA1.

2.2	 Identify the basic salary for women and for men in
     each employee category.

2.3	   Identify the remuneration for women and men in
       each employee category.

2.4	 Report the ratio of the basic salary and
     remuneration of women to men for each employee
     category, by significant locations of operation.

3. Definitions

Basic Salary

A fixed, minimum amount paid to an employee for
performing his/her duties. This does not include any
additional remuneration.

Employee category

Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest
governance bodies, senior management, middle
management, etc) and function (e.g., technical,
administrative, production, etc). Derived from an
organization’s own human resources system.




                                                                                                                  Version 3.1   21
IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Human Rights (HR)




© 2000-2011 GRI           Version 3.1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: HR           IP


Human Rights
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Investment and Procurement Practices                       Aspect: Security Practices
         HR1	 Percentage and total number of significant
                                                                            HR8 	 Percentage of security personnel trained
              investment agreements and contracts that
                                                                                  in the organization’s policies or procedures
              include clauses incorporating human rights
                                                                                  concerning aspects of human rights that are




                                                                   Add
Co r e




              concerns, or that have undergone human
                                                                                  relevant to operations.
              rights screening. 	
                                                                   Aspect: Indigenous Rights 	
         HR2	 Percentage of significant suppliers,
              contractors, and other business partners that                 HR9 	 Total number of incidents of violations involving




                                                                   Add
Co r e




              have undergone human rights screening, and                          rights of indigenous people and actions taken.
              actions taken.
                                                                   Aspect: Assessment
         HR3	 Total hours of employee training on policies
                                                                            HR10 	Percentage and total number of operations
              and procedures concerning aspects of human
                                                                   Co r e

                                                                                  that have been subject to human rights
Co r e




              rights that are relevant to operations, including
                                                                                  reviews and/or impact assessments.
              the percentage of employees trained.
                                                                   Aspect: Remediation
Aspect: Non-discrimination	
                                                                            HR11 	Number of grievances related to human rights
Co r e




         HR4 	 Total number of incidents of discrimination
                                                                   Co r e




                                                                                  filed, addressed, and resolved through formal
               and corrective actions taken.
                                                                                  grievance mechanisms.
Aspect: 	Freedom of Association and Collective 	
	Bargaining	

         HR5 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
               in which the right to exercise freedom of
               association and collective bargaining may
Co r e




               be violated or at significant risk, and actions
               taken to support these rights.

Aspect: Child Labor

         HR6 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
               as having significant risk for incidents of child
Co r e




               labor, and measures taken to contribute to the
               effective abolition of child labor.

Aspect: Forced and Compulsory Labor	

         HR7 	 Operations and significant suppliers identified
               as having significant risk for incidents of
               forced or compulsory labor, and measures to
Co r e




               contribute to the elimination of all forms of
               forced or compulsory labor.




                                                                                                                                  Version 3.1   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            Relevance                                                    In addition to the International Bill of Human Rights,
                                                                         the corpus of human rights is further defined by
            Human Rights Performance Indicators elicit disclosures
                                                                         numerous other declarations, treaties and conventions
            on the impacts and activities an organization has on
                                                                         at international, regional and sub-regional levels. Of
            the civil, political, economic, social and cultural human
                                                                         particular relevance to business among these additional
            rights of its stakeholders. The Aspects within these
                                                                         instruments are:
            Performance Indicators are based on internationally
            recognized standards, primarily the United Nations           1.	   ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
            Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the ILO                  Rights at Work, 1998 (in particular the eight core
            Declaration on the Fundamental Principles and Rights at            conventions of the ILO consisting of Conventions
            Work of 1998 (in particular the eight core Conventions             100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105).;
            of the ILO). Although closely related, the categories
            of Human Rights and Labor Practices serve different          2.	   Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of
            purposes. Human Rights Indicators focus on how the                 Racial Discrimination, 1966;
            reporting organization maintains and respects the basic
            rights of a human being, whereas the Indicators on           3.	   Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of
            Labor Practices reflect the quality of the work conditions         Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979;
            and the working environment.
                                                                         4.	   Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989;
            The Performance Indicators seek to provide comparable
            measures of results or outcomes, and therefore focus         5.	   International Convention on the Protection of the
            primarily on incidents relating to core human rights.              Rights of All Migrant Workers and Members of
            Incidents typically include ‘points of impact’ on                  Their Families, 1990; and
            stakeholder groups as well as risks for the organization
            where violations have occurred. The Indicator set            6.	   ILO Convention (107) Indigenous and Tribal
            addresses three general areas:                                     Populations Convention, 1957, ILO Convention
                                                                               (169) Concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples in
            •  asic aspects of human rights (HR4, HR5, HR6, HR7 and
               B                                                               Independent Countries, 1991 and United Nations
               HR9);                                                           Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples,
                                                                               2007.
            •  he capacity and knowledge enabling the organization
               T
               to effectively address human rights, including training
               and internal procedures (HR3, HR8, HR10, and HR 11);
                                                                         General References
               and                                                       •	 Tripartite Declaration Concerning
                                                                            ILO
                                                                            Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy, 2001,
            •  he organization’s integration of human rights into
               T                                                            Third Edition.
               its external business relationships either through
                                                                         • 	OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
               investments or suppliers (HR1 and HR2).
                                                                              Revision 2000.

                                                                         •	    Vienna Declaration and Programme of Action,
            Definitions                                                        1993.
            Human rights
            Generally recognized human rights are defined by the
            International Bill of Human Rights, which is composed of
            three instruments:

            1.  niversal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948;
               U

            2.  nternational Covenant on Civil and Political Rights,
               I
               1966; and

            3.  nternational Covenant on Economic, Social and
               I
               Cultural Rights, 1966.




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR           IP


HR1 Percentage and total number of                             3. Definitions
significant investment agreements and                          Human rights clauses

contracts that include human rights                            Specific terms in a written agreement that define
                                                               minimum expectations of performance with respect to
clauses or that have undergone human                           human rights as a requirement for investment.
rights screening.                                              Human rights screening
1. Relevance
                                                               A formal or documented process that applies a set of
This measure is one indication of the extent to which          human rights performance criteria as one of the factors
human rights are integrated in an organization’s               in determining whether to proceed with a business
economic decisions. This is particularly relevant for          relationship.
organizations that operate within or are partners in
                                                               4. Documentation
ventures in regions where the protection of human
rights is of significant concern. Integrating human            Potential information sources include the reporting
rights criteria in screening or including human rights         organization’s legal, investor relations, and financial
in performance requirements can be part of a strategy          departments, as well as documentation collected
to reduce the risks of investment. Problems with               through quality management systems.
an organization’s human rights record can result in
reputational damage for the investing organization and         5. References
can affect the stability of investments.
                                                               None.

2. Compilation
2.1	   Count only the agreements and contracts that are
       significant in terms of size or strategic importance.
       The significance may be determined by the level
       of approval required within the organization
       for the investment or other criteria that can be
       consistently applied to agreements. The reporting
       organization should disclose their definition of
       “significant agreements”.

2.2	   Identify the total number of significant investment
       agreements and contracts finalized during
       the reporting period that either moved the
       organization into a position of ownership in
       another entity or initiated a capital investment
       project that was material to financial accounts.

2.3	   If multiple significant investment agreements are
       undertaken and contracts signed with the same
       partner, the number of the agreements should
       reflect the number of separate projects undertaken
       or entities created.

2.4	   Report the total number and percentage of
       significant investment agreements and contracts
       that include human rights clauses or that
       underwent human rights screening.




                                                                                                                         Version 3.1   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            HR2 Percentage of significant suppliers,                        •	    The primary providers of a given type of good or
                                                                                  service and overall comprise the majority of the
            contractors, and other business partners                              organization’s purchases; or
            that have undergone human rights                                •    I
                                                                                 dentified as having the highest risk of incidents of
            screening, and actions taken.                                        violations related to human rights.

            1. Relevance
                                                                            Human rights screening
            The development of extensive networks of suppliers
                                                                            A formal or documented process that applies a set of
            and contractors to produce products and services has
                                                                            human rights performance criteria as one of the factors
            generated interest in how reporting organizations apply
                                                                            in determining whether to proceed with a business
            their human rights policies to their supply networks. This
                                                                            relationship.
            is particularly relevant for organizations in sectors that
            rely heavily on outsourcing and global networks.
                                                                            5. Documentation
            Processes that screen and monitor human rights
                                                                            Potential information sources include the reporting
            performance within the supply chain, contractors
                                                                            organization’s procurement or purchasing and legal
            and other business partners can provide evidence of
                                                                            departments.
            an organization’s positive and/or negative impact on
            the wider business community. Issues with human
                                                                            5. References
            rights performance on the part of significant suppliers,
            contractors and other business partners can result in           None.
            reputational damage for their business partners and/or
            create instability in the suppliers’ operations. Screening is
            part of risk management, and the percentage indicated
            here indicates how regularly an organization takes this
            particular risk into consideration.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	   Identify the total number of the reporting
                   organization’s significant suppliers, contractors and
                   other business partners.

            2.2	   Report the percentage of contracts with significant
                   suppliers, contractors and other business partners
                   that included clauses or screening on human rights.
                   See HR1 for definitions of ‘clauses’.

            2.3	   Report the percentage of contracts with significant
                   suppliers, contractors and other business partners
                   that were either declined or imposed performance
                   conditions, or were subject to other actions as a
                   result of human rights screening.

            3. Definitions
            Significant suppliers, contractors and other
            business partners

            External parties from whom products or services are
            obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the
            provision of such products and services. In the context
            of this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers and
            contractors who are:




4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR         IP


HR3 Total hours of employee training                         3. Definitions
on policies and procedures concerning                        None

aspects of human rights that are relevant                    4. Documentation
to operations, including the percentage                      Potential sources of information include employee
of employees trained.                                        records of training and training schedules.

1. Relevance
                                                             5. References
Information generated from this Indicator offers insight
                                                             None.
into an organization’s capacity to implement its human
rights policies and procedures. Human rights have
become well-established in international standards and
laws, and this has obligated organizations to implement
specialized training that equips employees to address
human rights in the course of their regular work. The
number of employees trained and the amount of
training they receive both contribute to an assessment
of an organization’s depth of knowledge about human
rights.

2. Compilation
2.1	   Identify the total number of hours devoted to
       employee training, using data from LA10.

2.2	   Identify the total number of employees, using data
       from LA1.

2.3	   Identify employees who have received formal
       training in the organization’s policies and
       procedures on human rights issues and their
       applicability to the employees’ work. This can
       refer either to training dedicated to the topic of
       human rights or to a human rights module within
       a general training program.

2.4	   Report the total number of hours in the reporting
       period devoted to training on policies and
       procedures concerning aspects of human rights
       that are relevant to operations.

2.5	   Report the percentage of employees in the
       reporting period trained in policies and procedures
       concerning aspects of human rights that are
       relevant to operations.




                                                                                                                 Version 3.1   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            HR4 Total number of incidents of                               3. Definitions
            discrimination and corrective actions                          Discrimination

            taken.                                                         The act and the result of treating a person unequally by
                                                                           imposing unequal burdens or denying benefits rather
            1. Relevance
                                                                           than treating the person fairly on the basis of individual
            Human rights extend beyond the rights of employees             merit. Discrimination can also include harassment,
            in the workplace. Anti-discrimination policy is a key          defined as a course of comments or actions that are
            requirement of international conventions and social            unwelcome, or should reasonably be known to be
            legislation and guidelines. The issue of discrimination        unwelcome, to the person towards whom they are
            is also addressed by ILO Core Conventions 100  111.           addressed.
            An effective monitoring system is necessary to ensure
            compliance throughout the reporting organization’s             4. Documentation
            operations. Stakeholders will seek assurance that such
                                                                           Potential information sources include the reporting
            policies and monitoring are effective.
                                                                           organization’s legal and compliance departments.

            2. Compilation
                                                                           5. References
            2.1	 Identify incidents of discrimination on grounds of
                                                                           •	    Declaration on the Elimination of All Forms of
                 race, color, sex, religion, political opinion, national
                                                                                 Intolerance and of Discrimination based on
                 extraction, or social origin as defined by the ILO,
                                                                                 Religion or Belief, UN General Assembly Resolution
                 or other relevant forms of discrimination involving
                                                                                 36/55 of 26 November 1981.
                 internal and/or external stakeholders across
                 operations in the reporting period.                       •	    Declaration on Race and Racial Prejudice: General
                                                                                 Conference UNESCO 20th session on 27 November
            	     ‘Incidents’ refer to legal actions, complaints                 1978.
                  registered with the organization or competent
                  authorities through a formal process, or instances       •	    Declaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging
                  of non-compliance identified by the organization               to National or Ethnic, Religious and Linguistic
                  through established procedures such as                         Minorities: UN GA Resolution 47/135 of 18
                  management system audits or formal monitoring                  December 1992.
                  programs.
                                                                           •	    ILO Convention 100, ‘Equal Remuneration
            2.2	 Report the total number of incidents of                         Convention’, 1951.
                 discrimination during the reporting period.
                                                                           •	    ILO Convention 111, ‘Discrimination in Respect of
                                                                                 Employment and Occupation Convention’, 1958.
            2.3	 Report the status of the incidents and the actions
                 taken with reference to the following:                    •	    International Convention on Civil and Political
                                                                                 Rights: GA Resolution 2200 A XX1 of 16 December
                  •	   Organization has reviewed the incident;                   1966.

                  •	   Remediation plan is being implemented;              •	    International Convention on the Elimination of All
                                                                                 Forms of Racial Discrimination GA Resolution 1904
                  •	   Remediation plan has been implemented                     (XV111) of 20 November 1963.
                       and results reviewed through routine internal
                       management review processes; and                    •	    United Nations Convention on the Elimination of
                                                                                 all forms of Discrimination Against Women: UN,
                  •	   Incident is no longer subject to action (i.e.,            GA: Resolution 34/180 of 18 December 1979.
                       resolved, case completed, no further by action
                       by company, etc).                                   •	    United Nations Declaration on the Elimination of
                                                                                 All Forms of Racial Discrimination: GA Resolution
                                                                                 1904 (XVlll) of 20 November 1963.




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR           IP


HR5 Operations and significant                              2.3 	 Report on any measures taken by the organization
                                                                  in the reporting period intended to support rights
suppliers identified in which the right                           to freedom of association and collective
to exercise freedom of association or                             bargaining. See the ILO Tripartite Declaration and
                                                                  OECD Guidelines for further guidance.
collective bargaining may be violated or
at significant risk, and actions taken to                   3. Definitions
support these rights.                                       Freedom of association

1. Relevance                                                Workers and employers may establish and join
                                                            organizations of their own choosing without the need
Inherent in the right to freedom of association and
                                                            for prior authorization.
collective bargaining is the protection of the right of
workers (and employers) to organize collectively in
                                                            Significant suppliers
organizations of their own choice. The Right to Freedom
of Association is a fundamental provision of the UN         External parties from whom products or services are
Universal Declaration of Human Rights and is defined by     obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the
ILO Core Conventions 87  98.                               provision of such products and services. In the context of
                                                            this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are:
This Indicator aims to reveal actions that the
reporting organization has taken to evaluate whether        •	   The primary providers of a given type of good or
opportunities exist for workers to exercise their rights         service and overall comprise the majority of the
to freedom of association and collective bargaining.             organization’s purchases; or
It also aims to reveal actions that have been taken to
support these rights across the organization’s range of     •	   Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of
operations. This Indicator does not require the reporting        violations related to human rights.
organization to express a specific opinion on the quality
of national legal systems.                                  4. Documentation
                                                            Potential information sources include the reporting
2. Compilation
                                                            organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources
2.1 	 Identify operations and significant suppliers         departments.
      in which employee rights to exercise freedom
      of association or collective bargaining may be        5. References
      violated or at risk. The process of identification
                                                            •	   ILO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and
      should reflect the organization’s approach to
                                                                 Protection of the Right to Organise Convention’,
      risk assessment on this issue and can draw from
                                                                 1948.
      recognized international data sources such as ILO
      reports (yearly report of ILO Committee of Experts
                                                            •	   ILO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and
      on the implementation of ratified conventions and
                                                                 Collective Bargaining Convention’, 1949
      recommendations, as well as the Governing Body’s
      reports on freedom of association).
                                                            •	   United Nations Universal Declaration of Human
                                                                 Rights, 1948.
2.2 	 Report operations and significant suppliers
      identified in which employee rights to exercise
                                                            •	   International Covenant on Economic, Social and
      freedom of association or collec-tive bargaining
                                                                 Cultural Rights, 1966.
      may be violated or at risk either in terms of:

     •	   Type of operations (e.g., manufacturing plant);
          or

     •	   Countries or geographical areas with
          operations considered at risk.




                                                                                                                    Version 3.1   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            HR6 Operations and significant suppliers                        response to special application by the country concerned
                                                                             and consultation with representative organizations of
            identified as having significant risk for                       employers and workers.
            incidents of child labor, and measures
                                                                            Note: ILO Convention 138 refers to both child labor and
            taken to contribute to the effective                            young workers. See below for the definition of ‘young
            abolition of child labor.                                       worker’.

            1. Relevance
                                                                            Significant suppliers
            The abolition of child labor is a key principle and
                                                                            External parties from whom products or services are
            objective of major human rights declarations and
                                                                            obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the
            legislation, and is subject to ILO Conventions 138 and
                                                                            provision of such products and services. In the context of
            182. The presence and effective implementation of
                                                                            this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are:
            policies on child labor are a basic expectation of socially
            responsible conduct.
                                                                            •	    The primary providers of a given type of good or
                                                                                  service and overall comprise the majority of the
            2. Compilation
                                                                                  organization’s purchases; or
            2.1	   Identify operations considered to have significant
                   risk for incidents of:                                   •	    Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of
                                                                                  violations related to human rights.
                   •	   Child labor; and/or
                                                                            Young worker
                   •	   Young workers exposed to hazardous work.
                                                                            A person who is above the applicable minimum working
                                                                            age and younger than 18 years of age.
            	      The process of identification should reflect the
                   organization’s approach to risk assessment on this
                                                                            4. Documentation
                   issue and can draw from recognized international
                   data sources such as ILO reports.                        Potential information sources include the reporting
                                                                            organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources
            2.2	   Report operations considered to have significant         departments.
                   risk for incidents of child labor either in terms of:
                                                                            5. References
                   •	   Type of operations (e.g., manufacturing plant);
                                                                            •	    ILO Convention 138, ‘Minimum Age Convention’,
                        or
                                                                                  1973.

                   •	   Countries or geographical areas with
                                                                            •	    ILO Convention 182, ‘Worst Forms of Child Labour
                        operations considered at risk.
                                                                                  Convention’, 1999.

            2.3	   Report on any measures taken by the organization
                                                                            •	    ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
                   in the reporting period intended to contribute to
                                                                                  Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998.
                   the elimination of child labor. See the ILO Tripartite
                   Declaration and OECD Guidelines for further
                                                                            •	    United Nations Convention on the Rights of the
                   guidance.
                                                                                  Child, 1989.

            3. Definitions
            Child

            This term applies to all persons under the age of 15 years
            or under the age of completion of compulsory schooling
            (whichever is higher), except in certain countries where
            economies and educational facilities are insufficiently
            developed and a minimum age of 14 years might apply.
            These countries of exception are specified by the ILO in




8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR              IP


HR7 Operations and significant suppliers                     bonded labor, but debts can also be used as a means
                                                             of maintaining workers in a state of forced labor.
identified as having significant risk for                    Withholding identity papers, requiring compulsory
incidents of forced or compulsory labor,                     deposits, or compelling workers, under threat of firing,
                                                             to work extra hours to which they have not previously
and measures taken to contribute to                          agreed, are all examples of forced labor.
the elimination of all forms of forced or
                                                             Significant suppliers
compulsory labor.
                                                             External parties from whom products or services are
1. Relevance
                                                             obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the
Not to be subjected to forced or compulsory labor            provision of such products and services. In the context of
is considered a fundamental human right and is a             this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are:
provision of the UN Universal Declaration of Human
                                                             •	   The primary providers of a given type of good or
Rights and subject to ILO Core Conventions 29  105.
                                                                  service and overall comprise the majority of the
This type of labor can exist in a variety of forms and the
                                                                  organization’s purchases; or
data provided will indicate the reporting organization’s
challenges in contributing to the abolition of forced and
                                                             •	   Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of
compulsory labor.
                                                                  violations related to human rights.

2. Compilation
                                                             4. Documentation
2.1	   Identify operations considered to have significant
                                                             Potential information sources include the reporting
       risk for incidents of forced or compulsory labor.
                                                             organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources
       The process of identification should reflect the
                                                             departments.
       organization’s approach to risk assessment on this
       issue and can draw from recognized international
                                                             5. References
       data sources such as ILO reports.
                                                             •	   ILO Conventions 29, ‘Forced Labour Convention’,
2.2	   Report operations considered to have significant           1930.
       risk for incidents of compulsory labor either in
       terms of:                                             •	   ILO Convention 105, ‘Abolition of Forced Labour’,
                                                                  1957.
       •	   Type of operations (e.g. manufacturing plant);
            or                                               •	   League of Nations (later UN) Slavery Convention,
                                                                  1927.
       •	   Countries or geographical areas with
            operations considered at risk.                   •	   United Nations Supplementary Convention on
                                                                  the Abolition of Slavery, the Slave Trade, and
2.3	   Report on any measures taken by the                        Institutions and Practices Similar to Slavery, 226
       organization in the reporting period intended              U.N.T.S.3, 1957.
       to contribute to the elimination of all forms of
       forced or compulsory labor. See the ILO Tripartite    •	   Universal Declaration of Human Rights (United
       Declaration and OECD Guidelines for further                Nations General Assembly Resolution 217 A (III) of
       guidance.                                                  10 December 1948), Articles 4  5.

3. Definitions                                               •	   ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and
                                                                  Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998.
Forced or compulsory labor

All work and service which is exacted from any person
under the menace of any penalty and for which the
said person has not offered her/himself voluntarily
(ILO Convention 29, Forced Labour Convention, 1930).
The most extreme examples are slave labor and




                                                                                                                        Version 3.1   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            HR8 Percentage of security personnel                        5. References
            trained in the organization’s policies                      •	   ILO Convention 29, ‘Forced Labour Convention’,
                                                                             1930.
            or procedures concerning aspects
            of human rights that are relevant to                        •	   ILO Convention 105, ‘Abolition of Forced Labour
                                                                             Convention’, 1957.
            operations.
            1. Relevance                                                •	   The Voluntary Principles on Security and Human
                                                                             Rights, 2000.
            The conduct of security personnel towards third parties
            is underpinned by their training in human rights
            issues, particularly regarding the use of force. Training
            security personnel can help prevent reputational
            and litigation risks that arise from inappropriate
            actions or approaches not condoned by the reporting
            organization. Information provided under this Indicator
            helps to demonstrate the extent to which management
            systems pertaining to human rights are implemented.
            This measure indicates the proportion of the security
            force that can reasonably be assumed to be aware
            of the organization’s expectations of human rights
            performance.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify the total number of security personnel the
                 reporting organization employs directly.

            2.2	 Report the percentage of security personnel who
                 have received formal training in the organization’s
                 policies on, or specific procedures for, human
                 rights issues and their application to security.
                 This can refer either to training dedicated to the
                 topic or a module within a more general training
                 program.

            2.3	 Report whether training requirements also apply
                 to third party organizations providing security
                 personnel.

            3. Definitions
            Security personnel

            Individuals employed for the purposes of guarding
            property of the organization, crowd control, loss
            prevention, and escorting persons, goods, and valuables.

            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include the reporting
            organization’s human resources department and
            training records received by internal security personnel.
            Contractors may hold similar information with respect to
            their employees.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR           IP


HR9 Total number of incidents of                           3. Definitions
violations involving rights of indigenous                  Indigenous peoples

people and actions taken.                                  Indigenous peoples are those whose social, cultural,
                                                           political, and economic conditions distinguish
1. Relevance
                                                           them from other sections of the dominant national
The number of recorded incidents involving the rights      community, or who are regarded as indigenous on
of indigenous peoples provides information about the       account of their descent from the populations which
implementation of an organization’s policies relating      inhabited the country, or a geographical region to
to indigenous peoples. This information will help          which the country belongs, at the time of conquest
indicate the state of relations with these stakeholder     or colonization or the establishment of present state
communities, particularly in regions where indigenous      boundaries and who, irrespective of their legal status,
people reside or have interests near operations of         retain some or all of their own social, economic, cultural,
the reporting organization. The information also           and political institutions.
provides an additional entry point for support groups.
                                                           4. Documentation
ILO Conventions 107 and 169 address the rights of
indigenous peoples.                                        Potential information sources include the reporting
                                                           organization’s operating procedures and guidelines on
2. Compilation                                             the issue. Other information may be supplied by country
                                                           managers and by legal specialists of the reporting
2.1	 Identify incidents involving indigenous rights
                                                           organization. Data on indigenous people within the
     among the organization’s own employees, and
                                                           workforce may be obtainable from employee records.
     in communities near existing operations that are
     likely to be affected by planned or proposed future
                                                           5. References
     operations of the reporting organization.
                                                           •	    Charter of the United Nations, Preamble, San
	    ‘Incidents’ refer to legal actions, complaints              Francisco, 1945.
     registered with the organization or competent
     authorities through a formal process, or instances    •	    International Finance Corporation’s Performance
     of non-compliance identified by the organization            Standards on Social  Environmental Sustainability,
     through established procedures such as                      2006.
     management system audits or formal monitoring
     programs.                                             •	    ILO Convention (107) Indigenous and Tribal
                                                                 Populations Convention, 1957.
2.2 	 Report the total number of identified incidents
      involving indigenous rights during the reporting     •	    ILO Convention (169) Concerning Indigenous and
      period.                                                    Tribal Peoples in Independent Countries, 1991.

2.3 Report the status of the incidents and actions taken   •	    United Nations Declaration on the Rights of
     with reference to the following:                            Indigenous Peoples, 2007.

     •	   Organization has reviewed the incident;

     •	   Remediation plan is being implemented;

     •	   Remediation plan has been implemented
          and results reviewed through routine internal
          management review processes; and

     •	   Incident is no longer subject to action (i.e.,
          resolved, case completed, no further by action
          by company, etc).




                                                                                                                    Version 3.1   11
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: HR



            HR10 Percentage and total number of                          5. References
            operations that have been subject to                         •	   Global Compact Business Guide for Conflict Impact
                                                                              Assessment and Risk Management, 2002.
            human rights reviews and/or impact
            assessments.                                                 •	   Guidance on Responsible Business in Conflict-
                                                                              Affected and High -Risk Areas: A Resource for
            1. Relevance
                                                                              Companies and Investors, UNGC/PRI, 2010.
            Reporting organizations need to be aware of their
            special responsibility to respect human rights. The          •	   OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
            presence of the reporting organization’s operations               Revision 2000.
            can have positive and negative effects in relation
            to respecting on the protection of human rights.             •	   OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational
            Organizations can affect human rights directly, through           Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones (in
            their own actions and operations, and indirectly, through         particular ch. 2, 4  7), 2006.
            their interaction and relationships with others, including
            governments, local communities and suppliers.                •	   Multinational Enterprises in Situations of
                                                                              Violent Conflict and Widespread Human Rights
            Information reported for this Indicator will provide              Abuses, OECD, Working Papers on International
            insight into how far the reporting organization takes             Investment, number 2002/1, 2002.
            human rights considerations into account when making
            decisions on their locations of operations. It will also
            evaluate the potential of its being associated with, or
            considered complicit in, human rights abuse.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	   Identify countries in which the reporting
                   organization operates.

            2.2	   Report the total number of operations, by country.

            2.3	   Report the total number and percentage of
                   operations that have undergone human rights
                   reviews or human rights impact assessments, by
                   country.

            3. Definitions
            Human rights reviews

            A formal or documented assessment process that
            applies a set of human rights performance criteria.


            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include the reporting
            organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources
            departments, information supplied by country managers
            and the risk management office.




12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: HR        IP


HR11 Number of grievances related                                 •	   Internal Stakeholders;

to human rights filed, addressed, and                             •	   External stakeholders; and
resolved through formal grievance
                                                                  •	   Gender, minority group membership and other
mechanisms.                                                            indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by
1. Relevance                                                           an individual or group of people and not an
                                                                       organization).
Disputes over the human rights impact of an
organization’s operations and decisions may occur.
                                                             3. Definitions
Effective grievance mechanisms play an important role
in the successful protection of human rights.                Grievance mechanisms

                                                             A system consisting of specified procedures, roles and
2. Compilation
                                                             rules for methodically addressing complaints as well as
2.1 	 Identify existing formal organizational grievance      resolving disputes. Grievance mechanisms are expected
      mechanisms.                                            to be legitimate, accessible, predictable, equitable,
                                                             rights-compatible, clear and transparent and based on
2.2 	 Report the total number of grievances related to       dialogue and mediation.
      human rights filed through formal organizational
      grievance mechanisms during the reporting
                                                             4. Documentation
      period.
                                                             Potential information sources include the reporting
2.3 	 Report the total number of addressed grievances        organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources
      related to human rights from those filed in the        departments.
      reporting period, broken down by:
                                                             5. References
     •	   Internal Stakeholders;
                                                             None.
     •	   External stakeholders; and

     •	   Gender, minority group membership and other
          indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by
          an individual or group of people and not an
          organization).

2.4 	 Report the total number of resolved grievances
      related to human rights from those filed in the
      reporting period, broken down by:

     •	   Internal Stakeholders;

     •	   External stakeholders; and

     •	   Gender, minority group membership and other
          indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by
          an individual or group of people and not an
          organization).

2.5 	 Report the total number of grievances related
      to human rights addressed and resolved during
      the reporting period that were filed before the
      reporting period, broken down by:




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1   13
Indicator Protocols Set: SO      IP




                  IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Society (SO)




© 2000-2011 GRI            Version 3.1      Version 3.1.   1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: SO      IP


Society
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Local Communities

         SO1   P
                ercentage of operations with implemented
Co r e




                local community engagement, impact
                assessments, and development programs.

         S09   Operations with significant potential or actual
Co r e




               negative impacts on local communities.

         SO10 Prevention and mitigation measures
              implemented in operations with significant
Co r e




              potential or actual negative impacts on local
              communities.

Aspect: Corruption
         SO2 	 Percentage and total number of business
Co r e




               units analyzed for risks related to corruption.



         SO3 	 Percentage of employees trained in
Co r e




               organization’s anti-corruption policies and
               procedures.

         SO4 	 Actions taken in response to incidents of
Co r e




               corruption.


Aspect: Public Policy

         SO5	 Public policy positions and participation in
Co r e




              public policy development and lobbying.



         SO6 	 Total value of financial and in-kind
               contributions to political parties, politicians,
Add




               and related institutions by country.

Aspect: Anti-Competitive Behavior

         SO7 	 Total number of legal actions for anti-
               competitive behavior, anti-trust, and
Add




               monopoly practices and their outcomes.

Aspect: Compliance

         SO8 	 Monetary value of significant fines and total
               number of non-monetary sanctions for non-
Co r e




               compliance with laws and regulations.




                                                                                    Version 3.1.   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            Relevance                                                                 Operation
            The categories of Labor, Human Rights, and Product                        A single location used by an organization for the
            Responsibility address social impacts associated with                     production, storage and/or distribution of its goods
            specific stakeholder groups (such as employees or                         and services, or for administrative purposes (e.g.,
            customers). However, the social impacts of organizations                  office). Within a single operation, there may be multiple
            are also linked to interactions with market structures and                production lines, warehouses, or other activities. For
            social institutions that establish the social environment                 example, a single factory may be used for multiple
            within which stakeholder groups interact. These                           products or a single retail outlet may contain several
            interactions, as well as the organization’s approach to                   different retail operations that are owned or managed by
            dealing with social groups such as communities, represent                 the reporting organization.
            an important component of sustainability performance.
            The Society Performance Indicators therefore focus on the                 Vulnerable Groups
            impacts organizations have on the communities in which
                                                                                      A vulnerable group is a set or subset of people with
            they operate, and how the organization’s interactions with
                                                                                      some specific physical, social, political, or economic
            other social institutions are managed and mediated. In
                                                                                      condition or characteristic that places the group at a
            particular, information is sought on bribery and corruption,
                                                                                      higher risk of suffering a burden, or at a risk of suffering
            involvement in public policy-making, monopoly practices,
                                                                                      a disproportionate burden of the social, economic or
            and compliance with laws and regulations other than labor
                                                                                      environmental impacts of an organization’s operations.
            and environmental.
                                                                                      Vulnerable groups may include, but are not limited
                                                                                      to, children and youth, the elderly, people with
            Definitions                                                               disabilities, ex-combatants, the internally displaced,
            Corruption                                                                refugees or returning refugees, HIV/AIDS- affected
                                                                                      households, indigenous peoples, and ethnic minorities.
            Corruption is ‘the abuse of entrusted power for private
                                                                                      Vulnerabilities and impacts may differ by gender.
            gain’1 and can be instigated by individuals in the public or
            private sector. It is interpreted here to include such corrupt
                                                                                      General References
            practices as bribery, fraud, extortion, collusion, conflict of
            interest, and money laundering. In this context, it includes              •	    I
                                                                                            nter-American Convention Against Corruption, 1996.
            an offer or receipt of any gift, loan, fee, reward, or other
            advantage to or from any person as an inducement to do                    •	    O
                                                                                             ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
            something that is dishonest, illegal, or a breach of trust in                   Revision 2000.
            the conduct of the enterprise’s business.2 This may include
            gifts other than money, such as free goods and holidays,                  •	    O
                                                                                             ECD Convention on Combating Bribery  of
            or special personal services provided for the purpose of,                       Foreign Public Officials in International
            or liable to result in, an improper advantage or that may                       Business Transactions, 1997.
            result in moral pressure to receive such an advantage.
                                                                                      •	    O
                                                                                             ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004.
            Local Community
                                                                                      •	    Stakeholder Engagement: A Good Practice
            Persons or groups of people living and/or working in any
                                                                                            Handbook For Companies Doing Business In
            areas that are economically, socially or environmentally
                                                                                            Emerging Markets, IFC, 2007.
            impacted (positively or negatively) by the organization’s
            operations. The local community can range from
                                                                                      •	    U
                                                                                             nited Nations Convention Against Corruption, 2003.
            people living adjacent to operations through to isolated
            settlements at a distance from operations that may
            experience the impacts of these operations.




            1
                Transparency International
            2
                T
                 hese definitions are based on ‘Business Principles for Countering
                Bribery’ which have been developed through a project managed
                by Transparency International.




2    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO            IP


SO1 Percentage of operations with                                  •	 	 Stakeholder engagement plans based on
                                                                        stakeholder mapping;
implemented local community
engagement, impact assessments, and                                •	 	 Broad based local community consultation
                                                                        committees and processes that include
development programs.                                                   vulnerable groups;

1. Relevance
                                                                   •	 	 Works councils, occupational health and
A key element in managing impacts on women and                          safety committees and other employee
men in local communities is assessment and planning                     representation bodies to deal with impacts;
in order to understand the potential and actual impacts,                and
and strong engagement with local communities in
order to understand their expectations and needs.                  •	 	 Formal local community grievance processes.
There are many elements that can be incorporated into
engagement, impact assessments, and development               3. Definitions
programs. This Indicator seeks to identify which
                                                              Community Development Programs
elements have been consistently applied, organization-
wide.                                                         Plan that details actions to minimize, mitigate, and
                                                              compensate for adverse social and economic impacts,
Engagement, impact assessments, and development               and to identify opportunities and actions to enhance
programs, combined with the consistency of their              positive impacts of the project on the community.
application, provide insight into the overall quality of an
organization’s efforts, as well as its degree of follow-up    4. Documentation
on policy or policies.
                                                              Potential information sources for this Indicator may
                                                              include:
2. Compilation
                                                              •	   Public consultation and consultation plans;
2.1	   Identify the total number of operations. (The total
       number of operations should match that reported
                                                              •	   Agenda and meeting reports of works councils,
       under Profile Disclosure 2.8.)
                                                                   occupational health and safety committees and
                                                                   other employee representation bodies;
2.2	   Identify organization-wide local community
       engagement, impact assessments, and
                                                              •	   Baseline studies – socio-economic, health,
       development programs.
                                                                   environment, cultural, etc;
2.3	   Report the percentage of operations with
                                                              •	   Social impact assessments;
       implemented local community engagement,
       impact assessments, and development programs
                                                              •	   Gender impact assessments;
       including, but not limited to, the use of:

                                                              •	   Health impact assessments;
       •	 	 Social impact assessments, including gender
            impact assessments, based on participatory
                                                              •	   Environmental impact assessments;
            processes;

                                                              •	   Social action plans;
       •	 	 Environmental impact assessments and
            ongoing monitoring;
                                                              •	   Resettlement action plans;
       •	 	 Public disclosure of results of environmental
                                                              •	   Community development plans;
            and social impact assessments;

                                                              •	   Grievance or complaints mechanisms; and
       •	 	 Local community development programs
            based on local communities’ needs;
                                                              •	   Documents held in community information
                                                                   centers.




                                                                                                                      Version 3.1.   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            5. References
            •	    International Finance Corporation’s Performance
                  Standards on Social  Environmental
                  Sustainability, 2006.

            •	    OECD Guidelines For Multinational Enterprises (in
                  particular Ch ii.3  v.2.b).

            •	    OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational
                  Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones (in
                  particular ch. 2, 4  7).




4    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO           IP


S09 Operations with significant                                  2.2	   Identify significant potential negative impacts,
                                                                        including but not limited to consideration of:
potential or actual negative impacts on
local communities.                                                      •	 	 Vulnerability and risk to local communities
                                                                             from potential impacts due to factors such as:
1. Relevance
                                                                            –	 Degree of physical or economic isolation of
Organizational operations related to entering, operating,                      the local community;
and exiting can have a number of significant negative
                                                                            –	 Level of socio-economic development
impacts on local communities. Indicators in the GRI
                                                                               including the degree of gender equality
Framework, such as environmental emissions or
                                                                               within the community ;
economic data, will offer an overall picture of positive
and negative impacts, but may not be able to present                        –	 State of socio-economic infrastructure
them in relation to local communities.                                         (health, education);

                                                                            –	 Proximity to operations;
This Indicator is focused on significant potential and
actual negative impacts related to operations and not                       –	 Level of social organization; and
on community investments or donations (which are
                                                                            –	 Strength and quality of the governance of
addressed under EC1).
                                                                               local and national institutions around local
                                                                               communities.
The Indicator informs stakeholders about an
organization’s awareness of its impacts. It also enables
                                                                 2.3	   Identify the exposure of the local community to
an organization to better prioritize and improve its
                                                                        operations due to higher than average use of/
organization-wide attention to local communities.
                                                                        impact on shared resources through:

Understanding operations with specific challenges,
                                                                        •	 	 Use of hazardous substances that impact on
combined with information about organization-wide
                                                                             the environment and human health in general,
processes, enables stakeholders to better assess an
                                                                             and specifically reproductive health;
organization’s overall community performance. An
analysis of negative impacts enables an organization
                                                                        •	 	 Volume and type of pollution released;
to reflect its approach in management systems and
consequently enhance the brand and reputation of the
                                                                        •	 	 Status as major employer in the local
organization as a potential partner. It simultaneously
                                                                             community;
strengthens the ability of an organization to maintain
existing operations, and to initiate new ones.
                                                                        •	 	 Land conversion and resettlement; and

2. Compilation
                                                                        •	 	 Natural resource consumption.
2.1	   Identify internal sources of information about
       potential and actual negative impacts, including          2.4	   Identify the significant potential and actual
       sources such as:                                                 negative economic, social, cultural, and
                                                                        environmental impacts on local communities and
       •	 	 Actual performance data;                                    their rights, considering:

       •	 	 Internal investment plans and associated risk               •	 	 Intensity/severity of the impact;
            assessments;
                                                                        •	 	 Likely duration of the impact;
       •	 	 All data collected with GRI indicators (e.g., EC9,
            EN1, EN3, EN8, EN12, EN14-15, EN19-26, EN29,                •	 	 Reversibility of the impact; and
            LA8, HR6-9, PR1-2) as relates to individual
            communities.                                                •	 	 Scale of the impact.




                                                                                                                           Version 3.1.   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            2.5	   Report:

                   •	 	 Operations and associated communities
                        with significant potential or actual negative
                        impacts;

                   •	 	 Location of the operations with significant
                        potential or negative impacts; and

                   •	 	 Potential or actual negative impacts of
                        operations.

            3. Definitions
            Operations with significant potential or actual
            negative impacts on local communities.

            This refers primarily to operations, considered alone
            or in combination with the characteristics of local
            communities, that have higher than average potential
            of negative impacts, or actual negative impacts, on the
            social, economic or environmental wellbeing of local
            communities (for example, local community health and
            safety).

            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include organizational
            policies and risk assessment procedures, results of data
            collection from local community programs, and analysis
            results of external stakeholder forums, joint community
            committees, stakeholder reports, and other inputs.

            Both internal and external sources and references should
            be used.

            5. References

            •	     OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational
                   Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones, 2006.

            •	     International Finance Corporation’s Performance
                   Standards on Social  Environmental
                   Sustainability, 2006.




6    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO           IP


SO10 Prevention and mitigation                           4. Documentation
measures implemented in operations                       Potential information sources include:

with significant potential or actual
                                                         •	   Baseline studies – socio-economic, health,
negative impacts on local communities.                        environment, cultural, etc;

1. Relevance                                             •	   Agenda and meeting reports of works councils,
                                                              occupational health and safety committees and
This Indicator demonstrates the measures implemented
                                                              other employee representation bodies;
in response to the significant potential and actual
negative impacts identified in Indicator SO9.
                                                         •	   Social impact assessments;
The quality and extent of prevention and mitigation
                                                         •	   Gender impact assessments;
measures is important in understanding the potential
and actual impacts of organization-wide operations.
                                                         •	   Health impact assessments;
The information also provides insight into the ability
of the organization to respond appropriately to
                                                         •	   Environmental impact assessments;
potential problems, and therefore the potential risks
that impacts pose to the organization’s reputation or
                                                         •	   Social action plans; and
ability to operate. The approach to prevention and
mitigation measures can also provide insight into how
                                                         •	   Resettlement action plans.
an organization implements its mission, values, and
commitments.
                                                         5. References
2. Compilation                                           •	   OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises (in
                                                              particular Ch ii.3  v.2.b), 2000.
2.1	 Use the information on potential and actual
     negative impacts reported in SO9.
                                                         •	   OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational
                                                              Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones, 2006.
2.2	 Report whether, for the significant potential and
     actual negative impacts reported in SO9:
                                                         •	   International Finance Corporation’s Performance
                                                              Standards on Social  Environmental
     •	 	 Prevention and mitigation measures were
                                                              Sustainability, 2006.
          implemented;

     •	 	 Prevention and mitigation measures were
          implemented in order to:

         	 i.	 Remediate non-compliance with laws or
               regulations;

         	 ii.	 Maintain compliance with laws or
                regulations;

         iii.		 Achieve a standard beyond legal
                compliance;

     •	 	 Prevention and mitigation objectives were
          achieved or not.

3. Definitions
None.




                                                                                                                Version 3.1.   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            SO2 Percentage and total number of
            business units analyzed for risks related
            to corruption.
            1. Relevance
            Efforts to manage reputational risks arising from corrupt
            practices by employees or business partners require a
            system that has supporting procedures in place. This
            measure identifies two specific actions for ensuring the
            effective deployment of the reporting organization’s
            policies and procedures by its own employees and its
            intermediaries or business partners. Risk analysis is an
            important and necessary management approach that
            helps to assess the potential for incidents of corruption
            within the organization.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify business units analyzed for organizational
                 risks related to corruption during the reporting
                 period. This refers to either a formal risk
                 assessment focused on corruption or the inclusion
                 of corruption as a risk factor in overall risk
                 assessments.

            2.2	 Report the total number and percentage of
                 business units analyzed for risks related to
                 corruption.

            3. Definitions
            None.

            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include monitoring
            reports.

            5. References
            •	    O
                   ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of
                  Foreign Public Officials in International Business
                  Transactions, 1997.

            •	    O
                   ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                  Revision 2000.

            •	    I
                   nter-American Convention Against Corruption,
                  1996.

            •	    U
                   nited Nations Convention Against Corruption,
                  2003.

            •	    B
                   usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003.




8    © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO      IP


SO3 Percentage of employees trained in
organization’s anti-corruption policies
and procedures.
1. Relevance
Efforts to manage reputational risks arising from corrupt
practices by employees or business partners require
a system that has supporting procedures in place.
Training is an important element of such a system as
it builds internal awareness and capacity necessary to
prevent incidents of corruption. This measure reveals
the proportion of the organization’s employees that
can reasonably be assumed to be aware of the anti-
corruption issues.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify the total number of employees,
     distinguishing between management and non-
     management employees, using the data from LA1.

2.2	 Report separately the percentage of total number
     of management and non-management employees
     who have received anti-corruption training during
     the reporting period.

3. Definitions
None.

4. Documentation
Potential information sources include training records.

5. References
•	   O
      ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of
     Foreign Public Officials in International Business
     Transactions, 1997.

•	   O
      ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
     Revision 2000.

•	   I
      nter-American Convention Against Corruption,
     1996.

•	   U
      nited Nations Convention Against Corruption,
     2003.

•	   B
      usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003.




                                                                              Version 3.1.   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            SO4 Actions taken in response to                               5. References
            incidents of corruption.                                       •	   U
                                                                                 nited Nations Convention Against Corruption,
            1. Relevance                                                        2003.

            Corruption can be a significant risk to an organization’s
                                                                           •	   O
                                                                                 ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of
            reputation and business. It is broadly linked to
                                                                                Foreign Public Officials in International Business
            contributing to poverty in transition economies,
                                                                                Transactions, 1997.
            damage to the environment, abuse of human rights,
            abuse of democracy, misallocation of investments,
                                                                           •	   I
                                                                                 nter-American Convention Against Corruption,
            and undermining the rule of law. Organizations are
                                                                                1996.
            increasingly expected by the marketplace, international
            norms, and stakeholders to demonstrate their adherence
                                                                           •	   O
                                                                                 ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
            to integrity, governance, and good business practices.
                                                                                Revision 2000.
            This Indicator demonstrates specific actions taken to
            limit exposure to sources of corruption and reduce the
                                                                           •	   A
                                                                                 nti-Corruption Instruments and the OECD
            risk of new instances of corruption. For stakeholders,
                                                                                Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, 2003.
            there is an interest in both the occurrence of incidents,
            but also how the organization chooses to respond.
                                                                           •	   B
                                                                                 usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report actions taken in response to incidents of
                 corruption, including:

                  •	   T
                        he total number of incidents in which
                       employees were dismissed or disciplined for
                       corruption; and

                  •	   T
                        he total number of incidents when contracts
                       with business partners were not renewed due
                       to violations related to corruption.

            2.2	 Report any concluded legal cases regarding
                 corrupt practices brought against the reporting
                 organization or its employees during the reporting
                 period and the outcomes of such cases.

            3. Definitions
            None.

            4. Documentation
            Potential information sources include legal department
            records of cases brought against the reporting
            organization, its employees, business partners, or
            contractors; minutes of the proceedings of internal
            disciplinary hearings; and contracts with business partners.




10   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO            IP


SO5 Public policy positions and                                 3. Definitions
participation in public policy                                  Public policy development

development and lobbying.                                       Organized or coordinated activities to effect government
                                                                policy formulation.
1. Relevance
This Indicator provides information that allows                 Lobbying
organizations to compare public policy positions
                                                                Refers to efforts to persuade or influence persons
with formal sustainability policies and objectives. This
                                                                holding political office, or candidates for such office, to
information provides insight into the extent to which
                                                                sponsor policies, and/or to influence the development
publicly-expressed positions on sustainability are
                                                                of legislation or political decisions. In this Indicator,
consistently embedded across the organization and
                                                                this can relate to lobbying governments at any level or
aligned across different units. This allows a comparison
                                                                international institutions.
of organizational priorities (particularly when making
comparisons within the same sector) at the same time as
                                                                4. Documentation
the particular policy positions help to clarify the strategic
relevance of sustainability issues for the organization. It     Potential information sources include the public policy
also helps to provide transparency for lobbying activities      statements of the reporting organization; internal
for those concerned with the integrity of the practices         minutes of government relations committees or
and potential impacts on stakeholders.                          departments; statements of positions adopted by the
                                                                reporting organization in relevant trade associations;
2. Compilation                                                  and records of interactions with public policy-makers.

2.1	 Participation refers to efforts where the
                                                                5. References
     organization has taken a formal position or
     activities where participation has been formally           •	    O
                                                                       ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
     recognized. While this could include activities                  Revision 2000.
     through trade associations, roundtables, task
     forces, and other forms of lobbying with public            •	    O
                                                                       ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004.
     policymakers, the disclosure relates to the position
     of the organization and not that of the bodies in
     which it is involved.

2.2	 Report the significant issues that are the focus of
     the reporting organization’s participation in public
     policy development and lobbying. This refers to
     participation at the level of the organization rather
     than individual operations.

2.3	 Report the core positions held on each of the
     reported issues above and explain any significant
     differences between lobbying positions and
     stated policies, sustainability goals, or other public
     positions.




                                                                                                                          Version 3.1.   11
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            SO6 Total value of financial and in-                             Related institutions

            kind contributions to political parties,                         Any bodies established with the primary purpose of
                                                                             arranging official or unofficial funding support for
            politicians, and related institutions by                         political parties, their elected representatives, or persons
            country.                                                         seeking political office. This definition also includes
                                                                             think-tanks, policy organs, trade associations, and other
            1. Relevance
                                                                             support organizations that are linked to the creation
            The purpose of this Indicator is to reflect the scale of         of support for political parties, their representatives, or
            the reporters’ engagement in political funding and to            candidates for office.
            ensure transparency in political dealings and relationships
            with the reporting organization. Many countries have             4. Documentation
            legislation that sets limits on official expenditure by
                                                                             Potential information sources include the accounting
            parties and political candidates for campaigning purposes.
                                                                             records of external payments and public disclosure
                                                                             statements.
            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify the total monetary value of financial and          5. References
                 in-kind contributions committed by the reporting
                                                                             •	    O
                                                                                    ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                 organization during the reporting period to
                                                                                   Revision 2000.
                 political parties, politicians, and related institutions.
                 The value of in-kind contributions should be
                 estimated.

            2.2	 Calculate contributions in accordance with national
                 accounting rules (where these exist).

            2.3	 Report the total monetary value broken down by
                 country for those countries where:

                  •	   The organization has major operations and/or
                       sales;

                  •	   The organization holds a significant share
                       of the market in comparison to other
                       organizations; or

                  •	   The sums contributed are significant compared
                       to the total amount contributed globally.

            3. Definitions

            Contributions

            Contributions can include donations, loans,
            sponsorships, purchase of tickets for fundraising
            events, advertising, use of facilities, design and printing,
            donation of equipment, retainers or jobs for elected
            politicians or candidates for office, etc.




12   © 2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: SO           IP


SO7 Total number of legal actions for                        Anti-trust and monopoly practices
anti-competitive behavior, anti-trust, and                   Actions of the reporting organization that may result in
                                                             collusion to erect barriers to entry to the sector, unfair
monopoly practices and their outcomes.
                                                             business practices, abuse of market position, cartels,
1. Relevance                                                 anti-competitive mergers, price-fixing, and other
                                                             collusive actions which prevent competition.
Mergers and acquisitions can affect consumer choice,
pricing, and other factors that are essential to efficient
                                                             4. Documentation
markets. Legislation has been introduced in many
countries that seeks to control or prevent monopolies,       Potential information sources include the legal
with the underlying assumption that competition              department records and public records.
between enterprises also promotes economic efficiency
and sustainable growth. Legal action indicates a             5. References
situation in which the market actions or status of
                                                             •	    O
                                                                    ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
the organization have reached a sufficient scale to
                                                                   Revision 2000.
merit concern by a third party. Legal decisions arising
from these situations can carry the risk of significant
disruption of market activities for the organization and/
or punitive measures.

2. Compilation
2.1	 This Indicator pertains to legal actions initiated
     under national or international laws designed
     primarily for the purpose of regulating anti-
     competitive behavior, anti-trust, or monopoly
     practices.

2.2	 Identify legal actions pending or completed during
     the reporting period regarding anti-competitive
     behavior and violations of anti-trust and monopoly
     legislation in which the reporting organization has
     been identified as a participant.

2.3	 Report the total number of legal actions for anti-
     competitive behavior, anti-trust, and monopoly
     practices.

2.4	 Report the main outcomes of such actions,
     including any decisions or judgements.

3. Definitions
Anti-competitive behavior

Actions of the reporting organization and/or employees
that may result in collusion with potential competitors
to fix prices, coordinate bids, create market or output
restrictions, impose geographic quotas, or allocate
customers, suppliers, geographic areas, and product
lines with the purpose of limiting the effects of market
competition.




                                                                                                                     Version 3.1.   13
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: SO



            SO8 Monetary value of significant fines                        2.3	 Where the reporting organization has not
                                                                                identified any non-compliance with laws or
            and total number of non-monetary                                    regulations, a brief statement to this fact is
            sanctions for non-compliance with laws                              sufficient.

            and regulations.                                               2.4	 Organizations are encouraged to report fines and
            1. Relevance                                                        non-monetary sanctions in terms of the focus of
                                                                                laws.
            The level of non-compliance within the organization
            helps to indicate the ability of management to ensure
                                                                           3. Definitions
            that operations conform to certain performance
            parameters. From an economic perspective, ensuring             None.
            compliance helps to reduce financial risks that occur
            either directly through fines or indirectly through            4. Documentation
            impacts on reputation. The strength of an organization’s
                                                                           Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking
            compliance record can also affect its ability to expand
                                                                           systems operated by the legal department. Information
            operations or gain permits.
                                                                           regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting
                                                                           departments.
            Indicators EN28 and PR9 address compliance with
            specific aspects of law. An organization’s overall record of
                                                                           5. References
            compliance with the range of laws under which it must
            operate is equally of interest. This Indicator is intended     None.
            to reflect significant fines and non-monetary sanctions
            under laws or regulations not covered by EN28 and PR9,
            such as laws and regulations related to accounting fraud,
            workplace discrimination, corruption, etc.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions levied
                 against the organization for failure to comply with
                 laws or regulations, including:

                  •	   International declarations/conventions/
                       treaties, and national, sub-national, regional,
                       and local regulations, and.

                  •	   Cases brought against the organization
                       through the use of international dispute
                       mechanisms or national dispute mechanisms
                       supervised by government authorities.

            2.2	 Report significant fines and non-monetary
                 sanctions in terms of:

                  •	   Total monetary value of significant fines;

                  •	   Number of non-monetary sanctions; and

                  •	   Cases brought through dispute resolution
                       mechanisms.




14   © 2000-2011 GRI
IP


Indicator Protocols Set
Product Responsibility (PR)




© 2000-2011 GRI               Version 3.1
© 2000-2011 GRI   Version 3.1
Indicator Protocols Set: PR            IP


Product Responsibility
Performance Indicators
Aspect: Customer Health and Safety                                Aspect: Marketing Communications

         PR1 	 Life cycle stages in which health and safety                PR6 	 Programs for adherence to laws, standards,
               impacts of products and services are assessed                     and voluntary codes related to marketing




                                                                  Co r e
               for improvement, and percentage of significant                    communications, including advertising,
Co r e




               products and services categories subject to such                  promotion, and sponsorship.
               procedures.
                                                                           PR7 	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance
         PR2	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance                        with regulations and voluntary codes
              with regulations and voluntary codes                               concerning marketing communications,
              concerning health and safety impacts of                            including advertising, promotion, and
Add




                                                                  Add
              products and services, by type of outcomes.                        sponsorship, by type of outcomes.

Aspect: Product and Service Labeling                              Aspect: Customer Privacy

         PR3 	 Type of product and service information                     PR8 	 Total number of substantiated complaints
               required by procedures, and percentage of                         regarding breaches of customer privacy and
                                                                  Add
Co r e




               significant products and services subject to                      losses of customer data.
               such information requirements.
                                                                  Aspect: Compliance

         PR4 	 Total number of incidents of non-compliance                 PR9 	 Monetary value of significant fines for
               with regulations and voluntary codes                              non-compliance with laws and regulations
                                                                  Co r e




               concerning product and service information                        concerning the provision and use of products
Add




               and labeling, by type of outcomes.                                and services

         PR5 	 Practices related to customer satisfaction,
               including results of surveys measuring
Add




               customer satisfaction.




                                                                                                                                Version 3.1   1
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: PR



            Relevance
            The Product Responsibility Indicator set addresses
            the effects of products and services management on
            customers and users. Organizations are expected to
            exercise due care in the design of their products and
            services to ensure they are fit for their intended use and
            do not pose unintended hazards to health and safety.
            In addition, communications related to both products
            and services and users need to take into consideration
            the information needs of customers and their rights to
            privacy. The Indicators are primarily structured in pairs,
            with a Core Indicator seeking disclosure on the processes
            in place to address the aspect, and an additional
            Indicator to report on degree of compliance.


            Definitions
            Type of non-compliance
            Court judgment on failure to act in accordance with
            regulations or laws, categorized by the nature of the laws
            or regulations breached.

            Product and service information/labeling
            Information and labeling are used synonymously and
            describe communication delivered with the product or
            service describing its characteristics.

            Customer privacy
            The right of the customer to privacy and personal refuge,
            including matters such as the protection of data, the
            use of information/data only for its original intended
            purpose (unless specifically agreed otherwise), the
            obligation to observe confidentiality, and protection
            from misuse or theft. A customer is understood to
            include end-customers (consumer) as well as business-
            to-business customers.

            Marketing communication
            The combination of strategies, systems, methods,
            and activities used by an organization to promote
            its reputation, brands, products, and services to
            target audiences. Marketing communications can
            include activities such as advertising, personal selling,
            promotion, public relations, and sponsorship.

            General References
            •	    O
                   ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                  Revision 2000.




2    ©2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: PR          IP


PR1 Life cycle stages in which health
                                                            3. Definitions
and safety impacts of products and                          None.
services are assessed for improvement,
                                                            4. Documentation
and percentage of significant products
                                                            Potential information sources include the reporting
and services categories subject to such                     organization’s legal and sales departments as well as the
procedures.                                                 documentation collected through quality management
                                                            systems.
1. Relevance
                                                            5. References
This measure helps to identify the existence and scope
of systematic efforts to address health and safety across   •	   OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
the life cycle of a product and/or service. Customers            Revision 2000.
expect products and services to perform their intended
functions satisfactorily, and not pose a risk to health
and safety. This responsibility is not only subject to
laws and regulations, but is also addressed in voluntary
codes such as the OECD Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises.

Efforts made to protect the health and safety of
those who use or deliver the product/service have
direct impacts on an organization’s reputation, the
organization’s legal and financial risk due to recall,
market differentiation in relation to quality, and
employee motivation.

2. Compilation
2.1	 In each of the following life cycle stages, report
     whether the health and safety impacts of products
     and services are assessed for improvement:

                                         yes        no
       Development of product
       concept

       RD

       Certification

       Manufacturing and
       production

       Marketing and promotion

       Storage distribution and
       supply

       Use and service

       Disposal, reuse, or recycling

2.2	 Report the percentage of significant product
     or service categories that are covered by and
     assessed for compliance with such procedures.




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   3
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: PR



            PR2 Total number of incidents of                              2.6   R
                                                                                 eport the total number of incidents of non-
                                                                                compliance with the health and safety of products
            non-compliance with regulations and
                                                                                and services, broken down by:
            voluntary codes concerning the health
                                                                          	     •	   I
                                                                                      ncidents of non-compliance with regulations
            and safety impacts of products and
                                                                                     resulting in a fine or penalty;
            services during their life cycle, by type of
                                                                          	     •	   I
                                                                                      ncidents of non-compliance with regulations
            outcomes.
                                                                                     resulting in a warning; and
            1. Relevance
                                                                          	     •	   I
                                                                                      ncidents of non-compliance with voluntary
            Protection of health and safety is a recognized goal
                                                                                     codes.
            of many national and international regulations.
            Failing to comply with legal requirements indicates
                                                                          3. Definitions
            either inadequate internal management systems and
            procedures, or lack of implementation. In addition to         None.
            direct financial consequences, ongoing compliance
            failure poses increased financial risk due to damage          4. Documentation
            to both reputation and employee motivation. For
                                                                          Potential information sources include the reporting
            an organization, the number of incidents of non-
                                                                          organization’s legal and RD departments as well as
            compliance should remain as low as possible. The trends
                                                                          documentation collected through quality management
            revealed by this Indicator will indicate improvements or
                                                                          systems.
            deterioration in the effectiveness of internal controls.

                                                                          5. References
            2. Compilation
                                                                          None.
            2.1	 This Indicator addresses the life cycle of the
                 product or service once it is available for use and
                 therefore subject to regulations concerning the
                 health and safety of products and services.

            2.2	 Where the reporting organization has not
                 identified any non-compliance with regulations
                 and voluntary codes, a brief statement to this fact
                 is sufficient.

            2.3	 Identify the total number of incidents of non-
                 compliance with regulations and voluntary codes
                 concerning the health and safety of products and
                 services during the reporting period.

            2.4	 This Indicator refers to incidents of non-compliance
                 within the reporting period. If a substantial number
                 of incidents relate to events in preceding years, this
                 should be indicated.

            2.5	 Incidents of non-compliance in which the
                 organization was determined not to be at fault are
                 not counted in this Indicator.




4    ©2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: PR           IP


PR3 Type of product and service                             3. Definitions
information required by procedures,                         None.

and percentage of significant products                      4. Documentation
and services subject to such information                    Potential information sources include legal and sales
requirements.                                               departments and the documentation collected through
                                                            quality management systems.
1. Relevance
Accessible and adequate information on the                  5. References
sustainability impacts of products and services (positive
                                                            •	   O
                                                                  ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
and negative) is necessary for customers and end users
                                                                 Revision 2000.
to make informed purchasing choices, and for these
preferences to be reflected in the market. Providing
appropriate information and labeling with respect to
sustainability impacts is directly linked to compliance
with certain types of regulations and codes (such as
national laws or the OECD Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises) and, potentially, with strategies for brand
and market differentiation. This measure provides an
indication of the degree to which information and
labeling addresses a product’s or a service’s impact on
sustainability.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Report whether the following product and service
     information is required by the organization’s
     procedures for product and service information
     and labeling:

                                       yes       no
       The sourcing of components
       of the product or service

       Content, particularly with
       regard to substances that
       might produce an environ-
       mental or social impact

       Safe use of the product or
       service

       Disposal of the product and
       environmental/social impacts

       Other (explain)

2.2	 Report the percentage of significant product or
     service categories covered by and assessed for
     compliance with such procedures.




                                                                                                                   Version 3.1   5
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: PR



            PR4 Total number of incidents of                            2.5  eport the total number of incidents of non-
                                                                            R
                                                                            compliance with regulations concerning product
            non-compliance with regulations and
                                                                            and service information and labeling, broken down
            voluntary codes concerning product and                          by:
            service information and labeling, by type
                                                                             •	   I
                                                                                   ncidents of non-compliance with regulations
            of outcomes.                                                          resulting in a fine or penalty;
            1. Relevance
                                                                             •	   I
                                                                                   ncidents of non-compliance with regulations
            The display and provision of information and labeling for             resulting in a warning; and
            products and services are subject to many regulations
            and laws. Non-compliance indicates either inadequate             •	   Incidents of non-compliance with voluntary
            internal management systems and procedures or                         codes.
            ineffective implementation. In addition to direct
            financial consequences, such as penalties and fines,        3. Definitions
            non-compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer
                                                                        None.
            loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents
            of non-compliance should remain as low as possible.
                                                                        4. Documentation
            The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate
            improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of       Potential information sources include the reporting
            internal controls.                                          organization’s legal and technical departments as well as
                                                                        documentation collected through quality management
            2. Compilation                                              systems.

            2.1	 This Indicator refers to incidents of non-
                                                                        5. References
                 compliance decided within the reporting period. If
                 a substantial number of incidents relate to events     None.
                 in preceding years, this should be indicated.

            2.2	 Where the reporting organization has not
                 identified any non-compliance with regulations
                 and voluntary codes, a brief statement to this fact
                 is sufficient.

            2.3	 Identify the total number of incidents of non-
                 compliance with regulations and voluntary codes
                 concerning product and service information and
                 labeling during the reporting period.

            2.4	 Incidents of non-compliance in which the
                 organization was determined not to be at fault are
                 not counted in this Indicator.




6    ©2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: PR         IP


PR5 Practices related to customer                            4. Documentation
satisfaction, including results of surveys                   Potential information sources include the reporting
                                                             organization’s customer relations and RD departments.
measuring customer satisfaction.
1. Relevance                                                 5. References
Customer satisfaction is one measure of an organization’s    •	   UNIFEM  UNGC Women’s Empowerment
sensitivity to its customers’ needs and, from an                  Principles: Principles 5  7, 2010.
organizational perspective, is essential for long-term
success. In the context of sustainability, customer
satisfaction provides insight into how the organization
approaches its relationship with one stakeholder group
(customers). It can also be used in combination with other
sustainability measures. Customers’ needs and preferences
may differ by gender and other diversity factors. Used in
combination, customer satisfaction can provide insights
into the degree to which an organization considers the
needs of other stakeholders.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Report on organization-wide practices in place to
     assess and maintain customer satisfaction, such as:

     •	   Frequency of measuring customer satisfaction;

     •	   Standard requirements regarding

          methodologies of surveys; and

     •	   Mechanisms for customers to provide
          feedback.

2.2	 Report the results or key conclusions of surveys
     (based on statistically relevant sample sizes)
     conducted in the reporting period that were
     related to information about:

     •	   The organization as a whole;

     •	   A major product/service category; or

     •	   Significant locations of operation.

2.3	 For any survey results reported, identify the
     product/service category or locations of operations
     to which they apply.

3. Definitions
None.




                                                                                                                 Version 3.1   7
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: PR



            PR6 Programs for adherence to laws,                               •	   The subject of stakeholder questions or public
                                                                                   debate.
            standards, and voluntary codes related
            to marketing communications, including                       2.4	 Report how the organization has responded to
                                                                              questions or concerns regarding these products.
            advertising, promotion, and sponsorship.
            1. Relevance                                                 3. Definitions
            Marketing communications are designed to influence           None.
            opinions and purchasing decisions. The growth of
            consumer activism shows that stakeholders consider           4. Documentation
            marketing communications a significant issue when
                                                                         Potential information sources include the reporting
            they:
                                                                         organization’s legal, sales, and marketing departments.
            •	    Do not conform to generally accepted ethical or
                                                                         5. References
                  cultural standards;
                                                                         •	   I
                                                                              nternational Chamber of Commerce
            •	    Are irresponsible in relation to privacy intrusion          recommendations (i.e., the ICC International Code of
                  and dual standards;                                         Advertising Practice) and related codes of conduct.

            •	    Are irresponsible in their attempts to influence       •	   O
                                                                               ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises,
                  vulnerable audiences such as children; and                  Revision 2000.

            •	    Are irresponsible in portraying gender roles in        •	   Section J of The UN Beijing Platform For Action,
                  ways that are not respectful.                               1995.

            Marketing approaches that are seen as inappropriate
            can incur risks for organizations, including alienation
            of customers and other stakeholders, damage to
            reputation, financial costs, and legislative action.

            In addition to frameworks of national or international
            law, voluntary and self-regulatory codes (such as the ICC
            International Code of Advertising Practice or the OECD
            Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises) seek to express
            concepts of responsibility in marketing communications.
            The adoption of such self-disciplinary codes or rules can
            assist organizations in ensuring that their marketing
            communications practices conform to generally
            accepted standards.

            2. Compilation
            2.1	 Report any codes or voluntary standards relating
                 to marketing communications applied across the
                 organization.

            2.2	 Report the frequency with which the organization
                 reviews its compliance with these standards or codes.

            2.3	 Report whether the organization sells products
                 that are:

                  •	   Banned in certain markets; or




8    ©2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: PR         IP


PR7 Total number of incidents of                              3. Definitions
non-compliance with regulations and                           None.

voluntary codes concerning marketing                          4. Documentation
communications, including advertising,                        Potential information sources include the reporting
promotion, and sponsorship, by type of                        organization’s legal, sales, and marketing departments.

outcomes.                                                     5. References
1. Relevance
                                                              None.
Non-compliance indicates either inadequate internal
management systems and procedures or ineffective
implementation. In addition to direct financial
consequences such as penalties and fines, non-
compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer
loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents
of non-compliance should remain as low as possible.
The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate
improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of
internal controls

2. Compilation
2.1	 This Indicator refers to incidents of non-compliance
     within the reporting period. If a substantial number
     of incidents relate to events in preceding years, this
     should be indicated.

2.2	 Where the reporting organization has not identified
     any non-compliance with regulations and voluntary
     codes, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient.

2.3	 Identify the total number of incidents of non-
     compliance with regulations concerning marketing
     communications during the reporting period.

2.4	 Incidents of non-compliance in which the
     organization was determined not to be at fault are
     not counted in this Indicator.

2.5	 Report the total number of incidents of non-
     compliance with regulations concerning marketing
     communications, broken down by:

     •	   Incidents of non-compliance with regulations
          resulting in a fine or penalty;

     •	   Incidents of non-compliance with regulations
          resulting in a warning; and

     •	   Incidents of non-compliance with voluntary
          codes.




                                                                                                                    Version 3.1   9
IP   Indicator Protocols Set: PR



            PR8 Total number of substantiated                            3. Definitions
            complaints regarding breaches of                             Breach of customer privacy
            customer privacy and losses of customer                      Covers any non-compliance with existing legal
            data.                                                        regulations and (voluntary) standards of which the
                                                                         reporting organization is a member regarding the
            1. Relevance
                                                                         protection of customer privacy.
            Protection of customer privacy is a generally recognized
            goal in national regulations and organizational policies.    Substantiated complaint
            Non-compliance indicates either inadequate internal
                                                                         Written statement by regulatory or similar official body
            management systems and procedures or ineffective
                                                                         addressed to the reporting organization that identifies
            implementation. This Indicator provides an evaluation
                                                                         breaches of customer privacy, or a complaint lodged
            of the success of management systems and procedures
                                                                         with the organization that has been recognized as
            relating to customer privacy protection. In addition to
                                                                         legitimate by the organization.
            direct financial consequences such as penalties and fines,
            non-compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer
                                                                         4. Documentation
            loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents
            of non-compliance should remain as low as possible.          Information can be drawn from departments responsible
            The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate           for customer service, public relations, and/or legal
            improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of        concerns.
            internal controls.
                                                                         5. References
            2. Compilation
                                                                         None.
            2.1	 Identify the total number of complaints regarding
                 breaches of customer privacy during the reporting
                 period.

            2.2	 If a substantial number of these breaches relate to
                 events in preceding years, this should be indicated.

            2.3	 Report the total number of substantiated
                 complaints received concerning breaches of
                 customer privacy, categorized by:

                  •	   Complaints received from outside parties and
                       substantiated by the organization; and

                  •	   Complaints from regulatory bodies.

            2.4	 Report the total number of identified leaks, thefts,
                 or losses of customer data.

            2.5	 Where the reporting organization has not
                 identified any substantiated complaints, a brief
                 statement to this fact is sufficient.




10   ©2000-2011 GRI
Indicator Protocols Set: PR     IP


PR9 Monetary value of significant
fines for non-compliance with laws and
regulations concerning the provision and
use of products and services.
1. Relevance
The level of non-compliance within an organization is
an indicator of the ability of management to ensure that
operations conform to certain performance parameters.
From an economic perspective, ensuring compliance
helps to reduce financial risks that occur either
directly through fines or indirectly through impacts on
reputation. The strength of an organization’s compliance
record can also affect its ability to expand operations or
gain permits.

2. Compilation
2.1	 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions levied
     against the organization for failure to comply
     with laws or regulations, including international
     declarations/conventions/ treaties, and national,
     sub-national, regional, and local regulations
     concerning the provision and use of the reporting
     organization’s products and services. Relevant
     information for this Indicator includes but is not
     limited to data from PR2, PR4, and PR7.

2.2   Report total monetary value of significant fines.

2.3   Where the reporting organization has not
      identified any non-compliance with laws or
      regulations, a brief statement to this fact is
      sufficient.

3. Definitions
None.

4. Documentation
Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking
systems operated by the legal department. Information
regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting
departments.

5. References
None.




                                                                               Version 3.1   11
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP




               TP

          Technical Protocol
Applying the Report Content Principles




  © 2011 GRI                                                           1
© 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP


Index
Technical Protocol – Applying the
Report Content Principles:
an overview	                                     2

Introduction	                                    2

What does the Technical Protocol – Applying
the Report Content Principles cover?	            2

Audience	                                        2


Materiality in the context of
the GRI Reporting Framework	                     3

Sustainability Reporting and Companies	          3


Defining report content:
the process	                                     4

Step 1: Identification – identify relevant
topics	                                          5

Step 2: Prioritization	                          7

Basic features of the Prioritization step	       7

Analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and
‘Significance to the Organization’	              7

Determining Materiality and relative reporting
priority                                         9	

Step 3: Validation – checking the
Completeness of the material Aspects	            10

Review	                                          11


Conclusion	                                      12


Glossary of Terms	                               13




                                                                                               1
TP   Technical Protocol



             Technical Protocol – Applying
             the Report Content Principles:
             an overview
             Introduction                                                    The Protocol is designed to be used in conjunction with
                                                                             the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, the Sector
             A reporting organization has to consider many topics
                                                                             Supplements and other Technical Protocols1. It proposes
             when compiling a sustainability report. In order to
                                                                             a generic approach on how to apply the ‘Reporting
             provide a balanced and reasonable representation of
                                                                             Guidance for Defining Content’2 and the ‘Reporting
             its sustainability performance, topics that are relevant
                                                                             Principles for Defining Content’ that are outlined in the
             and material for an organization should be covered in its
                                                                             GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines. Knowledge of
             report.
                                                                             the GRI Reporting Framework is a prerequisite for using
                                                                             the Protocol. Definitions of key terms used throughout
             Identifying the topics that are relevant for a sustainability
                                                                             this Protocol can be found in the Glossary of Terms, on
             report, and prioritizing those topics that are material, is
                                                                             page 13.
             a challenge for most reporting organizations. The range
             of topics in a sustainability report varies, depending
                                                                             In applying the Protocol, the reporting organization will
             on the definition of report content and the topics that
                                                                             be able to provide an explanation, and documentation,
             are identified as material. Material topics include those
                                                                             on how it has applied the ‘Reporting Guidance for
             that reflect the organization’s significant economic,
                                                                             Defining Content’ and the ‘Reporting Principles
             environmental and social impacts; and topics that
                                                                             for Defining Content’, as required by the Standard
             would substantively influence the assessments and
                                                                             Disclosures 3.5-3.73 in the GRI Sustainability Reporting
             decisions of stakeholders.
                                                                             Guidelines.
             Defining report content correctly is crucial in making
             sustainability reporting a valuable exercise, for reporting     Audience
             organizations and report users.
                                                                             The Technical Protocol is intended primarily for the
                                                                             use of those involved in preparing, approving and
             What does the Technical Protocol –                              assuring sustainability reports. The Protocol is also of
                                                                             value for others, internal and external to the reporting
             Applying the Report Content Principles                          organization, who would like to learn more about the
             cover?                                                          process for defining report content outlined by the GRI
                                                                             Reporting Framework, including for analytical, research
             This Technical Protocol provides process guidance on
                                                                             and/or educational purposes. The Protocol is designed
             how to define the content of a sustainability report. This
                                                                             for use by organizations of any size, sector, or location.
             includes deciding on the Scope of a report, the range of
             topics covered, each topic’s relative reporting priority
             and level of coverage, and what to disclose in the report
             about the process for defining its content.

             It is important to note that the process of defining report
             content is dependent on the individual characteristics
             of a reporting organization. It is a highly iterative and
             complex process. The Protocol aims to help reporting
             organizations visualize the process as a series of steps.




             1
              	 For more information on the GRI Reporting Framework visit: www.globalreporting.org
             2
              	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp.7-13.
             3
              	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp.21-22.



2    © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP

                                                                        meet the needs of the present without compromising
Materiality in the context                                              the needs of future generations. These material topics
of the GRI Reporting                                                    will often have a significant financial impact in the near-
                                                                        term or long-term on an organization. They will therefore
Framework                                                               also be relevant for stakeholders who focus strictly on
                                                                        the financial condition of an organization.
Material topics for a reporting organization should
include those topics that have a direct or indirect impact              Many topics that attract significant stakeholder interest
on an organization’s ability to create, preserve or erode               in an organization, or represent major economic,
economic, environmental and social value for itself, its                environmental, or social impacts, result in financial
stakeholders and society at large.                                      consequences within a time frame that will be relevant
                                                                        for at least some participants in capital markets.4
The operations and activities of an organization lead
to positive and negative economic, environmental and                    The threshold for defining material topics to report
social impacts. Some of these sustainability impacts will               should be set to identify those opportunities and risks
be visible to stakeholders, who will express an interest                which are most important to stakeholders, the economy,
in them directly. But not all sustainability impacts will               environment, and society, or the reporting organization,
be recognized by stakeholders. Some impacts may be                      and therefore merit particular focus in a sustainability
slow and cumulative. Others will occur at a distance from               report.
stakeholders, so that causal links may not be clear.
                                                                        Sustainability Reporting and Companies
Sustainability impacts create both opportunities and
                                                                        There may be overlap between the content of a
risks for an organization. The ability of an organization
                                                                        sustainability report and the content of existing
to recognize opportunities and risks, and act effectively
                                                                        statutory reporting requirements for companies, in
in relation to them, will determine whether the
                                                                        terms of:
organization creates, preserves or erodes value.
                                                                        •	   Sustainability performance indicators correlated to
By following the ‘Reporting Guidance for Defining                            key value drivers or financial metrics
Content’, and applying the ‘Reporting Principles for
                                                                        •	   Qualitative risks and opportunities within a time
Defining Content’ in the GRI Sustainability Reporting
                                                                             frame, relevant for the purposes of statutory
Guidelines, the reporting organization should be able to
                                                                             reporting requirements
report on those topics that demonstrate its impacts, to
recognize and set out to address opportunities and risks,               Sustainability reporting should address all material
and to measure and understand its value in financial and                sustainability topics that are relevant in understanding
non-financial terms.                                                    how a company can create, preserve or erode value
                                                                        over time. Economic, environmental and social impacts
The materiality focus of sustainability reports is broader              can become important over an extended time period.
than the traditional measures of financial materiality. In              Reports must be able to reflect both immediate,
financial reporting, materiality is commonly thought of                 acute topics and foreseeable longer-term topics. A
as a threshold for influencing the economic decisions                   sustainability report therefore covers a wider range of
of those using an organization’s financial statements,                  topics than statutory reporting requirements, including
investors in particular. The concept of a threshold is also             but not limited to:
important in sustainability reporting, but it is concerned
                                                                        •	   Impacts on stakeholder groups that are of high
with a wider range of impacts and stakeholders.
                                                                             significance to them
Materiality for sustainability reporting is not limited
only to those sustainability topics that have a significant             •	   Opportunities to contribute to broader sustainability
financial impact on the organization. Determining                            objectives
materiality for a sustainability report also includes
                                                                        •	   Opportunities to adapt to planned changes in
considering economic, environmental, and social
                                                                             policies and regulatory frameworks
impacts that cross a threshold in affecting the ability to



	 These impacts could come in a range of forms, including but not limited to:
4

  •	 Significant ongoing impacts on short-term financial indicators (e.g., cash flow)
  •	 Sudden changes in the financial position of an organization due to the realization of an opportunity or risk
  •	 Cumulative effects over time resulting in financial consequences that are not material in the short-term, but may be material for
     long-term investors



                                                                                                                                                  3
TP   Technical Protocol



             Defining report content:
             the process                                                                                                             Topics
                                                                                                     GRI REPORTING FRAMEWORK
                                                                                                                                Categories
             This chapter describes the process that reporting                                          STANDARD DISCLOSURES
             organizations should go through in order to answer the                                                                Aspects
             question of ‘what to report’.                                                                 Strategy
                                                                                                             and       Management Approach
                                                                                                                                         and
             The process begins with the identification of relevant                                         Profile    Performance Indicators
             topics. Relevant topics are then prioritized as material
             Aspects, which are then validated. The end result of
             this process is a list of material Aspects and related
             Standard Disclosures which should be disclosed in the
             organization’s sustainability report.
                                                                                               Figure 1: GRI Reporting Framework Terminology
             The reporting organization’s senior decision-makers
                                                                                           Having followed the process steps, it is vitally important
             should take ownership of the process for defining report
                                                                                           that all reporting organizations undertake a review of
             content, and should approve any associated strategic
                                                                                           their sustainability report.
             decisions.
                                                                                           The four ‘Reporting Principles for Defining Content’
             Figure 1 depicts the terminology used in the GRI
                                                                                           featured in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines
             Reporting Framework. Knowledge of this terminology
                                                                                           should be used in the process for defining report
             is important in understanding the process for defining
                                                                                           content: ‘Materiality’, ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’,
             report content.
                                                                                           ‘Sustainability Context’ and ‘Completeness’.5
                                                                                           Each Reporting Principle features three components:
             The three process steps for defining report content are
                                                                                           a definition, an explanation, and tests. All three
             depicted in Figure 2. They are:
                                                                                           components need to be considered in the process.
             1. Identification
                                                                                           Figure 2 indicates which of these Reporting Principles
             2. Prioritization
                                                                                           is significant in the different process steps. ‘Stakeholder
             3. Validation                                                                 Inclusiveness’ is applied to varying degrees throughout
                                                                                           the whole process.



                          Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators



                                                                                                                               Report

                                     IDENTIFICATION              PRIORITIZATION               VALIDATION


                                       Sustainability              Materiality             Completeness
                                          Context
                                                           Stakeholder Inclusiveness


                                                                        REVIEW

                                                         Figure 2: Defining report content – the process

            5
             	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 8-13.


4    © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles    TP


    It is important to note that the process for defining          Step 1: Identification – identify relevant
    report content is iterative and dynamic, rather than
    linear and static. The reporting organization repeats the
                                                                   topics
    process for each reporting period, thereby refining the
    reporting process.                                          Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators


    Documentation of the process is crucial, including its                                                                                                   Report
    methodologies, assumptions and the decisions taken.
    Accurate records facilitate analysis and assurance, help             IDENTIFICATION                PRIORITIZATION               VALIDATION
    to fulfill the Standard Disclosures 3.5-3.8 in the GRI
    Sustainability Reporting Guidelines6, and enable the                     Sustainability              Materiality              Completeness
    reporting organization to explain and defend its chosen                     Context

    approach.                                                                                    Stakeholder Inclusiveness



    Inevitably, the process for defining report content                                                       REVIEW

    requires subjective judgments. The reporting
    organization should be transparent about its judgments.        The aim of the Identification step is to create a shortlist
    This will enable internal and external stakeholders to         of relevant topics that should be assessed for inclusion in
    understand the process.                                        an organization’s sustainability report.

    This Technical Protocol is based on the assumption that        Relevant topics are those that may reasonably be
    the reporting organization determines the Report Scope         considered important for reflecting the organization’s
    in conjunction with determining the Report Boundary -          economic, environmental, and social impacts, or
    the range of entities whose performance is represented         influencing the decisions of stakeholders. All such topics
    in the report (e.g., subsidiaries, joint ventures, sub-        potentially merit inclusion in a sustainability report.
    contractors, etc).
                                                                   Reporting organizations should apply a wide-ranging
    The ‘Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting’7 and the         radar to identify all relevant topics. All Aspects and
    GRI Boundary Protocol8 offer guidance on how to set the        related Standard Disclosures identified under each
    Boundary for a sustainability report and how to describe       Category in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines
    the chosen Boundary to report users. It is referenced at       and applicable Sector Supplements should be
    the relevant stages in the following process description.      considered relevant. They have been developed through
                                                                   GRI’s multi-stakeholder processes and are generally
                                                                   applicable for reporting an organization’s sustainability
                                                                   performance. Alongside these, any other topic outside
                                                                   the GRI Reporting Framework that meets the definition
                                                                   for relevant topics should be included in the shortlist.

                                                                   In order to factor in sustainability impacts and
                                                                   reasonable stakeholder expectations and interests when
                                                                   defining relevant topics, the reporting organization
                                                                   needs to define the range of entities, or groups of
                                                                   entities, that fall within the Report Boundary. To do so,
                                                                   the reporting organization needs to determine which
                                                                   entities it controls or significantly influences.

                                                                   The Reporting Principles 1. ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’
                                                                   and 2. ‘Sustainability Context’ are the most relevant
                                                                   Principles for the Identification step, and must be
                                                                   applied. In assessing the range of potentially relevant



6
 	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22.
7
 	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 17-19.
8
 	 The Boundary Protocol is available for free download from www.globalreporting.org.


                                                                                                                                                                      5
TP   Technical Protocol



            topics, it is vital to use the tests that underlie these two            •	   Organizational performance in relation to
            Principles 9.                                                                information about economic, environmental,
                                                                                         and social conditions in relevant locations, e.g.,
            These two Reporting Principles involve different points                      discussing water consumption in relation to
            of departure.                                                                available supply in a particular location

            1.	 ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ emphasizes attentiveness                •	   Organizational performance in relation to other
                to topics raised through the range of stakeholder                        actors. For example, relating resource usage,
                engagement. In order to compile a report that                            employment creation or wages to that of other
                provides a balanced and reasonable representation                        organizations
                of the reporting organization’s performance, and
                can inform the assessment and decision-making                       Further perspectives for analyzing significant
                of stakeholders, the reporting organization must                    economic, environmental, and social impacts may
                understand the reasonable expectations and                          include, but are not limited to:
                interests of those stakeholders, and be able to
                                                                                    •	   The scale of impact and its current and future
                describe the process of engagement.
                                                                                         implications
                  The reporting organization needs to identify its
                                                                                    •	   Comparison of impacts to relative scale; absolute
                  stakeholders, and learn about their expectations and
                                                                                         norms; global vs. local limits
                  interests, in order to take a well-informed decision
                  on Report Scope. The Principle underlines the                     •	   The consequences of impacts
                  usefulness of stakeholder engagement in informing
                                                                                    •	   Size and type (positive/negative) of contribution
                  decision-making during the reporting process.
                                                                                         including externalities
            2.	 ‘Sustainability Context’ emphasizes the necessity of
                                                                                    •	   The accumulative severity of impacts over time
                considering actual impact on sustainability. Impacts
                can be considered in absolute and relative terms.                   •	   Analysis of the absolute and relative significance
                                                                                         of the organization’s impacts in terms of overall
                  The Principle is intended to assess the organization’s
                                                                                         economic, environmental and social trends
                  contribution to the environmental and social
                  trends that are the focus of sustainability concerns.
                                                                                    Time horizons and criteria play a crucial role in
                  Understanding the organization’s impacts and
                                                                                    evaluating impacts. The accumulation of impacts
                  dependencies on ecosystem services can also be
                                                                                    over time, and generational repercussions, should
                  seen as part of ‘Sustainability Context’.
                                                                                    be evaluated. It is also important to document how
                  The tests for this Principle10 will guide the reporting           the trends that are then identified are prioritized and
                  organization. In using the tests the organization’s               tracked in future reports.
                  actions are not limited to but may include the review
                  of documents and information sources that assist in               The organization’s analysis of its impacts should
                  determining and analyzing its significant economic,               be systematic and consider the precautionary
                  environmental and social impacts.                                 principle. In addition, where practicable the
                                                                                    reporting organization should apply a scientific and
                  These documents and information sources may
                                                                                    internationally validated approach to measurement,
                  include, but are not limited to:
                                                                                    and rely on proven expertise and authoritative
                  •	   Authoritative research and forecasts on economic,            research.
                       environmental, and social topics, for example,
                       those published by local and international public            After applying these two Principles to the range of
                       institutions/governmental organizations                      potential topics to consider, the organization should
                                                                                    have identified a shortlist of relevant topics that
                  •	   Relevant national and international public
                                                                                    can then be assessed for materiality and relative
                       policy targets and indicators on economic,
                                                                                    reporting priority.
                       environmental, and social topics




            9
             	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12.
            10
              	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 12.



6    © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP


      Step 2: Prioritization                                                                          The methodology applied in the Prioritization step
                                                                                                      varies according to the individual organization.
                                                                                                      Specific circumstances such as business model, sector,
Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators
                                                                                                      geographic, cultural and legal operating context,
                                                                                                      ownership structure, and size and nature of impacts
                                                                                             Report
                                                                                                      affect how an organization prioritizes the topics and
                                                                                                      Aspects it covers in its sustainability report. What
           IDENTIFICATION             PRIORITIZATION                VALIDATION
                                                                                                      is important, given this variation, is the need for an
                                                                                                      organization to develop a rational process, the ability to
             Sustainability              Materiality              Completeness
                Context                                                                               document it, and the ability to replicate the process in
                                 Stakeholder Inclusiveness                                            subsequent reporting cycles.

                                              REVIEW                                                  The GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines require
                                                                                                      disclosure on these areas under Standard Disclosure 3.511.

      The Prioritization step involves examining all identified
                                                                                                      Analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and
      topics that could be included in a sustainability report,
                                                                                                      ‘Significance to the Organization’
      assessing which topics are material, and deciding the
      level of coverage and detail they will be afforded; the                                         It is important to note that while each Aspect should
      relative reporting priority.                                                                    be assessed on ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and
                                                                                                      ‘Significance to the Organization’, these viewpoints
      In the Prioritization step, analysis should be undertaken                                       overlap to some extent with respect to internal
      on the Aspect level. The step also involves deciding how                                        stakeholders. The interests and expectations of
      to represent the reporting organization’s performance in                                        stakeholders that are invested specifically in the success
      material topics in the report.                                                                  of the organization (e.g., of workers, shareholders, and
                                                                                                      suppliers) should inform the analysis of both viewpoints.


          Basic features of the Prioritization step
          The Prioritization step should include the following features as a minimum:
          1.	 An assessment of the Aspects based on analyzing the:
               •	      Significance to Stakeholders; and
               •	      Significance to the Organization.
               An analysis of Aspects using these viewpoints will help the reporting organization to combine findings from
               stakeholder engagement (on how stakeholders perceive impacts) with an assessment of organizational priorities.
          2.	 Determining materiality and relative reporting priority. Depending on the Aspect, this determination should
              involve qualitative analysis and discussion, or quantitative assessment, or both, on the basis of criteria. It is
              important to note that the fact that a topic is difficult to quantify does not mean that the topic is not material.
               The reporting organization needs to establish the thresholds that render an Aspect material, and support its
               decision-making about relative reporting priority. Establishing thresholds should include consideration of time
               horizons. The thresholds and underlying criteria need to be clearly defined, documented and communicated.
          3.	 A systematic approach. The Prioritization assessment should be systematic, documented and replicable, and
              used consistently from year to year. Changes to the assessment approach, and their implications, should be
              documented.
          4.	 Visual communication. The reporting organization should be able to communicate the results of its Prioritization
              step in a simple visual manner, explaining the relationship of the selected Aspects to the analysis of the two
              viewpoints stated above. The representation of Aspects within this visual explanation should be supported by
              evidence or a documented rationale.


     11
        	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22.



                                                                                                                                                                             7
TP   Technical Protocol



             SIGNIFICANCE TO STAKEHOLDERS                                             into a series of decisions on what to include and exclude
                                                                                      from its report.
             The analysis of this viewpoint should include, but is
             not limited to, assessment of the views expressed by
                                                                                      Consideration of the Aspects identified by stakeholders
             stakeholders during the reporting period.
                                                                                      may include but is not limited to:

             Stakeholder views can be drawn from existing,                            •	   Each stakeholder group’s perception of the
             ongoing engagement mechanisms, as well as from                                organization’s impact on that stakeholder group
             stakeholder engagement that is initiated specifically
                                                                                      •	   Each stakeholder group’s perception of the group’s
             for defining sustainability report content. Throughout
                                                                                           dependency on the organization
             the engagement process the Reporting Principle of
             ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ is applied in detail.                        •	   The geographical location of stakeholders, and the
                                                                                           significance of the Aspect to their region
             The nature of the organization’s impact should inform
                                                                                      •	   The diversity and range of stakeholders who express
             the geographic focus of engagement, and the process of
                                                                                           interest and/or are affected
             engagement should be appropriate to the stakeholder
             group. Stakeholder engagement should identify the                        •	   The expectations of stakeholders regarding action
             interests of stakeholders who are unable to articulate                        and response to an Aspect
             their views (e.g., future generations, fauna, ecosystems,
                                                                                      •	   The expectations of stakeholders regarding
             etc). These views could be presented by proxies. The
                                                                                           transparency on a particular Aspect
             reporting organization should identify a process
             for taking such views into account in determining
                                                                                      In addition, prioritizing stakeholders requires analysis of
             materiality. The organization should identify the interests
                                                                                      how stakeholders relate to the reporting organization.
             of stakeholders with whom it may not be in constant or
                                                                                      This process may include, but is not limited to, the
             obvious dialogue.
                                                                                      degree to which stakeholders:

             The stakeholder engagement should be two-way in                          •	   Are interested in or affected by the organization’s
             nature, systematic and objective. Some engagement                             impacts
             processes with specific stakeholder groups, such as
                                                                                      •	   Have the ability to influence outcomes within the
             workers and communities, should be independent of
                                                                                           organization
             management and include mechanisms for stakeholders
             to express collective views relevant to their location.                  •	   Are invested in the success/failure of the
                                                                                           organization
             An organization should also be able to identify and
             consider their key stakeholders and their respective                     The GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines require
             concerns, and how their views may affect decisions on                    disclosure on stakeholder engagement under Standard
             the report content.                                                      Disclosures 4.14-4.1712. The reporting organization
                                                                                      should be able to describe how stakeholders are
             The engagement process should be sensitive to Aspects                    identified and prioritized, how their input has been
             that are important to key stakeholders while recognizing                 used or not used, and how different expectations and
             gaps between the perceptions of the organization                         interests are assessed, as well as the organization’s
             and stakeholders. Aspects of high significance to key                    rationale behind the chosen approach.
             stakeholders should be considered material, especially
             those Aspects that concern the stakeholders’ own                         The analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ must
             interests.                                                               include use of the tests that relate to stakeholders for the
                                                                                      Reporting Principle of ‘Materiality’13.
             The analysis requires the reporting organization to
             translate the varied opinions of different stakeholders




             12	
                   See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 24.
             13	
                   See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 8.



8    © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles                 TP


SIGNIFICANCE TO THE ORGANIZATION                                          The definition of thresholds has a significant effect on a
The analysis should include but is not limited to:                       sustainability report. It is important that the thresholds
                                                                         are clearly defined, documented and communicated by
•	     Current and future financial and non-financial                    the reporting organization.
       implications
                                                                         In defining thresholds, the organization needs to make a
•	     Impacts on the strategies, policies, processes,
                                                                         decision on how to address Aspects that weigh more in
       relationships and commitments of the organization
                                                                         one viewpoint than the other. Emerging issues – Aspects
•	     Impacts on competitive advantage/management                       that might become relevant over time – are an example
       excellence                                                        of this. An Aspect does not need to weigh heavily in
                                                                         both viewpoints to be deemed a priority for reporting.
The aim of the analysis is to prioritize those Aspects
                                                                         The Aspect’s weight within one viewpoint is more
that might positively or negatively influence the
                                                                         important than convergence between the different
organization’s ability to deliver on its vision and/or
                                                                         viewpoints, and the establishing of a lowest common
strategy.
                                                                         denominator should be avoided. In addition, as noted
To prioritize these Aspects for reporting, the                           earlier, Aspects of high significance to key stakeholders
organization’s assessment can include but is not limited                 concerning their own interests should be considered
to:                                                                      material for reporting.

•	     The likelihood of risks or opportunities arising from             After the decision on which Aspects should be
       an Aspect                                                         considered material, the reporting organization needs
                                                                         to make an assessment of relative reporting priorities.
•	     The likelihood of a potential long or short term
                                                                         Depending on the relative reporting priority assigned,
       impact
                                                                         the coverage of material Aspects in the report varies. The
•	     Severity of impact                                                reporting organization can then decide on the level of
                                                                         coverage for the individual Aspects.
•	     How critical the impact is for the long-term
       performance of the organization                                   In Figure 3, the area between the two axes includes
•	     Ability/maturity of the organization to respond                   the Aspects identified during the Identification step.
                                                                         Here, the Aspects are placed with respect to the
•	     Preparedness                                                      considerations of stakeholders and the organization.
•	     Opportunity for the organization to grow or gain                  All the Aspects within the chart should be considered for
       advantage from the impact                                         reporting. The thresholds, represented by the red arcs,
                                                                         are set by the organization. Where an Aspect sits within
Elements of this information might be available through                  defined thresholds will determine the level of coverage
established internal policies, practices and procedures                  the Aspect should receive in a sustainability report.
(e.g., strategy, KPIs, risk assessments, and financial
reports), as well as regulatory disclosure.

The analysis of ‘Significance to the Organization’ must
include use of the tests that relate to organizational
                                                                       Significance to Stakeholders




factors for the Reporting Principle of ‘Materiality’14.

Determining materiality and relative reporting
                                                                                                                                           e




priority
                                                                                                                                         ag
                                                                                                                                       er
                                                                                                                                     ov




After completing the analysis of ‘Significance to
                                                                                                                                   fC
                                                                                                                                 lo




Stakeholders’ and ‘Significance to the Organization’, the
                                                                                                                               ve
                                                                                                                             Le




reporting organization will be able to visually represent
an Aspect with respect to both viewpoints.

The organization should now define thresholds that
render an Aspect material. The analysis of the two
viewpoints should be reflected in these thresholds.
                                                                                                                    Significance to the Organization
                                                                                                     Aspects of high significance to either Stakeholders or to the Organization should be considered
                                                                                                     for reporting


                                                                                                       Figure 3: Relative reporting priority
14	
      See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12.


                                                                                                                                                                                                       9
TP   Technical Protocol



             An organization could consider the following as                      Step 3: Validation – checking the
             examples of how it may address content and coverage                  Completeness of the material Aspects
             levels according to relative reporting priority:

             •	   Aspects with relatively low reporting priority may              Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators

                  be Aspects reported to fulfill regulatory or other
                  reporting requirements. It may be decided to not                                                                                                             Report
                  include them in the report.
                                                                                              IDENTIFICATION              PRIORITIZATION           VALIDATION
             •	   Aspects assigned medium-level reporting priority
                  may be considered for inclusion in the report, but
                                                                                               Sustainability              Materiality              Completeness
                  given less attention and content.                                               Context
                                                                                                                   Stakeholder Inclusiveness
             •	   Aspects deemed high-level may be reported on
                  in great detail, be given more attention, or form a
                                                                                                                                 REVIEW
                  theme for the report itself.

             At this stage in defining report content, the reporting              The Validation step requires all identified material
             process should revisit the range of entities, or groups of           Aspects to be assessed against the Reporting Principle
             entities, that fall within the Report Boundary. To do so,            of ‘Completeness’ prior to gathering the information to
             the organization needs to determine the level of impact              be reported. This ensures that Aspects identified in the
             of the entities it controls or has significant influence             Prioritization step are checked against the dimensions
             upon, to determine their relative importance.                        of Scope, Boundary and Time. If necessary, adjustments
                                                                                  should be made to the selection and coverage of the
             Alongside this, the reporting organization needs to                  material Aspects.
             decide on the depth of information in its report; for
             which of its entities should it include Performance                  The reporting organization can also take the approach
             Indicators, Disclosure on Management Approach or a                   of assessing the Performance Indicators for materiality
             narrative disclosure covering strategies and dilemmas.               during the Validation step. If a Performance Indicator is
             See the ‘Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting’ and                deemed material, yet the Aspect it belongs to was not
             the GRI Boundary Protocol for further guidance and                   identified as material, the Aspect should be reconsidered
             definitions.                                                         for its materiality.

             At the end of the Prioritization stage the reporting                 Validation should be undertaken with the aim of
             organization will have established all the Aspects to be             ensuring a report provides a reasonable and balanced
             included in the report and the level of coverage that                representation of the organization’s sustainability
             each Aspect will be afforded.                                        performance, including both its positive and negative
                                                                                  contributions.

                                                                                  The Validation step involves assessing the material
                                                                                  Aspects against:

                                                                                  1.	 Report Scope – the range of sustainability topics
                                                                                      covered in a report

                                                                                  2.	 Report Boundary – the range of entities whose
                                                                                      performance will be represented by the report

                                                                                  3.	 Time – the completeness of selected information
                                                                                      with respect to the reporting period

                                                                                  The four tests featured in the Reporting Principle
                                                                                  of ‘Completeness’15 should guide the reporting
                                                                                  organization during the Validation of its report content.



             	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 13.
            15




10   © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP


Conducting these tests will help ensure that report                   should be subject to the same Reporting Principles
content has been decided on properly.                                 and have the same technical rigor as GRI’s Standard
                                                                      Disclosures.
It is critical for the material Aspects identified for
inclusion in the report to be signed off by the relevant              After the Validation step, the reporting organization
internal senior decision-makers at the reporting                      should have authorized its chosen material Aspects to
organization. Some organizations may choose to                        be included in the report. The organization can now
involve external stakeholders in this authorization. The              start to gather the information to be reported, and
Validation process should be documented.                              assemble the report. In gathering the information, the
                                                                      organization will need to determine the Aspects for
Once the report content has been signed off, the                      which it already has management and performance
identified material Aspects require translating into                  information available, and those for which it still needs
disclosure items to report against.                                   to establish management approaches and performance
                                                                      measurement systems.17
Many of the Aspects identified will correspond to
Aspects in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines
and Sector Supplements. These documents set out
                                                                      Review
Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance                    Once a sustainability report has been compiled and
Indicators under each of the Aspects.                                 presented, it is vitally important that the reporting
                                                                      organization reviews it. In compiling a report it is
Performance Indicators, as defined in the GRI Reporting               crucial to follow the three steps of 1. Identification, 2.
Framework, are the result of a unique engagement                      Prioritization and 3. Validation. Reviewing a report is of
process and may be considered authoritative: the                      equal importance to the following of these three steps.
best expected practice for a globally consistent way of
measuring and monitoring performance on each Aspect.                  Review takes place after the report has been released
Performance Indicators include Core and Additional                    and the organization is preparing for the next report
Indicators.                                                           cycle. A wide-ranging radar should be utilized for the
                                                                      review. The findings will inform and contribute to the
Core Indicators are generally applicable Indicators in                Identification step for the next reporting cycle.
the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and are
assumed to best capture the measuring of material                     The Principles of ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ and
Aspects for most organizations. There may be cases                    ‘Sustainability Context’, and their associated tests in the
where an Aspect is considered material, but a specific                GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines18, should inform
Indicator could be deemed not material in the context                 the review of a sustainability report. They serve as checks
and circumstances.                                                    regarding the presentation and evaluation of report
                                                                      content, as well as checks for the reporting process as a
An organization should report on Core Indicators                      whole.
unless they are deemed not material on the basis of
the Reporting Principles for Defining Report Content.16               The reporting organization can choose to engage
Additional Indicators may also be determined material.                internal and external stakeholders to check whether
                                                                      the report content provides a reasonable and balanced
A reporting organization may identify material Aspects                picture of the organization’s sustainability performance,
that are not addressed in the GRI Reporting Framework.                and if the process by which the report content was
To address these Aspects the organization may apply                   derived reflects the intent of the two Reporting
alternative indicators, or develop their own indicators.              Principles.
Organization-specific indicators included in the report


16
  	 If a Core Indicator is not reported and the reporting organization plans to declare an Application Level A or A+, the
    organization must explain the reason for the Indicator’s omission. See the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines and
    www.globalreporting.org for further information on the GRI Application Levels and background information on reasons for
    omission.
17
  	 If an Aspect has been identified as material and the reporting organization lacks sufficient information to report on it, the
    sustainability report should state what action will be taken to resolve the information deficit, and the timeframe for doing so.
18
  	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12.



                                                                                                                                               11
TP   Technical Protocol



            Conclusion
            This Technical Protocol provides process guidance on
            how to define the content of a sustainability report. This
            includes deciding on the Scope of a report, the range of
            topics covered, each topic’s relative reporting priority
            and level of coverage, and what to disclose in the report
            about the process for defining its content.

            Defining report content is a process that varies with an
            organization’s individual circumstances and relies on
            informed judgment. As the Protocol cannot address
            all variations, the GRI website features a collection of
            examples from reporting organizations that describe
            the process by which they defined their report content,
            required by Standard Disclosures 3.5 – 3.719.

            The online examples can be found at:
            www.globalreporting.org

            The Report Content and Materiality Protocol is intended
            to help organizations optimize the quality and value of
            their sustainability reporting. With a clear idea of what
            is involved in defining report content, organizations
            are able to focus sustainability reports on material
            sustainability topics. Identifying and prioritizing material
            topics helps organizations to identify opportunities
            and anticipate risks, and enables greater understanding
            of their ability to create, preserve or erode economic,
            environmental and social value for itself, its stakeholders
            and society at large.




            19
              	 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22.



12   © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP


Glossary of Terms
Additional Indicators                                         Indicator Protocol
Additional Indicators are those Indicators identified in      An Indicator Protocol provides definitions,
the GRI Guidelines that represent emerging practice           compilation guidance, and other information to
or address topics that may be material to some                assist report preparers, and to ensure consistency in
organizations but not generally for a majority.               the interpretation of the Performance Indicators. An
                                                              Indicator Protocol exists for each of the Performance
Aspects                                                       Indicators contained in the Guidelines.

The general types of information that are related to a
                                                              Performance Indicator
specific Indicator category (e.g., energy use, child labor,
customers).                                                   Qualitative or quantitative information about results
                                                              or outcomes associated with the organization that is
Categories                                                    comparable and demonstrates change over time.

Broad areas or groupings of sustainability topics. The
                                                              Precautionary Principle
categories included in the GRI Guidelines are: economic,
environmental, and social. The social grouping is             The Precautionary Principle refers to the approach
categorized in terms of Labor Practices, Human Rights,        taken to address potential environmental impacts. See
Society, and Product Responsibility. A given category         Rio Declaration on Environment and Development
may have several Indicator Aspects.                           (1992), United Nations Conference on Environment
                                                              and Development. ‘Principle 15: In order to protect
Core Indicator                                                the environment, the precautionary approach shall be
                                                              widely applied by States according to their capabilities.
Core Indicators are those Indicators identified in the GRI
                                                              Where there are threats of serious or irreversible
Guidelines to be of interest to most stakeholders and
                                                              damage, lack of full scientific certainty shall not be used
assumed to be material unless deemed otherwise on the
                                                              as a reason for postponing cost effective measures to
basis of the GRI Reporting Principles.
                                                              prevent environmental degradation.’

Ecosystem dependencies
                                                              Report Boundary
For detailed information on ‘dependencies’, see the TEEB
                                                              Boundary refers to the range of entities (e.g., subsidiaries,
(The Economics of Ecosystems and Biodiversity) study
                                                              joint ventures, sub-contractors, etc) whose performance
discussions at www.teebweb.org.
                                                              is represented in the report. In setting the Boundary for
                                                              its report, an organization must consider the range of
Entity
                                                              entities over which it exercises control (often referred
An organization or sometimes an operation that is             to as the ‘organizational boundary’ and usually linked to
considered for inclusion or exclusion from a reporting        definitions used in financial reporting) and over which
boundary, no matter whether it is a legally constituted       it exercises influence (often called the ‘operational
body.                                                         boundary’). In assessing influence, the organization will
                                                              need to consider its ability to influence entities upstream
GRI Reporting Framework                                       (e.g., in its supply chain) as well as entities downstream
                                                              (e.g., distributors and users of its products and services).
The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to provide
                                                              The Boundary may vary based on the specific Aspect or
a generally accepted framework for reporting on
                                                              type of information being reported.
an organization’s economic, environmental, and
social performance. The Framework consists of the
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, the Indicator
Protocols, Technical Protocols, and the Sector
Supplements.




                                                                                                                                     13
TP   Technical Protocol



            Report Scope                                                  •	   Performance Indicators that elicit comparable
                                                                               information on the economic, environmental, and
            Scope refers to the range of sustainability topics covered
                                                                               social performance of the organization.
            in a report. The sum of the topics and Indicators reported
            should be sufficient to reflect significant economic,
                                                                          Topics
            environmental, and social impacts. It should also enable
            stakeholders to assess the organization’s performance.        The largest group of subjects within the terminology
            In determining whether the information in the report          used in the GRI Reporting Framework (see Figure 1 in
            is sufficient, the organization should consider both          this Technical Protocol).
            the results of stakeholder engagement processes and
            broadbased societal expectations that may not have
            surfaced directly through stakeholder engagement
            processes.

            Reporting Principle
            Concepts that describe the outcomes a report should
            achieve and that guide decisions made throughout the
            reporting process, such as which Indicators to respond
            to, and how to respond to them.

            Sector Supplements
            Sector Supplements are versions of the GRI Guidelines
            tailored for particular sectors. Some sectors face unique
            issues. Sector Supplements capture these issues, which
            may not be covered in the original Guidelines. Sector
            Supplements feature integrated commentary and new
            Performance Indicators, ensuring that sustainability
            reports cover key sectoral concerns.

            Stakeholders
            Stakeholders are defined broadly as those groups or
            individuals: (a) that can reasonably be expected to be
            significantly affected by the organization’s activities,
            products, and/or services; or (b) whose actions can
            reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the
            organization to successfully implement its strategies and
            achieve its objectives.

            Standard Disclosures
            The Guidelines present topics and information for
            reporting that are material to most organizations and
            of interest to most stakeholders. These are captured in
            three types of Standard Disclosures:

            •	    Strategy and Profile Disclosures set the overall
                  context for reporting and for understanding
                  organizational performance, such as its strategy,
                  profile, governance, and management approach;

            •	    Disclosures on Management Approach cover how an
                  organization addresses a given set of topics in order
                  to provide context for understanding performance in
                  a specific area; and




14   © 2011 GRI
Applying the Report Content Principles   TP


Legal Liability

This document, designed to promote sustainability           Further information on the GRI and the
reporting, has been developed through a unique              Sustainability Reporting Guidelines may be
multi-stakeholder consultative process involving            obtained from:
representatives from reporting organizations and
                                                            www.globalreporting.org
report information users from around the world. While
the GRI Board of Directors encourage use of the GRI         info@globalreporting.org
Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (GRI Guidelines)
by all organizations, the preparation and publication
of reports based fully or partially on the GRI Guidelines
is the full responsibility of those producing them.
Neither the GRI Board of Directors nor Stichting Global
Reporting Initiative can assume responsibility for          Global Reporting Initiative
any consequences or damages resulting directly or
                                                            PO Box 10039
indirectly, from the use of the GRI Guidelines in the
preparation of reports or the use of reports based on the   1001 EA Amsterdam
GRI Guidelines.
                                                            The Netherlands

                                                            Tel: +31 (0) 20 531 00 00
Copyright and Trademark Notice
                                                            Fax: +31 (0) 20 531 00 31
This document is copyright-protected by Stichting
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). The reproduction and
distribution of this document for information and/or
                                                            © 2000-2011 Global Reporting Initiative.
use in preparing a sustainability report is permitted
                                                            All rights reserved.
without prior permission from GRI. However, neither this
document nor any extract from it may be reproduced,
stored, translated, or transferred in any form or by any
means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded,
or otherwise) for any other purpose without prior
written permission from GRI.

Global Reporting Initiative, the Global Reporting
Initiative logo, Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and
GRI are trademarks of the Global Reporting Initiative.




                                                                                                                                   15

More Related Content

PDF
Iso strategic plan_2011-2015
PPTX
Sarah Lewis - CEO Deck Chile 2012
PPT
Reflections on monitoring a large-scale civil society WASH initiative: Lesson...
 
PDF
Targeting Results: Lessons Learned from UAE National ID Program
PPTX
Community engagement dr dolina - day 1 - session2
PDF
Mobilising private investment in clean energy infrastructure
PDF
Investment in clean energy infrastructure
PDF
What's Next in Growth? 2016
Iso strategic plan_2011-2015
Sarah Lewis - CEO Deck Chile 2012
Reflections on monitoring a large-scale civil society WASH initiative: Lesson...
 
Targeting Results: Lessons Learned from UAE National ID Program
Community engagement dr dolina - day 1 - session2
Mobilising private investment in clean energy infrastructure
Investment in clean energy infrastructure
What's Next in Growth? 2016

Similar to G3.1 guidelines-incl-technical-protocol (20)

PPT
Sustainability reporting
PPT
M. Molteni: Corporate Social Responsibility
PDF
Assessing social and economic impacts of building materials
PPTX
global reporting initiative & sustainability reporting
PDF
Sustainability Here to stay
PDF
Gri g3 quick-referencesheet
PPT
Sustainability Reporting- Business Ethics
DOCX
What is the global reporting initiative?
PDF
WBCSD_Reality of Materiality_Insights from real world applications of ESG mat...
PPTX
Reporting on Community Relations, Investment and Development
PDF
Cómo medir la sostenibilidad de los edificios - Informe UNEP FI
PDF
Whitepaper integrated reporting in the Cloud
PDF
Sustainability Management
PPTX
Csr gri framework
PDF
GRI US Conference Executive Summary - St Louis May 2012
PDF
Sustainable Businesses
PDF
Prominence of stakeholders in designing sustainability reporting practices ba...
PDF
Sustainable Shipping. Opportunities beyond compliance
PPT
Integrated Sustainability Reporting
PDF
11.pp.0026www.iiste.org call for paper-39
Sustainability reporting
M. Molteni: Corporate Social Responsibility
Assessing social and economic impacts of building materials
global reporting initiative & sustainability reporting
Sustainability Here to stay
Gri g3 quick-referencesheet
Sustainability Reporting- Business Ethics
What is the global reporting initiative?
WBCSD_Reality of Materiality_Insights from real world applications of ESG mat...
Reporting on Community Relations, Investment and Development
Cómo medir la sostenibilidad de los edificios - Informe UNEP FI
Whitepaper integrated reporting in the Cloud
Sustainability Management
Csr gri framework
GRI US Conference Executive Summary - St Louis May 2012
Sustainable Businesses
Prominence of stakeholders in designing sustainability reporting practices ba...
Sustainable Shipping. Opportunities beyond compliance
Integrated Sustainability Reporting
11.pp.0026www.iiste.org call for paper-39
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
PDF
Business model innovation report 2022.pdf
PDF
Nidhal Samdaie CV - International Business Consultant
PPTX
New Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation - Copy.pptx
PDF
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
PDF
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
PDF
How to Get Business Funding for Small Business Fast
PPTX
job Avenue by vinith.pptxvnbvnvnvbnvbnbmnbmbh
PDF
How to Get Funding for Your Trucking Business
PDF
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
PPTX
AI-assistance in Knowledge Collection and Curation supporting Safe and Sustai...
PDF
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
PDF
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time
PPTX
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
PDF
DOC-20250806-WA0002._20250806_112011_0000.pdf
DOCX
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx
PPTX
ICG2025_ICG 6th steering committee 30-8-24.pptx
PDF
Reconciliation AND MEMORANDUM RECONCILATION
PPT
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
DOCX
unit 1 COST ACCOUNTING AND COST SHEET
CkgxkgxydkydyldylydlydyldlyddolydyoyyU2.pptx
Business model innovation report 2022.pdf
Nidhal Samdaie CV - International Business Consultant
New Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation - Copy.pptx
Katrina Stoneking: Shaking Up the Alcohol Beverage Industry
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
How to Get Business Funding for Small Business Fast
job Avenue by vinith.pptxvnbvnvnvbnvbnbmnbmbh
How to Get Funding for Your Trucking Business
BsN 7th Sem Course GridNNNNNNNN CCN.pdf
AI-assistance in Knowledge Collection and Curation supporting Safe and Sustai...
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
IFRS Notes in your pocket for study all the time
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
DOC-20250806-WA0002._20250806_112011_0000.pdf
Euro SEO Services 1st 3 General Updates.docx
ICG2025_ICG 6th steering committee 30-8-24.pptx
Reconciliation AND MEMORANDUM RECONCILATION
340036916-American-Literature-Literary-Period-Overview.ppt
unit 1 COST ACCOUNTING AND COST SHEET
Ad

G3.1 guidelines-incl-technical-protocol

  • 1. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 2. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 3. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Table of Contents Preface General Reporting Notes Sustainable Development and the Data Gathering 40 Transparency Imperative Report Form and Frequency 40 Introduction Assurance 41 Overview of Sustainability Reporting The Purpose of a Sustainability Report 3 Glossary of Terms 42 Orientation to the GRI Reporting Framework 3 Orientation to the GRI Guidelines 4 Applying the Guidelines 5 Part 1 Defining Report Content, Quality, and Boundary Guidance for Defining Report Content 7 Principles for Defining Report Content 8 Principles for Defining Report Quality 13 Guidance for Report Boundary Setting 17 Part 2 Standard Disclosures Strategy and Profile 20 1. Strategy and Analysis 20 2. Organizational Profile 21 3. Parameters 21 Report 4. Governance, Commitments, and Engagement 22 5. Management Approach and Performance Indicators 24 Economic 25 Environmental 27 Social: Labor Practices and Decent Work 30 Human Rights 32 Society 36 Product Responsibility 39 Version 3.1 1
  • 4. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Preface Sustainable Development and the Transparency Imperative The goal of sustainable development is to “meet the The urgency and magnitude of the risks and threats needs of the present without compromising the ability to our collective sustainability, alongside increasing of future generations to meet their own needs.”1 As choice and opportunities, will make transparency key forces in society, organizations of all kinds have an about economic, environmental, and social impacts important role to play in achieving this goal. a fundamental component in effective stakeholder relations, investment decisions, and other market Yet in this era of unprecedented economic growth, relations. To support this expectation, and to achieving this goal can seem more of an aspiration than communicate clearly and openly about sustainability, a reality. As economies globalize, new opportunities a globally shared framework of concepts, consistent to generate prosperity and quality of life are arising language, and metrics is required. It is the Global though trade, knowledge-sharing, and access to Reporting Initiative’s (GRI) mission to fulfil this need technology. However, these opportunities are not always by providing a trusted and credible framework available for an ever-increasing human population, for sustainability reporting that can be used by and are accompanied by new risks to the stability of organizations of any size, sector, or location. the environment. Statistics demonstrating positive improvements in the lives of many people around the Transparency about the sustainability of organizational world are counter-balanced by alarming information activities is of interest to a diverse range of stakeholders, about the state of the environment and the continuing including business, labor, non-governmental burden of poverty and hunger on millions of people. organizations, investors, accountancy, and others. This This contrast creates one of the most pressing dilemmas is why GRI has relied on the collaboration of a large for the 21st century. network of experts from all of these stakeholder groups in consensus-seeking consultations. These consultations, One of the key challenges of sustainable development together with practical experience, have continuously is that it demands new and innovative choices and ways improved the Reporting Framework since GRI’s founding of thinking. While developments in knowledge and in 1997. This multi-stakeholder approach to learning technology are contributing to economic development, has given the Reporting Framework the widespread they also have the potential to help resolve the risks credibility it enjoys with a range of stakeholder groups. and threats to the sustainability of our social relations, environment, and economies. New knowledge and innovations in technology, management, and public policy are challenging organizations to make new choices in the way their operations, products, services, and activities impact the earth, people, and economies. 1 World Commission on Environment and Development. Our Common Future. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987, p.43. 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 5. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Overview of Sustainability Reporting Orientation to the GRI Reporting The Purpose of a Sustainability Report Framework Sustainability reporting is the practice of measuring, All GRI Reporting Framework documents are developed disclosing, and being accountable to internal and using a process that seeks consensus through dialogue external stakeholders for organizational performance between stakeholders from business, the investor towards the goal of sustainable development. community, labor, civil society, accounting, academia, ‘Sustainability reporting’ is a broad term considered and others. All Reporting Framework documents are synonymous with others used to describe reporting on subject to testing and continuous improvement. economic, environmental, and social impacts (e.g., triple bottom line, corporate responsibility reporting, etc.). The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to serve as a generally accepted framework for reporting on A sustainability report should provide a balanced an organization’s economic, environmental, and social and reasonable representation of the sustainability performance. It is designed for use by organizations of performance of a reporting organization – including any size, sector, or location. It takes into account the both positive and negative contributions. practical considerations faced by a diverse range of organizations – from small enterprises to those with Sustainability reports based on the GRI Reporting extensive and geographically dispersed operations. Framework disclose outcomes and results that occurred The GRI Reporting Framework contains general and within the reporting period in the context of the sector-specific content that has been agreed by a wide organization’s commitments, strategy, and management range of stakeholders around the world to be generally approach. Reports can be used for the following applicable for reporting an organization’s sustainability purposes, among others: performance. • Benchmarking and assessing sustainability The Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (the performance with respect to laws, norms, codes, Guidelines) consist of Principles for defining report performance standards, and voluntary initiatives; content and ensuring the quality of reported information. It also includes Standard Disclosures made • Demonstrating how the organization influences up of Performance Indicators and other disclosure and is influenced by expectations about items, as well as guidance on specific technical topics in sustainable development; and reporting. G3 Reporting Framework • Comparing performance within an organization and between different organizations over time. Ho wt s a n d Gui d oR ip le in c a epo nc Pr rt e Reporting S t a n d a rd D Framework S e c to r S ls to c o por t P ro osu isc upp o Re l re s lem en tt ts ha W Figure 1: The GRI Reporting Framework Version 3.1 3
  • 6. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Indicator Protocols exist for each of the Performance Orientation to the GRI Guidelines Indicators contained in the Guidelines. These Protocols The Sustainability Reporting Guidelines consist of provide definitions, compilation guidance, and other Reporting Principles, Reporting Guidance, and Standard information to assist report preparers and to ensure Disclosures (including Performance Indicators). These consistency in the interpretation of the Performance elements are considered to be of equal in weight and Indicators. Users of the Guidelines should also use the importance. Indicator Protocols. Part 1 – Reporting Principles and Guidance Sector Supplements complement the Guidelines Three main elements of the reporting process are with interpretations and guidance on how to apply the described in Part 1. To help determine what to report Guidelines in a given sector, and include sector-specific on, this section covers the Reporting Principles of Performance Indicators. Applicable Sector Supplements materiality, stakeholder inclusiveness, sustainability should be used in addition to the Guidelines rather than context, and completeness, along with a brief set of in place of the Guidelines. tests for each Principle. Application of these Principles with the Standard Disclosures determines the topics Technical Protocols are created to provide guidance on and Indicators to be reported. This is followed by issues in reporting, such as setting the report boundary. Principles of balance, comparability, accuracy, timeliness, They are designed to be used in conjunction with the reliability, and clarity, along with tests that can be used Guidelines and Sector Supplements and cover issues to help achieve the appropriate quality of the reported that face most organizations during the reporting information. This section concludes with guidance for process. reporting organizations on how to define the range of Orientation to the Reporting Guidelines entities represented by the report (also called the ‘Report Boundary’). Options for Reporting Guidance for Defining INPUT Report Content Principles and Guidance Principles for Defining INPUT Report Content Principles for Ensuring INPUT Report Quality Guidance for Report INPUT Boundary Setting Standard Disclosures Management Performance Indicators Approach Profile OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Focused Sustainability Report Figure 2: Overview of the GRI Guidelines 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 7. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Part 2 – Standard Disclosures Applying the Guidelines Part 2 contains the Standard Disclosures that should Getting Started be included in sustainability reports. The Guidelines All organizations (private, public, or non-profit) are identify information that is relevant and material to most encouraged to report against the Guidelines whether they organizations and of interest to most stakeholders for are beginners or experienced reporters, and regardless of reporting the three types of Standard Disclosures: their size, sector, or location. Reporting can take various forms, including web or print, stand alone or combined • Strategy and Profile: Disclosures that set the with annual or financial reports. overall context for understanding organizational performance such as its strategy, profile, and The first step is to determine report content. Guidance for governance. this is provided in Part 1. Some organizations may choose to introduce reporting against the full GRI Reporting • Management Approach: Disclosures that Framework from the outset, while others may want to cover how an organization addresses a given start with the most feasible and practical topics first and set of topics in order to provide context for phase in reporting on other topics over time. All reporting understanding performance in a specific area. organizations should describe the scope of their reporting and are encouraged to indicate their plans for expanding • Performance Indicators: Indicators that elicit their reporting over time. comparable information on the economic, environmental, and social performance of the GRI Application Levels organization. Upon finalization of their report, preparers should declare the level to which they have applied the GRI Reporting Framework via the “GRI Application Levels” system. This system aims to provide: • Report readers with clarity about the extent to which the GRI Guidelines and other Reporting Framework elements have been applied in the preparation of a report. • Report preparers with a vision or path for incrementally expanding application of the GRI Reporting Framework over time. Declaring an Application Level results in a clear communi- cation about which elements of the GRI Reporting Frame- work have been applied in the preparation of a report. To meet the needs of new beginners, advanced reporters, and those somewhere in between, there are three levels in the system. They are titled C, B, and A, The reporting criteria found in each level reflects an increasing application or coverage of the GRI Reporting Framework. An organization can self-declare a “plus” (+) at each level (ex., C+, B+, A+) if they have utilized external assurance.2 An organization self-declares a reporting level based on its own assessment of its report content against the criteria in the GRI Application Levels. 2 S ee the assurance section under General Reporting Notes for more information on options for assurance. Version 3.1 5
  • 8. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines In addition to the self declaration, reporting organizations Part 1: Defining Report Content, Quality, can choose one or both of the following options: and Boundary This section provides Reporting Principles and Reporting • Have an assurance provider offer an opinion on the Guidance regarding defining report content, ensuring self-declaration. the quality of reported information, and setting the Report Boundary. • Request that the GRI check the self-declaration. Reporting Guidance describes actions that can be taken, For more information on Application Levels, and or options that the reporting organization can consider the complete criteria, see the GRI Applications Level when making decisions on what to report on, and information pack available as an insert to this document, generally helps interpret or govern the use of the GRI or found online at www.globalreporting.org. Reporting Framework. Guidance is provided for defining report content and setting report Boundary. Request for notification of use Organizations that have used the Guidelines and/or other Reporting Principles describe the outcomes a report elements of the GRI Reporting Framework as the basis for should achieve and guide decisions throughout the their report are requested to notify the Global Reporting reporting process, such as selecting which topics and Initiative upon its release. While notifying GRI, organizations Indicators to report on and how to report on them. Each can choose any or all of the following options: of the Principles consists of a definition, an explanation, and a set of tests for the reporting organization to assess • Simply notify the GRI of the report and provide its use of the Principles. The tests are intended to serve hard and/or soft copy as tools for self-diagnosis, but not as specific disclosures to report against. Tests can, however, serve as a reference • Register their report in GRI’s online database of reports for explaining decisions about the application of the Principles • Request GRI check their self-declared Application Level. Together, the Principles are intended to help achieve transparency – a value and a goal that underlies all Maximizing Report Value aspects of sustainability reporting. Transparency can be defined as the complete disclosure of information Sustainability reporting is a living process and tool, on the topics and Indicators required to reflect impacts and does not begin or end with a printed or online and enable stakeholders to make decisions, and the publication. Reporting should fit into a broader process processes, procedures, and assumptions used to for setting organizational strategy, implementing prepare those disclosures. The Principles themselves are action plans, and assessing outcomes. Reporting organized into two groups: enables a robust assessment of the organization’s performance, and can support continuous improvement • Principles for determining the topics and Indicators in performance over time. It also serves as a tool for on which the organization should report; and engaging with stakeholders and securing useful input to organizational processes. • Principles for ensuring the quality and appropriate presentation of reported information. The Principles have been grouped in this way to help clarify their role and function, but this does not impose a rigid restriction on their use. Each Principle can support a range of decisions, and may prove useful in considering questions beyond just defining report content or ensuring the quality of reported information. 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 9. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG 1.1 Defining Report Content • The specific methods or processes used for assessing materiality should: In order to ensure a balanced and reasonable presentation of the organization’s performance, a • Differ for, and can be defined by, each determination must be made about what content the organization; report should cover. This determination should be made by considering both the organization’s purpose • Always take into account the guidance and and experience, and the reasonable expectations and tests found in the GRI Reporting Principles; and interests of the organization’s stakeholders. Both are important reference points when deciding what to • Be disclosed. include in the report. In applying this approach: Reporting Guidance for Defining Content The following approach governs the use of the GRI • Differentiate between Core and Additional Reporting Framework in preparing sustainability reports. Indicators. All Indicators have been developed More detailed guidance on defining content can be through GRI’s multi-stakeholder processes, and found in the Technical Protocol – Applying the Report those designated as Core are generally applicable Content Principles. Indicators and are assumed to be material for most organizations. An organization should report on • Identify the topics and related Indicators that are these unless they are deemed not material on relevant, and therefore might be appropriate to the basis of the Reporting Principles. Additional report, by undergoing an iterative process using the Indicators may also be determined to be material. Principles of materiality, stakeholder inclusiveness, • The Indicators in final versions of Sector sustainability context, and guidance on setting the Supplements are considered to be Core Indicators, Report Boundary. and should be applied using the same approach as the Core Indicators found in the Guidelines. • When identifying topics, consider the relevance of all Indicator Aspects identified in the GRI Guidelines • All other information (e.g., company specific and applicable Sector Supplements. Also consider Indicators) included in the report should be other topics, if any, that are relevant to report. subject to the same Reporting Principles and have the same technical rigor as GRI Standard • From the set of relevant topics and Indicators Disclosures. identified, use the tests listed for each Principle to assess Principles for Defining are material, which topics and Indicators Report Content • Confirm that the information to be reported and and therefore should be reported3. the Report Boundary are appropriate by applying the Principle of completeness. • Use the Principles to prioritize selected topics and decide which will be emphasized. Options for Reporting Principles and Guidance • Materiality Principles for Defining • Stakeholder INPUT Report Content Inclusiveness • Sustainability Context • Completeness Figure 3: Principles for defining report Content 3 GRI Organizational Profile Disclosures (1-4) apply to all reporting organizations. Version 3.1 7
  • 10. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Reporting Principles for Defining Content A combination of internal and external factors should be used to determine whether information is material, Each of the Reporting Principles consists of a definition, including factors such as the organization’s overall an explanation, and a set of tests to guide the use of mission and competitive strategy, concerns expressed the Principles. The tests are intended to serve as tools directly by stakeholders, broader social expectations, for self-diagnosis, but not as specific Disclosure items to and the organization’s influence on upstream (e.g., report against. The Principles should be used together supply chain) and downstream (e.g., customers) entities. with the guidance on defining content. Assessments of materiality should also take into account the basic expectations expressed in the international Materiality standards and agreements with which the organization Definition: The information in a report should cover is expected to comply. topics and Indicators that: These internal and external factors should be considered • reflect the organization’s significant economic, when evaluating the importance of information for environmental, and social impacts or that reflecting significant economic, environmental, and social impacts, or stakeholder decision making.5 A range • would substantively influence the assessments and of established methodologies can be used to assess the decisions of stakeholders. significance of impacts. In general, ‘significant impacts’ refer to those that are a subject of established concern Explanation: Organizations are faced with a wide range for expert communities, or that have been identified of topics on which it could report. Relevant topics and using established tools such as impact assessment Indicators are those that may reasonably be considered methodologies or life cycle assessments. Impacts that important for reflecting the organization’s economic, are considered important enough to require active environmental, and social impacts, or influencing the management or engagement by the organization can decisions of stakeholders, and, therefore, potentially merit likely be considered to be significant. inclusion in the report. Materiality is the threshold at which topics or Indicators become sufficiently important Establishing Materiality that they should be reported. Beyond this threshold, not all material topics will be of equal importance and the emphasis within a report should reflect the relative priority of these material topics and Indicators. In financial reporting, materiality is commonly thought of as a threshold for influencing the economic decisions Influence on Stakeholder Assessments and Decisions of those using an organization’s financial statements, gh investors in particular. The concept of a threshold is also Hi important in sustainability reporting, but it is concerned s ic y op rit with a wider range of impacts and stakeholders. io lT Pr ria g Materiality for sustainability reporting is not limited only tin e at or p M Re to those sustainability topics that have a significant e tiv la financial impact on the organization. Determining Re materiality for a sustainability report also includes w Lo considering economic, environmental, and social impacts that cross a threshold in affecting the ability to No n- meet the needs of the present without compromising M at the needs of future generations.4 These material topics e ria lT will often have a significant financial impact in the near- op ic s term or long-term on an organization. They will therefore also be relevant for stakeholders who focus strictly on the financial condition of an organization. Significance of Economic, Environmental, and Social Impacts Figure 4: Defining Materiality 4 World Commission on Environment and Development. Our Common Future. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987, p. 43. 5 See the principle of stakeholder inclusion for a discussion of stakeholders. 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 11. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG The report should emphasize information on performance R The main topics and future challenges for the regarding the most material topics. Other relevant topics sector reported by peers and competitors. can be included, but should be given less prominence in the report. The process by which the relative priority of R Relevant laws, regulations, international topics was determined should be explained. agreements, or voluntary agreements with strategic significance to the organization and its In addition to guiding the selection of topics to report, the stakeholders. Materiality Principle also applies to the use of Performance Indicators. When disclosing performance data, there are Significance to the Organization, including: varying degrees of comprehensiveness and detail that could be provided in a report. In some cases, GRI R Key organizational values, policies, strategies, guidance exists on the level of detail generally considered operational management systems, goals, and appropriate for a specific Indicator. Overall, decisions on targets. how to report data should be guided by the importance of the information for assessing the performance of the R The interests/expectations of stakeholders organization, and facilitating appropriate comparisons. specifically invested in the success of the organi- zation (e.g., employees, shareholders, and suppliers). Reporting on material topics may involve disclosing information used by external stakeholders that differs R Significant risks to the organization. from the information used internally for day-to-day management purposes. However, such information R Critical factors for enabling organizational success. does indeed belong in a report, where it can inform assessments or decision-making by stakeholders, or R The core competencies of the organization and the support engagement with stakeholders that can result in manner in which they can or could contribute to actions that would significantly influence performance sustainable development. or address key topics of stakeholder concern. Prioritizing Tests R The report prioritizes material topics and Indicators. In defining material topics, take into account the following: R Reasonably estimable sustainability impacts, risks, or opportunities (e.g., global warming, HIV-AIDS, poverty) identified through sound investigation by people with recognized expertise, or by expert bodies with recognized credentials in the field. Significance to Stakeholders, including: R Main sustainability interests/topics and Indicators raised by stakeholders (e.g., vulnerable groups within local communities, civil society). Version 3.1 9
  • 12. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Stakeholder Inclusiveness Stakeholder engagement processes can serve as tools for understanding the reasonable expectations and Definition: The reporting organization should identify interests of stakeholders. Organizations typically initiate its stakeholders and explain in the report how it has different types of stakeholder engagement as part of responded to their reasonable expectations and interests. their regular activities, which can provide useful inputs for decisions on reporting. These may include, for example, Explanation: Stakeholders are defined as entities or stakeholder engagement for the purpose of compliance individuals that can reasonably be expected to be with internationally-agreed standards, or informing significantly affected by the organization’s activities, ongoing organizational/ business processes. In addition, products, and/or services; and whose actions can stakeholder engagement may also be implemented reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the specifically to inform the report preparation process. organization to successfully implement its strategies Organizations can also use other means such as the and achieve its objectives. This includes entities or media, the scientific community, or collaborative activities individuals whose rights under law or international with peers and stakeholders. These means can help the conventions provide them with legitimate claims vis-à- organization better understand stakeholders’ reasonable vis the organization. expectations and interests. Stakeholders can include those who are invested in the For a report to be assurable, the process of stakeholder organization (e.g., employees, shareholders, suppliers) engagement should be documented. When stakeholder as well as those who have other relationships to the engagement processes are used for reporting purposes, organization (e.g., vulnerable groups within local they should be based on systematic or generally- communities, civil society). accepted approaches, methodologies, or principles. The overall approach should be sufficiently effective The reasonable expectations and interests of to ensure that stakeholders’ information needs are stakeholders are a key reference point for many properly understood. The reporting organization should decisions in the preparation of a report, such as document its approach for defining which stakeholders the scope, boundary, application of Indicators, it engaged with, how and when it engaged with them, and assurance approach. However, not all of an and how engagement has influenced the report content organization’s stakeholders will use the report. This and the organization’s sustainability activities. These presents challenges in balancing the specific interests/ processes should be capable of identifying direct input expectations of stakeholders who can reasonably be from stakeholders as well as legitimately established expected to use the report with broader expectations of societal expectations. An organization may encounter accountability to all stakeholders. conflicting views or differing expectations among its stakeholders, and will need to be able to explain how it For some decisions, such as the report scope or balanced these in reaching its reporting decisions. boundary of a report, the reasonable expectations and interests of a wide range of stakeholder will need to be Failure to identify and engage with stakeholders is considered. There may be, for example, stakeholders likely to result in reports that are not suitable, and who are unable to articulate their views on a report therefore not fully credible, to all stakeholders. In and whose concerns are presented by proxies. There contrast, systematic stakeholder engagement enhances may also be stakeholders who choose not to express stakeholder receptivity and the usefulness of the views on reports because they rely on different means report. Executed properly, it is likely to result in ongoing of communication and engagement. The reasonable learning within the organization and by external expectations and interests of these stakeholders should parties, as well as increase accountability to a range of still be acknowledged in decisions about the content stakeholders. Accountability strengthens trust between of the report. However, other decisions, such as the the reporting organization and its stakeholders. level of detail required to be useful to stakeholders, or Trust, in turn, fortifies report credibility. expectations of different stakeholders about what is required to achieve clarity, may require greater emphasis on those who can reasonably be expected to use the report. It is important to document the processes and approach taken in making these decisions. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 13. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Tests: Sustainability Context Definition: The report should present the organization’s R The organization can describe the stakeholders to performance in the wider context of sustainability. whom it considers itself accountable. Explanation: Information on performance should R The report content draws upon the outcomes be placed in context. The underlying question of of stakeholder engagement processes used by sustainability reporting is how an organization the organization in its ongoing activities, and as contributes, or aims to contribute in the future, to required by the legal and institutional framework the improvement or deterioration of economic, in which it operates. environmental, and social conditions, developments, and trends at the local, regional, or global level. R The report content draws upon the outcomes Reporting only on trends in individual performance (or of any stakeholder engagement processes the efficiency of the organization) will fail to respond undertaken specifically for the report. to this underlying question. Reports should therefore seek to present performance in relation to broader R The stakeholder engagement processes that concepts of sustainability. This will involve discussing inform decisions about the report are consistent the performance of the organization in the context of with the scope and boundary of the report. the limits and demands placed on environmental or social resources at the sectoral, local, regional, or global level. For example, this could mean that in addition to reporting on trends in eco-efficiency, an organization might also present its absolute pollution loading in relation to the capacity of the regional ecosystem to absorb the pollutant. This concept is often most clearly articulated in the environmental arena in terms of global limits on resource use and pollution levels. However, it can also be relevant with respect to social and economic objectives such as national or international socio-economic and sustainable development goals. For example, an organization could report on employee wages and social benefit levels in relation to nation-wide minimum and median income levels, and the capacity of social safety nets to absorb those in poverty or those living close to the poverty line. Organizations operating in a diverse range of locations, sizes, and sectors will need to consider how to best frame their overall organizational performance in the broader context of sustainability. This may require distinguishing between topics or factors that drive global impacts (such as climate change) and those that have more regional or local impacts (such as community development). When reporting on topics that have positive or negative local impacts, it is important to provide insight into how the organization affects communities in different locations. Similarly, distinctions might need to be made between trends or patterns of impacts across the range of operations versus contextualizing performance location by location. The organization’s own sustainability and business strategy provides the context in which to discuss Version 3.1 11
  • 14. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines performance. The relationship between sustainability and Completeness organizational strategy should be made clear, as should Definition: Coverage of the material topics and the context within which performance is reported. Indicators and definition of the report boundary Tests: should be sufficient to reflect significant economic, environmental, and social impacts and enable R T he organization presents its understanding of stakeholders to assess the reporting organization’s sustainable development and draws on objective performance in the reporting period. and available information as well as measures of sustainable development for the topics covered in Explanation: Completeness primarily encompasses the the report. dimensions of scope, boundary, and time. The concept of completeness can also be used to refer to practices R The organization presents its performance with in information collection (for example, ensuring that reference to broader sustainable development compiled data includes results from all sites within the conditions and goals, as reflected in recognized Report Boundary) and whether the presentation of sectoral, local, regional, and/or global publications. information is reasonable and appropriate. These topics are related to report quality, and are addressed in greater R The organization presents its performance in detail under the Principles of accuracy and balance later a manner that attempts to communicate the in Part 1. magnitude of its impact and contribution in appropriate geographical contexts. Scope refers to the range of sustainability topics covered in a report. The sum of the topics and Indicators reported R The report describes how sustainability topics should be sufficient to reflect significant economic, relate to long-term organizational strategy, risks, environmental, and social impacts. It should also enable and opportunities, including supply-chain topics. stakeholders to assess the organization’s performance. In determining whether the information in the report is sufficient, the organization should consider both the results of stakeholder engagement processes and broad- based societal expectations that may not have surfaced directly through stakeholder engagement processes. ‘Boundary’ refers to the range of entities (e.g., subsidiaries, joint ventures, sub-contractors, etc.) whose performance is represented by the report. In setting the boundary for its report, an organization must consider the range of entities over which it exercises control (often referred to as the ‘organizational boundary’, and usually linked to definitions used in financial reporting) and over which it exercises influence (often called the ‘operational boundary’). In assessing influence, the organization will need to consider its ability to influence entities upstream (e.g., in its supply chain) as well as entities downstream (e.g., distributors and users of its products and services). The boundary may vary based on the specific Aspect or type of information being reported. ‘Time’ refers to the need for the selected information to be complete for the time period specified by the report. As far as practicable, activities, events, and impacts should be presented for the reporting period in which they occur. This includes reporting on activities that produce minimal short-term impact, but which have 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 15. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG a significant and reasonably foreseeable cumulative 1.2 Reporting Principles for effect that may become unavoidable or irreversible in Defining Quality the longer term (e.g., bio-accumulative or persistent This section contains Principles that guide choices on pollutants). In making estimates of future impacts (both ensuring the quality of reported information, including positive and negative), the reported information should its proper presentation. Decisions related to the be based on well-reasoned estimates that reflect the process of preparing information in a report should be likely size, nature, and scope of impacts. Although such consistent with these Principles. All of these Principles estimates are by nature subject to uncertainty, they can are fundamental for effective transparency. The quality provide useful information for decision-making as long of information enables stakeholders to make sound as the basis for estimates is clearly disclosed and the and reasonable assessments of performance, and take limitations of the estimates are clearly acknowledged. appropriate action. Disclosing the nature and likelihood of such impacts, even if they may only materialize in the future, is Reporting Principles for Defining Quality consistent with the goal of providing a balanced and reasonable representation of the organization’s Balance economic, environmental, and social performance. Definition: The report should reflect positive and negative aspects of the organization’s performance to Tests: enable a reasoned assessment of overall performance. R The report was developed taking into account the Explanation: The overall presentation of the report’s entire chain of entities upstream and downstream, content should provide an unbiased picture of the and covers and prioritizes all information that reporting organization’s performance. The report should should reasonably be considered material on the avoid selections, omissions, or presentation formats basis of the principles of materiality, sustainability that are reasonably likely to unduly or inappropriately context, and stakeholder inclusiveness. influence a decision or judgment by the report reader. The report should include both favorable and R The report includes all entities that meet the unfavorable results, as well as topics that can influence criteria of being subject to control or significant the decisions of stakeholders in proportion to their influence of the reporting organization unless materiality. Reports should clearly distinguish between otherwise declared. factual presentation and the reporting organization’s interpretation of information. R The information in the report includes all significant actions or events in the reporting Tests: period, and reasonable estimates of significant future impacts of past events when those impacts R The report discloses both favorable and are reasonably foreseeable and may become unfavorable results and topics. unavoidable or irreversible. R The information in the report is presented in R The report does not omit relevant information a format that allows users to see positive and that would influence or inform stakeholder negative trends in performance on a year-to-year assessments or decisions, or that would reflect basis. significant economic, environmental, and social impacts. R The emphasis on the various topics in the report is proportionate to their relative materiality. Version 3.1 13
  • 16. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Comparability content of reports will also evolve. However, within the Definition: Issues and information should be selected, confines of the Principle of Materiality, organizations compiled, and reported consistently. Reported should aim for consistency in their reports over time. information should be presented in a manner that An organization should include total numbers (i.e., enables stakeholders to analyze changes in the absolute data such as tons of waste) as well as ratios (i.e., organization’s performance over time, and could normalized data such as waste per unit of production) to support analysis relative to other organizations. enable analytical comparisons. Explanation: Comparability is necessary for evaluating When changes occur with the boundary, scope, length performance. Stakeholders using the report should be of the reporting period, or content (including the design, able to compare information reported on economic, definitions, and use of any Indicators in the report), environmental, and social performance against the reporting organizations should, whenever practicable, organization’s past performance, its objectives, and, to restate current disclosures alongside historical data the degree possible, against the performance of other (or vice versa). This ensures that information and organizations. Consistency in reporting allows internal comparisons are both reliable and meaningful over and external parties to benchmark performance and time. Where such restatements are not provided, the assess progress as part of rating activities, investment report should explain the reasons and implications for decisions, advocacy programs, and other activities. interpreting current disclosures. Comparisons between organizations require sensitivity to factors such as differences in organizational size, Tests: geographic influences, and other considerations that may affect the relative performance of an organization. R The report and the information contained within it Where necessary, report preparers should consider can be compared on a year-to-year basis. providing context that will help report users understand the factors that may contribute to differences in R The organization’s performance can be compared performance between organizations. with appropriate benchmarks. Maintaining consistency with the methods used to R ny significant variation between reporting A calculate data, with the layout of the report, and with periods in the boundary, scope, length of explaining the methods and assumptions used to reporting period, or information covered in the prepare information, all facilitates comparability over report can be identified and explained. time. As Principlesimportance of topics to a given the relative for Ensuring Report Quality organization and its stakeholders change over time, the Options for Reporting Principles and Guidance • Balance Principles for Ensuring • Clarity INPUT Report Quality • Accuracy • Timeliness • Comparability • Reliability Figure 5: Principles for Ensuring Report Quality 14 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 17. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG R W here they are available, the report utilizes Accuracy generally accepted protocols for compiling, Definition: The reported information should be measuring, and presenting information, including sufficiently accurate and detailed for stakeholders to the GRI Technical Protocols for Indicators contained assess the reporting organization’s performance. in the Guidelines. Explanation: Responses to economic, environmental, R The report uses GRI Sector Supplements, where and social topics and Indicators can be expressed available. in many different ways, ranging from qualitative responses to detailed quantitative measurements. The characteristics that determine accuracy vary according to the nature of the information and the user of the information. For example, the accuracy of qualitative information is largely determined by the degree of clarity, detail, and balance in presentation within the appropriate Report Boundary. The accuracy of quantitative information, on the other hand, may depend on the specific methods used to gather, compile, and analyze data. The specific threshold of accuracy that is necessary will depend partly on the intended use of the information. Certain decisions will require higher levels of accuracy in reported information than others. Tests: R The report indicates the data that has been measured. R The data measurement techniques and bases for calculations are adequately described, and can be replicated with similar results. R The margin of error for quantitative data is not sufficient to substantially influence the ability of stakeholders to reach appropriate and informed conclusions on performance. R The report indicates which data has been estimated and the underlying assumptions and techniques used to produce the estimates, or where that information can be found. R The qualitative statements in the report are valid on the basis of other reported information and other available evidence. Version 3.1 15
  • 18. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Timeliness Clarity Definition: Reporting occurs on a regular schedule and Definition: Information should be made available in information is available in time for stakeholders to make a manner that is understandable and accessible to informed decisions. stakeholders using the report. Explanation: The usefulness of information is Explanation: The report should present information closely tied to whether the timing of its disclosure to in a way that is understandable, accessible, and usable stakeholders enables them to effectively integrate it into by the organization’s range of stakeholders (whether their decision-making. The timing of release refers both in print form or through other channels). A stakeholder to the regularity of reporting as well as its proximity to should be able to find desired information without the actual events described in the report. unreasonable effort. Information should be presented in a manner that is comprehensible to stakeholders who Although a constant flow of information is desirable for have a reasonable understanding of the organization meeting certain purposes, reporting organizations should and its activities. Graphics and consolidated data commit to regularly providing a consolidated disclosure tables can help make the information in the report of their economic, environmental, and social performance accessible and understandable. The level of aggregation at a single point in time. Consistency in the frequency of information can also affect the clarity of a report of reporting and the length of reporting periods is also if it is either significantly more or less detailed than necessary to ensure comparability of information over stakeholders expect. time and accessibility of the report to stakeholders. It can be of value for stakeholders if the schedules for Tests: sustainability reporting and financial reporting are aligned. The organization should balance the need R The report contains the level of information to provide information in a timely manner with the required by stakeholders, but avoids excessive and importance of ensuring that the information is reliable. unnecessary detail. Tests: R Stakeholders can find the specific information they want without unreasonable effort through tables R Information in the report has been disclosed while of contents, maps, links, or other aids. it is recent relative to the reporting period. R The report avoids technical terms, acronyms, R The collection and publication of key performance jargon, or other content likely to be unfamiliar to information is aligned with the sustainability stakeholders, and should include explanations reporting schedule. (where necessary) in the relevant section or in a glossary. R The information in the report (including web- based reports) clearly indicates the time period to R The data and information in the report is available which it relates, when it will be updated, and when to stakeholders, including those with particular the last updates were made. accessibility needs (e.g., differing abilities, language, or technology). 16 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 19. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG 1.3 Reporting Guidance for Reliability Boundary Setting6 Definition: Information and processes used in the preparation of a report should be gathered, recorded, In parallel with defining the content of a report, an compiled, analyzed, and disclosed in a way that could be organization must determine which entities’ (e.g., subject to examination and that establishes the quality subsidiaries and joint ventures) performance will be and materiality of the information. represented by the report. The Sustainability Report Boundary should include the entities over which the Explanation: Stakeholders should have confidence that reporting organization exercises control or significant a report could be checked to establish the veracity of its influence both in and through its relationships with contents and the extent to which it has appropriately various entities upstream (e.g., supply chain) and applied Reporting Principles. The information and data downstream (e.g., distribution and customers). included in a report should be supported by internal controls or documentation that could be reviewed For the purpose of setting boundaries, the following by individuals other than those who prepared the definitions should apply7: report. Disclosures about performance that are not substantiated by evidence should not appear in a • Control: the power to govern the financial and sustainability report unless they represent material operating policies of an enterprise so as to obtain information, and the report provides unambiguous benefits from its activities. explanations of any uncertainties associated with the information. The decision-making processes underlying • Significant influence: the power to participate in a report should be documented in a manner that the financial and operating policy decisions of the allows the basis of key decisions (such as processes entity but not the power to control those policies. for determining the report content and boundary or stakeholder engagement) to be examined. In designing The guidance below on setting the Report Boundary information systems, reporting organizations should pertains to the report as a whole as well as setting the anticipate that the systems could be examined as part of boundary for individual Performance Indicators. an external assurance process. Not all entities within the Report Boundary must be Tests: reported on in the same manner. The approach to reporting on an entity will depend on a combination R The scope and extent of external assurance is of the reporting organization’s control or influence identified. over the entity, and whether the disclosure relates to operational performance, management performance, R The original source of the information in the report or narrative/descriptive information. can be identified by the organization. The Report Boundary guidance is based on the R Reliable evidence to support assumptions or recognition that different relationships involve differing complex calculations can be identified by the degrees of access to information and the ability to affect organization. outcomes. For example, operational information such as emissions data can be reliably compiled from entities R Representation is available from the original data under the control of an organization, but may not be or information owners, attesting to its accuracy available for a joint venture or a supplier. The Report within acceptable margins of error. Boundary guidance below sets minimum expectations for the inclusion of entities upstream and downstream when reporting on Indicators and management disclosures. However, an organization may determine that it is necessary to extend the boundary for an Indicator(s) to include entities upstream or downstream. 6 T he guidance on Report Boundary has been derived from the Boundary Protocol. Future updates to the Guidelines will incorporate any further lessons or guidance developed from experience with the Reporting Boundary Protocol. 7 Further discussion of these terms can be found in the Boundary Protocol. Version 3.1 17
  • 20. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Determining the significance of an entity when Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting collecting information or considering the extension of a boundary depends on the scale of its sustainability • A sustainability report should include in its impacts. Entities with significant impacts typically boundary all entities that generate significant generate the greatest risk or opportunity for an sustainability impacts (actual and potential) and/ organization and its stakeholders, and therefore are the or all entities over which the reporting organization entities for which the organization is most likely to be exercises control or significant influence with regard perceived as being accountable or responsible. to financial and operating policies and practices. • These entities can be included using either Indicators of operational performance, Indicators of management performance, or narrative descriptions. • At a minimum, the reporting organization should include the following entities in its report using these approaches: • Entities over which the organization exercises control should be covered by Indicators of Establishing Reporting Boundaries Operational Performance; and • Entities over which the organization exercises significant influence should be covered by Disclosures on Management Approach. No Do you have control over the entity? No Do you have significant Yes influence? No No Do you have influence? Yes Does it have significant impacts? Exclude No Not Yes Does it have significant impacts? Yes necessary to report No Not Does it have significant Yes necessary impacts? to report Not necessary Yes to report Performance Data Disclosures on Management Approach Narrative reportinng on Issues and Dilemmas Figure 6: Decision Tree for Boundary Setting 18 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 21. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG • The boundaries for narrative disclosures should Part 2: Standard Disclosures include entities over which the organization does not exercise control/significant influence, but This section specifies the base content that should which are associated with key challenges for the appear in a sustainability report, subject to the guidance organization because their impacts are significant on determining content in Part 1 of the Guidelines. • The report should cover all entities within its There are three different types of disclosures contained Report Boundary. In the process of preparing its in this section. report, an organization may choose not to gather data on a particular entity or group of entities • Strategy and Profile: Disclosures that set the within the defined boundary on the basis of overall context for understanding organizational efficiency as long as such a decision does not sub- performance such as its strategy, profile, and stantively change the final result of a Disclosure governance. or Indicator. • Management Approach: Disclosures that cover how an organization addresses a given set of topics in order to provide context for Orientation to the Reporting Guidelines understanding performance in a specific area. Performance Indicators: Indicators that elicit • comparable information on the economic, environmental, and social performance of the Options for Reporting organization. Reporting organizations are encouraged to follow this structure in compiling their reports, however, other formats may be chosen. Context Results Standard Disclosures • Strategy Analysis • Economic • Report Parameters • Environmental • Governance, • Labor Practices and Commitments, and Decent Work Engagement • Human Rights • Management Approach • Society Management Performance • ProductResponsibility Indicators Approach Profile OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Focused Sustainability Report Figure 7: Overview of GRI Standard Disclosures Version 3.1 19
  • 22. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Profile 1.2 Description of key impacts, risks, and opportunities. 1. Strategy and Analysis The reporting organization should provide two This section is intended to provide a high-level, strategic concise narrative sections on key impacts, risks, view of the organization’s relationship to sustainability and opportunities. in order to provide context for subsequent and more detailed reporting against other sections of the Section One should focus on the organization’s key Guidelines. It may draw on information provided in impacts on sustainability and effects on other parts of the report, but this section is intended to stakeholders, including rights as defined by produce insight on strategic topics rather than simply national laws and relevant internationally agreed summarize the contents of the report. The strategy and standards. This should take into account the range analysis should consist of the statement outlined in 1.1 of reasonable expectations and interests of the and a concise narrative outlined in 1.2. organization’s stakeholders. This section should include: 1.1 Statement from the most senior decision- maker of the organization (e.g., CEO, chair, or • A description of the significant impacts equivalent senior position) about the relevance of the organization has on sustainability and sustainability to the organization and its strategy. associated challenges and opportunities. This includes the effect on stakeholders’ rights as The statement should present the overall vision defined by national laws and the expectations and strategy for the short-term, medium-term (e.g., in internationally-agreed standards and norms; 3-5 years), and long-term, particularly with regard to managing the key challenges associated with • An explanation of the approach to prioritizing economic, environmental, and social performance. these challenges and opportunities; The statement should include: • Key conclusions about progress in addressing • Strategic priorities and key topics for the short/ these topics and related performance in the medium-term with regard to sustainability, reporting period. This includes an assessment including respect for internationally agreed of reasons for underperformance or over- standards and how they relate to long-term performance; and organizational strategy and success; • A description of the main processes in place to • Broader trends (e.g., macroeconomic or address performance and/or relevant changes. political) affecting the organization and influencing sustainability priorities; Section Two should focus on the impact of sustainability trends, risks, and opportunities on • Key events, achievements, and failures during the long-term prospects and financial performance the reporting period; of the organization. This should concentrate specifically on information relevant to financial • Views on performance with respect to targets; stakeholders or that could become so in the future. Section Two should include the following: • Outlook on the organization’s main challenges and targets for the next year and goals for the • A description of the most important risks and coming 3-5 years; and opportunities for the organization arising from sustainability trends; • Other items pertaining to the organization’s strategic approach. • Prioritization of key sustainability topics as risks and opportunities according to their relevance for long-term organizational strategy, competitive position, qualitative, and (if possible) quantitative financial value drivers; 20 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 23. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG • Table(s) summarizing: • Quantity of products or services provided. • Targets, performance against targets, and In addition to the above, reporting organizations are lessons-learned for the current reporting encouraged to provide additional information, as period; and appropriate, such as: • Targets for the next reporting period and • Total assets; mid-term objectives and goals (i.e., 3-5 years) related to key risks and opportunities. • Beneficial ownership (including identity and percentage of ownership of largest shareholders); • Concise description of governance mechanisms and in place to specifically manage these risks and opportunities, and identification of other related • Breakdowns by country/region of the following: risks and opportunities. • Sales/revenues by countries/regions that 2. Organizational Profile make up 5 percent or more of total revenues; 2.1 Name of the organization. • Costs by countries/regions that make up 5 percent or more of total revenues; and 2.2 Primary brands, products, and/or services. • Employees. The reporting organization should indicate the nature of its role in providing these products 2.9 Significant changes during the reporting period and services, and the degree to which it utilizes regarding size, structure, or ownership including: outsourcing. • The location of, or changes in operations, 2.3 Operational structure of the organization, including facility openings, closings, and including main divisions, operating companies, expansions; and subsidiaries, and joint ventures. • Changes in the share capital structure and 2.4 Location of organization’s headquarters. other capital formation, maintenance, and alteration operations (for private sector 2.5 Number of countries where the organization organizations). operates, and names of countries with either major operations or that are specifically relevant to the 2.10 Awards received in the reporting period. sustainability issues covered in the report. 3. Report Parameters 2.6 Nature of ownership and legal form. Report Profile 2.7 Markets served (including geographic breakdown, 3.1 Reporting period (e.g., fiscal/calendar year) for sectors served, and types of customers/beneficiaries). information provided. 2.8 Scale of the reporting organization, including: 3.2 Date of most recent previous report (if any). • Number of employees; 3.3 Reporting cycle (annual, biennial, etc.) • Number of operations; 3.4 Contact point for questions regarding the report or its contents. • Net sales (for private sector organizations) or net revenues (for public sector organizations); Report Scope and Boundary • Total capitalization broken down in terms 3.5 Process for defining report content, including: of debt and equity (for private sector organizations); and • Determining materiality; Version 3.1 21
  • 24. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines • Prioritizing topics within the report; and • Strategy and Analysis 1.1 – 1.2; • Identifying stakeholders the organization • Organizational Profile 2.1 – 2.10; expects to use the report. • Report Parameters 3.1 – 3.13; Include an explanation of how the organization has applied the ‘Guidance on Defining Report Content’, • Governance, Commitments, and Engagement the associated Principles and the Technical Protocol – 4.1 – 4.17; Applying the Report Content Principles. • Disclosure of Management Approach, per 3.6 Boundary of the report (e.g., countries, divisions, category; subsidiaries, leased facilities, joint ventures, suppliers). See GRI Boundary Protocol for further guidance. • Core Performance Indicators; 3.7 State any specific limitations on the scope or • Any GRI Additional Indicators that were boundary of the report8. included; and If boundary and scope do not address the full range • Any GRI Sector Supplement Indicators of material economic, environmental, and social included in the report. impacts of the organization, state the strategy and projected timeline for providing complete coverage. Assurance 3.13 Policy and current practice with regard to seeking 3.8 Basis for reporting on joint ventures, subsidiaries, external assurance for the report. If not included leased facilities, outsourced operations, and other in the assurance report accompanying the entities that can significantly affect comparability sustainability report, explain the scope and basis of from period to period and/or between organizations. any external assurance provided. Also explain the relationship between the reporting organization 3.9 Data measurement techniques and the bases of and the assurance provider(s). calculations, including assumptions and techniques underlying estimations applied to the compilation of 4. Governance, Commitments, and Engagement the Indicators and other information in the report. Governance Explain any decisions not to apply, or to substantially 4.1 Governance structure of the organization, including diverge from, the GRI Indicator Protocols. committees under the highest governance body responsible for specific tasks, such as setting 3.10 Explanation of the effect of any re-statements strategy or organizational oversight. of information provided in earlier reports, and the reasons for such re-statement (e.g., mergers/ Describe the mandate and composition (including acquisitions, change of base years/periods, nature number of independent members and/or non- of business, measurement methods). executive members) of the highest governance body and its committees, and indicate each individual’s 3.11 Significant changes from previous reporting position and any direct responsibility for economic, periods in the scope, boundary, or measurement social, and environmental performance. methods applied in the report. Report the percentage of individuals by gender within GRI Content Index the organization’s highest governance body and its 3.12 Table identifying the location of the Standard committees, broken down by age group and minority Disclosures in the report. group membership and other indicators of diversity. Identify the page numbers or web links where the Refer to definitions of age and minority group following can be found: in the Indicator Protocol for LA13 and note that the information reported under 4.1 can be cross referenced against that reported for LA13. 8 See completeness Principle for explanation of scope. 22 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 25. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG 4.2 Indicate whether the Chair of the highest economic, environmental, and social performance governance body is also an executive officer and the status of their implementation. (and, if so, their function within the organization’s management and the reasons for this arrangement). Explain the degree to which these: 4.3 For organizations that have a unitary board • Are applied across the organization in different structure, state the number and gender of regions and department/units; and members of the highest governance body that are independent and/or non-executive members. • Relate to internationally agreed standards. State how the organization defines ‘independent’ 4.9 Procedures of the highest governance body for and ‘non-executive’. This element applies only for overseeing the organization’s identification and organizations that have unitary board structures. management of economic, environmental, and See the glossary for a definition of ‘independent’. social performance, including relevant risks and opportunities, and adherence or compliance 4.4 Mechanisms for shareholders and employees to with internationally agreed standards, codes of provide recommendations or direction to the conduct, and principles. highest governance body. Include frequency with which the highest Include reference to processes regarding: governance body assesses sustainability performance. • The use of shareholder resolutions or other mechanisms for enabling minority 4.10 Processes for evaluating the highest governance shareholders to express opinions to the body’s own performance, particularly with respect to highest governance body; and economic, environmental, and social performance. • Informing and consulting employees about Commitments to External Initiatives the working relationships with formal 4.11 Explanation of whether and how the precautionary representation bodies such as organization approach or principle is addressed by the level ‘work councils’, and representation of organization. employees in the highest governance body. Article 15 of the Rio Principles introduced the Identify topics related to economic, environmental, precautionary approach. A response to 4.11 and social performance raised through these could address the organization’s approach to mechanisms during the reporting period. risk management in operational planning or the development and introduction of new products. 4.5 Linkage between compensation for members of the highest governance body, senior 4.12 Externally developed economic, environmental, managers, and executives (including departure and social charters, principles, or other initiatives arrangements), and the organization’s to which the organization subscribes or endorses. performance (including social and environmental performance). Include date of adoption, countries/operations where applied, and the range of stakeholders 4.6 Processes in place for the highest governance involved in the development and governance body to ensure conflicts of interest are avoided. of these initiatives (e.g., multi-stakeholder, etc.). Differentiate between non-binding, voluntary 4.7 Process for determining the composition, initiatives and those with which the organization qualifications, and expertise of the members of has an obligation to comply. the highest governance body and its committees, including any consideration of gender and other 4.13 Memberships in associations (such as industry indicators of diversity. associations) and/or national/international advocacy organizations in which the 4.8 Internally developed statements of mission or organization: values, codes of conduct, and principles relevant to Version 3.1 23
  • 26. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines • Has positions in governance bodies; whether any of the engagement was undertaken specifically as part of the report preparation process. • Participates in projects or committees; 4.17 Key topics and concerns that have been raised • Provides substantive funding beyond routine through stakeholder engagement, and how the membership dues; or organization has responded to those key topics and concerns, including through its reporting. • Views membership as strategic. 5. Management Approach and Performance This refers primarily to memberships maintained at Indicators the organizational level. The section on sustainability Performance Indicators Stakeholder Engagement is organized by economic, environmental, and social categories. Social Indicators are further categorized The following Disclosure Items refer to general by Labor, Human Rights, Society, and Product stakeholder engagement conducted by the organization Responsibility. Each category includes a Disclosure on over the course of the reporting period. These Management Approach (‘Management Approach’) and Disclosures are not limited to stakeholder engagement a corresponding set of Core and Additional Performance implemented for the purposes of preparing a Indicators. sustainability report. Core Indicators have been developed through GRI’s 4.14 List of stakeholder groups engaged by the multi-stakeholder processes, which are intended to organization. identify generally applicable Indicators and are assumed to be material for most organizations. An organization Examples of stakeholder groups are: should report on Core Indicators unless they are deemed not material on the basis of the GRI Reporting • Civil society; Principles. Additional Indicators represent emerging practice or address topics that may be material for some • Customers; organizations, but are not material for others. Where final versions of Sector Supplements exist, the Indicators • Employees, other workers, and their trade should be treated as Core Indicators. See Guidance on unions; Defining Report Content for further details. • Local communities; The Disclosure(s) on Management Approach should provide a brief overview of the organization’s • Shareholders and providers of capital; and management approach to the Aspects defined under each Indicator Category in order to set the context for • Suppliers. performance information. The organization can structure its Disclosure(s) on Management Approach to cover the 4.15 Basis for identification and selection of full range of Aspects under a given Category or group stakeholders with whom to engage. its responses on the Aspects differently. However, the Disclosure should address all of the Aspects associated This includes the organization’s process for defining with each category regardless of the format or grouping. its stakeholder groups, and for determining the groups with which to engage and not to engage. Within the overall structure of the Standard Disclosures, Strategy and Profile items 1.1 and 1.2 in ‘Strategy and 4.16 Approaches to stakeholder engagement, including Analysis’ are intended to provide a concise overview of frequency of engagement by type and by the risks and opportunities facing the organization as stakeholder group. a whole. The Disclosure(s) on Management Approach is intended to address the next level of detail of the This could include surveys, focus groups, community organization’s approach to managing the sustainability panels, corporate advisory panels, written topics associated with risks and opportunities. communication, management/union structures, and other vehicles. The organization should indicate 24 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 27. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG In reporting on the Performance Indicators, the Economic following guidance on data compilation applies: The economic dimension of sustainability concerns the organization’s impacts on the economic conditions of its • Reporting on Trends: Information should be stakeholders and on economic systems at local, national, presented for the current reporting period (e.g., and global levels. The Economic Indicators illustrate: one year) and at least two previous periods, as well as future targets, where they have been • Flow of capital among different stakeholders; and established, for the short- and medium-term. • Main economic impacts of the organization • Use of Protocols: Organizations should use throughout society. the Protocols that accompany the Indicators when reporting on the Indicators. These give Financial performance is fundamental to understanding basic guidance on interpreting and compiling an organization and its own sustainability. However, information. this information is normally already reported in financial accounts. What is often reported less, and is • Presentation of Data: In some cases, ratios frequently desired by users of sustainability reports, is or normalized data are useful and appropriate the organization’s contribution to the sustainability of a formats for data presentation. If ratios or larger economic system. normalized data are used, absolute data should also be provided. Disclosure on Management Approach Provide a concise disclosure on the Management • Data aggregation: Reporting organizations Approach items outlined below with reference to the should determine the appropriate level of following Economic Aspects: aggregation of information. See additional guidance in the General Reporting Notes section • Economic Performance; of the Guidelines. • Market Presence; and • Metrics: Reported data should be presented using generally accepted international metrics • Indirect Economic Impacts. (e.g., kilograms, tonnes, litres) and calculated using standard conversion factors. Where specific Goals and Performance international conventions exist (e.g., GHG equivalents), these are typically specified in the Organization-wide goals regarding performance Indicator Protocols. relevant to the Economic Aspects. Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed) in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to demonstrate the results of performance against goals. Policy Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines the organization’s overall commitment relating to the Economic Aspects listed above, or state where this can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Additional Contextual Information Additional relevant information required to understand organizational performance, such as: • Key successes and shortcomings; • Major organizational risks and opportunities; Version 3.1 25
  • 28. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines • Major changes in the reporting period to systems Economic Performance Indicators or structures to improve performance; and Aspect: Economic Performance • Key strategies for implementing policies or EC1 Direct economic value generated and achieving performance. distributed, including revenues, operating costs, employee compensation, donations and other community investments, retained Core earnings, and payments to capital providers and governments. EC2 Financial implications and other risks and Core opportunities for the organization’s activities due to climate change. Core EC3 Coverage of the organization’s defined benefit plan obligations. Core EC4 Significant financial assistance received from government. Aspect: Market Presence EC5 Range of ratios of standard entry level wage by gender compared to local minimum wage A dd at significant locations of operation. EC6 Policy, practices, and proportion of spending Core on locally-based suppliers at significant locations of operation. EC7 Procedures for local hiring and proportion of senior management hired from the Core local community at locations of significant operation. Aspect: Indirect Economic Impacts EC8 Development and impact of infrastructure investments and services provided primarily Core for public benefit through commercial, in- kind, or pro bono engagement. EC9 Understanding and describing significant indirect economic impacts, including the A dd extent of impacts. 26 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 29. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Environmental Organizational responsibility The environmental dimension of sustainability concerns The most senior position with operational responsibility an organization’s impacts on living and non-living for Environmental Aspects or explain how operational natural systems, including ecosystems, land, air, and responsibility is divided at the senior level for these water. Environmental Indicators cover performance Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses related to inputs (e.g., material, energy, water) and on structures at the governance level. outputs (e.g., emissions, effluents, waste). In addition, they cover performance related to biodiversity, Training and awareness environmental compliance, and other relevant Procedures related to training and raising awareness in information such as environmental expenditure and the relation to the Environmental Aspects. impacts of products and services. Monitoring and Follow-Up Disclosure on Management Approach Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and Provide a concise disclosure on the Management preventive actions, including those related to the Approach items outlined below with reference to the supply chain. following Environmental Aspects: List of certifications for environment-related • Materials; performance or certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/verification for the reporting • Energy; organization or its supply chain. • Water; Additional Contextual Information • Biodiversity; Additional relevant information required to understand organizational performance, such as: • Emissions, Effluents, and Waste; • Key successes and shortcomings; • Products and Services; • Major organizational environmental risks and • Compliance; opportunities related to issues; • Transport; and • Major changes in the reporting period to systems or structures to improve performance; and • Overall • Key strategies and procedures for implementing Goals and Performance policies or achieving goals. Organization-wide goals regarding performance relevant to the Environment Aspects. Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed) in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to demonstrate the results of performance against goals. Policy Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines the organization’s overall commitment related to the Environmental Aspects listed above or state where this can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Version 3.1 27
  • 30. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Environmental Performance Indicators EN14 Strategies, current actions, and future plans A dd for managing impacts on biodiversity. Aspect: Materials EN1 Materials used by weight or volume. EN15 Number of IUCN Red List species and national Core conservation list species with habitats in areas affected by operations, by level of extinction A dd EN2 Percentage of materials used that are recycled risk. Core input materials. Aspect: Emissions, Effluents, and Waste Aspect: Energy EN16 Total direct and indirect greenhouse gas Core EN3 Direct energy consumption by primary energy emissions by weight. Core source. EN17 Other relevant indirect greenhouse gas Core EN4 Indirect energy consumption by primary emissions by weight. Core source. EN18 Initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas A dd EN5 Energy saved due to conservation and emissions and reductions achieved. A dd efficiency improvements. Core EN19 Emissions of ozone-depleting substances by EN6 Initiatives to provide energy-efficient weight. or renewable energy based products Core and services, and reductions in energy EN20 NO, SO, and other significant air emissions by A dd requirements as a result of these initiatives. type and weight. Core EN7 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy EN21 Total water discharge by quality and A dd consumption and reductions achieved. destination. Core Aspect: Water EN22 Total weight of waste by type and disposal method. EN8 Total water withdrawal by source. Core Core EN23 Total number and volume of significant spills. EN9 Water sources significantly affected by A dd withdrawal of water. EN24 Weight of transported, imported, exported, or treated waste deemed hazardous under the EN10 Percentage and total volume of water terms of the Basel Convention Annex I, II, III, A dd recycled and reused. and VIII, and percentage of transported waste A dd shipped internationally. Aspect: Biodiversity EN25 Identity, size, protected status, and EN11 Location and size of land owned, leased, biodiversity value of water bodies and related managed in, or adjacent to, protected areas habitats significantly affected by the reporting A dd Core and areas of high biodiversity value outside organization’s discharges of water and runoff. protected areas. EN12 Description of significant impacts of activities, products, and services on biodiversity in Core protected areas and areas of high biodiversity value outside protected areas. EN13 Habitats protected or restored. A dd 28 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 31. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Aspect: Products and Services Social Performance Indicators EN26 Initiatives to mitigate environmental impacts The social dimension of sustainability concerns the Core of products and services, and extent of impact impacts an organization has on the social systems within mitigation. which it operates. EN27 Percentage of products sold and their The GRI Social Performance Indicators identify key Core packaging materials that are reclaimed by Performance Aspects surrounding labor practices, category. human rights, society, and product responsibility. Aspect: Compliance EN28 Monetary value of significant fines and total number of non-monetary sanctions for non- Core compliance with environmental laws and regulations. Aspect: Transport EN29 Significant environmental impacts of transporting products and other goods and materials used for the organization’s operations, and transporting members of the A dd workforce. Aspect: Overall EN30 Total environmental protection expenditures A dd and investments by type. Version 3.1 29
  • 32. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Labor Practices and Decent Work Goals and Performance The specific Aspects under the category of Labor Organization–wide goals regarding performance Practices are based on internationally recognized relevant to the Labor Aspects, indicating their linkage to universal standards, including: the internationally recognized universal standards. • United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed) Rights; in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to demonstrate the results of performance against goals. • United Nations Convention: International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights; Policy Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines • United Nations Convention: International the organization’s overall commitment related to the Covenant on Economic, Social, and Cultural Rights; Labor Aspects, or state where this can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Also reference their • Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of linkage to the international standards indicated above. Discrimination against Women (CEDAW); Organizational responsibility • ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work (in particular the eight core The most senior position with operational responsibility for Conventions of the ILO consisting of Conventions Labor Aspects or explain how operational responsibility is 100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105); and divided at the senior level for these Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses on structures at the • The Vienna Declaration and Programme of Action. governance level. The Labor Practices Indicators also draw upon the Training and awareness two instruments directly addressing the social Procedures related to training and raising awareness in responsibilities of business enterprises: the ILO Tripartite relation to the Labor Aspects. Include information on Declaration Concerning Multinational Enterprises and who participates in diversity, equal opportunities and Social Policy, and the Organisation for Economic Co- gender sensitization training (e.g., highest governance operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for bodies, senior management), and the topics addressed Multinational Enterprises. by training and any informal awareness raising. Disclosure on Management Approach Monitoring and Follow-Up Provide a concise disclosure on the following Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and pre- Management Approach items with reference to the ventive actions, including those related to the supply chain. Labor Aspects listed below. The ILO Tripartite Declaration Concerning Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy List of certifications for labor-related performance or (in particular the eight core Conventions of the ILO) certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/ and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and verifying the reporting organization or its supply chain. Development Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, should be the primary reference points. Include procedures for equal remuneration reviews/ audits and for action to redress any gender • Employment; remuneration gaps. • Labor/Management Relations; • Occupational Health and Safety; • Training and Education; • Diversity and Equal Opportunity; and • Equal remuneration for women and men. 30 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 33. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Additional Contextual Information Labor Practices and Decent Work Performance Indicators Additional relevant information required to understand organizational performance, such as: Aspect: Employment LA1 Total workforce by employment type, • Key successes and shortcomings; Core employment contract, and region, broken down by gender. • Major organizational risks and opportunities; LA2 Total number and rate of new employee hires • Major changes in the reporting period to systems Core and employee turnover by age group, gender, or structures to improve performance; and and region. • Key strategies and procedures for implementing LA3 Benefits provided to full-time employees policies or achieving goals. that are not provided to temporary or part- time employees, by significant locations of A dd • A description of the legal and socio-economic operation. environment that provides opportunities for, and barriers to, gender equity in the workforce, Core LA15 Return to work and retention rates after including but not limited to women’s workforce parental leave, by gender. participation rates, their participation at highest governance level, and equal remuneration. Aspect: Labor/Management Relations LA4 Percentage of employees covered by Core collective bargaining agreements. LA5 Minimum notice period(s) regarding Core operational changes, including whether it is specified in collective agreements. Aspect: Occupational Health and Safety LA6 Percentage of total workforce represented in formal joint management–worker health and safety committees that help monitor and advise A dd on occupational health and safety programs. LA7 Rates of injury, occupational diseases, lost days, and absenteeism, and total number Core of work-related fatalities, by region and by gender. LA8 Education, training, counseling, prevention, and risk-control programs in place to assist Core workforce members, their families, or community members regarding serious diseases. LA9 Health and safety topics covered in formal A dd agreements with trade unions. Aspect: Training and Education LA10 Average hours of training per year per Core employee by gender, and by employee category. Version 3.1 31
  • 34. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines LA11 Programs for skills management and Human Rights lifelong learning that support the continued There is growing global consensus that organizations have employability of employees and assist them in A dd the responsibility to respect human rights. Human rights managing career endings. Performance Indicators require organizations to report on the extent to which processes have been implemented, LA12 Percentage of employees receiving regular on incidents of human rights violations and on changes performance and career development A dd in the stakeholders’ ability to enjoy and exercise their reviews, by gender. human rights, occurring during the reporting period. Aspect: Diversity and Equal Opportunity Among the human rights issues included are non- discrimination, gender equality, freedom of association, LA13 Composition of governance bodies and collective bargaining, child labor, forced and compulsory breakdown of employees per employee labor, and indigenous rights. category according to gender, age group, Core minority group membership, and other The international legal framework for human rights indicators of diversity. is comprised of a body of law made up of treaties, conventions, declarations and other instruments. The ASPECT: EQUAL REMUNERATION FOR WOMEN AND corner stone of human rights is the International Bill of MEN Rights which is formed by three instruments: LA14 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of Core women to men by employee category, by i) the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948); significant locations of operation. ii) the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (1966); and iii) the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (1966). These are the first reference points for any organization reporting on human rights. In addition to these three key instruments, the international legal framework for human rights is underpinned by over 80 other instruments: ranging from soft declarations and guiding principles to binding treaties and conventions, and ranging from universal instruments to regional. Organizations can affect a wide range of human rights. In assessing which human rights are relevant for reporting, an organization should consider all human rights. Some additional instruments which may be useful for a reporting organization to reflect upon are: • ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work (1998) (which builds upon the eight core Conventions of the ILO consisting of Conventions 100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105)9; • The regional conventions, adhering to the principle of universality in the International Bill of Rights, for areas where the organization operates, including: the African Charter on Human and Peoples Rights (1981), the Arab Charter on Human Rights (1994), Conventions 100 and 111 pertain to non-discrimination; Conventions 87 and 98 pertain to freedom of association and collective 9 bargaining; Conventions 138 and 182 pertain to the elimination of child labor; and Conventions 29 and 105 pertain to the prevention of forced and compulsory labor. 32 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 35. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG the American Convention on Human Rights (1969), Goals and Performance the European Convention on Human Rights (ECHR) Organization-wide goals regarding performance relevant (1950); and to the human rights Aspects, indicating their linkage to the international declarations and standards listed in the • Conventions protecting the rights of individuals introduction. who may be impacted by the organization’s work, including but not limited to the Convention on Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed) the Elimination of Discrimination Against Women in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to (CEDAW) (1979), the Convention on the Rights of demonstrate the results of performance against goals. the Child (1989), the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination Policy (1966), ILO Convention 107 Indigenous and Tribal Populations Convention (1957), ILO Convention Brief, organization-wide policy or policies that define the 169 Concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples organization’s overall commitment to the human rights in Independent Countries (1991), UN Declaration Aspects including: on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (2007) and Convention on the Rights of Persons with • Rights identified as priorities; Disabilities (2007). • Application of the policy or policies in terms of It is important to note that many Aspects that provide country of operations and business partners; and insight into human rights performance can be found in other Indicator Categories in the Guidelines, and are not • Policy or policies which may reasonably be limited to the Human Rights Indicators Category. considered likely to affect employees’ decisions to join a trade union, or bargain collectively. Disclosure on Management Approach Alternatively, state where a policy or policies can Provide concise disclosure on the implementation of be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Also, due diligence processes on the following Management reference the linkage between organizational policy or Approach items, with reference to the human rights policies and international human rights Conventions and Aspects listed below. Declarations. The primary reference points should be the ILO The relevant policies for this disclosure may be stand- Tripartite Declaration Concerning Multinational alone human rights policy, or may require disclosing Enterprises and Social Policy and the Organisation for criteria that are integrated into a combination of policies. Economic Cooperation and Development Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises. Strategies for extending and embedding human rights • Investment and Procurement Practices; policies, goals and processes across the organization, and strategies for extending applicable policies and • Non-discrimination; procedures to external parties such as joint ventures, subsidiaries and suppliers. Specifically, the organization • Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining; should explain its approach for using human rights criteria or clauses in contracts, including the types of • Child Labor; clauses and the types of contracts and agreements in which they are commonly applied (e.g., investments, • Prevention of Forced and Compulsory Labor; purchasing contracts, joint ventures). • Security Practices; ORGANIZATIONAL RISK ASSESSMENT • Indigenous Rights; Describe risk assessment procedures that include human rights, including the use of industry guidance and • Assessment; and practices. • Remediation. Identify other processes for analyzing and understanding human rights issues that are relevant to Version 3.1 33
  • 36. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines the organization and its stakeholders, and the frequency • Listing of human rights issues that have been with which they are undertaken. raised at board or senior executive level during the reporting period; Identify any specific organizational or sectoral opportunities and risks that relate to human rights, • The inclusion of human rights criteria in employee considering internal drivers or practices that could performance assessments, annual bonus schemes promote or undermine efforts to uphold human rights and other incentive mechanisms; and (e.g., purchasing practices). • Any agreements/partnerships with external IMPACT ASSESSMENT parties that are designed to help the organization identify and meet its human rights responsibilities Processes and procedures for assessing, reviewing or (for example, international framework agreements tracking human rights impacts at the level of individual with trade unions/global union federations, operations, or for assessing specific business decisions, external grievance procedures established with including the review of projects, operations, or other local/international NGOs or national human rights activities with specific business lines (e.g., sourcing commissions). strategies). This is distinct from organizational risk assessment, which assesses the organization as a whole. The above points differ from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses on structures at the governance level. • Degree to which internal and external stakeholder engagement is included in the process; Training and awareness • Degree to which minorities and vulnerable groups Procedures related to training and raising awareness are considered in the process; in relation to the human rights Aspects, including descriptions of the strategy for embedding awareness • Whether and how the organization assesses its of human rights, of major operations that are the focus relationships with other parties such as workers of internal training, of the methods and resources and their trade unions, suppliers, business used for human rights training, and of training on the partners, governments, security providers in order availability and accessibility of grievance mechanisms to evaluate the potential of its being associated and remediation processes. with, or considered complicit in, human rights abuse; Monitoring, Follow-Up AND REMEDIATION Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and pre- • Which parameters are used to implement the ventive actions, including those related to the supply chain. assessment (e.g., country of operation, relevant human rights law, organizational human rights List of certifications for human rights-related performance, policies and commitments); and or certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/ verifying the reporting organization or its supply chain. • How and when the results of impact assessment inform processes that investigate alternatives and/ Procedures describing how the results of monitoring or assist in the development of mitigation and are applied, and procedures to determine remedies for remediation strategies. negative human rights impacts, including remediation processes associated with grievance procedures, and Organizational responsibility responses to complaints from local community/workers’ The most senior position with operational responsibility representatives, and other stakeholders. for human rights Aspects, or an explanation of how operational responsibility is divided at senior level for Describe processes for monitoring internal and these Aspects, including: external parties (e.g., use of internal audit, third-party monitoring, prioritizing risk locations). In addition, • The distribution of responsibilities for the the organization should describe the availability and implementation of human rights policies and accessibility of grievance mechanisms and remediation practices, including any involvement of the highest processes, and the involvement of local community/ governance body; workers’ representatives’ engagement in monitoring performance. 34 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 37. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Additional Contextual Information Human Rights Performance Indicators Additional relevant information required to understand Aspect: Investment and Procurement Practices organizational performance, such as: HR1 Percentage and total number of significant investment agreements and contracts that • Key successes and shortcomings; include clauses incorporating human rights Core concerns, or that have undergone human • Major organizational risks and opportunities; rights screening. • Major changes in the reporting period to systems HR2 Percentage of significant suppliers, or structures to improve performance; and contractors, and other business partners that Core have undergone human rights screening, and • Key strategies and procedures for implementing actions taken. policies or achieving goals. HR3 Total hours of employee training on policies and procedures concerning aspects of human Core rights that are relevant to operations, including the percentage of employees trained. Aspect: Non-discrimination HR4 Total number of incidents of discrimination Core and corrective actions taken. Aspect: Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining HR5 Operations and significant suppliers identified in which the right to exercise freedom of association and collective bargaining may Core be violated or at significant risk, and actions taken to support these rights. Aspect: Child Labor HR6 Operations and significant suppliers identified as having significant risk for incidents of child Core labor, and measures taken to contribute to the effective abolition of child labor. Aspect: Forced and Compulsory Labor HR7 Operations and significant suppliers identified as having significant risk for incidents of forced or compulsory labor, and measures to Core contribute to the elimination of all forms of forced or compulsory labor. Aspect: Security Practices HR8 Percentage of security personnel trained in the organization’s policies or procedures concerning aspects of human rights that are A dd relevant to operations. Version 3.1 35
  • 38. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Aspect: Indigenous Rights Society HR9 Total number of incidents of violations involving Society Performance Indicators focus attention on the A dd rights of indigenous people and actions taken. impacts organizations have on the local communities in which they operate, and disclosing how the risks that Aspect: Assessment may arise from interactions with other social institutions HR10 Percentage and total number of operations are managed and mediated. In particular, information Core that have been subject to human rights is sought on the risks associated with bribery and reviews and/or impact assessments. corruption, undue influence in public policy-making, and monopoly practices. Aspect: Remediation Community members have individual rights based on: HR11 Number of grievances related to human rights Core filed, addressed and resolved through formal • Universal Declaration of Human Rights; grievance mechanisms. • International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights; • International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; and • Declaration on the Right to Development. While there is ongoing debate about collective community rights, indigenous and tribal peoples have collective rights recognized by ILO Conventions 107 and 169 and the UN Declaration on Indigenous Rights. In terms of identity, these peoples’ rights are based on both the collective and the individual. Their right to free, prior and informed consultation in order to seek consent is a fundamental right expressly recognized in the reference points above. Disclosure on Management Approach Provide a concise disclosure on the following Management Approach items with reference to the Society Aspects: • Local Communities; • Corruption; • Public Policy; • Anti-Competitive Behavior; and • Compliance. Goals and Performance Organization-wide goals regarding performance relevant to the Aspects indicated above. 36 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 39. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Use organization-specific Indicators as needed section (Disclosure 4.1), and in the mechanisms for in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to employees and shareholders to provide direction to demonstrate the results of performance against goals. the highest governance body (Disclosure 4.4). Inform if and how works councils, occupational health and Address the extent to which organization-wide goals safety committees and/or other independent employee contribute to or interfere with the collective rights of representation bodies are empowered to deal with and local communities. have dealt with impacts on local communities. Policy Training and awareness Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that define Procedures related to training and raising awareness in the organization’s overall commitment relating to the relation to the Society Aspects. Society Aspects or state where this can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Refer specifically to formal and informal training that addresses impacts on local communities including, but Organization-wide policy or policies, or standards, not limited to, parties that are trained or with whom related to assessing the risks to local communities, and the organization communicates its policy or policies, managing impacts on local communities. Address the including those external to the organization. areas listed below covering the whole life cycle of the organization’s operations (including entering, operating, Procedures directed at the training and awareness and exiting): of employees and contractors (including security personnel) for managing impacts on local communities. • References/statements regarding the collective rights of local communities; Monitoring and Follow-Up Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and • Risk assessment for impacts on local communities, preventive actions, including those related to the supply through the whole life cycle; chain. • Mitigation of impacts on local communities; List of certifications for performance or certification systems, or other approaches to auditing/verifying the • Engagement with both women and men in local reporting organization or its supply chain. communities; and Procedures related to assessing the risks and managing • Application of the policy within different levels of impacts on local communities, including entering, the organization. operating, and exiting. This should include information on how data was collected and the process for selecting Organizational responsibility the local community members (individual or group) The most senior position with operational responsibility from whom information was gathered. for Society Aspects or explain how operational responsibility is divided at the senior level for these Additional Contextual Information Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses Additional relevant information required to understand on structures at the governance level. organizational performance, such as: Explain the division of responsibility for impacts on • Key successes and shortcomings; local communities in the highest governance body. For organizations that do not have a single policy or • Major organizational risks and opportunities; standard, explain the roles of different departments in the overall process of managing the impacts. Indicate • Major changes in the reporting period to systems the extent to which the impacts are addressed in the or structures to improve performance; and organizational structures identified in the Governance • Key strategies and procedures for implementing policies or achieving goals. Version 3.1 37
  • 40. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Society Performance Indicators Product Responsibility Aspect: Local Communities Product Responsibility Performance Indicators address the aspects of a reporting organization’s products and SO1 Percentage of operations with implemented services that directly affect customers, namely, health Core local community engagement, impact and safety, information and labeling, marketing, and assessments, and development programs. privacy. Core SO9 Operations with significant potential or actual These aspects are chiefly covered through disclosure negative impacts on local communities. on internal procedures and the extent to which these procedures are not complied with. SO10 Prevention and mitigation measures implemented in operations with significant Disclosure on Management Approach Core potential or actual negative impacts on local communities. Provide a concise disclosure on the following Management Approach items with reference to the Aspect: Corruption Product Responsibility Aspects: Core SO2 Percentage and total number of business • Customer Health and Safety; units analyzed for risks related to corruption. • Product and Service Labeling; SO3 Percentage of employees trained in Core organization’s anti-corruption policies and • Marketing Communications; procedures. • Customer Privacy; and Core SO4 Actions taken in response to incidents of corruption. • Compliance. Aspect: Public Policy Goals and Performance SO5 Public policy positions and participation in Core Organization-wide goals regarding performance public policy development and lobbying. relevant to the Product Responsibility Aspects. SO6 Total value of financial and in-kind Use organization-specific Indicators (as needed) contributions to political parties, politicians, A dd in addition to the GRI Performance Indicators to and related institutions by country. demonstrate the results of performance against goals. Aspect: Anti-Competitive Behavior Policy SO7 Total number of legal actions for anti- Brief, organization-wide policy (or policies) that defines competitive behavior, anti-trust, and A dd the organization’s overall commitment to the Product monopoly practices and their outcomes. Responsibility Aspects, or state where this can be found in the public domain (e.g., web link). Aspect: Compliance SO8 Monetary value of significant fines and total Organizational responsibility Core number of non-monetary sanctions for non- The most senior position with operational responsibility compliance with laws and regulations. for Product Responsibility Aspects, or explain how operational responsibility is divided at the senior level for Product Responsibility Aspects. This differs from Disclosure 4.1, which focuses on structures at the governance level. Training and awareness Procedures related to training and raising awareness in relation to the Product Responsibility Aspects. 38 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 41. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Monitoring and Follow-Up Product Responsibility Performance Indicators Procedures related to monitoring and corrective and Aspect: Customer Health and Safety preventive actions, including those related to the supply chain. PR1 Life cycle stages in which health and safety impacts of products and services are List of certifications for product responsibility- assessed for improvement, and percentage of Core related performance or certification systems, or significant products and services categories other approaches to auditing/verifying the reporting subject to such procedures. organization or its supply chain. PR2 Total number of incidents of non-compliance Additional Contextual Information with regulations and voluntary codes concerning health and safety impacts of products and services A dd Additional relevant information required to understand during their life cycle, by type of outcomes. organizational performance, such as: Aspect: Product and Service Labeling • Key successes and shortcomings; PR3 Type of product and service information • Major organizational risks and opportunities; Core required by procedures, and percentage of significant products and services subject to • Major changes in the reporting period to systems such information requirements. or structures to improve performance; and PR4 Total number of incidents of non-compliance • Key strategies and procedures for implementing with regulations and voluntary codes policies or achieving goals. concerning product and service information A dd and labeling, by type of outcomes. PR5 Practices related to customer satisfaction, including results of surveys measuring A dd customer satisfaction. Aspect: Marketing Communications PR6 Programs for adherence to laws, standards, and voluntary codes related to marketing Core communications, including advertising, promotion, and sponsorship. PR7 Total number of incidents of non-compliance with regulations and voluntary codes concerning marketing communications, including advertising, promotion, and A dd sponsorship by type of outcomes. Aspect: Customer Privacy PR8 Total number of substantiated complaints regarding breaches of customer privacy and A dd losses of customer data. Aspect: Compliance PR9 Monetary value of significant fines for non- Core compliance with laws and regulations concerning the provision and use of products and services. Version 3.1 39
  • 42. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines General Reporting Notes Medium of Reporting Data Gathering Electronic (e.g., CD-ROM) or web-based reporting and paper reports are appropriate media for reporting. Feasibility Assessment Organizations may choose to use a combination of The process of defining report content will result in a web and paper-based reports or use only one medium. set of topics and Indicators on which the organization For example, an organization may choose to provide should report. However, practical challenges such as a detailed report on their website and provide an the availability of data, the cost of gathering it, the executive summary including their strategy and analysis confidentiality of information, privacy or other legal and performance information in paper form. The choice concerns, the reliability of available information, and will likely depend on the organization’s decisions on other factors, may result in a legitimate decision not to its reporting period, its plans for updating content, the disclose certain information. Where material information likely users of the report, and other practical factors such is omitted, the report should clearly indicate this and the as its distribution strategy. At least one medium (web or reasons why. paper) should provide users with access to the complete set of information for the reporting period. Data Aggregation and Disaggregation Frequency of Reporting Reporting organizations will need to determine the level of aggregation at which to present information. Organizations should define a consistent and periodic This requires balancing the effort required against the cycle for issuing a report. For many organizations, this added meaningfulness of information reported on a will be an annual cycle, although some organizations disaggregated basis (e.g., country or site). Aggregation choose to report biannually. An organization may of information can result in the loss of a significant choose to update information on a regular basis amount of meaning, and can also fail to highlight between the issuing of consolidated accounts particularly strong or poor performance in specific areas. of performance. This has advantages in terms of On the other hand, unnecessary disaggregation of data providing stakeholders with more immediate access can affect the ease of understanding the information. to information, but has disadvantages in terms of Reporting organizations should disaggregate comparability of information. However, organizations information to an appropriate level using the should still maintain a predictable cycle in which all of principles and the guidance in the reporting Indicators. the information that is reported covers a specific time Disaggregation may vary by Indicator, but will generally period. provide more insight than a single, aggregated figure. Reporting on economic, environmental, and social Report Form and Frequency performance could coincide or be integrated with other organizational reporting, such as annual financial Definition of a Sustainability Report statements. Coordinated timing will reinforce the A sustainability report refers to a single, consolidated linkages between financial performance and economic, disclosure that provides a reasonable and balanced environmental, and social performance. presentation of performance over a fixed time period. Stakeholders should be able to directly access all of Updating Report Content the report information from a single location, such When preparing a new report, an organization may as a GRI content index. Other publications should identify areas of information that have not changed not be referenced as the information source for a GRI since the prior report (e.g., a policy that has not been Standard Disclosure Item (ex., a Performance Indicator) amended). The organization may choose to only update unless the means for a stakeholder to directly access the topics and Indicators that have changed and to the information is provided (e.g., a link to a specific re-publish the Disclosures that have not changed. For web page or the page number of the corresponding example, an organization may choose to reproduce publication). There is no minimum length for a report the information on policies that have not changed and using the GRI Framework as long as the organization only update its Performance Indicators. The flexibility to has properly applied the Guidelines and Framework take such an approach will depend in large part on the documents it has chosen to use. organization’s choice of reporting medium. Topics such as strategy and analysis and Performance Indicators are likely to show changes each reporting period, while other topics such as organizational profile or governance 40 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 43. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG may change at a slower pace. Regardless of the strategy • Utilizes groups or individuals to conduct the used, the full set of applicable information for the assurance who are not unduly limited by reporting period should be accessible in a single location their relationship with the organization or its (either a paper or web-based document). stakeholders to reach and publish an independent and impartial conclusion on the report; Assurance • Assesses the extent to which the report preparer Choices on assurance has applied the GRI Reporting Framework Organizations use a variety of approaches to enhance (including the Reporting Principles) in the course the credibility of their reports. Organizations may have of reaching its conclusions; and systems of internal controls in place, including internal audit functions, as part of their processes for managing • Results in an opinion or set of conclusions that is and reporting information. These internal systems are publicly available in written form, and a statement important to the overall integrity and credibility of a report. from the assurance provider on their relationship However, GRI recommends the use of external assurance for to the report preparer. sustainability reports in addition to any internal resources. As indicated in Profile Disclosure 3.13, organizations A variety of approaches are currently used by report should disclose information on their approach to preparers to implement external assurance, including external assurance. the use of professional assurance providers, stakeholder panels, and other external groups or individuals. However, regardless of the specific approach, it should be conducted by competent groups or individuals external to the organization. These engagements may employ groups or individuals that follow professional standards for assurance, or they may involve approaches that follow systematic, documented, and evidence-based processes but are not governed by a specific standard. GRI uses the term ‘external assurance’ to refer to activities designed to result in published conclusions on the quality of the report and the information contained within it. This includes, but is not limited to, consideration of underlying processes for preparing this information. This is different from activities designed to assess or validate the quality or level of performance of an organization, such as issuing performance certifications or compliance assessments. Overall, the key qualities for external assurance of reports using the GRI Reporting Framework are that it: • Is conducted by groups or individuals external to the organization who are demonstrably competent in both the subject matter and assurance practices; • Is implemented in a manner that is systematic, documented, evidence-based, and characterized by defined procedures; • Assesses whether the report provides a reasonable and balanced presentation of performance, taking into consideration the veracity of data in a report as well as the overall selection of content; Version 3.1 41
  • 44. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Glossary of Terms GRI Reporting Framework Additional Indicators The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to provide a generally accepted framework for reporting on an Additional Indicators are those Indicators identified in organization’s economic, environmental, and social the GRI Guidelines that represent emerging practice performance. The Framework consists of the Sustainability or address topics that may be material to some Reporting Guidelines, the Indicator Protocols, Technical organizations but not generally for a majority. Protocols, and the Sector Supplements. Boundary Independent Board Member The boundary for a sustainability report refers to the Definitions for ‘independent’ can vary between legal range of entities whose performance is covered in the jurisdictions. Independent usually implies that the organization’s sustainability report. member has no financial interest in the organization or other potential benefits that could create a conflict of Content Index interest. Organizations using the Guidelines should state A GRI content index is a table or matrix that lists all the definition used for ‘independent’. of the Standard Disclosures, and where responses to the Disclosures can be found (page number or URL). Indicator Categories Reporting organizations can also add reference to Broad areas or groupings of sustainability topics. The organization-specific (non-GRI Guidelines) Indicators. categories included in the GRI Guidelines are: economic, The Content Index provides users with a quick overview environmental, and social. The social grouping is of what has been reported and increases ease of report categorized in terms of Labor Practices, Human Rights, use. A Content Index is especially important if some Society, and Product Responsibility. A given category of the Disclosures appear in other reports, such as a may have several Indicator Aspects. financial report or previous sustainability reports. Indicator Aspects Core Indicator The general types of information that are related to a specific Core Indicators are those Indicators identified in the GRI Indicator category (e.g., energy use, child labor, customers). Guidelines to be of interest to most stakeholders and assumed to be material unless deemed otherwise on the Performance Indicator basis of the GRI Reporting Principles. Qualitative or quantitative information about results Downstream or outcomes associated with the organization that is comparable and demonstrates change over time. The term ‘downstream entities’ is based on the concept of a production chain that extends from the extraction Profile Disclosures of raw materials to the use of a good or service by an end-user. ‘Downstream’ refers to those organizations The numbered information requirements in Part 2 of the that play a role in the distribution or use of goods and Guidelines that set the overall context for reporting and services provided by the reporting organization, or, more understanding organizational performance (e.g., 2.1, 3.13). generally, play a role in a later step in the production chain than the organization itself. Reporting Principle Concepts that describe the outcomes a report should Global Reporting Initiative achieve and that guide decisions made throughout the GRI’s vision is of a sustainable global economy where reporting process, such as which Indicators to respond organizations manage their economic, environmental, to, and how to respond to them. social and governance performance and impacts responsibly and report transparently. GRI accomplishes Sector Supplement this vision by providing guidance and support that Sector Supplements are versions of the GRI Guidelines enables organizations to report transparently and with tailored for particular sectors. Some sectors face unique accountability, as drivers of the change to a sustainable issues. Sector Supplements capture these issues, which global economy. All GRI Reporting Framework may not be covered in the original Guidelines. Sector components are developed using a multi-stakeholder Supplements feature integrated commentary and new consensus-seeking approach. 42 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 45. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Performance Indicators, ensuring that sustainability reports Unitary Board cover key sectoral concerns. Refers to a board structure that has only one governing body responsible for the organization. Stakeholder Stakeholders are defined broadly as those groups or Upstream individuals: (a) that can reasonably be expected to be The term ‘upstream entities’ is based on the concept of significantly affected by the organization’s activities, a production chain that extends from the extraction of products, and/or services; or (b) whose actions can raw materials to the use of a good or service by an end- reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the user. ‘Upstream’ refers to those organizations that play organization to successfully implement its strategies and a role in the supply chain of the reporting organization achieve its objectives. or, more generally, play a role in an earlier step in the production chain than the organization itself. Standard Disclosures For definitions of words or concepts contained directly in The Guidelines present topics and information for the wording of the Indicators, see the Indicator Protocols. reporting that are material to most organizations and of interest to most stakeholders. These are captured in three types of Standard Disclosures: • Strategy and Profile Disclosures set the overall context for reporting and for understanding organizational performance, such as its strategy, profile, governance, and management approach; • Disclosures on Management Approach cover how an organization addresses a given set of topics in order to provide context for understanding performance in a specific area. • Performance Indicators that elicit comparable information on the economic, environmental, and social performance of the organization Sustainability Report Sustainability reporting is the practice of measuring, disclosing, and being accountable for organizational performance while working towards the goal of sustainable development. A sustainability report provides a balanced and reasonable representation of the sustainability performance of the reporting organization, including both positive and negative contributions. Indicator Protocol An Indicator Protocol provides definitions, compilation guidance, and other information to assist report preparers, and to ensure consistency in the interpretation of the Performance Indicators. An Indicator Protocol exists for each of the Performance Indicators contained in the Guidelines. Version 3.1 43
  • 46. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines G3 Guidelines Acknowledgements: Indicators Working Group (IWG) Members A Global Effort The Indicators Working Group was responsible for reviewing the indicators set as a whole; ensuring quality The following organizations provided funds or in-kind and consistency of the indicators’ design; and designing contributions for the G3 development process overall fit with the TAC guidance. G3 Consortium: • Mr. Neil Anderson, Union Network International, UNI • Mr. David Bent, Forum for the Future • Mr. William R. Blackburn, William Blackburn Consulting • Ms. Julie-Anne Braithwaite, Rio Tinto/ICMM • Ms. Sarah Forrest, Goldman Sachs International • Ms. Somporn Kamolsiripichaiporn, Chulalongkorn University G3 ad hoc support: • Mr. Robert Langford, The Federation des Experts Comptables Europeens (FEE) The United Kingdom Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs (DEFRA) and the Netherlands Ministry • Ms. Stephanie Maier, Ethical Investment Research of Foreign Affairs also contributed to the G3 Guidelines Service (EIRIS) Development. • Ms. Asako Nagai, Sony Corporation • Mr. Ron Nielsen, Alcan Inc. G3 Online supported by: • Mr. Michael Rae, World Wide Fund Australia • Ms. Ulla Rehell, Kesko Corporation • Mr. George Nagle, Bristol-Myers Squibb • Ms. Filippa Bergin, Amnesty International G3 printed by: • Ms. Giuliana Ortega Bruno, Ethos Institute The IWG worked with six issue-specific Advisory Groups that were responsible for reviewing indicators and creating technical protocols for indicators in their area of expertise. G3 Guidelines and Protocols Content Development Society Advisory Group Members Volunteers from business, non-governmental • Ms. Anne Gambling, Holcim organizations, labor, accountancy, investment, academia, and others came together and create all aspects of the G3 • Mr. Sachin Joshi, Center For Social Markets (CSM) Guidelines and Protocols. The following multi-stakeholder technical working groups were convened between • Mr. Craig Metrick, Investor Responsibility Research January and November 2005, and each delivered a Center (IRRC) different part of the content of the G3 Guidelines. • Mr. Keith Miller, 3M • Ms. Ruth Rosenbaum, Center for Reflection, Education and Action (CREA) • Ms. Glaucia Terreo, Instituto Ethos • Mr. Peter Wilkinson, Transparency International 44 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 47. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Human Rights Advisory Group Members Labor Advisory Group Members • Ms. Marina d’Engelbronner, Humanist Committee • Ms. Michiko Arikawa, Matsushita Electric Industrial on Human Rights (HOM) (Panasonic) • Ms. Bethany Heath, Chiquita Brands • Mr. Stephen Frost, Southeast Asia Research Centre • Mr. Jorge Daniel Taillant, The Center for Human • Ms. Kyoko Sakuma, Sustainability Analysis Rights and Environement (CEDHA) Consulting • Rev. Mr. David M. Schilling, Interfaith Center on • Mr. Sean Ansett, Gap Inc. Corporate Responsibility • Ms. Deborah Evans, Lloyd’s Register of Quality • Ms. Susan Todd, Solstice Sustainability Works Inc. Assurance (LRQA) • Mr. Hirose Chuichiro, Canon • Mr. Pierre Mazeau, Electricité de France (EDF) • Mr. Steve Ouma, Kenyan Human Rights Commission • Mr. Dan Viederman, Verité • Mr. Björn Edlund, ABB Ltd. • Ms. Marleen van Ruijven, Amnesty International Economic Advisory Group Members • Ms. Christine Jasch, Institute for Environmental Management and Economics(IOEW) Environment (Biodiversity and Water) Advisory Group • Mr. Martin Tanner, Novartis International AG • Mr. Ian Blythe, Boots Group PLC • Ms. Helen Campbell, former AccountAbility • Mr. Ian Dutton, The Nature Conservancy • Mr. Eric Israel, KPMG LLP • Ms. Annelisa Grigg, Fauna Flora International • Ms. Martina Japy, BMJ CoreRatings • Ms. Nancy Kamp-Roelands, Ernst Young • Ms. Michelle Smith, Rohm and Haas Netherlands/ Royal NIVRA • Ms. Lisa Acree, Business for Social Responsibility • Ms. Erin Musk, City West Water • Mr. Johan Verburg, NOVIB/Oxfam Netherlands • Mr. Mike Rose, SASOL Reporting as a Process Working Group • Mr. Fernando Toledo, Codelco (RPWG) Members Environment (Pollution) Advisory Group The Reporting as a Process Working Group was tasked Members with updating and further developing the reporting • Ms. Tanja D. Carroll, Coalition for Environmentally principles, and other guidance on the process of Responsible Economies (CERES) applying the G3 Guidelines. • Mr. Yutaka Okayama, Toyota Motor Corporation • Ms. Amy Anderson, Starbucks Coffee • Ms. Maria Fatima Reyes, Philippine Institute of • Mr. Pankaj Bhatia, World Resources Institute (WRI) Certified Public Accountants (PICPA) • Mr. Bill Boyle, BP • Mr. Yogendra Kumar Saxena, Gujarat Ambuja Cements • Dr. Uwe Brekau, Bayer AG • Mr. David Stangis, Intel Corporation • Ms. Debra Hall, Coalition for Environmentally • Ms. Sonia Valdivia, The Catholic University of Peru Responsible Economies (CERES) • Mr. Eric Shostal, Institutional Shareholder Services • Mr. Dunstan Hope, Business for Social Responsibility • Ms. Lucian Turk, Dell, Inc. • Dr. Aqueel Khan, Association for Stimulating Know How (ASK) Version 3.1 45
  • 48. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines • Ms. Judy Kuszewski, SustainAbility Ltd. G3.1 Acknowledgements: • Mr Brian Kohler, Communications, Energy Paperworkers Union of Canada Community Impacts Working Group • Ms. Luz Barragan, CEMEX • Mr Ken Larson, Hewlett Packard • Mr. Derk Byvanck, Oxfam/Novib • Mr. Steve Lippman, Trillium Invest • Mr. Pierre Habbard, TUAC (Trade Union Advisory • Mr Luis Perera, PriceWaterHouseCoopers Committee to the OECD) • Mr. Dante Pesce, Vincular, Pontificia Universidad • Ms. Constance Kane, World Education Católica de Valparaíso • Ms. Helen Macdonald, Newmont Mining • Ms Mizue Unno, So-Tech Consulting, Inc. Corporation • Mr Cornis van der Lugt, UNEP Division of • Ms. Liane Lohde, International Finance Technology, Industry, and Economics (DTIE) Corporation, United States of America • Mr. Robert Walker, The Ethical Funds Company • Mr. Manohar Paralkar, Tata Motors • Mr. Ian Whitehouse, Manaaki Whenua Landcare • Mr. Claude Perras, Rio Tinto Research • Mr. Johan Verburg, Oxfam/Novib • Mr Alan Willis, Alan Willis Associates • Although not a member of the group, Jennifer Human Rights Working Group Iansen-Rogers, KPMG, The Netherlands, provided • Mr. Tom Etty, Former FNV Netherlands ongoing advice on process matters. • Ms. Karin Ireton, Standard Bank Public comments • Ms. Margaret Jungk, The Danish Institute for Human Rights 270 submissions were received in response to its call for comments on the draft G3 Guidelines between January • Mr. Stephen Ouma Akoth, Former Human Rights and March 2006. These comments significantly shaped Commission, Kenya the final G3 Guidelines. • Ms. Jeehye Park, SK Telecom Consultants • Mr. Dante Pesce, Vincular: Centre for CSR – Chile The GRI secretariat enlisted the (paid) help of the • Ms. Anna Pot, APG All Pensions Group following consultants during the G3 process: • Mr. Ed Potter, Coca-Cola Company • csrnetwork (Lead consultant – Mark Line) • Ms. Soraya Ramoul, NovoNordisk • Just Solutions (Lead consultant – Vic Thorpe) • Ms. Jo Render, Newmont Mining Corporation / • onValues (Lead consultant - Ivo Knoepfel) ERM • Ove Arup (Lead consultant - Jean Rogers) • Mr. Martin Summers, British American Tobacco • Responsibility Matters (Lead consultant – Mark • Ms. Jet Urmeneta, Verité Southeast Asia Brownlie) • Mr. Bob Walker, Northwest Ethical Investments • Sandra Pederson, Editor • Mr. John Wilson, TIAA-CREF • Source-Asia (Lead consultant – Paul Wenman) • Triple Innova (Lead consultant - Michael Kundt) • University of Amsterdam (Lead consultant - Jeffrey Harrod) 46 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 49. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Gender Working Group Public comments • Ms. Gemma Adaba , International Confederation of The development of G3.1 followed established due Free Trade Unions (ICFTU) process, including a call for public comment. 358 • Ms. Amy Augustine, Calvert /CERES responses were received during the Public Comment Period. Recommendations and concerns were • Mr. Stefan Chojnicki, Standard Chartered Bank considered and addressed by the Working Groups and GRI’s governance bodies, significantly shaping G3.1’s • Ms. Heloisa Covolan, Itaipu Binacional design. • Ms. Janet Geddes, KPMG India • Ms. Jane Gronow, Rio Tinto • Ms. Kate Grosser, Nottingham University Business School • Ms. Cecily Joseph, Symantec • Ms. Tahereh Kharestani, CSR Iran • Mr. Tur-Od Lkhagvajav, XacBank • Ms. Jyoti Macwan, SEWA • Ms. Laraine Mills, UNIFEM • Ms. Alisha Miranda, Standard Chartered Bank • Ms. Carmen Niethammer, International Finance Corporation (IFC) • Ms. Pratibha Pandya, SEWA • Ms. Liz Potter, LendLease • Ms. Srimathi Shivashankar, Infosys Technologies India • Ms. Ines Smyth, Oxfam GB • Ms. Anne Stenhammer, UNIFEM • Ms. Annie Tennant, LendLease • Ms. Noortje Verhart, KIT Royal Tropical Institute • Mr. Vusa Vundla, AMSCO • Mr. Jean-Paul Zalaquett Falaha, Chilectra • Ms. Jo Zaremba, Oxfam GB Version 3.1 47
  • 50. RG Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Acknowledgements Technical GRI Governance Bodies Protocol Technical Advisory Committee Report Content Materiality Working This group of a maximum of 15 experts assists in Group maintaining the overall quality and coherence of the GRI Reporting Framework by providing high level • Mr. Glenn Frommer, MTR Corporation technical advice and expertise. Their key function in • Mr. Bradley Googins, Carroll School of the Guidelines’ development is to recommend the Management - Boston College direction of guidance, resolve key issues that emerge around content, ensure the development follows • Mr. Jong Ho Hong, Graduate School of sound due process, and submit a concur/non-concur Environmental Studies Seoul National University recommendation to the Board on whether to approve • Ms. Daisy Kambalame, African Institute of the Guidelines for release. Corporate Citizenship (AICC) Stakeholder Council • Mr. David Kingma, Holcim This group of a maximum of 50 constitutes the formal • Mr. Carlos Eduardo Lessa Brandão - Brazilian stakeholder policy forum within the GRI governance Institute of Corporate Governance structure. The Council advises the Board on policy and strategy issues. Some individual SC members participate • Mr. Jason Morrison, Pacific Institute in Guidelines Working Groups. • Mr. Graham Terry, The South African Institute of Board of Directors: Chartered Accountants (SAICA) This group of a maximum of 16 has the ultimate • Mr. Luis Perera, PriceWaterHouseCoopers fiduciary, financial and legal responsibility for GRI, and is the final decision making authority on Guidelines • Mr. Cornis van der Lugt - United Nations revisions, organizational strategy and work plans. Environment Programme (UNEP) GRI Secretariat: • Ms. Janet Williamson, TUC The Secretariat works to drive GRI’s Mission to make Public comments sustainability reporting standard practice. The Secretariat implements the Guidelines and technical The development of the Technical Protocol – Applying work plan approved by the Board of Directors. It also the Report Content Principles followed established due manages communications, outreach, stakeholder process, including a call for public comment. relations, learning and research services and financial 40 responses were received during the Public administration. The Secretariat supports the operations Comment Period. Recommendations and concerns of the Board of Directors, Stakeholder Council and were considered and addressed by the Working Group Technical Advisory Committee. and GRI’s governance bodies, significantly shaping the Technical Protocol’s design. 48 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 51. Sustainability Reporting Guidelines RG Legal Liability This document, designed to promote sustainability Further information on the GRI and the reporting, has been developed through a unique Sustainability Reporting Guidelines may be multi-stakeholder consultative process involving obtained from: representatives from reporting organizations and www.globalreporting.org report information users from around the world. While the GRI Board of Directors encourage use of the GRI info@globalreporting.org Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (GRI Guidelines) by all organizations, the preparation and publication of reports based fully or partially on the GRI Guidelines is the full responsibility of those producing them. Neither the GRI Board of Directors nor Stichting Global Reporting Initiative can assume responsibility for any consequences or damages resulting directly or indirectly, from the use of the GRI Guidelines in the Global Reporting Initiative preparation of reports or the use of reports based on the GRI Guidelines. PO Box 10039 Request for Notification of Use 1001 EA Amsterdam Organizations that have used the Guidelines and/or The Netherlands other elements of the Reporting Framework as the basis for their report are requested to notify GRI upon its Tel: +31 (0) 20 531 00 00 release. When notifying GRI, organizations can choose the following options: Fax: +31 (0) 20 531 00 31 • Register their report in GRI’s online database of reports © 2000-2011 Global Reporting Initiative. • Request that GRI publicize their report with the All rights reserved. Featured Report Service • Request a GRI Application Level Check to confirm their self-declared Application Level. Copyright and Trademark Notice This document is copyright-protected by Stichting Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). The reproduction and distribution of this document for information and/or use in preparing a sustainability report is permitted without prior permission from GRI. However, neither this document nor any extract from it may be reproduced, stored, translated, or transferred in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) for any other purpose without prior written permission from GRI. Global Reporting Initiative, the Global Reporting Initiative logo, Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and GRI are trademarks of the Global Reporting Initiative. Version 3.1 49
  • 52. GRI Application Levels AL AL GRI Application Levels © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1 Version 3.1 1
  • 53. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 54. GRI Application Levels AL GRI Application Levels Brief overview Value of the Levels To indicate that a report is GRI-based, report makers The Levels aim to provide: should declare the level to which they have applied the GRI Reporting Framework via the “Application Levels” • Report readers with a measure of the extent to system. which the GRI Guidelines and other Reporting Framework elements have been applied in the To meet the needs of beginners, advanced reporters, preparation of a report. and those somewhere in between, there are three levels in the system. They are titled C, B, and A. The reporting • Report makers with a vision or path for criteria at each level reflect a measure of the extent of incrementally expanding application of the GRI application or coverage of the GRI Reporting Framework. Reporting Framework over time. A “plus” (+) is available at each level (ex., C+, B+, A+) if external assurance was utilized for the report. Declaring an Application Level clearly communicates which elements of the GRI Reporting Framework have been applied in the preparation of a report. How the system works A report maker self-declares a Level based on its own • Incentives for beginners: The Levels provide a assessment of its report content against the criteria in starting point for first-time report makers, and the GRI Application Levels (see overleaf ). also reinforce the importance and value of an incremental approach to reporting which expands In addition to the self-declaration, reporting over time. organizations can choose one or both of the following options: • Recognizing advanced reporters: A growing number of organizations have developed • Have a third party offer an opinion on the self- sophisticated reporting systems based on the declaration GRI Framework, that include assurance, and are looking to communicate this to readers in a quick • Request that the GRI check the self-declaration. and easy-to-understand way. Version 3.1 1
  • 55. AL GRI Application Levels Application Level Criteria Reports intended to qualify for level C, C+, B, B+, A or A+ GRI recommends reporting organizations include the must contain each of the criteria that are presented in Application Level table in their report as it illustrates the the column for the relevant Level. value and requirements of the system to report readers. APPENDIX A – FINAL VERSION GRI APPLICATION LEVELS APPROVED BY THE GRI BOARD OF DIRECTORS JULY 2006 Report Application Level C C+ B B+ A A+ Report on: Report on all criteria listed for Same as requirement for Level B 1.1 Level C plus: Profile OUTPUT 2.1 - 2.10 1.2 Disclosures 3.1 - 3.8, 3.10 - 3.12 3.9, 3.13 4.1 - 4.4 , 4.14 - 4.15 4.5 - 4.13, 4.16 - 4.17 Report Externally Assured Report Externally Assured Report Externally Assured Standard Disclosures N o t R e q u i re d M a n a g e m e n t A p p ro a c h D i s c l o s u re s Management Approach disclosed for for each Indicator Category each Indicator Category Disclosures on OUTPUT Management Approach Report fully on a minimum of any 10 Report fully on a minimum of any 20 Respond on each core and Sector Performance Performance Indicators, including Performance Indicators, at least Supplement* indicator with due Indicators at least one from each of: social, one from each of: economic, regard to the materiality Principle OUTPUT economic, and environment.** environment, human rights, labor, by either: a) reporting on the Sector Supplement society, product responsibility.*** indicator or b) explaining the reason Performance Indicators for its omission. * Sector supplement in final version ** Performance Indicators may be selected from any finalized Sector Supplement, but 7 of the 10 must be from the original GRI Guidelines *** Performance Indicators may be selected from any finalized Sector Supplement, but 14 of the 20 must be from the original GRI Guidelines Declaring an Application Level A GRI Application Level declaration should be included The GRI Application Level Check Statement serves as the in the report. It needs to be indicated who has made this formal confirmation of the Application Level Check. assessment. GRI recommends reporting organizations publish this Statement near the GRI Content Index. Reporting organizations may exercise their option to seek opinions from a third party or request a GRI GRI will only recognize reports on its website as GRI- Application Level Check to confirm their self-declaration. based if they contain, at minimum, a GRI Content Index. Both self-declarations and third party statements should The GRI Content Index lists every Guidelines disclosure be indicated in the report by including appropriate text. addressed in a report. The Index complements, and More information on ‘Options for Declaration’ can be should correspond to, an Application Level declaration. found at www.globalreporting.org. It communicates which GRI disclosures have been reported, and the reason why certain disclosures have Having successfully completed a GRI Application Level not been reported. The Index is also the gateway for Check, reporting organizations should include the finding all reported sustainability information. It should customized GRI Application Level Check Statement in be able to easily have clear and direct referencing, and their report, which incorporates the special GRI-Checked if used online, can be an interactive navigation tool. By icon. using the Index, report users should be able to easily find specific data. 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 56. GRI Application Levels AL Application Level check methodology Application Levels and assurance The most important aspect of the GRI Application GRI recommends the use of external assurance. Level Check revolves around the GRI Content Index. This Index is the basis for determining whether or not For each of the Application Levels, a “+” can be added an organization has reported on the required set and to the Level when a reporting organization has had its number of standard disclosures (Profile Disclosures, reporting externally assured. GRI has identified six key Disclosures on Management Approach, Performance qualities for external assurance of reports. The external Indicators) for a particular Application Level. assurance: When GRI finds that the Index does not meet the • should be conducted by groups or individuals requirements for the Application Level declared by the external to the organization who are demonstrably organization, a set of action points will be provided to competent in both the subject matter and the reporting organization in order to correct this. assurance practices; A GRI Content Index template (Excel file) can be • is implemented in a manner that is systematic, downloaded from GRI’s website, which a reporting documented, evidence-based, and is characterized organization is required to complete for the GRI by defined procedures; Application Level Check and can also be included in its report. • assesses whether the report provides a reasonable and balanced presentation of performance, taking As a secondary step, GRI takes a sample of the standard into consideration the veracity of the data in a disclosures and determines whether the reporting report as well as the overall selection of content; claims made in the Index can be substantiated. For this purpose, GRI checks the text to see if: • utilizes groups or individuals to conduct the assurance who are not unduly limited by • A quantitative standard disclosure has been their relationship with the organization or its answered with a quantitative response in-line with stakeholders to reach and publish an independent the disclosure. and impartial conclusion on the report; • A qualitative standard disclosure has been • assesses the extent to which the report preparer answered with a qualitative response in-line with has applied the GRI Reporting Framework the disclosure. (including the Reporting Principles) in the course of reaching its conclusions; and • results in an opinion or set of conclusions that is publicly available in written form, and a statement from the assurance provider on their relationship to the report preparer. If GRI is requested to check a “plus” (+) level report it will check for the presence of a statement from the assurance provider but will not conduct reviews to determine whether external assurance has met the above-listed criteria. The Application Levels are intended to demonstrate a pathway for incrementally expanding approaches to reporting using the GRI Reporting Framework. They are in no way intended as substitutes for or equivalents to external assurance. Version 3.1 3
  • 57. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP IP Indicator Protocols Set Economic (EC) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1 Version 3.1 1
  • 58. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 59. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP Economic Performance Indicators Aspect: Economic Performance EC1 irect economic value generated and D distributed, including revenues, operating costs, employee compensation, donations and other community investments, retained Co r e earnings, and payments to capital providers and governments. EC2 Financial implications and other risks and Co r e opportunities for the organization’s activities due to climate change. EC3 Coverage of the organization’s defined benefit Co r e plan obligations. EC4 Significant financial assistance received from Co r e government. Aspect: Market Presence EC5 Range of ratios of standard entry level wage by gender compared to local minimum wage Add at significant locations of operation. EC6 Policy, practices, and proportion of spending Co r e on locally-based suppliers at significant locations of operation. EC7 Procedures for local hiring and proportion of Co r e senior management hired from the local community at significant locations of operation. Aspect: Indirect Economic Impacts EC8 Development and impact of infrastructure investments and services provided primarily for Co r e public benefit through commercial, in-kind, or pro bono engagement. EC9 Understanding and describing significant indirect economic impacts, including the Add extent of impacts. Version 3.1 1
  • 60. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC Relevance The Economic Indicators are also closely related to Indicators in other Protocols, including: Performance data generated in response to the Indicators in this section are expected to illustrate: • EC1-2.1c, EC5, and LA14 regarding wages; • T he flow of capital amongst different stakeholders; • EC1-2.1c, EC3, and LA3 regarding employee and benefits; • T he major economic impacts of the organization • EC1-2.1f, EC6, EC8, and SO1 regarding interactions throughout society. with local communities; An organization’s economic performance is fundamental • EC2 (climate change risk) and EN3 (direct energy to understanding the organization and its basis for consumption); and sustainability. However, this information is already well reported in many countries in annual financial accounts • EC10 (indirect economic impacts) and SO1 (socio- and reports. Financial statements provide information economic impacts on communities). about the financial position, performance, and changes in the financial position of an entity. They also indicate the results achieved in managing the financial capital Definitions provided to the organization. Significant locations of operation What is reported less frequently, but often desired by Locations where single-market revenues, costs, stake- readers of sustainability reports, is the organization’s holder payments, production, or employee numbers contribution to the sustainability of the economic represent a significant share of the organization’s global systems in which the organization operates. An total, and are sufficient to be particularly important to organization may be financially viable, but this may decision-making by the organization or its stakeholders. have been achieved by creating significant externalities Combined, these locations would likely represent the that impact other stakeholders. Economic Performance majority of the above figures. Reporting organizations Indicators are intended to measure the economic should identify and explain the specific criteria used to outcomes of an organization’s activities and the effect of determine what is significant. Reporting organizations these outcomes on a broad range of stakeholders. should use International Accounting Standards 14 (IAS14) as a reference in defining significant locations of operation. The Indicators in this section are divided into three categories: General References 1. conomic Performance. This category of Indicators E • T he International Accounting Standards Board addresses the direct economic impacts of the (IASB) website (www.iasb.org) provides information organization’s activities and the economic value about relevant International Financial Reporting added by these activities. Standards (IFRS). 2. arket Presence. These Indicators provide M • I n preparing responses to the Economic Indicators, information about interactions in specific markets. data should be compiled from figures in the organization’s audited financial accounts or 3. ndirect Economic Impacts. These Indicators measure I its internally audited management accounts, the economic impacts created as a result of the wherever possible. In all cases, the data should be organization’s economic activities and transactions. compiled using either: There are several linkages between different Economic • T he relevant International Financial Reporting Indicators. Elements of the value-added table in EC1 are Standards (IFRS) and Interpretations of Standards, related to other Economic Indicators, and there are also published by the International Accounting connections between wages and benefits (EC1-2.1c and Standards Board (IASB) (some Indicator Protocols EC5), transactions with governments (EC1-2.1e and EC4), reference specific International Accounting and community investments (EC1-2.1f and EC8). Standards, which should be consulted); or 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 61. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP • ational or regional standards recognized N inter-nationally for the purpose of financial reporting. The reporting organization should clearly indicate which standards were applied and provide clear references to the relevant sources. Segmental reporting Reporting organizations should use International Accounting Standards 14 (IAS14) as a reference in defining ‘local’, as required by Indicators EC1, EC5, EC6, and EC7. Version 3.1 3
  • 62. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC EC1 Direct economic value generated organization’s global operations as included in the table below. Data can also be presented and distributed, including revenues, on a cash basis where this can be justified and operating costs, employee compensation, disclosed in a table that includes the basic components as listed below. donations and other community invest- ments, retained earnings, and payments To better assess local economic impacts, EVGD should be presented separately at country, to capital providers and governments. regional, or market levels, where significant. Reporting organizations should identify and 1. Relevance explain their criteria for defining significance. Data on the creation and distribution of economic value provide a basic indication of how the organization has 2.2 Guidance on EVGD Table Line Entries created wealth for stakeholders. Several components of the Economic Value Generated and Distributed (EVGD) a) Revenues: table also provide an economic profile of the reporting • et sales equal gross sales from products N organization, which may be useful for normalizing and services minus returns, discounts, and other performance figures. If presented in country-level allowances. detail, EVGD can provide a useful picture of the direct monetary value added to local economies. • evenue from financial investments R includes cash received as interest 2. Compilation on financial loans, as dividends from 2.1 Presentation: shareholdings, as royalties, and as direct income generated from assets (e.g., • he EVGD data should be compiled, where T property rental). possible, from data in the organization’s audited financial or profit and loss (PL) statement, or • evenues from sale of assets include R its internally audited management accounts. It physical assets (property, infrastructure, is also recommended that the economic value equipment) and intangibles (e.g., data be presented on an accruals basis in a table intellectual property rights, designs, and that includes the basic components for the brand names). Component Comment Direct economic value generated a) Revenues Net sales plus revenues from financial investments and sales of assets Economic value distributed b) Operating costs Payments to suppliers, non-strategic investments, royalties, and facilitation payments c) Employee wages and benefits Total monetary outflows for employees (current payments, not future commitments) d) Payments to providers of capital All financial payments made to the providers of the organization’s capital. e) ayments to government (by country – see note P Gross taxes below) f ) Community investments Voluntary contributions and investment of funds in the broader community (includes donations) Economic value retained (calculated as Economic Investments, equity release, etc. value generated less Economic value distributed) 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 63. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP b) Operating costs: f ) Community investments: • ash payments made outside the reporting C • oluntary donations and investment of funds V organization for materials, product in the broader community where the target components, facilities, and services beneficiaries are external to the company. purchased. This includes property rental, These include contributions to charities, license fees, facilitation payments (since NGOs and research institutes (unrelated these have a clear commercial objective), to the company’s commercial RD), funds royalties, payments for contract workers, to support community infrastructure (e.g., employee training costs (where outside trainers recreational facilities) and direct costs of social are used), employee protective clothing, etc. programs (including arts and educational events). The amount included should account c) Employee wages and benefits: for actual expenditures in the reporting period, not commitments. • otal payroll means employee salaries, T including amounts paid to government • or infrastructure investments, the calculation F institutions (employee taxes, levies, of the total investment should include costs and unemployment funds) on behalf of of goods and labor in addition to capital costs. employees. Non-employees working in an For support of ongoing facilities or programs operational role should normally not be (e.g., an organization funds the daily included here, but rather under Operating operations of a public facility), the reported Costs as a service purchased. investment should include operating costs. • otal benefits include regular contributions T • his excludes legal and commercial activities T (e.g., to pensions, insurance, company vehicles, or where the purpose of the investment is and private health), as well as other employee exclusively commercial. Donations to political support such as housing, interest-free loans, parties are included but are also addressed public transport assistance, educational grants, separately in more detail in SO6. and redundancy payments. They do not include training, costs of protective equipment, • ny infrastructure investment that is driven A or other cost items directly related to the primarily by core business needs (e.g., building employee’s job function. a road to a mine or factory) or to facilitate the business operations of the organization should d) Payments to providers of funds: not be included. The calculation of investment may include infrastructure built outside the • Dividends to all shareholders; main business activities of the reporting organization, such as a school or hospital for • nterest payments made to providers of loans. I employees and their families. • his includes interest on all forms of debt and T 3. Definitions borrowings (not only long-term debt) and also None arrears of dividends due to preferred shareholders. 4. Documentation e) Payments to government: Finance, treasury, or accounting departments should • ll company taxes (corporate, income, A have the information required by this Indicator. property, etc.) and related penalties paid at the international, national, and local levels. 5. References This figure should not include deferred • International Accounting Standard (IAS) 12 on taxes because they may not be paid. For Income Taxes, IAS 14 on segment Reporting, IAS organizations operating in more than one 18 on Revenues, and IAS 19 on Employee Benefits country, report taxes paid by country. The should be consulted. organization should report which definition of segmentation has been used. Version 3.1 5
  • 64. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC EC2 Financial implications and • P otential competitive advantages created for the organization by regulatory or other other risks and opportunities for the technology changes linked to climate change. organization’s activities due to climate 2.3 Report whether management has quantitatively change. estimated the financial implications (e.g., cost of 1. Relevance insurance and carbon credits) of climate change for the organization. Where possible, quantification Climate change presents risks and opportunities to would be beneficial. If quantified, disclose financial organizations, their investors, and their stakeholders. implications and the tools used to quantify. Organizations may face physical risks due to changes in the climate system and weather patterns. These risks 3. Definitions may include the impact of increased storms; changes in sea level, ambient temperature, and water availability; None. impacts on the workforce such as health effects (e.g., heat-related illness or disease); or the need to relocate 4. Documentation operations. Records or minutes of the organization’s governance bodies, including environmental committees may have As governments move to regulate activities that the information required by this Indicator. contribute to climate change, organizations that are directly or indirectly responsible for emissions face 5. References regulatory risk through increased costs or other factors impacting competitiveness. Limits on greenhouse gas None. emissions can also create opportunities for organizations as new technologies and markets are created. This is especially the case for organizations that can use or produce energy and energy products more efficiently. EN16 allows for disclosure on total amount of greenhouse gas emissions, while EN18 discloses total reductions achieved and initiatives for reducing the amount of emissions the reporting organization produces. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report whether the organization’s senior governance body considered climate change and the risks and opportunities it presents to the organization. 2.2 Report risks and/or opportunities posed by climate change that have potential financial implications for the organization, including: • R isks due to physical changes associated with climate change (e.g., impacts of modified weather patterns and heat-related illness); • R egulatory risks (e.g., the cost of activities and systems to comply with new regulations); • O pportunities to provide new technologies, products, or services to address challenges related to climate change; and 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 65. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP EC3 Coverage of the organization’s 2.5 here a fund set up to pay the plan’s pension W liabilities is not fully covered, explain the strategy, if defined benefit plan obligations. any, adopted by the employer to work towards full 1. Relevance coverage, and the timescale, if any, by which the employer hopes to achieve full coverage. When an organization provides a retirement plan for its workforce, these benefits could become commitments 2.6 Report the percentage of salary contributed by that members of the schemes plan on for their long- employee or employer. term economic well-being. Defined benefits plans have potential implications for employers in terms of the 2.7 Report the level of participation in retirement plans obligations that need to be met. Other types of plans, (e.g., participation in mandatory or voluntary like defined contributions, do not guarantee access to schemes, regional or country-based schemes, or a retirement plan or the quality of benefits. The type of those with financial impact). plan chosen has implications for both employees and employers. Conversely, a properly funded pension plan 2.8 Different jurisdictions (e.g., countries) have can help to attract and maintain a stable workforce and varying interpretations and guidance regarding support long-term financial and strategic planning on calculations used to determine plan coverage. the part of the employer. Calculate in accordance with the regulations and methods for relevant jurisdictions, and report 2. Compilation aggregated totals. Consolidation techniques 2.1 Identify whether the structure of retirement plans should be the same as those applied in preparing offered to employees are based on: the financial accounts of the organization. Note that benefit pension plans are part of the • Defined benefit plans; or International Accounting Standard (IAS) 19, however, IAS 19 covers more issues. • Other types of benefits. 3. Definitions 2.2 For defined benefit plans, identify whether the employer’s obligations to pay pensions under the Full coverage plan are to be met directly by the organization’s Plan assets that meet or exceed plan obligations. general resources or through a fund held and maintained separately from the resources of the 4. Documentation organization. Finance or accounting departments should have the information required by this Indicator. 2.3 Where the plan’s liabilities are met by the organization’s general resources, report the 5. References estimated value of those liabilities. • I nternational Accounting Standard (IAS) 19 on 2.4 Where a separate fund exists to pay the plan’s Employee Benefits . pension liabilities, report: • T he extent to which the scheme’s liabilities are estimated to be covered by the assets that have been set aside to meet them; • T he basis on which that estimate has been arrived at; and • When that estimate was made. Version 3.1 7
  • 66. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC EC4 Significant financial assistance 4. Documentation received from government. Financial accountants include items of IAS 20 individually but these are not consolidated, as this Indicator requires. 1. Relevance This Indicator provides a measure of host governments’ 5. References contributions to the reporting organization. The • I nternational Accounting Standard (IAS) 20 on significant financial assistance received from a Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure government, in comparison with taxes paid, can of Government Assistance. be useful for developing a balanced picture of the transactions between the reporting organization and government. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report significant estimated aggregate financial value on an accruals basis for the following: • Tax relief/credits; • Subsidies; • I nvestment grants, research and development grants, and other relevant types of grants; • Awards; • Royalty holidays; • F inancial assistance from Export Credit Agencies (ECAs); • Financial incentives; and • O ther financial benefits received or receivable from any government for any operation. 2.2 Report whether the government is present in the shareholding structure. 3. Definitions Significant financial assistance Significant direct or indirect financial benefits that do not represent a transaction of goods and services, but which are an incentive or compensation for actions taken, the cost of an asset, or expenses incurred. The provider of financial assistance does not expect a direct financial return from the assistance offered. 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 67. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP EC5 Range of ratios of standard entry 3. Definitions level wage by gender compared to local Local minimum wage minimum wage at significant locations of Minimum wage refers to compensation per hour or other operation. unit of time for employment allowed under law. Since some countries have numerous minimum wages (e.g., 1. Relevance by state/province or by employment category), identify Economic well-being is one of the ways in which an which minimum wage is being used. organization invests in its employees. This Indicator Entry level wage helps demonstrate how an organization contributes to the economic well-being of employees in significant Entry level wage should be defined by the full-time locations of operation. The Indicator also provides an wage offered to an employee in the lowest employment indication of the competitiveness of the organization’s category. Intern or apprentice wages should not be wages, and information relevant for assessing the effect considered. of wages on the local labor market. Offering wages 4. Documentation above the minimum can be one factor in building strong community relations, employee loyalty, and Potential sources of information include the payroll strengthening an organization’s social license to operate. department of the organization or finance, treasury, This Indicator is most relevant for organizations in which or accounting departments. Pertinent legislation in a substantial portion of their workforce is compensated each country/region of operation may also provide in a manner or scale that is closely linked to laws or information for this Indicator. regulations on minimum wage. 5. References 2. Compilation • Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of 2.1 Identify whether a significant proportion of the Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979. workforce is compensated based on wages subject to minimum wage rules. 2.2 In percentage terms, compare local minimum wage to the reporting organization’s entry level wage by gender at significant locations of operation. 2.3 Identify the variation in the ratios across significant locations of operation. 2.4 Report the distribution of the ratio of the entry level wage by gender to the minimum wage. 2.5 Report the definition used for ‘significant locations’. 2.6 For organizations that only offer salaried employment, the salary should be converted into an hourly estimate. 2.7 Indicate whether a local minimum wage is absent or variable in significant locations of operation, by gender. In circumstances in which different minimums could be used as a reference, explain which minimum wage is being used. Version 3.1 9
  • 68. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC EC6 Policy, practices, and proportion of 3. Definitions spending on locally-based suppliers at Locally-based suppliers significant locations of operation. Providers of materials, products, and services that are based in the same geographic market as the reporting 1. Relevance organization (i.e., no trans-national payments to the The influence an organization can have on a local supplier are made). The geographic definition of ‘local’ economy goes beyond direct jobs and payment of may vary because, in some circumstances, cities, regions wages and taxes. By supporting local business in the within a country, and even small countries could be supply chain, an organization can indirectly attract reasonably viewed as ‘local’. additional investment to the local economy. 4. Documentation Reporting organizations can gain or retain their ‘social None. license to operate’ in part by demonstrating positive local economic impacts. Local sourcing can be a strategy 5. References to help ensure supply, support a stable local economy, and can prove to be more efficient for remote settings. None. The proportion of local spending can also be an important factor in contributing to the local economy and maintaining community relations. However, the overall impact of local sourcing will also depend on the sustainability of the supplier over the long term. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report the organization’s geographic definition of ‘local’. 2.2 For the following calculations, note that percentages should be based on invoices or commitments made during the reporting period (i.e., accruals accounting). 2.3 Report whether the organization has a policy or common practices for preferring locally based suppliers either organization-wide or for specific locations. 2.4 If so, state the percentage of the procurement budget used for significant locations of operation that is spent on suppliers local to that operation (e.g., % of goods and supplies purchased locally). Local purchases can be made either from a budget managed at the location of operation or at the organization’s headquarters. 2.5 Indicate the factors that influence supplier selection (e.g., costs, environmental and social performance) in addition to their geographic location. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 69. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP EC7 Procedures for local hiring and proportion of senior management hired from the local community at significant locations of operation. 1. Relevance Selection of staff and senior management is based on a range of considerations. Ensuring that senior management is populated with local residents can benefit the local community and the organization’s ability to understand local needs. Diversity within a management team and the inclusion of members from the local area can enhance human capital, the economic benefit to the local community, and the organization’s ability to understand local needs. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report whether the organization has a global policy or common practices for granting preference to local residents when hiring in significant locations of operation. 2.2 If so, report the proportion of senior management in significant locations of operation from the local community. Use data on full-time employees to calculate this percentage. 2.3 Report the definition of ‘senior management’ used. 3. Definitions Local Local refers to individuals either born in or who have the legal right to reside indefinitely (e.g., naturalized citizens or permanent visa holders) in the same geographic market as the operation. Reporting organizations can choose their own definition of ‘local’ because, in some cases, cities, regions, and even small countries could be reasonably viewed as local. However, the definition should be clearly disclosed. 4. Documentation Personnel or human resources departments should have the information required by this Indicator. 5. References None. Version 3.1 11
  • 70. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EC EC8 Development and impact of infra- structure investments and services provided primarily for public benefit through commercial, in-kind, or pro bono engagement. 1. Relevance As well as generating and distributing economic value, an organization can affect an economy through its investments in infrastructure. The impacts of infrastructure investment can extend beyond the scope of the organization’s own business operations and over a longer timescale. This might include transport links, utilities, community social facilities, sports centers, health and welfare centers, etc. Along with investment in its own operations, this is one measure of an organization’s capital contribution to the economy. 2. Compilation 2.1 Explain the extent of development (e.g., size, cost, duration) of significant investments and support, and the current or expected impacts (positive or negative) on communities and local economies. Indicate whether these investments and services are commercial, in-kind, or pro bono engagement. 2.2 Report whether the organization conducted a community needs assessment to determine infrastructure and other services needed. If so, briefly explain the results of the assessment. 3. Definitions Infrastructure Facilities (e.g., water supply facility, road, school, or hospital) built primarily to provide a public service or good rather than a commercial purpose, and from which the organization does not seek to gain direct economic benefit. Services supported Providing a public benefit either through direct payment of operating costs or through staffing the facility/service with the reporting organization’s own employees. Public benefit can also include public services. 4. Documentation Finance, treasury, or accounting departments should have the information required by this Indicator. 5. References None. 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 71. Indicator Protocols Set: EC IP EC9 Understanding and describing pharmaceuticals contributes to a healthier population that can participate more fully in significant indirect economic impacts, the economy; pricing structures that exceed the including the extent of impacts. economic capacity of those on low incomes); 1. Relevance • E nhancing skills and knowledge amongst a Indirect economic impacts are an important part of professional community or in a geographical an organization’s economic influence in the context of region (e.g., need for a supplier base creates sustainable development. Whereas direct economic impacts a magnet for companies with skilled workers, and market influence tend to focus on the immediate which in turn engenders new learning institutes); consequences of monetary flows to stakeholders, indirect economic impacts include the additional impacts generated • J obs supported in the supply chain or distribution as money circulates through the economy. chain (e.g., assessing the impacts of growth or contraction of the organization on its suppliers) Direct economic impacts are often measured as the value of transactions between the reporting organization and • S timulating, enabling, or limiting foreign direct its stakeholders, while indirect economic impacts are the investment (e.g., expansion or closure of an infra- results - sometimes non-monetary - of the transaction. structure service in a developing country can lead Indirect impacts are an important aspect of an organization’s to increased or reduced foreign direct investment); role as a participant or agent in socio-economic change, particularly in developing economies. Indirect impacts are • E conomic impact of change in location of particularly important to assess and report in relation to operations or activities (e.g., outsourcing of local communities and regional economies. jobs to an overseas location); and For management purposes, indirect economic impacts • E conomic impact of the use of products and are an important indication of where risks to reputation services (e.g., linkage between economic may develop, or where opportunities may emerge to growth patterns and use of particular products expand market access or a social license to operate. and services). 2. Compilation 2.3 Report the significance of the impacts in the context of external benchmarks and stakeholder 2.1 Explain work undertaken to understand the priorities, such as national and international indirect economic impacts the organization has at standards, protocols, and policy agendas the national, regional, or local level. 3. Definitions 2.2 Report examples of indirect economic impacts, both positive and negative, such as: Indirect economic impact An additional consequence of the direct impact of • C hanging the productivity of organizations, financial transactions and the flow of money between an sectors, or the whole economy (e.g., through organization and its stakeholders. greater adoption or distribution of information technology); Economic impact • E conomic development in areas of high A change in the productive potential of the economy that poverty (e.g., number of dependents can have an influence on a community’s or stakeholder’s supported through income from one job); well-being and longer-term prospects for development. • E conomic impact of improving or deteriorating 4. Documentation social or environmental conditions (e.g., None. changing job market in an area converted from small family farms to large plantations or the 5. References economic impacts of pollution); None. • A vailability of products and services for those on low incomes (e.g., preferential pricing of Version 3.1 13
  • 72. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP IP Indicator Protocols Set Environment (EN) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1 Version 3.1 1
  • 73. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 74. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP Environment Performance Indicators Aspect: Materials Aspect: Biodiversity EN1 Materials used by weight or volume. EN11 Location and size of land owned, leased, Co r e managed in, or adjacent to, protected areas Co r e and areas of high biodiversity value outside EN2 Percentage of materials used that are recycled protected areas. Co r e input materials. EN12 Description of significant impacts of activities, Aspect: Energy products, and services on biodiversity in Co r e protected areas and areas of high biodiversity EN3 Direct energy consumption by primary energy Co r e value outside protected areas. source. EN13 Habitats protected or restored. EN4 Indirect energy consumption by primary Add Co r e source. EN14 Strategies, current actions, and future plans for EN5 Energy saved due to conservation and managing impacts on biodiversity. Add Add efficiency improvements. EN6 Initiatives to provide energy-efficient EN15 Number of IUCN Red List species and national or renewable energy-based products conservation list species with habitats in areas and services, and reductions in energy affected by operations, by level of extinction Add Add requirements as a result of these initiatives. risk. Aspect: Emissions, Effluents, and Waste EN7 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy Add consumption and reductions achieved. EN16 Total direct and indirect greenhouse gas emissions by weight. Co r e Aspect: Water EN8 Total water withdrawal by source. EN17 Other relevant indirect greenhouse gas Co r e Co r e emissions by weight. EN9 Water sources significantly affected by EN18 Initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas emissions withdrawal of water. Add and reductions achieved. Add EN10 Percentage and total volume of water recycled EN19 Emissions of ozone-depleting substances by Co r e and reused. weight. Add EN20 NOx, SOx, and other significant air emissions by Co r e type and weight. EN21 Total water discharge by quality and Co r e destination. Version 3.1 1
  • 75. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN22 Total weight of waste by type and disposal Co r e method. EN23 Total number and volume of significant spills. Co r e EN24 Weight of transported, imported, exported, or treated waste deemed hazardous under the terms of the Basel Convention Annex I, II, III, and VIII, and percentage of transported waste Add shipped internationally. EN25 Identity, size, protected status, and biodiversity value of water bodies and related habitats significantly affected by the reporting Add organization’s discharges of water and runoff. Aspect: Products and Services EN26 Initiatives to mitigate environmental impacts Co r e of products and services, and extent of impact mitigation. EN27 Percentage of products sold and their Co r e packaging materials that are reclaimed by category. Aspect: Compliance EN28 Monetary value of significant fines and total number of non-monetary sanctions for non- Co r e compliance with environmental laws and regulations. Aspect: Transport EN29 Significant environmental impacts of transporting products and other goods and materials used for the organization’s operations, and transporting members of the Add workforce. Aspect: Overall EN30 Total environmental protection expenditures and investments by type. Add 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 76. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP Relevance Measurement of energy consumption is relevant to greenhouse gas emissions and climate change. The The Aspects in the Environment Indicator set are burning of fossil fuels to generate energy creates structured to reflect the inputs, outputs, and modes of emissions of carbon dioxide (a greenhouse gas). To meet impact an organization has on the environment. Energy, the aims formulated in the Kyoto Protocol and to reduce water, and materials represent three standard types of the risk of severe climate change, energy demand needs inputs used by most organizations. These inputs result to be lowered. This can be achieved through more in outputs of environmental significance, which are efficient energy use (measured under EN5 and EN6) and captured under the Aspects of Emissions, Effluents, and replacing fossil fuel energy sources with renewable ones Waste. Biodiversity is also related to the concepts of (measured under EN3 and EN4). In addition to lowering inputs to the extent that it can be viewed as a natural the direct consumption of energy, designing energy- resource. However, biodiversity is also directly impacted efficient product and services (EN6) and reducing by outputs such as pollutants. indirect energy consumption (EN7) (e.g., the selection of low energy-intensive raw materials or the use of services The Aspects of Transport and Products and Services such as travel) are important strategies. represent areas in which an organization can further impact the environment, but often through other parties Emissions Aspect such as customers or suppliers of logistics services. The ‘emissions, effluents, and waste’ aspect includes Compliance and Overall Aspects are specific measures Indicators that measure standard releases to the the organization takes to manage environmental environment considered to be pollutants. These performance. Indicators include different types of pollutants (e.g., air emissions, effluents, solid waste) that are typically The Aspects of Energy, Water, Emissions, and Biodiversity recognized in regulatory frameworks (EN20-EN23, each contain several Indicators whose relationships are EN24). In addition, there are Indicators for two types explained in more detail below: of emissions that are the subject of international conventions- greenhouse gases (EN16 and EN17) Energy Aspect and ozone depleting substances (EN19). EN16 can be calculated using the data reported under EN3 and EN4. The Energy Indicators cover the five most important EN18 addresses the emissions reductions achieved and areas of organizational energy use, which include both initiatives to reduce emissions. direct and indirect energy. Direct energy use is energy consumed by the organization and its products and services. Indirect energy use, on the other hand, is Definitions energy that is consumed by others who are serving the Direct energy organization. The five different areas of energy use are to be reported as follows: Forms of energy that enter the reporting organization’s operational boundaries. It can be consumed either • n EN3, the direct energy consumption of the reporting I by the organization within its boundaries, or it can be organization is reported, including energy produced exported to another user. Direct energy can appear on-site (e.g., through the burning of gas). in either primary (e.g., natural gas for heating) or intermediate (e.g., electricity for lighting) forms. It can • N4 provides information on energy consumption E be purchased, extracted (e.g., coal, natural gas, oil), required to produce energy purchased externally, such harvested (e.g., biomass energy), collected (e.g., solar, as electricity. wind), or brought into the reporting organization’s boundaries by other means. • N5 asks for energy saved due to conservation and E efficiency improvements. Greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) The six main greenhouse gas emissions are: • N6 addresses the development of energy-efficient E products and services. • arbon dioxide (CO2); C • inally, EN7 covers the indirect energy consumption of F • ethane (CH4); M the reporting organization’s activities. Version 3.1 3
  • 77. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN • itrous oxide (N2O); N • ydrofluorocarbons (HFCs- a group of several H compounds); • erfluorocarbons (PFCs- a group of several P compounds); and • ulphur hexafluoride (SF6). S Indirect energy Energy produced outside the reporting organization’s organizational boundary that is consumed to supply energy for the organization’s intermediate energy needs (e.g., electricity or heating and cooling). The most common example is fuel consumed outside the reporting organization’s boundary in order to generate electricity to be used inside the organization’s boundary. Intermediate energy Forms of energy that are produced by converting primary energy into other forms. For most organizations, electricity will be the only significant form of intermediate energy. For a small percentage of organizations, other intermediate energy products might also be important, such as steam or water provided from a district heating plant or chilled water plant, or refined fuels such as synthetic fuels, biofuels, etc. Primary source The initial form of energy consumed to satisfy the reporting organization’s energy demand. This energy is used either to provide final energy services (e.g., space heating, transport) or to produce intermediate forms of energy, such as electricity and heat. Examples of primary energy include non-renewable sources such as coal, natural gas, oil, and nuclear energy. It also includes renewable sources such as biomass, solar, wind, geothermal, and hydro energy. Primary energy might be consumed on-site (e.g., natural gas to heat the reporting organization’s buildings) or off-site (e.g., natural gas consumed by the power plants that provide electricity to the reporting organization’s facilities). Renewable energy Renewable energy is derived from natural processes that are replenished constantly. This includes electricity and heat generated from solar, wind, ocean, hydropower, biomass, geothermal resources, biofuels, and hydrogen derived from renewable resources. 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 78. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN1 Materials used by weight or volume. 3. Definitions 1. Relevance Direct materials This Indicator describes the reporting organization’s Materials that are present in a final product. contribution to the conservation of the global resource base and efforts to reduce the material intensity and Non-renewable materials increase the efficiency of the economy. These are Resources that do not renew in short time periods, such expressed goals of the OECD Council and various as minerals, metals, oil, gas, coal, etc. national sustainability strategies. For internal managers and others interested in the financial state of the 4. Documentation organization, material consumption relates directly to overall costs of operation. Tracking this consumption Potential information sources include billing and internally, either by product or product category, accounting systems, and the procurement or supply facilitates the monitoring of material efficiency and cost management department. of material flows. 5. References 2. Compilation • OECD, Recommendation of the Council on Material 2.1 Identify total materials used, including materials Flows and Resource Productivity, 2004. purchased from external suppliers and those obtained from internal sources (captive production and extraction activities). This can include: • Raw materials (i.e., natural resources used for conversion to products or services such as ores, minerals, wood, etc.); • Associated process materials (i.e., materials that are needed for the manufacturing process but are not part of the final product, such as lubricants for manufacturing machinery); • Semi-manufactured goods or parts, including all forms of materials and components other than raw materials that are part of the final product; and • Materials for packaging purposes. 2.2 Identify non-renewable and direct materials used. Convert any measurements into estimated weight or volume, calculated ‘as is’ rather than by ‘dry substance/weight’. 2.3 Report the total weight or volume of : • Non-renewable materials used; and • Direct materials used. Version 3.1 5
  • 79. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN2 Percentage of materials used that are recycled input materials. 1. Relevance This Indicator seeks to identify the reporting organization’s ability to use recycled input materials. Using these materials helps to reduce the demand for virgin material and contribute to the conservation of the global resource base. For internal managers and others interested in the financial condition of the reporting organization, substituting recycled materials can contribute to lowering overall costs of operation. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total weight or volume of materials used as reported under EN1. 2.2 Identify the total weight or volume of recycled input materials. If estimation is required, state the estimation methods. 2.3 Report the percentage of recycled input materials used by applying the following formula: EN2= Total recycled input materials used x100 Input matertials used 3. Definitions Recycled input materials Materials that replace virgin materials that are purchased or obtained from internal or external sources, and that are not by-products and non-product outputs (NPO) produced by the reporting organization. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include billing and accounting systems, the procurement or supply management department, and internal production and waste disposal records. 5. References • OECD Working Group on Waste Prevention and Recycling. 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 80. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN3 Direct energy consumption by • Fuel distilled from crude oil, including gasoline, diesel, liquefied petroleum gas primary energy source. (LPG), compressed natural gas (CNG), 1. Relevance liquefied natural gas (LNG), butane, propane, ethane, etc. The ability of the reporting organization to use energy efficiently can be revealed by calculating the amount of • Direct renewable energy sources including: energy it consumes. Energy consumption has a direct effect on operational costs and exposure to fluctuations • Biofuels; in energy supply and prices. The environmental footprint of the organization is shaped in part by its choice of • Ethanol; and energy sources. Changes in the balance of these sources can indicate the organization’s efforts to minimize its • Hydrogen. environmental impacts. Note: Biomass is excluded from direct Information on the consumption of primary energy renewable energy sources for the purpose of sources supports an assessment of how the organization reporting to the WRI/WBCSD GHG Protocol. might be affected by emerging environmental For alignment with the WRI/WBCSD GHG regulations such as the Kyoto Protocol. The consumption Protocol, direct CO2 emissions from the of fossil fuels is a major source of greenhouse gas combustion of biomass should be reported emissions, and energy consumption is directly linked to separately. the organization’s greenhouse gas emissions. 2.2 Direct energy sources produced Replacing fossil fuel energy sources with renewable Identify the amount of primary energy the ones is essential for combating climate change and reporting organization acquires by producing, other environmental impacts created by the extraction extracting, harvesting, collecting, or converting it and processing of energy. Supporting renewable and from other forms of energy into joules or multiples. efficient energy technology also reduces the reporting This can include the same energy sources listed organization’s current and future dependency on non- under 2.1. renewable energy sources, and its exposure to potential volatility in prices and supply. 2.3 Direct energy sources sold Identify the amount of primary energy exported This Indicator measures the reporting organization’s outside the reporting boundary in joules or consumption of direct primary energy sources. The multiples. Indicator covers scope 1 of the WRI/WBCSD GHG Protocol. Indicator EN4 measures the consumption 2.4 Calculate total energy consumption in joules or of primary energy sources to supply the reporting multiples such as gigajoules (one billion joules or organization with intermediate energy such as 109 joules) using the following equation: electricity, heating and cooling, etc. Total direct energy consumption = direct 2. Compilation primary energy purchased + direct primary 2.1 Direct energy sources purchased energy produced- direct primary energy sold Identify primary energy sources purchased by the reporting organization for its own consumption. Refer to the following table to convert volumes of This includes: primary sources to gigajoules: • Direct non-renewable energy sources including: • Coal; • Natural gas; and Version 3.1 7
  • 81. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN Coal GJ Crude Oil GJ Gasoline GJ Natural Gas GJ Electricity GJ tonne (metric) 26,00 barrel 6,22 US gallon 0,125 therm 0,1055 kilowatt-hour 0,0036 ton (short) 23,59 tonne (metric) 44,80 tonne (metric) 44,80 1000 cubic feet 1,1046 megawatt-hour 3,6000 ton (long) 26,42 ton (short) 40,64 Diesel 1000 cubic meters 39,01 gigawatt-hour 3600,0 ton (long) 45,52 US gallon 0,138 MMBtu 1,055 tonne (metric) 43,33 Fuel Oil US gallon 0,144 tonne (metric) 40,19 2.5 Report total direct energy consumption in joules or multiples by renewable primary source. 2.6 Report total direct energy consumption in joules or multiples by non-renewable primary source. 3. Definitions Renewable resources Resources capable of being replenished within a short time through ecological cycles (as opposed to resources such as minerals, metals, oil, gas, coal that do not renew in short time periods). 4. Documentation Information can be obtained from invoices, measured (or calculated) heat/fuel accounting, estimations, defaults, etc. Amounts of joules can be taken directly or converted from invoices or delivery notes. Information about the combination of primary sources used to generate intermediate energy can be obtained from suppliers. 5. References • The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative - A corporate accounting and reporting standard (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD). 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 82. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN4 Indirect energy consumption by Intermediate energy purchased and consumed from renewable energy sources including: primary source. 1. Relevance • Solar; The amount and primary source of energy the reporting • Wind; organization uses indirectly through the purchase of electricity, heat, or steam, can indicate efforts by the • Geothermal; organization to manage environmental impacts and reduce its contribution to climate change. The particular • Hydro energy; effect indirect energy usage has on climate change depends on the type of primary energy used to generate • Biomass based intermediate energy; and intermediate energy. • Hydrogen based intermediate energy. Intermediate energy refers to forms of energy that are produced by converting primary energy into other 2.2 Identify the amount of primary fuels consumed forms. For most organizations, electricity will be the to produce intermediate energy based on the only significant form of intermediate energy. For a small total amount of energy purchased from external percentage of organizations, other intermediate energy suppliers (EN3- Energy Purchased). To estimate the products might also be important, such as steam or fuels consumed to produce purchased energy, use water provided from a district heating plant or chilled either: water plant, or refined fuels such as synthetic fuels, biofuels, etc. • Fuel consumption data acquired from the electricity provider if these data are available; This Indicator measures the energy required to produce and deliver purchased electricity and any other • Default data for electricity and heat; or intermediate energy products (such as district heat) that involve significant energy consumption upstream from • Estimations where default figures are not the organization’s reporting boundary. This information available. also enables calculations of indirect greenhouse gas emissions. It covers Scope 2 of the WRI/WBCSD GHG 2.3 Using data from 2.1, report: Protocol. • The total amount of indirect energy used by 2. Compilation indirect non-renewable sources and indirect 2.1 Identify the amount of intermediate energy renewable sources in terms of intermediate purchased and consumed from sources external to energy; and the reporting organization in joules or multiples, such as gigajoules (one billion joules, or 109 joules). • The corresponding primary energy consumed This includes: in its production. Intermediate energy purchased and consumed Note: The sum of primary energy sources from non-renewable energy sources as listed (expressed in joules) used to generate under EN3, including: intermediate energy will, depending on the primary source used, significantly exceed the • Electricity; amount of intermediate energy purchased (in joules) due to grid and efficiency losses when • Heating and Cooling; converting and transporting energy. • Steam; 3. Definitions None. • Nuclear energy; and • Other forms of imported energy. Version 3.1 9
  • 83. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN 4. Documentation Suppliers of energy and related services are the most important informational source for this Indicator. Other information can be obtained from invoices, measured (or calculated) heat/fuel accounting, estimations, defaults, etc. Besides default data drawn from the International Energy Agency (IEA), information can be obtained from the annual reports submitted by governments to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCC). These reports will detail country energy use and associated emissions for country specific defaults, etc. 5. References • International Energy Agency’s (IAE) annual publication of Energy Balances for OECD and non- OECD countries. • The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative - A corporate accounting and reporting standard (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD). • Kyoto Protocol, 1997. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 84. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN5 Energy saved due to conservation 4. Documentation and efficiency improvements. Information can be obtained from internal energy measurements and supplier information (e.g., energy 1. Relevance related specification of new machinery, light bulbs, etc.). This Indicator demonstrates the results of proactive efforts to improve energy-efficiency through 5. References technological improvements of processes and other None. energy conservation initiatives. Improved energy efficiency can result in cost savings and can lead to competitive advantages and market differentiation. Supporting efficient energy technology has a direct impact on operational costs, and reduces the reporting organization’s future dependency on non-renewable energy sources. Efficient energy use is one key strategy in combating climate change and other environmental impacts created by the extraction and processing of energy. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify total energy saved by efforts to reduce energy use and increase energy efficiency. Reduced energy consumption from reduced production capacity or outsourcing should not be included in this Indicator. 2.2 Report the total amount of energy saved in joules or multiples, such as gigajoules (one billion joules or 109 joules). Take into consideration energy saved due to: • Process redesign; • Conversion and retrofitting of equipment; and • Changes in personnel behavior. 3. Definitions Energy saved The reduced amount of energy needed to carry out the same processes or tasks. The term does not include overall reduction in energy consumption from reduced organizational activities (e.g., partial outsourcing of production). Conservation and efficiency improvements Organizational or technological innovations that allow a defined process or task to be carried out at a reduced level of energy consumption. This includes process redesign, the conversion and retrofitting of equipment (e.g., energy-efficient lighting), or the elimination of unnecessary energy use due to changes in behavior. Version 3.1 11
  • 85. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN6 Initiatives to provide energy- 5. References efficient or renewable energy based • Energy efficiency standards and relevant testing procedures are available from the International products and services, and reductions in Organization for Standardization (ISO). energy requirements as a result of these • Energy efficiency standards and relevant testing initiatives. procedures are available from the International 1. Relevance Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). Energy consumption is a major contributor to climate change since the burning of fossil fuel energy sources ultimately generates carbon dioxide (a greenhouse gas). Using energy more efficiently is essential to combating climate change, which is the aim of the Kyoto Protocol. Providing energy efficient products and services is an important part of product stewardship initiatives. These products and services can be a source of competitive advantage by enhancing product differentiation and reputation. Energy-efficient technologies can also reduce the cost of consumer goods. When initiatives of different organizations in the same sector are compared, it can give an indication of likely trends in the market for a product or service. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report existing initiatives to reduce the energy requirements of major products/product groups or services. 2.2 Report quantified reductions in the energy requirements of products and services achieved during the reporting period. 2.3 If use-oriented figures are employed (e.g., energy requirements of a computer), clearly report any assumptions about underlying consumption patterns or normalization factors (e.g., 10% less energy use per average working day, assuming operation for 8 hours with changing processor load). Refer to available industry standards (e.g., fuel consumption of cars for 100 km at 90 km/h). 3. Definitions None. 4. Documentation Information can be obtained from internal product testing/measurements, research concerning usage patterns, industry standards, etc. 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 86. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN7 Initiatives to reduce indirect energy 3. Definitions consumption and reductions achieved. None. 1. Relevance 4. Documentation Indirect energy use occurs through purchasing Relevant data can be drawn from supplier information, materials and components or services such as travel, life-cycle calculations/estimations (carried out internally commuting, and subcontracted production. When or by research organizations), etc. monitored comprehensively, indirect energy use can be reduced effectively (e.g., by carefully selecting energy- 5. References efficient materials, services, or production capacities, or substituting phone or video conferences for travel). • International Energy Agency’s (IAE) annual publication of Energy Balances for OECD and non- Quantifying indirect energy use provides a basis for OECD countries. calculating ‘other relevant indirect greenhouse gas emissions’ as requested in EN17. Tracking and reducing indirect energy use can improve the overall life-cycle performance of products and services, and serve as part of a comprehensive design-for-environment program. Finally, this Indicator covers energy savings achieved in the indirect energy consumption of the reporting organization’s activities. 2. Compilation 2.1 For this Indicator, exclude indirect energy use associated with the purchase of intermediate energy sources as reported in EN4. 2.2 Identify relevant upstream/downstream indirect energy use in the following four areas: • Use of energy-intensive materials; • Subcontracted production; • Business-related travel; and • Employee commuting. 2.3 Report initiatives to reduce indirect energy use. 2.4 Report quantitatively the extent to which indirect energy use has been reduced during the reporting period for the four areas listed in 2.2. 2.5 Indicate underlying assumptions and methodologies used to calculate other indirect energy use and indicate the source of information. Version 3.1 13
  • 87. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN8 Total water withdrawal by source. 3. Definitions 1. Relevance Total water withdrawal Reporting the total volume of water withdrawn by The sum of all water drawn into the boundaries of source contributes to an understanding of the overall the reporting organization from all sources (including scale of potential impacts and risks associated with the surface water, ground water, rainwater, and municipal reporting organization’s water use. The total volume water supply) for any use over the course of the withdrawn provides an indication of the organization’s reporting period. relative size and importance as a user of water, and 4. Documentation provides a baseline figure for other calculations relating to efficiency and use. Information on organizational water withdrawal can be drawn from water meters, water bills, calculations The systematic effort to monitor and improve the derived from other available water data or (if neither efficient use of water in the reporting organization water meters nor bills or reference data exist) the is directly linked to water consumption costs. Total organization’s own estimates. water use can also indicate the level of risk posed by disruptions to water supplies or increases in the cost 5. References of water. Clean freshwater is becoming increasingly None. scarce, and can impact production processes that rely on large volumes of water. In regions where water sources are highly restricted, the organization’s water consumption patterns can also influence relations with other stakeholders. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total volume of water withdrawn from any water source that was either withdrawn directly by the reporting organization or through intermediaries such as water utilities. This includes the abstraction of cooling water. 2.2 Report the total volume of water withdrawn in cubic meters per year (m3/year) by the following sources: • Surface water, including water from wetlands, rivers, lakes, and oceans; • Ground water; • Rainwater collected directly and stored by the reporting organization; • Waste water from another organization; and • Municipal water supplies or other water utilities. 14 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 88. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN9 Water sources significantly affected 2.2 Report the total number of significantly affected water sources by type according to the criteria by withdrawal of water. above, indicating the following: 1. Relevance • Size of water source in cubic meters (m3); Withdrawals from a water system can affect the environment by lowering the water table, reducing • Whether or not the source is designated volume of water available for use, or otherwise altering as a protected area (nationally and/or the ability of an ecosystem to perform its functions. Such internationally); and changes have wider impacts on the quality of life in the area, including economic and social consequences. • Biodiversity value (e.g., species diversity and endemism, number of protected species). This Indicator measures the scale of impacts associated with the organization’s water use. In terms of relations • Value/importance of water source to local with other users of the same water sources, this communities. Indicator also enables an assessment of specific areas of risk or improvement, as well as the stability of the 3. Definitions organization’s own water sources. None. 2. Compilation 4. Documentation 2.1 Identify water sources significantly affected by water withdrawal by the reporting organization. Information on the characteristics of a water source or Significant withdrawals meet one or more of the protected area can be obtained from local or national following criteria: water-related ministries or government departments, or research such as environmental impact assessments. • Withdrawals that account for an average of 5 percent or more of the annual average 5. References volume of a given water body; • IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. • Withdrawals from water bodies that are • Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971. recognized by professionals to be particularly sensitive due to their relative size, function, or status as a rare, threatened, or endangered system (or to their support of a particular endangered species of plant or animal); or • Any withdrawal from a Ramsar-listed wetland or any other nationally or internationally proclaimed conservation area regardless of the rate of withdrawal. Note: If the water is provided by a public or private water supplier, the original water body/ source should be identified and reported. Version 3.1 15
  • 89. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN10 Percentage and total volume of 4. Documentation water recycled and reused. Information can be obtained from water meters, water bills, or (if neither water meters nor bills exist) 1. Relevance calculations based on a water audit or inventory, or from The rate of water reuse and recycling can be a measure water retailer. of efficiency and can demonstrate the success of the organization in reducing total water withdrawals and 5. References discharges. Increased reuse and recycling can result None. in a reduction of water consumption, treatment, and disposal costs. The reduction of water consumption through reuse and recycling can also contribute to local, national, or regional goals for managing water supplies. 2. Compilation 2.1 This Indicator measures both water that was treated prior to reuse and water that was not treated prior to reuse. Grey water (i.e., collected rainwater and wastewater generated by household processes such as washing dishes, laundry, and bathing) is included. 2.2 Calculate the volume of recycled/reused water based on the volume of water demand satisfied by recycled/reused water rather than further withdrawals. For example, if the organization has a production cycle that requires 20 cubic meters of water per cycle, the organization withdraws 20 cubic meters of water for one production process cycle and then reuses it for an additional three cycles. The total volume of water recycled/ reused for that process is 60 cubic meters. 2.3 Report the total volume of water recycled/reused by the organization in cubic meters per year (m3/ year) and also as a percentage of the total water withdrawal reported under Indicator EN8. 3. Definitions Recycling/Reuse The act of processing used water/wastewater through another cycle before discharge to final treatment and/or discharge to the environment. In general, there are three types of water recycling/re-use: • Wastewater recycled back in the same process or higher use of recycled water in the process cycle; • Wastewater recycled/re-used in a different process, but within the same facility; and • Wastewater re-used at another of the reporting organization’s facilities. 16 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 90. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN11 Location and size of land owned, 3. Definitions leased, managed in, or adjacent to, Protected area protected areas and areas of high bio- A geographically defined area that is designated, regulated, or managed to achieve specific conservation objectives. diversity value outside protected areas. Areas of high biodiversity value 1. Relevance Areas not subject to legal protection but recognized By reporting on the potential impact on land that lies within, for important biodiversity features by a number of contains, or is adjacent to legally protected areas, as well governmental and non-governmental organizations. These as areas of high biodiversity value outside protected areas, include habitats that are a priority for conservation (often an organization can identify and understand certain risks defined in National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans associated with biodiversity. Monitoring which activities prepared under the Convention on Biological Diversity). In are taking place in both protected areas and areas of high addition, several international conservation organizations biodiversity value outside protected areas makes it possible have identified particular areas of high biodiversity value. for the reporting organization to reduce the risks of impacts. It also makes it possible for the organization to manage 4. Documentation impacts on biodiversity or avoid mismanagement. Failure to Sources of information for the required data could adequately manage such impacts may result in reputational include purchase contracts, lease contracts, or the damage, delays in obtaining planning permission, and the national/regional land registry. loss of a social license to operate. On the national level, public agencies responsible for 2. Compilation environmental protection and conservation might keep 2.1 Identify operational sites owned, leased, managed information on internationally and nationally protected in, located in, adjacent to, or that contain protected areas and areas of high biodiversity value. In addition, areas and areas of high biodiversity value outside National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans often protected areas. Include sites for which future include information and registers of protected areas and operations have been formally announced. areas of high biodiversity value. 2.2 Report the following information for each 5. References operational site identified above: • Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971. • Geographic location; • UNESCO World Heritage Sites. • Subsurface and/or underground land that may be owned, leased, or managed by the organization; • United Nations Biosphere Reserves. • Position in relation to protected area (in the area, adjacent to, or containing portions of the • National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans protected area) and high biodiversity value prepared under the Convention on Biological area outside protected area; Diversity. • Type of operation (office, manufacturing/ • Conservation International’s Biodiversity Hotspots production, or extractive); and Wilderness Areas. • Size of operational site in km2; • WWF’s Global 200 Ecoregion. • Biodiversity value characterized by: • Bird Life International’s Important Bird Areas. - T he attribute of the protected area and high biodiversity value area outside protected • IUCN’s Centres of Plant Diversity. area (terrestrial, freshwater, or maritime ecosystem); and - Listing of protected status (e.g., IUCN Protected Area Management Category, Ramsar Convention, national legislation, Natura 2000 site, etc.). Version 3.1 17
  • 91. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN12 Description of significant impacts 2.3 Report significant direct and indirect positive and negative impacts with reference to the following: of activities, products, and services on biodiversity in protected areas and • Species affected; areas of high biodiversity value outside • Extent of areas impacted (this may not be protected areas. limited to areas that are formally protected and should include consideration of impacts 1. Relevance on buffer zones as well as formally designated This Indicator provides information on the significant areas of special importance or sensitivity); direct and indirect impacts of the reporting organization on biodiversity in protected areas and areas of high • Duration of impacts; and biodiversity value outside protected areas. It also provides the background for understanding (and • Reversibility or irreversibility of the impacts. developing) an organizational strategy to mitigate these impacts. By asking for structured, qualitative 3. Definitions information, the Indicator enables comparison across Significant impact organizations and over time of the relative size, scale, and nature of impacts. Impacts that may adversely affect the integrity of a geographical area/region, either directly or indirectly. 2. Compilation This occurs by substantially changing its ecological features, structures, and functions across its whole area 2.1 Identify significant impacts on biodiversity and over the long term. This means that the habitat, its associated with activities, products, and services of population level, and/or the particular species that make the reporting organization, including both direct that habitat important cannot be sustained. impacts as well as indirect impacts (e.g., in the supply chain). On a species level, a significant impact causes a population decline and/or change in distribution so that 2.2 Report the nature of significant direct and indirect natural recruitment (reproduction or immigration from impacts on biodiversity with reference to one or unaffected areas) cannot return to former levels within a more of the following: limited number of generations. A significant impact can also affect subsistence or commercial resource use to the • Construction or use of manufacturing plants, degree that the well-being of users is affected over the mines, and transport infrastructure; long term. • Pollution (introduction of substances that do 4. Documentation not naturally occur in the habitat from point Information for this Indicator can be found in the and non-point sources); reporting organization’s environmental management system or other internal documentation. If available, • Introduction of invasive species, pests, and information can also be obtained from environmental pathogens; and social impact assessments and/or lifecycle assessments, and from other organizations upstream/ • Reduction of species; downstream in the supply chain. • Habitat conversion; and 5. References • Changes in ecological processes outside the • GRI Cross-Reference: GRI Biodiversity Resource natural range of variation (e.g., salinity or Document. changes in groundwater level). 18 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 92. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN13 Habitats protected or restored. 4. Documentation 1. Relevance Information on protected areas can be found in the A biodiversity strategy contains a combination of documentation of the organization’s environmental elements related to the prevention, management, and management system, site plans, environmental and remediation of damage to natural habitats resulting social impact assessments, or organizational policies. from the organization’s activities. This Indicator measures the implementation of a specific strategy for preventing Information on land restoration (i.e., requirements for or redressing negative impacts associated with activities. land restoration) can be found in lease, rent, or purchase Ensuring the integrity of natural habitats can enhance contracts of the land, or in environmental and social the reputation of the organization, the stability of its impact assessments or risk registers. surrounding natural environment and resources, and its acceptance by surrounding communities. 5. References None. 2. Compilation 2.1 This Indicator refers to areas in which remediation has been completed or the area is actively protected (see Definitions). Areas in which operations are still active can be counted if they conform to the definitions of ’restored’ or ’protected’. 2.2 Assess the status of the area based on its condition at the close of the reporting period. 2.3 Report the size and location of all habitat protected areas and/or restored areas (in hectares), and whether the success of the restoration measure was/is approved by independent external professionals. If the area is larger than one km2, report in km2. 2.4 Report whether partnerships exist with third parties to protect or restore habitat areas distinct from where the organization has overseen and implemented restoration or protection measures. 3. Definitions Area restored Areas that were used during or affected by operational activities, and where remediation measures have either restored the environment to its original state or to a state where it is a healthy and functioning ecosystem. Area protected Areas that are protected from any harm during operational activities, and the environment remains in its original state with a healthy functioning ecosystem. Version 3.1 19
  • 93. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN14 Strategies, current actions, and 2.3 Report actions underway to manage biodiversity risks identified in EN11 and EN12, or plans to future plans for managing impacts on undertake such activities in the future. biodiversity. 3. Definitions 1. Relevance None. Performance against biodiversity policies, objectives, and commitments depends on having structured 4. Documentation programs in place for managing impacts. The presence and structure of programs is particularly important Information on programs and targets can be found when national regulations do not provide clear reference in management guidelines or obtained from the points for an organization planning its biodiversity organization’s Environmental Management System, management. Environmental and Social Impact Assessments, Corporate Social Responsibility policies, or Risk Registers. Members of local communities often have unique knowledge of biodiverse areas and their value to local 5. References communities that is important for managing impacts on None. biodiversity. This Indicator enables both internal and external stakeholders to analyze how well the reporting organization’s strategies, current actions, and future plans address potential impacts on biodiversity. The quality of the organization’s approach to managing impacts on biodiversity (as identified in EN11 and EN12) will affect its exposure to risks such as reputational damage, fines, or rejection of planning or operating permissions. Actions to protect or restore habitats and species are of particular relevance. 2. Compilation 2.1 If national regulations have influenced the specific strategies, actions, or plans reported under this Indicator, this should be noted. 2.2 Report the organization’s strategy for achieving its policy on biodiversity management including: • Integration of biodiversity considerations in analytical tools such as environmental site impact assessments; • Engagement with relevant stakeholders; • Methodology for establishing risk exposure to biodiversity; • Setting specific targets and objectives; • Monitoring processes; and • Public reporting. 20 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 94. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN15 Number of IUCN Red List species 4. Documentation and national conservation list species Information on the presence of species on the IUCN Red List and national conservation lists can be obtained with habitats in areas affected by from national/regional conservation agencies, local operations, by level of extinction risk. authorities, or environmental NGOs. For organizations operating in or adjacent to protected areas or areas 1. Relevance of high-biodiversity value, planning studies or other This Indicator helps the reporting organization to permit materials may also contain information about the identify where its activities can pose a threat to biodiversity within the protected areas. endangered plant and animal species. By identifying these threats, the organization can initiate appropriate 5. References steps to avoid harm and to prevent the extinction of • IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. species. The IUCN Red List and national conservation list species can serve as authorities on the sensitivity of habitat in areas affected by operations, and on the relative importance of these habitats from a management perspective. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the location of habitats affected by the operations of the reporting organization that include species on the IUCN Red List and on national conservation lists. 2.2 Report the number of species in habitats identified as affected by the reporting organization, indicating one of the following levels of extinction risk: • Critically endangered; • Endangered; • Vulnerable; • Near threatened; and • Least concern. 3. Definitions IUCN Red List species An inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species developed by the International Union for the Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (IUCN). Version 3.1 21
  • 95. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN16 Total direct and indirect green- • Transportation of materials, products, and waste; house gas emissions by weight. • Venting; and 1. Relevance • Fugitive emissions. Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate change and are governed by the United Nations Frame- Emissions from combustion processes and sources work Convention on Climate Change (UNFCC) and the will correspond to the direct primary energy from subsequent Kyoto Protocol. As a result, different national non-renewable and renewable sources as reported and international regulations and incentive systems (such in EN3. Note that the direct CO2 emissions from the as trading climate certificates) aim to control the volume combustion of biomass shall not be included but and reward the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. reported separately under GHG Protocol Corporate Standard (revised edition). This Indicator can be used in combination with EN17 to explain targets for regulations or trading systems 2.3 Identify indirect emissions of greenhouse gases at international or national levels. The combination of resulting from the generation of purchased direct and indirect emissions also provides insights into electricity, heat, or steam (this corresponds with the potential cost implications of taxation or trading energy consumption reported under EN4). systems for reporting organizations. Other indirect emissions (e.g., from organizational 2. Compilation travel) are not included since they are accounted 2.1 Different conversion methodologies are available for in EN17. to calculate the amount of greenhouse gas emissions per source. Indicate the standard used, 2.4 Report total greenhouse gas emissions as the sum and indicate the methodology associated with the of direct and indirect emissions (as identified in 2.2 data with reference to the following categories: and 2.3) in tonnes of CO2 equivalent. • Direct measurement (e.g., continuous online 3. Definitions analyzers, etc.); Direct emissions • Calculation based on site specific data (e.g., for Emissions from sources that are owned or controlled fuel composition analysis, etc.); by the reporting organization. For example, direct emissions related to combustion would arise • Calculation based on default data; and from burning fuel for energy within the reporting organization’s operational boundaries. • Estimations. If estimations are used due to a Indirect emissions lack of default figures, indicate which basis figures were obtained. Emissions that result from the activities of the reporting organization but are generated at sources owned or Further details on the compilation of this Indicator are controlled by another organization. In the context of available in the WRI /WBCSD GHG Protocol and in the this Indicator, indirect emissions refer to greenhouse IPCC document as listed under references. gas emissions from the generation of electricity, heat, or steam that is imported and consumed by the reporting 2.2 Identify direct emissions of greenhouse gases from organization. all sources owned or controlled by the reporting Carbon dioxide equivalent organization, including: CO2 (Carbon Dioxide) equivalent is the measure used to • Generation of electricity, heat, or steam (as compare the emissions from various greenhouse gases reported in EN3); based on their global warming potential (GWP). The CO2 equivalent for a gas is derived by multiplying the tonnes • Other combustion processes such as flaring; of the gas by the associated GWP. • Physical or chemical processing; 22 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 96. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP 4. Documentation Emissions resulting from direct and indirect energy use can be calculated from the data reported in EN3 and EN4. 5. References • The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative - A corporate accounting and reporting standard (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD). • Kyoto Protocol, 1997. • Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The Scientific Basis. Version 3.1 23
  • 97. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN17 Other relevant indirect green- Carbon dioxide equivalent house gas emissions by weight. CO2 (Carbon Dioxide) equivalent is the measure used to compare emissions from various greenhouse gases 1. Relevance based on their global warming potential (GWP). The CO2 Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate equivalent for a gas is derived by multiplying the tonnes change and are governed by the United Nations Frame- of the gas by the associated GWP. work Convention on Climate Change (UNFCC) and the subsequent Kyoto Protocol. For some organizations, 4. Documentation indirect greenhouse gas emissions are significantly greater Information can be obtained from external suppliers than their direct emissions. They are also sufficiently of products and services. For certain types of indirect under the influence of the organization that changes in its emissions such as business travel, the organization may practices can lead to significant reductions. Measuring and need to combine its own records with data from external demonstrating efforts to reduce indirect emissions can sources to arrive at an estimate. demonstrate leadership in combating climate change and can enhance the organization’s reputation. 5. References 2. Compilation • The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative - A corporate accounting and reporting standard 2.1 Identify the greenhouse gas emissions resulting (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources from indirect energy use. Exclude indirect Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for emissions from imported electricity, heat, or steam, Sustainable Development (WBCSD). as these are covered by EN16. • Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change 2.2 Additionally, identify which of the reporting (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The organization’s activities cause indirect emissions Scientific Basis. and assess their amounts (e.g., employee commuting, business travel, etc). • Kyoto Protocol, 1997. When deciding on the relevance of these activities, consider whether emissions of the activity: • Are large compared to other activities generating direct emissions or energy related indirect emissions (as reported in EN16); • Are judged to be critical by stakeholders; • Could be substantially reduced through actions taken by the reporting organization. 2.3 Report the sum of indirect GHG emissions identified in tonnes of CO2 equivalent. 3. Definitions Indirect emissions Emissions that are consequences of the activities of the reporting organization but are generated at sources owned or controlled by another organization. In the context of this Indicator, indirect emissions do not include those generated from imported electricity, heat, or steam consumed by the reporting organization (e.g., transport, packaging). 24 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 98. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN18 Initiatives to reduce greenhouse 4. Documentation gas emissions and reductions achieved. Information can be drawn from data reported under EN16 and EN17, from emissions measurements, 1. Relevance calculated from accounting data and defaults, or from Greenhouse gas emissions are the main cause of climate estimates. Information on initiatives can likely be found change and are governed by the United Nations agreed in records maintained by departments responsible for on the Framework Convention on Climate Change environmental management. (UNFCC) and the subsequent Kyoto Protocol. As a result, different national and international regulations and 5. References incentive systems (such as trading climate certificates) • The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG) Initiative- A aim to control the volume and reward the reduction corporate accounting and reporting standard of greenhouse gas emissions. When monitored (Revised Edition, 2004) of the World Resources comprehensively, emissions can be reduced effectively Institute (WRI) and the World Business Council for (e.g., by carefully selecting energy-efficient materials, Sustainable Development (WBCSD). services, or production capacities). • Kyoto Protocol, 1997. This Indicator can be used in combination with EN16 and EN17 to set and monitor reduction targets • Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change with reference to regulations or trading systems at (IPCC), Climate Change 2001, Working Group I: The international or national levels. Scientific Basis. Tracking and reducing greenhouse gas emissions can improve the overall life cycle performance of products and services, and serve as part of a comprehensive design-for-environment program. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify emissions reductions from all sources owned or controlled by the reporting organization as reported under EN16 and resulting from indirect energy use and activities of the reporting organization as reported under EN17. Distinguish between mandatory and voluntary emissions reductions. 2.2 Report initiatives to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, include the areas where the initiatives were implemented. 2.3 Report quantitatively the extent greenhouse gas emissions reductions achieved during the reporting period as a direct result of the initiative(s) in tonnes of CO2 equivalent. 3. Definitions None. Version 3.1 25
  • 99. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN19 Emissions of ozone-depleting 3. Definitions substances by weight. Ozone-depleting substance (ODS) 1. Relevance Any substance with an ozone depletion potential (ODP) greater than 0 that can deplete the stratospheric ozone The ozone layer (O3) filters out most of the sun’s layer. Most ozone-depleting substances are controlled biologically harmful ultraviolet (UV-B) radiation. The under the Montreal Protocol and its amendments, and Montreal Protocol regulates the phase-out of ozone- include CFCs, HCFCs, halons, and methyl bromide. depleting substances (ODS) internationally. Measuring ODS emissions enables an assessment of how well CFC-11 equivalent the reporting organization complies with current and CFC-11 is a measure used to compare various substances future legislation, and its likely risks in this area. This is based on their relative ozone depletion potential. The particularly relevant for organizations whose processes, reference level of 1 is the potential of CFC-11 and CFC-12 products, and services have used ODS and must to cause ozone depletion. transition to new technologies in order to comply with phase-out commitments. The reporting organization’s 4. Documentation results on ODS phase-out can help indicate its level Information can be derived from internal measurements of technology leadership and competitive position in and accounting. markets for products and services affected by ODS rules. 5. References 2. Compilation • The Montreal Protocol on substances that deplete 2.1 Ozone-depleting substances contained or emitted the ozone layer. from products during their usage and disposal are not covered by this Indicator. • United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) Halon Handbook. 2.2 Emissions of substances covered in Annexes A, B, C, and E of the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer are included. 2.3 Identify emissions of ozone-depleting substances using the following formulas: Emissions = Production + Imports- Exports of Substances Production = Substances Produced- Substances Destroyed by Technology- Substances used entirely as feedstock in the manufacture of other chemicals Note: ODS that is recycled and reused is not considered production. 2.4 Report the emissions of specific ozone-depleting substances in tonnes and tonnes of CFC-11 equivalent. 26 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 100. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN20 NOx, SOx, and other significant air • Volatile organic compounds (VOC); emissions by type and weight. • Hazardous air pollutants (HAP); 1. Relevance • Stack and fugitive emissions; This Indicator measures the scale of the organization’s air emissions and can demonstrate the relative size • Particulate matter (PM); or and importance of these emissions compared to other organizations. • Other standard categories of air emissions identified in regulations. Air pollutants have adverse effects on habitats and human and animal health. Deterioration of air quality, 3. Definitions acidification, forest degradation, as well as public health concerns has led to local and international regulations to Significant air emissions control air emissions. Reductions in regulated pollutants Air emissions that are regulated under international lead to improved health conditions for workers and conventions and/or national laws or regulations, neighboring communities. Reductions or demonstrated including those listed on environmental permits for the performance beyond compliance can enhance relations reporting organization’s operations. with affected communities and workers, and the ability to maintain or expand operations. In regions with 4. Documentation emission caps, the volume of emissions also has direct Information can be drawn from emissions cost implications for the organization. measurements, calculated from accounting data and defaults, or estimated. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify significant air emissions and calculate their 5. References weight. • Geneva Protocol to the Convention on Long-Range Transboundary Air Pollution, 1979. 2.2 Since calculating certain air emissions such as NOx requires complex quantification efforts, indicate • Helsinki Protocol to the Convention on Long- the methodology used for calculations, selecting Range Transboundary Air Pollution, 1985. one of the following approaches: • Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed • Direct measurement of emissions (e.g., online Consent (PIC) Procedure, 1998. analyzers, etc.); • Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic • Calculation based on site specific data; Pollutants (POPs) (Annex A, B, and C), 2001. • Calculation based on default data; or • Sofia Protocol to the Convention on Long-Range Transboundary Air Pollution, 1988. • Estimation (if estimations are used due to a lack of default figures, indicate on what basis • Gothenburg Protocol to the 1979 Convention on figures were obtained). Long-Range Transboundary Air Pollution to abate acidification, eutrophication, and ground-level 2.3 Report the weight of significant air emissions (in ozone. kilograms or multiples such as tonnes) for each of the following categories: • NOx; • SOx; • Persistent organic pollutants (POP); Version 3.1 27
  • 101. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN21 Total water discharge by quality services/operations. The selection of parameters should be consistent with those used in the and destination. organization’s sector. 1. Relevance Clean water refers to water that meets national The amount and quality of the water discharged by the regulations for freshwater quality when leaving the reporting organization is directly linked to ecological boundaries of the reporting organization. This can be impact and operational costs. By progressively improving either freshwater whose quality has not been affected by the quality of discharged water and/or reducing volumes, the organization’s use, or wastewater that is treated to the reporting organization has the potential to reduce meet freshwater standards prior to discharge. its impact on the surrounding environment. Unmanaged discharge of effluents with a high chemical or nutrient 3. Definitions load (principally nitrogen, phosphorous, or potassium) can have a significant impact on receiving waters. This, in Total water discharge turn, can affect the quality of the water supply available The sum of water effluents discharged over the course to the organization and its relationship with communities of the reporting period to subsurface waters, surface and other water users. waters, sewers that lead to rivers, oceans, lakes, wetlands, treatment facilities, and ground water either through: Discharging effluents or process water to a facility for treatment not only reduces pollution levels, but • A defined discharge point (point source discharge); can also lower the organization’s financial costs and the risk of regulatory action for non-compliance with • Over land in a dispersed or undefined manner environmental regulation. All of this enhances the (non-point source discharge); or reporting organization’s social license to operate. • Wastewater removed from the reporting 2. Compilation organization via truck. Discharge of collected rainwater and domestic sewage is not regarded as 2.1 Identify planned and unplanned water discharges water discharge. (excluding collected rainwater and domestic sewage) by destination and indicate how it is 4. Documentation treated. If the reporting organization does not have a meter to measure water discharges, this Information sources about the volume of water figure needs to be estimated by subtracting the discharged by the reporting organization include flow approximate volume consumed on-site from the meters (point-source discharges or when discharges are volume withdrawn as reported in EN8. released through a pipe) and regulatory permits. 2.2 Report the total volume of planned and unplanned 5. References water discharges in cubic meters per year • MARPOL Convention (International Convention for (m3/year) by: the Prevention of Pollution of Ships), 1973. • Destination; • Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs), 2001. • Treatment method; and • Whether it was reused by another organization. 2.3 Reporting organizations that discharge effluents or process water should report water quality in terms of total volumes of effluent using standard effluent parameters such as Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD), Total Suspended Solids (TSS), etc. The specific choice of quality parameters will vary depending on the organization’s products/ 28 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 102. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN22 Total weight of waste by type and · Landfill; disposal method. · On-site storage; and 1. Relevance · Other (to be specified by the reporting Data on waste generation figures over several years organization). can indicate the level of progress the organization has made toward waste reduction efforts. It can also indicate 2.4 Report how the method of disposal has been potential improvements in process efficiency and determined: productivity. From a financial perspective, the reduction of waste contributes directly to lower costs for materials, • Disposed directly by the reporting processing, and disposal. organization or otherwise directly confirmed; Information about the disposal destination reveals the • Information provided by the waste disposal extent to which a reporting organization has managed contractor; or the balance between disposal options and uneven environmental impacts. For example, land filling and • Organizational defaults of the waste disposal recycling create very different types of environmental contractor. impacts and residual effects. Most waste minimization strategies emphasize prioritizing options for reuse, 3. Definitions recycling, and then recovery over other disposal options. Disposal method 2. Compilation The method by which waste is treated or disposed, 2.1 Identify the amount of waste created by the including composting, reuse, recycling, recovery, organization’s operations, by: incineration, landfill, deep well injection, and on-site storage. • Hazardous waste (as defined by national 4. Documentation legislation at the point of generation); and Potential information sources include external waste • Non-hazardous waste (all other forms of solid audits by providers of disposal services or waste balance or liquid waste excluding wastewater). sheets from these providers, as well as internal billing and accounting systems, and the procurement or supply 2.2 If no weight data are available, estimate the weight management department. using available information on waste density and volume collected, mass balances, or similar 5. References information. • Ban Amendment to the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of 2.3 Report the total amount of waste in tonnes by Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, 1989. type as identified in 2.1 for each of the following methods: • London Dumping Convention, 1972. · Reuse; • MARPOL Convention (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of Ships), 1973. · Recycling; · Composting; · Recovery, including Energy Recovery; · Incineration (mass burn); · Deep well injection; Version 3.1 29
  • 103. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN23 Total number and volume of Significant spill significant spills. All spills that are included in the reporting organization’s financial statement (e.g., due to resulting liabilities) or 1. Relevance recorded as a spill by the reporting organization. Spills of chemicals, oils, and fuels can have significant 4. Documentation negative impacts on the surrounding environment, potentially affecting soil, water, air, biodiversity, Potential information sources regarding spills of fuel, oils, and human health. The systematic effort to avoid and chemicals can be internal records within an existing spills of hazardous materials is directly linked to the environmental management system as well as official organization’s compliance with regulations, its financial statements made to/by the relevant environmental risk from the loss of raw materials, remediation costs, regulatory agency. the risk of regulatory action, as well as damage to reputation. This Indicator also serves as an indirect 5. References measure for evaluating the monitoring skills of the None. organization. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify all recorded significant spills and the volume of these spills. 2.2 Report the total number and total volume of recorded significant spills. 2.3 For spills that were reported in the organization’s financial statement, report the additional following information for each such spill: • Location of spill; • Volume of spill; and • Material of spill, categorized by: - Oil spills (soil or water surfaces); - Fuel spills (soil or water surfaces); - Spills of wastes (soil or water surfaces); - Spills of chemicals (mostly soil or water surfaces); and - Other. 2.4 Report the impacts of significant spills. 3. Definitions Spill Accidental release of a hazardous substance that can affect human health, land, vegetation, water bodies, and ground water. 30 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 104. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN24 Weight of transported, imported, organization, by destination. Waste transported between different locations of the organization is exported, or treated waste deemed not counted as imported. hazardous under the terms of the Basel 2.4 Identify the proportion of the total amount of Convention Annex I, II, III, and VIII, transported hazardous waste by destination that and percentage of transported waste is transported from the reporting organization to locations abroad. Include all wastes that leave the shipped internationally. boundaries of the reporting organization to cross 1. Relevance international borders, excluding transportation between different locations of the reporting Hazardous waste management is a key area of concern organization. for many stakeholders. Improper transport of dangerous wastes, particularly to countries that lack the infrastructure 2.5 Identify the portion of the total amount of and national regulations to handle such waste, can pose transported and exported waste by destination harm to both human health and the environment. In that the organization has treated. addition, poor management of hazardous waste creates liabilities associated with non-compliance with national 2.6 Identify the portion of the total amount of waste and international regulations, as well as potential damage by destination that is treated by external sources/ to reputation. suppliers, that has been transported, exported, or imported by the organization. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify hazardous wastes transported by or on 2.7 Convert volumes to an estimate of weight with a behalf of the reporting organization within the brief explanation of the methodology used. reporting period by destination. 2.8 Report the following information in kilograms or 2.2 Identify the total weight of transported hazardous tonnes: waste using the following equation: • Total weight of hazardous waste transported; Total weight of hazardous waste transported by destination • Total weight of imported hazardous waste; = • Total weight of exported hazardous waste; and Weight of hazardous waste transported to the reporting organization by destination from • Total weight of treated hazardous waste. external sources/suppliers not owned by the reporting organization 3. Definitions + None. Weight of hazardous waste transported from the 4. Documentation reporting organization by destination to external sources/suppliers not owned by the reporting Potential information sources include billing data from organization logistic or disposal contractors, accounting systems, + as well as the procurement or supply management department. Some countries require documentation Weight of hazardous waste transported nationally to accompany hazardous waste shipments that would and/or internationally by destination between supply all relevant data for this Indicator. locations owned, leased, or managed by the reporting organization 5. References • Ban Amendment to the Basel Convention on 2.3 Identify the total weight of hazardous waste the Control of Transboundary Movements of transported across international borders and Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal, 1989. which enters the boundaries of the reporting Version 3.1 31
  • 105. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN25 Identity, size, protected status, and 2.2 Report water bodies significantly affected by water discharges based on the criteria above, adding biodiversity value of water bodies and information on: related habitats significantly affected by • Size of water body in cubic meters (m3); the reporting organization’s discharges of water and runoff. • Whether the source is designated as a protected area (nationally and/or 1. Relevance internationally); and This Indicator is a qualitative counterpart to quantitative Indicators of water discharge that helps to describe • Biodiversity value (e.g., number of protected the impact of these discharges. Discharges and runoff species). affecting aquatic habitats can have a significant impact on the availability of water resources. Identifying water 3. Definitions bodies affected by discharges provides an opportunity None. to identify activities in regions of significant concern, or areas where the reporting organization may face 4. Documentation specific risks due to community concerns, limited water resources, etc. Information on the status of a water source or protected area can be obtained from local or national water- 2. Compilation related ministries or government departments, or through research initiated by the organization or other 2.1 Identify water bodies significantly affected by the institutions, such as environmental impact studies. reporting organization’s water discharges that meet one of more of the following criteria: 5. References • Discharges account for an average of 5% or • IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. more of the annual average volume of the water body; • Ramsar Convention on Wetlands. • Discharges that, on the advice of appropriate professionals (e.g., municipal authorities), are known to have or are highly likely to have significant impacts on the water body and associated habitats; • Discharges to water bodies that are recognized by professionals to be particularly sensitive due to their relative size, function, or status as a rare, threatened, or endangered system (or support a particular endangered species of plant or animal); or • Any discharge to a Ramsar-listed wetland or any other nationally or internationally proclaimed conservation area regardless of the rate of discharge. 32 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 106. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN26 Initiatives to mitigate • Effluents (e.g., quality of water used during production and/or use); environmental impacts of products and services, and extent of impact • Noise; and mitigation. • Waste (e.g., non-reclaimable, toxic materials/ 1. Relevance compounds). For some sectors, the impacts of products and services 2.3 Report quantitatively the extent to which during their use phase (e.g., water consumption of a environmental impacts of products and services washing machine) and at the end of their useful life have been mitigated during the reporting period. can be equal to or greater in significance than the If use-oriented figures are employed (e.g., water production phase. The significance of such impacts is use of washing machine), clearly indicate the determined by both customer behavior and general underlying assumptions regarding consumption product/service design. Organizations are expected patterns or normalization factors (e.g., 10% less to take more proactive approaches to assessing and water use per 5 kg of laundry). improving the environmental impacts of their products and services. 3. Definitions This measure assesses the actions the reporting None. organization has taken to reduce the negative environmental impacts and enhance the positive 4. Documentation impacts of its product and service design and delivery. Information can be drawn from product Lifecycle Design for environment can help identify new business Assessments (LCA) or documents related to product opportunities, differentiate products and services, design, development, and testing. and stimulate innovation in technology. Integrating environmental considerations into product and service 5. References design can also decrease the risk of incompatibility with future environmental legislation, as well as enhance None. reputation. 2. Compilation 2.1 In this Indicator, the following impacts are excluded since they are covered in other Environmental Indicators: • reclaiming of products and product packaging (EN27); and • Impacts on biodiversity (EN12). 2.2 Report initiatives in the reporting period to mitigate the most significant environmental impacts of products/service groups in relation to: • Materials use (e.g., use of non-renewable, energy-intensive, toxic materials); • Water use (e.g., volumes used during production and/or use); • Emissions (e.g., GHG, toxic, ozone-depleting emissions); Version 3.1 33
  • 107. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN27 Percentage of products sold 3. Definitions and their packaging materials that are Reclaimed reclaimed by category. Refers to collecting, reusing, or recycling products and their packaging materials at the end of their useful life. 1. Relevance Collection and treatment can be carried out by the The disposal of products and packaging materials at the manufacturer of the product or by a contractor. This end of a use phase is a steadily growing environmental refers to products and their packaging materials that are: challenge. Establishing effective recycling and reuse • Collected by or on behalf of the reporting systems to close product cycles can contribute organization; significantly to increased material and resource efficiency. It also mitigates problems and costs related to • Separated into raw materials (e.g., steel, glass, disposal. paper, some kinds of plastic, etc.) or components; and This Indicator provides insight into the extent to which the reporting organization’s products, components, • Used by the reporting organization or other users. or materials are collected and successfully converted into useful materials for new production processes. 4. Documentation It also provides insight into the degree to which the organization has designed products and packages None. capable of being recycled or reused. This measure can be a particular source of competitive differentiation in 5. References sectors facing formal requirements to recycle products None. and their packaging materials. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the amount of products and their packaging materials reclaimed (i.e., recycled or reused) at the end of their useful life within the reporting period. Rejects and recalls of products should not be counted. Recycling or reuse of packaging should also be reported separately. 2.2 Report the percentage of reclaimed products and their packaging materials for each category of products (i.e., a group of related products sharing a common, managed set of features that satisfy the specific needs of a selected market) using the following formula: products and their packaging materials reclaimed within % of reclaimed the reporting period products = x100 products sold within the reporting period 2.3 Given potential variations in data sources, report how the data for this Indicator has been collected (e.g., data is gathered from an internal collection system or data is provided by external collection systems reclaiming products on behalf of the organization). 34 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 108. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN28 Monetary value of significant 2.3 Where reporting organizations have not identified any non-compliance with laws or regulations, a fines and total number of non-monetary brief statement to this fact is sufficient. sanctions for non-compliance with 3. Definitions environmental laws and regulations. Environmental laws and regulations 1. Relevance Refers to regulations related to all types of The level of non-compliance within the organization environmental issues (i.e., emissions, effluents, and helps indicate the ability of management to ensure waste, as well as material use, energy, water, and that operations conform to certain performance biodiversity) applicable to the reporting organization. parameters. From an economic perspective, ensuring This includes binding voluntary agreements that are compliance helps to reduce financial risks that occur made with regulatory authorities and developed either directly through fines or indirectly through as a substitute for implementing a new regulation. impacts on reputation. In some circumstances, non- Voluntary agreements can be applicable if the compliance can lead to clean-up obligations or other reporting organization directly joins the agreement or costly environmental liabilities. The strength of the if public agencies make the agreement applicable to organization’s compliance record can also affect its organizations in their territory through legislation or ability to expand operations or gain permits. regulation. 2. Compilation 4. Documentation 2.1 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions for Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking failure to comply with environmental laws and systems operated by the legal department. Information regulations, including: regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting departments. • International declarations/conventions/ treaties, and national, sub-national, regional, 5. References and local regulations. Include non-compliances None. related to spills as disclosed under EN23 that meet the criteria for EN28; • Voluntary environmental agreements with regulating authorities that are considered binding and developed as a substitute for implementing new regulations. In certain jurisdictions, such agreements are referred to as ‘covenants’; and • Cases brought against the organization through the use of international dispute mechanisms or national dispute mechanisms supervised by government authorities. 2.2 Report significant fines and non-monetary sanctions in terms of: • Total monetary value of significant fines; • Number of non-monetary sanctions; and • Cases brought through dispute resolution mechanisms. Version 3.1 35
  • 109. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN EN29 Significant environmental 2.4 Report how the environmental impacts of transporting products, members of the impacts of transporting products and organization’s workforce, and other goods and other goods and materials used for materials are mitigated. the organization’s operations, and 3. Definitions transporting members of the workforce. Transportation 1. Relevance The act of transferring resources and goods from one The environmental impacts of transportation systems location to another (between suppliers, production have a wide reach, from global warming to local smog plants, warehouses, and the customer) using different and noise. For some companies, particularly those modes of transport, including passenger transportation with extensive supply and distribution networks, (e.g., employee commuting and business traveling). environmental impacts associated with logistics can Logistical purposes represent a major part of their environmental footprint. Assessing the impacts of transporting products, goods, The forward or reverse flow and storage of goods and and materials for logistical purposes, and transporting services between the point of origin and the point of members of the organization’s workforce, is part of a consumption. comprehensive approach to planning environmental Transportation of the members of the management strategies. organization’s workforce 2. Compilation Transportation used for commuting to work by members of the workforce or travel for business purposes 2.1 Identify the significant environmental impacts including air, train, bus, and other forms of motorized of the modes of transportation used by the and non-motorized travel. organization, including: 4. Documentation • Energy use (e.g., oil, kerosene, fuel, electricity); Potential sources of data include invoices from logistical service providers and suppliers, reports from the logistics • Emissions (e.g., greenhouse gas emissions, department, records of vehicle usage and maintenance, ozone-depleting substances, NOx, SOx, and and monitoring/measurement conducted by, for other air emissions); example, the environment department. • Effluents (e.g., different kinds of chemicals); 5. References • Waste (e.g., different types of packaging • United Nations Recommendations on the material); Transport of Dangerous Goods. • Noise; and • Spills (e.g., spills of chemicals, oils, and fuels). 2.2 Report the significant environmental impacts of transportation used for logistical purposes and for transportation of members of the organization’s workforce. Where quantitative data is not stated in the report, disclose the reason. 2.3 Indicate the criteria and methodology used to determine which environmental impacts are significant. 36 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 110. Indicator Protocols Set: EN IP EN30 Total environmental protection • Insurance for environmental liability; and expenditures and investments by type. • Clean-up costs, including costs for remediation 1. Relevance of spills as reported in EN23. Measuring environmental mitigation and protection 2.3 Identify prevention and environmental expenditures allows organizations to assess the management costs based on expenditures related efficiency of their environmental initiatives. It also to the following items: provides valuable input for internal cost-benefit analyses. Data on environmental performance measured • Personnel employed for education and training; against environmental mitigation and protection expenditures offers insights into how effectively the • External services for environmental organization uses resources to improve performance. management; When tracked and analyzed in a comprehensive fashion over time, this expenditures data allows the • External certification of management systems; reporting organization to judge the value of complex organizational or technological investments for • Personnel for general environmental improving environmental performance. management activities; It is possible to establish a full environmental • Research and development; management accounting system within an organization that tracks multiple categories of information. This • Extra expenditures to install cleaner Indicator focuses on waste disposal, emissions technologies (e.g., additional cost beyond treatment, remediation costs, as well as prevention and standard technologies); environmental management costs. • Extra expenditures on green purchases; and 2. Compilation 2.1 The compilation of the expenditures in this • Other environmental management costs. Indicator should exclude the following categories as defined in the IFAC ‘International Guidance 2.4 Report total environmental protection Document on Environmental Management expenditures broken down by: Accounting’ document: • Waste disposal, emissions treatment, and • Costs of non-product output; and remediation costs; and • Fines for non-compliance with environmental • Prevention and environmental management regulation. costs. 2.2 Identify waste disposal, emissions treatment, and 3. Definitions remediation costs based on expenditures related Environmental protection expenditures to the following items: All expenditures on environmental protection by the • Treatment and disposal of waste; reporting organization, or on its behalf, to prevent, reduce, control, and document environmental aspects, • Treatment of emissions (e.g., expenditures for impacts, and hazards. It also includes disposal, filters, agents); treatment, sanitation, and clean-up expenditure. 4. Documentation • Expenditures for the purchase and use of emissions certificates; Potential information sources include billing and accounting systems (e.g., Environmental Management • Depreciation of related equipment, Accounting) as well as procurement, human resource, maintenance, and operating material and and legal departments. services, and related personnel costs; Version 3.1 37
  • 111. IP Indicator Protocols Set: EN 5. References • IFAC- The International Federation of Accountants (2005) ‘International Guidance Document on Environmental Management Accounting’. • UNDSD- United Nations Division for Sustainable Development (2003): Environmental Management Accounting Procedures and Principles (EMARIC Environmental Management Accounting Research and Information Center, 2003). 38 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 112. IP Indicator Protocols Set Labor Practices and Decent Work (LA) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 113. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 114. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP Labor Practices Decent Work Performance Indicators Aspect: Employment LA9 Health and safety topics covered in formal LA1 Total workforce by employment type, agreements with trade unions.Health and Co r e employment contract, and region, broken safety topics covered in formal agreements Add down by gender. with trade unions. Aspect: Training and Education LA2 Total number and rate of new employee hires Co r e and employee turnover by age group, gender, LA10 Average hours of training per year per Co r e and region. employee, by gender, and by employee category. LA3 Benefits provided to full-time employees that are not provided to temporary or part- LA11 Programs for skills management and time employees, by significant locations of lifelong learning that support the continued Add operation. Add employability of employees and assist them in managing career endings. LA15 Return to work and retention rates after Co r e parental leave, by gender. LA12 Percentage of employees receiving regular performance and career development Add Aspect: Labor/ Management Relations reviews, by gender. LA4 Percentage of employees covered by Aspect: Diversity and Equal Opportunity Co r e collective bargaining agreements. LA13 Composition of governance bodies and breakdown of employees per employee category according to gender, age group, LA5 Minimum notice period(s) regarding Co r e minority group membership, and other significant operational changes, including indicators of diversity. Co r e whether it is specified in collective agreements. Aspect: Equal Remuneration for Women and Men Aspect: Occupational Health and Safety LA14 Ratio of basic salary and remuneration of Co r e women to men by employee category, by LA6 Percentage of total workforce represented significant locations of operation. in formal joint management-worker health and safety committees that help monitor and advise on occupational health and safety Add programs. LA7 Rates of injury, occupational diseases, lost days, and absenteeism, and total number Co r e of work-related fatalities, by region and by gender. LA8 Education, training, counseling, prevention, and risk-control programs in place to assist workforce members, their families, Co r e or community members regarding serious diseases. Version 3.1 1
  • 115. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA Relevance Employee The ILO Decent Work Agenda is framed within the context An individual who is, according to national law or of fair globalization, which aims to achieve both economic practices, recognized as an employee of the reporting growth and equity through a combination of social and organization. economic goals. The Agenda has four elements: Supervised worker • Employment; An individual who performs regular work on-site for, or on behalf of, the reporting organization but is not recognized • Dialogue; as an employee under national law or practice. • Rights; and Independent contractor • Protection. An individual legally recognized as being self-employed. The structure of the Labor Indicators is broadly based Collective bargaining agreements on the concept of decent work. The set begins with There are two types of collective bargaining agreements, disclosures on the scope and diversity of the reporting aimed either at employers or workers. Those aimed at organization’s workforce, emphasizing aspects of gender employers are agreements in writing regarding working and age distribution. conditions and terms of employment concluded between an employer, a group of employers, or one or The approach to dialogue between the organization and more employers’ organizations. Those aimed at workers its employees, and the degree to which employees are agreements between one or more representative are organized in representative bodies are covered by workers’ organizations, or, in the absence of such Indicators LA4 (which complements Indicator HR5 on organizations, the representatives of the workers duly Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining) and LA5. elected and authorized by them in accordance with national laws and regulations. The physical protection and well-being of people at work is covered by Occupational Health and Safety Indicators Employee categories (LA6, LA7, LA8, LA9), which address both the scope of programs as well as statistical performance on health Breakdown of employees, by level (e.g., highest governance and safety. bodies, senior management, middle management, etc) and function (e.g., technical, administrative, production, The scope of employee benefits and contributions toward etc). Derived from an organization’s own human resources a broad social goal of diversity and equal treatment is system. addressed by LA14 (Pay Equity), LA13 (Diversity) and LA3 (Benefits). Indicators in the Economics category also General References provide relevant information. The support organizations • Convention on the Elimination of all Forms of provide to employees to enhance personal skills and Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979. potential (which also improves the organization’s human capital) is represented in Indicators LA10, LA11, and LA12. • I LO Convention 135, ‘Workers’ Representatives Convention’, 1971. Definitions • I LO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and Total workforce Protection of the Right to Organise’, 1948. The total number of persons working for the reporting • I LO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and organization at the end of the reporting period (i.e., the Collective Bargaining’, 1949. sum of all employees and supervised workers as defined above). • I LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work, 1998. Worker Generic term for any person performing work, regardless • ILO Decent Work Agenda, 1999. of the contractual relationship. 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 116. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP • I LO Tripartite Declaration Concerning Multi- nationals and Social Policy, 1977, amended 2000. • O ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004. • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000. • UNIFEM UNGC Women’s Empowerment Principles, 2010. • United Nations Millennium Declaration, 2000. Version 3.1 3
  • 117. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA1 Total workforce by employment 2.5 If a substantial portion of the organization’s work is performed by workers who are legally recognized type, employment contract, and region, as self-employed, or by individuals other than broken down by gender. employees or supervised workers, this should be reported. 1. Relevance 2.6 R eport the total number of employees broken The size of a workforce provides insight into the scale down by employment contract and gender. of impacts created by labor issues. Breaking down the workforce by employment type, employment contract, 2.7 Report the total number of permanent employees and region (region refers to ‘country’ or ‘geographical broken down by employment type and gender. area’) demonstrates how the organization structures its human resources to implement its overall strategy. 2.8 Report the total workforce broken down by It also provides insight into the organization’s business region and gender, based on the scale of the model, and offers an indication of job stability and organization’s operations. the level of benefits the organization offers. Breaking down this data by gender enables an understanding of 2.9 If applicable, explain any significant seasonal gender representation across an organization, and of variations in employment numbers (e.g., in the the optimal use of available labor and talent. As a basis tourism or agricultural industries). for calculations in several other Indicators, the size of the workforce is a standard normalizing factor for many 3. Definitions integrated Indicators. A rise or fall in net employment, evidenced by data reported over the course of three or Employment types more years, is an important element of the organization’s contribution to the overall economic development and Full time: A ‘full-time employee’ is defined according to sustainability of the workforce.1 national legislation and practice regarding working time (e.g., national legislation defines that ‘full-time’ means a 2. Compilation minimum of nine months per year and a minimum of 30 hours per week). 2.1 Identify the total workforce (employees and supervised workers) broken down by gender Part-time: A ‘part-time employee’ is an employee whose working for the reporting organization at the end working hours per week, month, or year are less than ‘full of the reporting period. Supply chain workers are time’ as defined above. not included in this Indicator. Employment Contract 2.2 Identify the contract type and full-time and part- time status of employees based on the definitions An employment contract as recognized under national under the national laws of the country where they law or practice that may be written, verbal, or implicit are based. (i.e., when all the characteristics of employment are present but without a written or witnessed verbal 2.3 Combine country statistics to calculate global contract). statistics and disregard differences in legal definitions. Although the definitions of what Indefinite or Permanent Contract: constitutes types of contract and a full-time or A permanent contract of employment is a contract part-time employment relationship may vary with an employee for full-time or part-time work for an between countries, the global figure will still reflect indeterminate period. the relationships under law. Fixed Term or Temporary Contract: 2.4 Report the total workforce broken down by A fixed term contract is a contract of employment as employees and supervised workers, and by gender. defined above that ends when a specific time period expires, or when a specific task that has a time estimate attached is completed. 1 S ee GRI Guidelines on expectations regarding reporting of multiple years’ data. 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 118. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP A temporary contract of employment is of limited duration and terminated by a specific event, including the end of a project or work phase, return of replaced personnel, etc. 4. Documentation Payroll information available at the national or site level should provide data for this Indicator. 5. References • ILO: International Classification of Status in Employment. • ILO: Key Indicators of the Labour Market. • ILO: LABORSTA Internet Indicators. • United Nations: World Macro Regions and Components. Version 3.1 5
  • 119. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA2 Total number and rate of new New employee hires employee hires and employee turnover New employees joining the organization for the first time. by age group, gender, and region. 1. Relevance 4. Documentation A high turnover rate can indicate levels of uncertainty Potential sources of information include payroll and dissatisfaction among employees, or may signal information available at the national or site level. a fundamental change in the structure of the Operational plans and restatements of the organization’s organization’s core operations. An uneven pattern of key strategic targets may provide explanations for large turnover by age or gender can indicate incompatibility variations in this figure. or potential inequity in the workplace. Turnover results in changes to the human and intellectual capital of the 5. References organization and can impact productivity. Turnover has None. direct cost implications either in terms of reduced payroll or greater expenses for recruitment of workers. The number, age, gender, and region of new employee hires of the reporting organization can indicate the organization’s strategy and ability to attract diverse qualified employees. This information can signify the organization’s efforts to implement inclusive recruitment practices based on age and gender, and the optimal use of available labor and talent in different regions. Employment net creation can be estimated using the data reported under Indicator LA1. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of new employee hires during the reporting period, broken down by age group, gender and region. 2.2 Identify the total number of new employee hires leaving employment during the reporting period, broken down by age group, gender and region. 2.3 Report the total number and rate of new employee hires entering and employees leaving employment during the reporting period, broken down by age group (e.g., 30;30-50;50), gender and region. Rates should be calculated using the total employee numbers at the end of the reporting period. 3. Definitions Employee Turnover Number of employees who leave the organization voluntarily or due to dismissal, retirement, or death in service. 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 120. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA3 Benefits provided to full-time 4. Documentation employees that are not provided to Potential sources of information include local or central collective agreements, which may provide examples of temporary or part-time employees, by benefits paid beyond legal minimums. Other reference significant locations of operation. tools may include benefits summaries, employee orientation/commencement materials, and employee 1. Relevance contracts. Data reported under this Indicator provides a measure of the organization’s investment in human resources and 5. References the minimum benefits it offers its full time employees. • I LO Convention 102, ‘Social Security The quality of benefits for full-time staff is a key factor in (Minimum Standards) Convention’, 1952. retaining employees. The Indicator also measures relative investment in different parts of the workforce. • I LO Convention 121, ‘Employment Injury Benefits Convention’, 1964. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify benefits offered to all employees. • I LO Convention 128, ‘Invalidity, Old-Age and Survivors’ Benefits Convention’, 1967. 2.2 Report which of the following benefits are standard for full-time employees of the organization but are • I LO Convention 130, ‘Medical Care and Sickness not provided to temporary or part-time employees, Benefits Convention’, 1969. broken down by significant locations of operation: • I LO Convention 132, ‘Holidays with Pay Convention • Life insurance; (Revised)’ 1970. • Health care; • I LO Convention 140, ‘Paid Educational Leave • Disability/invalidity coverage; Convention’, 1974. • Parental leave; • ILO Convention 156, ‘Workers with Family • Retirement provision; Responsibilities Convention’, 1981. • Stock ownership; and • I LO Convention 157, ‘Maintenance of Social • Others. Security Rights’, 1982. 2.3 Standard benefits refer to those typically offered • I LO Convention 168, ‘Employment Promotion and to at least the majority of full-time employees. This Protection against Unemployment Convention’, should not be interpreted as being offered to every 1988. single full-time employee of the organization. The intention of the Indicator is to disclose what full- • I LO Convention 183, ‘Maternity Protection time employees can reasonably expect. Convention’, 2000. 3. Definitions • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000. Benefits This refers to either direct benefit provided in the form of financial contributions, care paid for by the reporting organization, or the reimbursement of expenses borne by the employee. Redundancy payments over and above legal minimums, lay-off pay, extra employment injury benefit, survivors’ benefits, and extra paid holiday entitlements could also be included under this Indicator. In-kind benefits such as provision of sports or child day care facilities, free meals during working time, and similar general employee welfare programs are excluded from this Indicator. Version 3.1 7
  • 121. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA15 Return to work and retention 4. Documentation rates after parental leave, by gender. Potential sources of information include the human resources departments. 1. Relevance Many countries have introduced legislation to 5. References provide a specific length of parental leave. However, • ILO Convention 156, ‘Workers with Family the application of legislation will vary according Responsibilities Convention’, 1981 to interpretation by government, employers and employees. • ILO Convention 183, ‘Maternity Protection Convention’, 2000. The aim of the legislation is to allow employees to take leave and return to work to the same or a comparable position. However, many women are discouraged from taking leave and returning to work by employer practices that affect their employment security, remuneration and career path. Many men are not encouraged to take the leave to which they are entitled. Equitable gender choice for maternity and paternity leave, and other leave entitlements, can lead to the greater recruitment and retention of qualified staff, and boost employee morale and productivity. Men’s uptake of paternity leave options can indicate the degree to which an organization encourages fathers to take such leave. More men taking advantage of leave entitlements has a positive effect for women in taking such leave without prejudicing their career path. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report the number of employees by gender that were entitled to parental leave. 2.2 Report the number of employees by gender that took parental leave. 2.3 Report the number of employees who returned to work after parental leave ended, by gender. 2.4 Report the number of employees who returned to work after parental leave ended who were still employed twelve months after their return to work, by gender. 2.5 Report the return to work and retention rates of employees who returned to work after leave ended, by gender. 3. Definitions Parental Leave Leave granted to men and women workers on the grounds of the birth of a child. 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 122. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA4 Percentage of employees covered 4. Documentation by collective bargaining agreements. Records of formal recognition agreements and signed collective agreements with independent trade unions 1. Relevance will normally be held by the human resources or Freedom of association is a human right as defined by personnel department of the reporting organization. international declarations and conventions, particularly ILO Core Conventions 87 98. Collective bargaining 5. References is an important form of stakeholder engagement and • I LO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and particularly relevant for reporting guidelines. It is a form Protection of the Right to Organise’, 1948. of stakeholder engagement that helps build institutional frameworks and is seen by many as contributing to a • I LO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and stable society. Together with corporate governance, Collective Bargaining’, 1949. collective bargaining is part of an overall framework that contributes to responsible management. It is an • I LO Convention 135, ‘Workers’ Representatives instrument used by parties to facilitate collaborative Convention’, 1971. efforts to enhance the positive social impacts of an organization. The percentage of employees covered by • I LO Convention 154, ‘Collective Bargaining collective bargaining agreements is the most direct way Convention’, 1981 and Recommendations 91, to demonstrate an organization’s practices in relation to ‘Collective Agreements Recommendation’ 1951, freedom of association. and 163, ‘Collective Bargaining Recommendation’, 1981. 2. Compilation 2.1 Use data from LA1 as the basis for calculating • I LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and percentages for this Indicator. Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998, Article 2 (a). 2.2 Binding collective bargaining agreements include • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, those signed by the reporting organization itself or Section IV, Paragraph 2 (a). by employer organizations of which it is a member. These agreements can be at the sector, national, regional, organizational, or workplace level. 2.3 Identify the total number of employees covered by collective bargaining agreements. 2.4 Report the percentage of total employees covered by collective bargaining agreements. 3. Definitions None. Version 3.1 9
  • 123. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA5 Minimum notice period(s) regarding 4. Documentation significant operational changes, Agreements specific to the organization will provide data for this Indicator. including whether it is specified in collective agreements. 5. References 1. Relevance • D eclaration concerning the aims and purposes of the International Labour Organisation (Declaration This Indicator provides insight into an organization’s of Philadelphia), 1944 - Annex to the ILO practice of ensuring timely discussion of significant Constitution – Articles I (a) and III (e). operational changes, and engaging with its employees and their representatives to negotiate and implement • I LO Convention 158, ‘Termination of Employment these changes (which may have positive or negative Convention’, 1982. implications for workers). Timely and effective consultation with workers and other relevant parties, • I LO Tripartite Declaration of Principles Concerning where practicable (such as with governmental Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy, 1997. authorities), helps to minimize any adverse impacts from operating changes on workers and related communities. • I LO Recommendation 94, ‘Co-operation at the Level of the Undertaking Recommendation’, 1952. Minimum notice period(s) are an Indicator of an organization’s ability to maintain employee satisfaction • I LO Recommendation 135, ‘Workers’ and motivation while implementing significant Representatives’ Convention’, 1971. changes to operations. This Indicator also allows an assessment of an organization’s consultation practices • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Companies, in relation to expectations expressed in relevant Revision 2000, Article IV, (2) (3). international norms. Consultative practices that result in good industrial relations can help provide positive • O ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004 working environments, reduce turnover, and minimize (notably Article IV, C, D E). operational disruptions. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report the minimum number of weeks notice typically provided to employees and their elected representatives prior to the implementation of significant operational changes that could substantially affect them. 2.2 For organizations with collective bargaining agreements, report whether the notice period and/ or provisions for consultation and negotiation are specified in collective agreements. 3. Definitions Significant operational changes Alterations to the reporting organization’s pattern of operations that will have substantial positive or negative consequences for its employees. Such changes may include, for example, restructuring, outsourcing of operations, closures, expansions, new openings, takeovers, sale of all or part of the organization, or mergers. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 124. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA6 Percentage of total workforce 4. Documentation represented in formal joint management- Potential sources of information include organizational procedures and minutes of occupational health safety worker health and safety committees committee(s). that help monitor and advise on 5. References occupational health and safety programs. • I LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and 1. Relevance Health Convention’ and Protocol 155, 1981. A health and safety committee with joint representation • I LO Convention 161, ‘Occupational Health Services can facilitate a positive health and safety culture. The use Convention’, 1985. of committees is one way to involve workers in driving the improvement of occupational health and safety in the workplace. This Indicator provides one measure of the extent to which the workforce is actively involved in health and safety. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify formal health and safety committees that help monitor and advise on occupational safety programs at the facility level or higher with joint management/labor representation. ‘Formal’ refers to committees whose existence and function are integrated in the reporting organization’s organizational and authority structure, and that operate according to certain agreed, written rules. 2.2 Report the percentage of the total workforce represented in formal joint management-worker health and safety committees: • None; • Up to 25%; • Between 25% and 50%; • Between 50% and 75%; and • Over 75%. 2.3 Report the level(s) at which the committee(s) typically operates (e.g., at facility level and/or at multi-facility, region, group, or company levels). This may either be a result of a formal policy, procedure, or informal practice within the organization. 3. Definitions None. Version 3.1 11
  • 125. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA7 Rates of injury, occupational • Occupational diseases rate (ODR) diseases, lost days, and absenteeism, and ODR= Total # of Occupational diseases cases x 200,000 total number of work-related fatalities, Total hours worked by region and by gender. • Lost day rate (LDR) 1. Relevance Total # of lost days LDR= x 200,000 Health and safety performance is a key measure of an Total hours worked organization’s duty of care. Low injury and absentee rates are generally linked to positive trends in staff morale • Absentee rate (AR) and productivity. This Indicator will show whether health Total # of missed (absentee) days and safety management practices are resulting in fewer over the period occupational health and safety incidents. An evaluation of AR= x 200,000 Total # of workforce days worked trends and patterns may also indicate potential workplace for same period inequity. Note: The factor 200,000 is derived from 50 working 2. Compilation weeks @ 40 hours per 100 employees. 2.1 This Indicator should provide a regional By using this factor, the resulting rate is related to the breakdown for the following, by gender: number of employees, not the number of hours. 2.5 Report fatalities in the reporting period by gender, • The total workforce (i.e., total employees plus using an absolute number, not a rate. supervised workers); and 2.6 Report the system of rules applied in recording • Independent contractors working on-site to and reporting accident statistics. The ‘ILO Code whom the reporting organization is liable for of Practice on Recording and Notification of the general safety of the working environment. Occupational Accidents and Diseases’ was developed for the reporting, recording, and 2.2 Since some reporting organizations include minor notification of workplace accidents. Where (first-aid level) injuries in their data, indicate national law follows the ILO recommendations, it is whether such injuries are included or excluded. sufficient to state that fact and that practice follows the law. In situations where national law does not 2.3 In calculating ‘lost days’ indicate: comply, indicate which system of rules it applies and their relationship to the ILO code. • Whether ‘days’ means ‘calendar days’ or ‘scheduled work days’; and 3. Definitions • At what point the ‘lost days’ count begins (e.g., the Injury day after the accident or 3 days after the accident). A non-fatal or fatal injury arising out of or in the course 2.4 Report regional breakdown and total of injury, of work. occupational diseases, lost days, and absentee Injury rate rates in the reporting period by gender, using the following formula: The frequency of injuries relative to the total time worked by the total workforce in the reporting period. • Injury rate (IR) Occupational disease Total # of injuries IR= x 200,000 A disease arising from the work situation or activity (e.g., Total hours worked stress or regular exposure to harmful chemicals), or from Note: The injury rate should capture fatalities. a work-related injury. Occupational disease rate The frequency of occupational diseases relative to the total time worked by the total workforce in the reporting period. 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 126. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP Lost day Time (‘days’) that could not be worked (and is thus ‘lost’) as a consequence of a worker or workers being unable to perform their usual work because of an occupational accident or disease. A return to limited duty or alternative work for the same organization does not count as lost days. Lost day rate The impact of occupational accidents and diseases as reflected in time off work by the affected workers. It is expressed by comparing the total lost days to the total number of hours scheduled to be worked by the workforce in the reporting period. Absentee An employee absent from work because of incapacity of any kind, not just as the result of work-related injury or disease. Permitted leave absences such as holidays, study, maternity/paternity, and compassionate leave are excluded. Absentee rate Refers to a measure of actual absentee days lost as defined above, expressed as a percentage of total days scheduled to be worked by the workforce for the same period. Fatality The death of a worker occurring in the current reporting period, arising from an occupational injury or disease sustained or contracted while in the reporting organization’s employ. 4. Documentation Employee records, employee contracts, attendance records, and accident records will provide relevant data for this Indicator. 5. References • I LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Health Safety Convention’ and Protocol 155, 1981. • I LO Code of Practice on Recording and Notification of Occupational Accidents and Diseases, 1995. • I LO Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health Management Systems, 2001. Version 3.1 13
  • 127. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA8 Education, training, counseling, Serious diseases prevention, and risk-control programs Occupational or non-occupational related impairment of health with serious consequences for employees, their in place to assist workforce members, families, and communities, such as HIV/AIDS, diabetes, their families, or community members RSI, and stress. regarding serious diseases. 4. Documentation 1. Relevance Potential sources of information include organizational As part of a preventative strategy for managing the policies and operating procedures, minutes of internal health and safety of its workforce, this Indicator is occupational health committee(s), and human resource relevant for any organization. It also has specific and health center records. relevance for organizations working in countries with a high risk or incidence of communicable diseases, 5. References and those in professions that have a high incidence • G RI Cross-Reference: Reporting Guidance on of specific diseases. The Indicator helps demonstrate HIV/AIDS: A GRI Resource Document. LA8 is the extent to which such issues have been addressed a standard Indicator relevant for HIV/AIDS. in organizational programs and the degree to which Reporting organizations operating in areas with best practices are applied. Preventing serious diseases high prevalence should consider expanding contributes to the health, satisfaction, and stability of the their reporting on this issue and can view the GRI workforce, and helps maintain the organization’s social Resource Document for examples. license to operate in a community or region. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report the programs related to assisting workforce members, their families, or community members regarding serious diseases using the table below: Assistance Programs Education/ Counseling Prevention/ Treatment Training Risk Control Program Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No recipients Workers Workers’ families Com- munity members 2.2 Report whether there are workers who are involved in occupational activities who have a high incidence or high risk of specific diseases. 3. Definitions Risk control Practices that seek to limit exposure and transmission of diseases. 14 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 128. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA9 Health and safety topics covered in 3. Definitions formal agreements with trade unions. Formal agreements 1. Relevance Written documents signed by both parties declaring a mutual intention to abide by what is contained in This Indicator demonstrates one of the ways in which the documents. These can include, for example, local the health and safety of the workforce is ensured. collective bargaining agreements as well as national and Formal agreements can promote the acceptance of international framework agreements. responsibilities by both parties and the development of a positive health and safety culture. This Indicator will reveal 4. Documentation the extent to which the workforce is actively involved in formal, labor-management agreements that determine Potential sources of information include collective health and safety management arrangements. agreements with trade unions. 2. Compilation 5. References 2.1 Report whether formal agreements (either local or • I LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and global) with trade unions cover health and safety. Health Convention’ and its Protocol 155, 1981. (Yes/No) 2.2 If yes, report the extent to which various health and safety topics are covered by local and global agreements signed by the organization. Agreements at the local level typically address topics such as: • Personal protective equipment; • Joint management-employee health and safety committees; • Participation of worker representatives in health and safety inspections, audits, and accident investigations; • Training and education; • Complaints mechanism; • Right to refuse unsafe work; and • Periodic inspections. Agreements at the global level typically address topics such as: • Compliance with the ILO; • Arrangements or structures for resolving problems; and • Commitments regarding target performance standards or level of practice to apply. Version 3.1 15
  • 129. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA10 Average hours of training per • P aid educational leave provided by the reporting organization for its employees; year per employee, by gender, and by employee category. • T raining or education pursued externally and paid for in whole or in part by the reporting 1. Relevance organization; and Maintaining and improving human capital, particularly through training that expands the knowledge base • T raining on specific topics such as health and safety. of employees, is a key element in organizational Training does not include on-site coaching by development. This Indicator provides insight into the supervisors. scale of the organization’s investment in this area and the degree to which the investment is made across the entire Employee Category employee base. Access to training opportunities can also support progress in other areas of social performance, Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest such as ensuring equal opportunity in the workplace. governance bodies, senior management, middle It also contributes to motivating improvement at the management, etc) and function (e.g., technical, personal and organizational level. administrative, production, etc). Derived from an organization’s own human resources system. 2. Compilation 4. Documentation 2.1 Identify the total number of employees, by gender in each employee category across the Potential sources of information include employee organization’s operations at the end of the records and training schedules. reporting year. 5. References 2.2 Identify total hours devoted to training personnel • I LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources within each employee category. Development Convention’, 1975. 2.3 Report the average number of hours of training per • I LO Convention 140, ‘Paid Educational Leave year per employee by employee category using Convention’, 1974. the following formula: Total number of hours per employee category • I LO Convention 155, ‘Occupational Safety and Health Convention’, 1981. Total number of employees per employee category • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000, Articles II, 4 IV, 2 (c), 3 5. 2.4 Identify total hours devoted to training personnel per gender. 2.5 Report the average number of training per year per gender using the following formula: Total number of hours by gender Total number of employees by gender 3. Definitions Training Refers to: • All types of vocational training and instruction; 16 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 130. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA11 Programs for skills management 3. Definitions and lifelong learning that support the Continued employability continued employability of employees and Adaptation to the changing demands of the workplace through the acquisition of new skills. assist them in managing career endings. 1. Relevance Career endings Programs for skills management allow organizations to Retirement by reaching statutory national retiring age plan skills acquisitions that will equip employees to meet or termination in the face of restructuring. strategic targets in a changing work environment. A more skilled and aware workforce enhances the organization’s Skills management human capital and contributes to employee satisfaction, Policies and programs that focus on developing which correlates strongly with improved performance. For employees’ skills to meet the evolving strategic needs those facing retirement, confidence and quality of work of the organization and/or the industry. relations is improved by the knowledge that they will be supported in their transition from work to retirement. The Lifelong learning goal of lifelong learning is to promote the development of knowledge and competencies that will enable each Acquiring and updating abilities, knowledge, citizen to adapt to a rapidly-changing labor market and to qualifications, and interests throughout life, from pre- participate actively in all spheres of economic life. school years to post-retirement. 2. Compilation 4. Documentation 2.1 Do employee training or assistance programs to Potential sources of information include organizational upgrade skills provide any of the following? procedures for termination and employee records. • Internal training courses; 5. References • I LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources • F unding support for external training or Development Convention’, 1975. education; and • I LO Convention 168, ‘Employment Promotion and • T he provision of sabbatical periods with Protection against Unemployment Convention’, guaranteed return to employment. 1988. 2.2 Do transition assistance programs to support employees who are retiring or who have been terminated provide any of the following: • Pre-retirement planning for intended retirees; • R etraining for those intending to continue working; • Severance pay; • I f severance pay is provided, does it take into account employee age and years of service; • Job placement services; and • A ssistance (e.g., training, counseling) on transitioning to a non-working life. Version 3.1 17
  • 131. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA LA12 Percentage of employees receiving 5. References regular performance and career • I LO Convention 142, ‘Human Resources Development’, 1975. development reviews, by gender. 1. Relevance Appraising employee performance against common targets aids the personal development of individual employees and contributes to both skills management and the development of human capital within the organization. Employee satisfaction can also be enhanced, which correlates with improved organizational performance. This Indicator indirectly demonstrates how the reporting organization works to monitor and maintain the skill sets of its employees. When reported in conjunction with LA12, the Indicator helps illustrate how the organization approaches skills enhancement. The percentage of employees receiving regular performance and career development reviews broken down by gender demonstrates the extent to which this system is applied throughout the organization and if there is inequity of access to these opportunities. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of employees broken down by gender. The total number of employees should match that reported under LA1. 2.2 Report the percentage of total employees by gender who received a formal performance appraisal and review during the reporting period. 3. Definitions Regular performance and career development review Performance targets and reviews are based on criteria known to the employee and his/her superior. This review is undertaken with the knowledge of the employee at least once per year. It can include an evaluation by the employee’s direct superior, peers, or a wider range of employees. The review may also involve personnel from the human resources department. 4. Documentation Potential sources of information include personnel records. 18 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 132. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA13 Composition of governance • Gender; bodies and breakdown of employees per • Minority groups; and employee category according to gender, • A ge groups: Under 30 years old, 30-50 years age group, minority group membership, old, over 50 years old. and other indicators of diversity. 3. Definitions 1. Relevance This Indicator provides a quantitative measure of diversity Employee Category within an organization and can be used in conjunction Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest with sectoral or regional benchmarks. The level of diversity governance bodies, senior management, middle within an organization provides insights into the human management, etc) and function (e.g., technical, capital of the organization. Comparisons between broad administrative, production, etc). Derived from an workforce diversity and management team diversity organization’s own human resources system. also offer information on equal opportunity. Detailed information on the composition of the workforce can Governance bodies also help in assessing which issues may be of particular relevance to certain segments of the workforce. The committees or boards responsible for the strategic guidance of the organization, the effective monitoring of 2. Compilation management, and the accountability of management to the broader organization and its stakeholders. 2.1 Identify the diversity Indicators used by the reporting organization in its own monitoring and Indicators of diversity recording that may be relevant for reporting. Indicators for which the reporting organization gathers 2.2 Identify the total number of employees in data may include, for example, citizenship, ancestry and each employee category. The total number of ethnic origin, creed, and disability. employees should match that reported in LA1. 4. Documentation 2.3 Report the percentage of employees per employee Potential sources of information include employee category in each of the following diversity records and minutes of equal opportunity committees. categories: (% of employees) 5. References • Gender; • C onvention on the Elimination of All Forms of • Minority groups; and Discrimination Against Women: UN GA: Resolution 34/180 of 18 December 1979. • A ge groups: Under 30 years old, 30-50 years old, over 50 years old. • D eclaration on the Elimination of All Forms of Intolerance and of Discrimination based on 2.4 Report the percentage of employees by gender for Religion or Belief: UN GA: Resolution 36/55 of 26 the minority and age groups identified in 2.3. November 1981. The categories should be broken down by gender • D eclaration on Race and Racial Prejudice: General as per the diversity categories above. Conference UNESCO 20th session on 27 November 1978. 2.5 Report the percentage of individuals within the organization’s governance bodies (e.g., the board of directors, management committee, or similar body for non-corporate reporting organizations) in • D eclaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging each of the following diversity categories: to National or Ethnic, Religious and Linguistic (% of Individuals within Governance Bodies) Minorities: UN GA Resolution 47/135 of 18 December 1992. Version 3.1 19
  • 133. IP Indicator Protocols Set: LA • I LO Tripartite Declaration of Principles Concerning Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy: Art. 21, 22, 23, 1977. • I LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work, 1998. • I LO Convention concerning Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation, 1958 (No.111). • I nternational Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination of 4 January 1969. • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000 (Employment and Industrial Relations Section). • U nited Nations Global Compact: Principle 6, 26 July 2000. • U nited Nations Declaration on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination: UN GA Resolution 1904 (XVlll) of 20 November 1963. 20 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 134. Indicator Protocols Set: LA IP LA14 Ratio of basic salary and Remuneration remuneration of women to men by Basic salary plus additional amounts such as those based on years of service, bonuses including cash and/ employee category, by significant or equity such as stocks and shares, benefit payments, locations of operation. overtime, time owed, and any additional allowances (e.g., transportation, living and childcare allowances). 1. Relevance 4. Documentation Many countries have introduced legislation to enforce the principle of equal pay for work of equal value. This Sources of information for this Indicator include issue is supported by ILO Convention 100 on ‘Equal employee and payment records. Remuneration for Men and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value’. Equality of remuneration is a factor 5. References in retaining qualified employees in the workforce. • I LO Convention 100, ‘Equal Remuneration for Men Where imbalances exist, an organization runs a risk and Women Workers for Work of Equal Value’, 1951. to its reputation and legal challenges on the basis of discrimination. • I LO Convention 111, ‘Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation’, 1958. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of employees in • I LO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and each employee category across the reporting Rights at Work, 1998. organization’s operations, broken down by gender using the information from LA13. Employee categories should be defined based on the reporting organization’s own human resources system. The total number of employees should match that reported in LA1. 2.2 Identify the basic salary for women and for men in each employee category. 2.3 Identify the remuneration for women and men in each employee category. 2.4 Report the ratio of the basic salary and remuneration of women to men for each employee category, by significant locations of operation. 3. Definitions Basic Salary A fixed, minimum amount paid to an employee for performing his/her duties. This does not include any additional remuneration. Employee category Breakdown of employees by level (e.g., highest governance bodies, senior management, middle management, etc) and function (e.g., technical, administrative, production, etc). Derived from an organization’s own human resources system. Version 3.1 21
  • 135. IP Indicator Protocols Set Human Rights (HR) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 136. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 137. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP Human Rights Performance Indicators Aspect: Investment and Procurement Practices Aspect: Security Practices HR1 Percentage and total number of significant HR8 Percentage of security personnel trained investment agreements and contracts that in the organization’s policies or procedures include clauses incorporating human rights concerning aspects of human rights that are Add Co r e concerns, or that have undergone human relevant to operations. rights screening. Aspect: Indigenous Rights HR2 Percentage of significant suppliers, contractors, and other business partners that HR9 Total number of incidents of violations involving Add Co r e have undergone human rights screening, and rights of indigenous people and actions taken. actions taken. Aspect: Assessment HR3 Total hours of employee training on policies HR10 Percentage and total number of operations and procedures concerning aspects of human Co r e that have been subject to human rights Co r e rights that are relevant to operations, including reviews and/or impact assessments. the percentage of employees trained. Aspect: Remediation Aspect: Non-discrimination HR11 Number of grievances related to human rights Co r e HR4 Total number of incidents of discrimination Co r e filed, addressed, and resolved through formal and corrective actions taken. grievance mechanisms. Aspect: Freedom of Association and Collective Bargaining HR5 Operations and significant suppliers identified in which the right to exercise freedom of association and collective bargaining may Co r e be violated or at significant risk, and actions taken to support these rights. Aspect: Child Labor HR6 Operations and significant suppliers identified as having significant risk for incidents of child Co r e labor, and measures taken to contribute to the effective abolition of child labor. Aspect: Forced and Compulsory Labor HR7 Operations and significant suppliers identified as having significant risk for incidents of forced or compulsory labor, and measures to Co r e contribute to the elimination of all forms of forced or compulsory labor. Version 3.1 1
  • 138. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR Relevance In addition to the International Bill of Human Rights, the corpus of human rights is further defined by Human Rights Performance Indicators elicit disclosures numerous other declarations, treaties and conventions on the impacts and activities an organization has on at international, regional and sub-regional levels. Of the civil, political, economic, social and cultural human particular relevance to business among these additional rights of its stakeholders. The Aspects within these instruments are: Performance Indicators are based on internationally recognized standards, primarily the United Nations 1. ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the ILO Rights at Work, 1998 (in particular the eight core Declaration on the Fundamental Principles and Rights at conventions of the ILO consisting of Conventions Work of 1998 (in particular the eight core Conventions 100, 111, 87, 98, 138, 182, 29, 105).; of the ILO). Although closely related, the categories of Human Rights and Labor Practices serve different 2. Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of purposes. Human Rights Indicators focus on how the Racial Discrimination, 1966; reporting organization maintains and respects the basic rights of a human being, whereas the Indicators on 3. Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Labor Practices reflect the quality of the work conditions Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW), 1979; and the working environment. 4. Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989; The Performance Indicators seek to provide comparable measures of results or outcomes, and therefore focus 5. International Convention on the Protection of the primarily on incidents relating to core human rights. Rights of All Migrant Workers and Members of Incidents typically include ‘points of impact’ on Their Families, 1990; and stakeholder groups as well as risks for the organization where violations have occurred. The Indicator set 6. ILO Convention (107) Indigenous and Tribal addresses three general areas: Populations Convention, 1957, ILO Convention (169) Concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples in • asic aspects of human rights (HR4, HR5, HR6, HR7 and B Independent Countries, 1991 and United Nations HR9); Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, 2007. • he capacity and knowledge enabling the organization T to effectively address human rights, including training and internal procedures (HR3, HR8, HR10, and HR 11); General References and • Tripartite Declaration Concerning ILO Multinational Enterprises and Social Policy, 2001, • he organization’s integration of human rights into T Third Edition. its external business relationships either through • OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, investments or suppliers (HR1 and HR2). Revision 2000. • Vienna Declaration and Programme of Action, Definitions 1993. Human rights Generally recognized human rights are defined by the International Bill of Human Rights, which is composed of three instruments: 1. niversal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948; U 2. nternational Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, I 1966; and 3. nternational Covenant on Economic, Social and I Cultural Rights, 1966. 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 139. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR1 Percentage and total number of 3. Definitions significant investment agreements and Human rights clauses contracts that include human rights Specific terms in a written agreement that define minimum expectations of performance with respect to clauses or that have undergone human human rights as a requirement for investment. rights screening. Human rights screening 1. Relevance A formal or documented process that applies a set of This measure is one indication of the extent to which human rights performance criteria as one of the factors human rights are integrated in an organization’s in determining whether to proceed with a business economic decisions. This is particularly relevant for relationship. organizations that operate within or are partners in 4. Documentation ventures in regions where the protection of human rights is of significant concern. Integrating human Potential information sources include the reporting rights criteria in screening or including human rights organization’s legal, investor relations, and financial in performance requirements can be part of a strategy departments, as well as documentation collected to reduce the risks of investment. Problems with through quality management systems. an organization’s human rights record can result in reputational damage for the investing organization and 5. References can affect the stability of investments. None. 2. Compilation 2.1 Count only the agreements and contracts that are significant in terms of size or strategic importance. The significance may be determined by the level of approval required within the organization for the investment or other criteria that can be consistently applied to agreements. The reporting organization should disclose their definition of “significant agreements”. 2.2 Identify the total number of significant investment agreements and contracts finalized during the reporting period that either moved the organization into a position of ownership in another entity or initiated a capital investment project that was material to financial accounts. 2.3 If multiple significant investment agreements are undertaken and contracts signed with the same partner, the number of the agreements should reflect the number of separate projects undertaken or entities created. 2.4 Report the total number and percentage of significant investment agreements and contracts that include human rights clauses or that underwent human rights screening. Version 3.1 3
  • 140. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR HR2 Percentage of significant suppliers, • The primary providers of a given type of good or service and overall comprise the majority of the contractors, and other business partners organization’s purchases; or that have undergone human rights • I dentified as having the highest risk of incidents of screening, and actions taken. violations related to human rights. 1. Relevance Human rights screening The development of extensive networks of suppliers A formal or documented process that applies a set of and contractors to produce products and services has human rights performance criteria as one of the factors generated interest in how reporting organizations apply in determining whether to proceed with a business their human rights policies to their supply networks. This relationship. is particularly relevant for organizations in sectors that rely heavily on outsourcing and global networks. 5. Documentation Processes that screen and monitor human rights Potential information sources include the reporting performance within the supply chain, contractors organization’s procurement or purchasing and legal and other business partners can provide evidence of departments. an organization’s positive and/or negative impact on the wider business community. Issues with human 5. References rights performance on the part of significant suppliers, contractors and other business partners can result in None. reputational damage for their business partners and/or create instability in the suppliers’ operations. Screening is part of risk management, and the percentage indicated here indicates how regularly an organization takes this particular risk into consideration. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of the reporting organization’s significant suppliers, contractors and other business partners. 2.2 Report the percentage of contracts with significant suppliers, contractors and other business partners that included clauses or screening on human rights. See HR1 for definitions of ‘clauses’. 2.3 Report the percentage of contracts with significant suppliers, contractors and other business partners that were either declined or imposed performance conditions, or were subject to other actions as a result of human rights screening. 3. Definitions Significant suppliers, contractors and other business partners External parties from whom products or services are obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the provision of such products and services. In the context of this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers and contractors who are: 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 141. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR3 Total hours of employee training 3. Definitions on policies and procedures concerning None aspects of human rights that are relevant 4. Documentation to operations, including the percentage Potential sources of information include employee of employees trained. records of training and training schedules. 1. Relevance 5. References Information generated from this Indicator offers insight None. into an organization’s capacity to implement its human rights policies and procedures. Human rights have become well-established in international standards and laws, and this has obligated organizations to implement specialized training that equips employees to address human rights in the course of their regular work. The number of employees trained and the amount of training they receive both contribute to an assessment of an organization’s depth of knowledge about human rights. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of hours devoted to employee training, using data from LA10. 2.2 Identify the total number of employees, using data from LA1. 2.3 Identify employees who have received formal training in the organization’s policies and procedures on human rights issues and their applicability to the employees’ work. This can refer either to training dedicated to the topic of human rights or to a human rights module within a general training program. 2.4 Report the total number of hours in the reporting period devoted to training on policies and procedures concerning aspects of human rights that are relevant to operations. 2.5 Report the percentage of employees in the reporting period trained in policies and procedures concerning aspects of human rights that are relevant to operations. Version 3.1 5
  • 142. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR HR4 Total number of incidents of 3. Definitions discrimination and corrective actions Discrimination taken. The act and the result of treating a person unequally by imposing unequal burdens or denying benefits rather 1. Relevance than treating the person fairly on the basis of individual Human rights extend beyond the rights of employees merit. Discrimination can also include harassment, in the workplace. Anti-discrimination policy is a key defined as a course of comments or actions that are requirement of international conventions and social unwelcome, or should reasonably be known to be legislation and guidelines. The issue of discrimination unwelcome, to the person towards whom they are is also addressed by ILO Core Conventions 100 111. addressed. An effective monitoring system is necessary to ensure compliance throughout the reporting organization’s 4. Documentation operations. Stakeholders will seek assurance that such Potential information sources include the reporting policies and monitoring are effective. organization’s legal and compliance departments. 2. Compilation 5. References 2.1 Identify incidents of discrimination on grounds of • Declaration on the Elimination of All Forms of race, color, sex, religion, political opinion, national Intolerance and of Discrimination based on extraction, or social origin as defined by the ILO, Religion or Belief, UN General Assembly Resolution or other relevant forms of discrimination involving 36/55 of 26 November 1981. internal and/or external stakeholders across operations in the reporting period. • Declaration on Race and Racial Prejudice: General Conference UNESCO 20th session on 27 November ‘Incidents’ refer to legal actions, complaints 1978. registered with the organization or competent authorities through a formal process, or instances • Declaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging of non-compliance identified by the organization to National or Ethnic, Religious and Linguistic through established procedures such as Minorities: UN GA Resolution 47/135 of 18 management system audits or formal monitoring December 1992. programs. • ILO Convention 100, ‘Equal Remuneration 2.2 Report the total number of incidents of Convention’, 1951. discrimination during the reporting period. • ILO Convention 111, ‘Discrimination in Respect of Employment and Occupation Convention’, 1958. 2.3 Report the status of the incidents and the actions taken with reference to the following: • International Convention on Civil and Political Rights: GA Resolution 2200 A XX1 of 16 December • Organization has reviewed the incident; 1966. • Remediation plan is being implemented; • International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination GA Resolution 1904 • Remediation plan has been implemented (XV111) of 20 November 1963. and results reviewed through routine internal management review processes; and • United Nations Convention on the Elimination of all forms of Discrimination Against Women: UN, • Incident is no longer subject to action (i.e., GA: Resolution 34/180 of 18 December 1979. resolved, case completed, no further by action by company, etc). • United Nations Declaration on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination: GA Resolution 1904 (XVlll) of 20 November 1963. 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 143. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR5 Operations and significant 2.3 Report on any measures taken by the organization in the reporting period intended to support rights suppliers identified in which the right to freedom of association and collective to exercise freedom of association or bargaining. See the ILO Tripartite Declaration and OECD Guidelines for further guidance. collective bargaining may be violated or at significant risk, and actions taken to 3. Definitions support these rights. Freedom of association 1. Relevance Workers and employers may establish and join organizations of their own choosing without the need Inherent in the right to freedom of association and for prior authorization. collective bargaining is the protection of the right of workers (and employers) to organize collectively in Significant suppliers organizations of their own choice. The Right to Freedom of Association is a fundamental provision of the UN External parties from whom products or services are Universal Declaration of Human Rights and is defined by obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the ILO Core Conventions 87 98. provision of such products and services. In the context of this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are: This Indicator aims to reveal actions that the reporting organization has taken to evaluate whether • The primary providers of a given type of good or opportunities exist for workers to exercise their rights service and overall comprise the majority of the to freedom of association and collective bargaining. organization’s purchases; or It also aims to reveal actions that have been taken to support these rights across the organization’s range of • Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of operations. This Indicator does not require the reporting violations related to human rights. organization to express a specific opinion on the quality of national legal systems. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include the reporting 2. Compilation organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources 2.1 Identify operations and significant suppliers departments. in which employee rights to exercise freedom of association or collective bargaining may be 5. References violated or at risk. The process of identification • ILO Convention 87, ‘Freedom of Association and should reflect the organization’s approach to Protection of the Right to Organise Convention’, risk assessment on this issue and can draw from 1948. recognized international data sources such as ILO reports (yearly report of ILO Committee of Experts • ILO Convention 98, ‘Right to Organise and on the implementation of ratified conventions and Collective Bargaining Convention’, 1949 recommendations, as well as the Governing Body’s reports on freedom of association). • United Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. 2.2 Report operations and significant suppliers identified in which employee rights to exercise • International Covenant on Economic, Social and freedom of association or collec-tive bargaining Cultural Rights, 1966. may be violated or at risk either in terms of: • Type of operations (e.g., manufacturing plant); or • Countries or geographical areas with operations considered at risk. Version 3.1 7
  • 144. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR HR6 Operations and significant suppliers response to special application by the country concerned and consultation with representative organizations of identified as having significant risk for employers and workers. incidents of child labor, and measures Note: ILO Convention 138 refers to both child labor and taken to contribute to the effective young workers. See below for the definition of ‘young abolition of child labor. worker’. 1. Relevance Significant suppliers The abolition of child labor is a key principle and External parties from whom products or services are objective of major human rights declarations and obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the legislation, and is subject to ILO Conventions 138 and provision of such products and services. In the context of 182. The presence and effective implementation of this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are: policies on child labor are a basic expectation of socially responsible conduct. • The primary providers of a given type of good or service and overall comprise the majority of the 2. Compilation organization’s purchases; or 2.1 Identify operations considered to have significant risk for incidents of: • Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of violations related to human rights. • Child labor; and/or Young worker • Young workers exposed to hazardous work. A person who is above the applicable minimum working age and younger than 18 years of age. The process of identification should reflect the organization’s approach to risk assessment on this 4. Documentation issue and can draw from recognized international data sources such as ILO reports. Potential information sources include the reporting organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources 2.2 Report operations considered to have significant departments. risk for incidents of child labor either in terms of: 5. References • Type of operations (e.g., manufacturing plant); • ILO Convention 138, ‘Minimum Age Convention’, or 1973. • Countries or geographical areas with • ILO Convention 182, ‘Worst Forms of Child Labour operations considered at risk. Convention’, 1999. 2.3 Report on any measures taken by the organization • ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and in the reporting period intended to contribute to Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998. the elimination of child labor. See the ILO Tripartite Declaration and OECD Guidelines for further • United Nations Convention on the Rights of the guidance. Child, 1989. 3. Definitions Child This term applies to all persons under the age of 15 years or under the age of completion of compulsory schooling (whichever is higher), except in certain countries where economies and educational facilities are insufficiently developed and a minimum age of 14 years might apply. These countries of exception are specified by the ILO in 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 145. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR7 Operations and significant suppliers bonded labor, but debts can also be used as a means of maintaining workers in a state of forced labor. identified as having significant risk for Withholding identity papers, requiring compulsory incidents of forced or compulsory labor, deposits, or compelling workers, under threat of firing, to work extra hours to which they have not previously and measures taken to contribute to agreed, are all examples of forced labor. the elimination of all forms of forced or Significant suppliers compulsory labor. External parties from whom products or services are 1. Relevance obtained or with whom contracts are concluded for the Not to be subjected to forced or compulsory labor provision of such products and services. In the context of is considered a fundamental human right and is a this Indicator, ‘significant’ refers to suppliers who are: provision of the UN Universal Declaration of Human • The primary providers of a given type of good or Rights and subject to ILO Core Conventions 29 105. service and overall comprise the majority of the This type of labor can exist in a variety of forms and the organization’s purchases; or data provided will indicate the reporting organization’s challenges in contributing to the abolition of forced and • Identified as having the highest risk of incidents of compulsory labor. violations related to human rights. 2. Compilation 4. Documentation 2.1 Identify operations considered to have significant Potential information sources include the reporting risk for incidents of forced or compulsory labor. organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources The process of identification should reflect the departments. organization’s approach to risk assessment on this issue and can draw from recognized international 5. References data sources such as ILO reports. • ILO Conventions 29, ‘Forced Labour Convention’, 2.2 Report operations considered to have significant 1930. risk for incidents of compulsory labor either in terms of: • ILO Convention 105, ‘Abolition of Forced Labour’, 1957. • Type of operations (e.g. manufacturing plant); or • League of Nations (later UN) Slavery Convention, 1927. • Countries or geographical areas with operations considered at risk. • United Nations Supplementary Convention on the Abolition of Slavery, the Slave Trade, and 2.3 Report on any measures taken by the Institutions and Practices Similar to Slavery, 226 organization in the reporting period intended U.N.T.S.3, 1957. to contribute to the elimination of all forms of forced or compulsory labor. See the ILO Tripartite • Universal Declaration of Human Rights (United Declaration and OECD Guidelines for further Nations General Assembly Resolution 217 A (III) of guidance. 10 December 1948), Articles 4 5. 3. Definitions • ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work, 86th Session, 1998. Forced or compulsory labor All work and service which is exacted from any person under the menace of any penalty and for which the said person has not offered her/himself voluntarily (ILO Convention 29, Forced Labour Convention, 1930). The most extreme examples are slave labor and Version 3.1 9
  • 146. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR HR8 Percentage of security personnel 5. References trained in the organization’s policies • ILO Convention 29, ‘Forced Labour Convention’, 1930. or procedures concerning aspects of human rights that are relevant to • ILO Convention 105, ‘Abolition of Forced Labour Convention’, 1957. operations. 1. Relevance • The Voluntary Principles on Security and Human Rights, 2000. The conduct of security personnel towards third parties is underpinned by their training in human rights issues, particularly regarding the use of force. Training security personnel can help prevent reputational and litigation risks that arise from inappropriate actions or approaches not condoned by the reporting organization. Information provided under this Indicator helps to demonstrate the extent to which management systems pertaining to human rights are implemented. This measure indicates the proportion of the security force that can reasonably be assumed to be aware of the organization’s expectations of human rights performance. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of security personnel the reporting organization employs directly. 2.2 Report the percentage of security personnel who have received formal training in the organization’s policies on, or specific procedures for, human rights issues and their application to security. This can refer either to training dedicated to the topic or a module within a more general training program. 2.3 Report whether training requirements also apply to third party organizations providing security personnel. 3. Definitions Security personnel Individuals employed for the purposes of guarding property of the organization, crowd control, loss prevention, and escorting persons, goods, and valuables. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include the reporting organization’s human resources department and training records received by internal security personnel. Contractors may hold similar information with respect to their employees. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 147. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR9 Total number of incidents of 3. Definitions violations involving rights of indigenous Indigenous peoples people and actions taken. Indigenous peoples are those whose social, cultural, political, and economic conditions distinguish 1. Relevance them from other sections of the dominant national The number of recorded incidents involving the rights community, or who are regarded as indigenous on of indigenous peoples provides information about the account of their descent from the populations which implementation of an organization’s policies relating inhabited the country, or a geographical region to to indigenous peoples. This information will help which the country belongs, at the time of conquest indicate the state of relations with these stakeholder or colonization or the establishment of present state communities, particularly in regions where indigenous boundaries and who, irrespective of their legal status, people reside or have interests near operations of retain some or all of their own social, economic, cultural, the reporting organization. The information also and political institutions. provides an additional entry point for support groups. 4. Documentation ILO Conventions 107 and 169 address the rights of indigenous peoples. Potential information sources include the reporting organization’s operating procedures and guidelines on 2. Compilation the issue. Other information may be supplied by country managers and by legal specialists of the reporting 2.1 Identify incidents involving indigenous rights organization. Data on indigenous people within the among the organization’s own employees, and workforce may be obtainable from employee records. in communities near existing operations that are likely to be affected by planned or proposed future 5. References operations of the reporting organization. • Charter of the United Nations, Preamble, San ‘Incidents’ refer to legal actions, complaints Francisco, 1945. registered with the organization or competent authorities through a formal process, or instances • International Finance Corporation’s Performance of non-compliance identified by the organization Standards on Social Environmental Sustainability, through established procedures such as 2006. management system audits or formal monitoring programs. • ILO Convention (107) Indigenous and Tribal Populations Convention, 1957. 2.2 Report the total number of identified incidents involving indigenous rights during the reporting • ILO Convention (169) Concerning Indigenous and period. Tribal Peoples in Independent Countries, 1991. 2.3 Report the status of the incidents and actions taken • United Nations Declaration on the Rights of with reference to the following: Indigenous Peoples, 2007. • Organization has reviewed the incident; • Remediation plan is being implemented; • Remediation plan has been implemented and results reviewed through routine internal management review processes; and • Incident is no longer subject to action (i.e., resolved, case completed, no further by action by company, etc). Version 3.1 11
  • 148. IP Indicator Protocols Set: HR HR10 Percentage and total number of 5. References operations that have been subject to • Global Compact Business Guide for Conflict Impact Assessment and Risk Management, 2002. human rights reviews and/or impact assessments. • Guidance on Responsible Business in Conflict- Affected and High -Risk Areas: A Resource for 1. Relevance Companies and Investors, UNGC/PRI, 2010. Reporting organizations need to be aware of their special responsibility to respect human rights. The • OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, presence of the reporting organization’s operations Revision 2000. can have positive and negative effects in relation to respecting on the protection of human rights. • OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational Organizations can affect human rights directly, through Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones (in their own actions and operations, and indirectly, through particular ch. 2, 4 7), 2006. their interaction and relationships with others, including governments, local communities and suppliers. • Multinational Enterprises in Situations of Violent Conflict and Widespread Human Rights Information reported for this Indicator will provide Abuses, OECD, Working Papers on International insight into how far the reporting organization takes Investment, number 2002/1, 2002. human rights considerations into account when making decisions on their locations of operations. It will also evaluate the potential of its being associated with, or considered complicit in, human rights abuse. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify countries in which the reporting organization operates. 2.2 Report the total number of operations, by country. 2.3 Report the total number and percentage of operations that have undergone human rights reviews or human rights impact assessments, by country. 3. Definitions Human rights reviews A formal or documented assessment process that applies a set of human rights performance criteria. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include the reporting organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources departments, information supplied by country managers and the risk management office. 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 149. Indicator Protocols Set: HR IP HR11 Number of grievances related • Internal Stakeholders; to human rights filed, addressed, and • External stakeholders; and resolved through formal grievance • Gender, minority group membership and other mechanisms. indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by 1. Relevance an individual or group of people and not an organization). Disputes over the human rights impact of an organization’s operations and decisions may occur. 3. Definitions Effective grievance mechanisms play an important role in the successful protection of human rights. Grievance mechanisms A system consisting of specified procedures, roles and 2. Compilation rules for methodically addressing complaints as well as 2.1 Identify existing formal organizational grievance resolving disputes. Grievance mechanisms are expected mechanisms. to be legitimate, accessible, predictable, equitable, rights-compatible, clear and transparent and based on 2.2 Report the total number of grievances related to dialogue and mediation. human rights filed through formal organizational grievance mechanisms during the reporting 4. Documentation period. Potential information sources include the reporting 2.3 Report the total number of addressed grievances organization’s legal, compliance, and human resources related to human rights from those filed in the departments. reporting period, broken down by: 5. References • Internal Stakeholders; None. • External stakeholders; and • Gender, minority group membership and other indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by an individual or group of people and not an organization). 2.4 Report the total number of resolved grievances related to human rights from those filed in the reporting period, broken down by: • Internal Stakeholders; • External stakeholders; and • Gender, minority group membership and other indicators of diversity (for grievances filed by an individual or group of people and not an organization). 2.5 Report the total number of grievances related to human rights addressed and resolved during the reporting period that were filed before the reporting period, broken down by: Version 3.1 13
  • 150. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP IP Indicator Protocols Set Society (SO) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1 Version 3.1. 1
  • 151. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 152. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP Society Performance Indicators Aspect: Local Communities SO1 P ercentage of operations with implemented Co r e local community engagement, impact assessments, and development programs. S09 Operations with significant potential or actual Co r e negative impacts on local communities. SO10 Prevention and mitigation measures implemented in operations with significant Co r e potential or actual negative impacts on local communities. Aspect: Corruption SO2 Percentage and total number of business Co r e units analyzed for risks related to corruption. SO3 Percentage of employees trained in Co r e organization’s anti-corruption policies and procedures. SO4 Actions taken in response to incidents of Co r e corruption. Aspect: Public Policy SO5 Public policy positions and participation in Co r e public policy development and lobbying. SO6 Total value of financial and in-kind contributions to political parties, politicians, Add and related institutions by country. Aspect: Anti-Competitive Behavior SO7 Total number of legal actions for anti- competitive behavior, anti-trust, and Add monopoly practices and their outcomes. Aspect: Compliance SO8 Monetary value of significant fines and total number of non-monetary sanctions for non- Co r e compliance with laws and regulations. Version 3.1. 1
  • 153. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO Relevance Operation The categories of Labor, Human Rights, and Product A single location used by an organization for the Responsibility address social impacts associated with production, storage and/or distribution of its goods specific stakeholder groups (such as employees or and services, or for administrative purposes (e.g., customers). However, the social impacts of organizations office). Within a single operation, there may be multiple are also linked to interactions with market structures and production lines, warehouses, or other activities. For social institutions that establish the social environment example, a single factory may be used for multiple within which stakeholder groups interact. These products or a single retail outlet may contain several interactions, as well as the organization’s approach to different retail operations that are owned or managed by dealing with social groups such as communities, represent the reporting organization. an important component of sustainability performance. The Society Performance Indicators therefore focus on the Vulnerable Groups impacts organizations have on the communities in which A vulnerable group is a set or subset of people with they operate, and how the organization’s interactions with some specific physical, social, political, or economic other social institutions are managed and mediated. In condition or characteristic that places the group at a particular, information is sought on bribery and corruption, higher risk of suffering a burden, or at a risk of suffering involvement in public policy-making, monopoly practices, a disproportionate burden of the social, economic or and compliance with laws and regulations other than labor environmental impacts of an organization’s operations. and environmental. Vulnerable groups may include, but are not limited to, children and youth, the elderly, people with Definitions disabilities, ex-combatants, the internally displaced, Corruption refugees or returning refugees, HIV/AIDS- affected households, indigenous peoples, and ethnic minorities. Corruption is ‘the abuse of entrusted power for private Vulnerabilities and impacts may differ by gender. gain’1 and can be instigated by individuals in the public or private sector. It is interpreted here to include such corrupt General References practices as bribery, fraud, extortion, collusion, conflict of interest, and money laundering. In this context, it includes • I nter-American Convention Against Corruption, 1996. an offer or receipt of any gift, loan, fee, reward, or other advantage to or from any person as an inducement to do • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, something that is dishonest, illegal, or a breach of trust in Revision 2000. the conduct of the enterprise’s business.2 This may include gifts other than money, such as free goods and holidays, • O ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of or special personal services provided for the purpose of, Foreign Public Officials in International or liable to result in, an improper advantage or that may Business Transactions, 1997. result in moral pressure to receive such an advantage. • O ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004. Local Community • Stakeholder Engagement: A Good Practice Persons or groups of people living and/or working in any Handbook For Companies Doing Business In areas that are economically, socially or environmentally Emerging Markets, IFC, 2007. impacted (positively or negatively) by the organization’s operations. The local community can range from • U nited Nations Convention Against Corruption, 2003. people living adjacent to operations through to isolated settlements at a distance from operations that may experience the impacts of these operations. 1 Transparency International 2 T hese definitions are based on ‘Business Principles for Countering Bribery’ which have been developed through a project managed by Transparency International. 2 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 154. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP SO1 Percentage of operations with • Stakeholder engagement plans based on stakeholder mapping; implemented local community engagement, impact assessments, and • Broad based local community consultation committees and processes that include development programs. vulnerable groups; 1. Relevance • Works councils, occupational health and A key element in managing impacts on women and safety committees and other employee men in local communities is assessment and planning representation bodies to deal with impacts; in order to understand the potential and actual impacts, and and strong engagement with local communities in order to understand their expectations and needs. • Formal local community grievance processes. There are many elements that can be incorporated into engagement, impact assessments, and development 3. Definitions programs. This Indicator seeks to identify which Community Development Programs elements have been consistently applied, organization- wide. Plan that details actions to minimize, mitigate, and compensate for adverse social and economic impacts, Engagement, impact assessments, and development and to identify opportunities and actions to enhance programs, combined with the consistency of their positive impacts of the project on the community. application, provide insight into the overall quality of an organization’s efforts, as well as its degree of follow-up 4. Documentation on policy or policies. Potential information sources for this Indicator may include: 2. Compilation • Public consultation and consultation plans; 2.1 Identify the total number of operations. (The total number of operations should match that reported • Agenda and meeting reports of works councils, under Profile Disclosure 2.8.) occupational health and safety committees and other employee representation bodies; 2.2 Identify organization-wide local community engagement, impact assessments, and • Baseline studies – socio-economic, health, development programs. environment, cultural, etc; 2.3 Report the percentage of operations with • Social impact assessments; implemented local community engagement, impact assessments, and development programs • Gender impact assessments; including, but not limited to, the use of: • Health impact assessments; • Social impact assessments, including gender impact assessments, based on participatory • Environmental impact assessments; processes; • Social action plans; • Environmental impact assessments and ongoing monitoring; • Resettlement action plans; • Public disclosure of results of environmental • Community development plans; and social impact assessments; • Grievance or complaints mechanisms; and • Local community development programs based on local communities’ needs; • Documents held in community information centers. Version 3.1. 3
  • 155. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO 5. References • International Finance Corporation’s Performance Standards on Social Environmental Sustainability, 2006. • OECD Guidelines For Multinational Enterprises (in particular Ch ii.3 v.2.b). • OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones (in particular ch. 2, 4 7). 4 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 156. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP S09 Operations with significant 2.2 Identify significant potential negative impacts, including but not limited to consideration of: potential or actual negative impacts on local communities. • Vulnerability and risk to local communities from potential impacts due to factors such as: 1. Relevance – Degree of physical or economic isolation of Organizational operations related to entering, operating, the local community; and exiting can have a number of significant negative – Level of socio-economic development impacts on local communities. Indicators in the GRI including the degree of gender equality Framework, such as environmental emissions or within the community ; economic data, will offer an overall picture of positive and negative impacts, but may not be able to present – State of socio-economic infrastructure them in relation to local communities. (health, education); – Proximity to operations; This Indicator is focused on significant potential and actual negative impacts related to operations and not – Level of social organization; and on community investments or donations (which are – Strength and quality of the governance of addressed under EC1). local and national institutions around local communities. The Indicator informs stakeholders about an organization’s awareness of its impacts. It also enables 2.3 Identify the exposure of the local community to an organization to better prioritize and improve its operations due to higher than average use of/ organization-wide attention to local communities. impact on shared resources through: Understanding operations with specific challenges, • Use of hazardous substances that impact on combined with information about organization-wide the environment and human health in general, processes, enables stakeholders to better assess an and specifically reproductive health; organization’s overall community performance. An analysis of negative impacts enables an organization • Volume and type of pollution released; to reflect its approach in management systems and consequently enhance the brand and reputation of the • Status as major employer in the local organization as a potential partner. It simultaneously community; strengthens the ability of an organization to maintain existing operations, and to initiate new ones. • Land conversion and resettlement; and 2. Compilation • Natural resource consumption. 2.1 Identify internal sources of information about potential and actual negative impacts, including 2.4 Identify the significant potential and actual sources such as: negative economic, social, cultural, and environmental impacts on local communities and • Actual performance data; their rights, considering: • Internal investment plans and associated risk • Intensity/severity of the impact; assessments; • Likely duration of the impact; • All data collected with GRI indicators (e.g., EC9, EN1, EN3, EN8, EN12, EN14-15, EN19-26, EN29, • Reversibility of the impact; and LA8, HR6-9, PR1-2) as relates to individual communities. • Scale of the impact. Version 3.1. 5
  • 157. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO 2.5 Report: • Operations and associated communities with significant potential or actual negative impacts; • Location of the operations with significant potential or negative impacts; and • Potential or actual negative impacts of operations. 3. Definitions Operations with significant potential or actual negative impacts on local communities. This refers primarily to operations, considered alone or in combination with the characteristics of local communities, that have higher than average potential of negative impacts, or actual negative impacts, on the social, economic or environmental wellbeing of local communities (for example, local community health and safety). 4. Documentation Potential information sources include organizational policies and risk assessment procedures, results of data collection from local community programs, and analysis results of external stakeholder forums, joint community committees, stakeholder reports, and other inputs. Both internal and external sources and references should be used. 5. References • OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones, 2006. • International Finance Corporation’s Performance Standards on Social Environmental Sustainability, 2006. 6 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 158. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP SO10 Prevention and mitigation 4. Documentation measures implemented in operations Potential information sources include: with significant potential or actual • Baseline studies – socio-economic, health, negative impacts on local communities. environment, cultural, etc; 1. Relevance • Agenda and meeting reports of works councils, occupational health and safety committees and This Indicator demonstrates the measures implemented other employee representation bodies; in response to the significant potential and actual negative impacts identified in Indicator SO9. • Social impact assessments; The quality and extent of prevention and mitigation • Gender impact assessments; measures is important in understanding the potential and actual impacts of organization-wide operations. • Health impact assessments; The information also provides insight into the ability of the organization to respond appropriately to • Environmental impact assessments; potential problems, and therefore the potential risks that impacts pose to the organization’s reputation or • Social action plans; and ability to operate. The approach to prevention and mitigation measures can also provide insight into how • Resettlement action plans. an organization implements its mission, values, and commitments. 5. References 2. Compilation • OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises (in particular Ch ii.3 v.2.b), 2000. 2.1 Use the information on potential and actual negative impacts reported in SO9. • OECD Risk Awareness Tool for Multinational Enterprises in Weak Governance Zones, 2006. 2.2 Report whether, for the significant potential and actual negative impacts reported in SO9: • International Finance Corporation’s Performance Standards on Social Environmental • Prevention and mitigation measures were Sustainability, 2006. implemented; • Prevention and mitigation measures were implemented in order to: i. Remediate non-compliance with laws or regulations; ii. Maintain compliance with laws or regulations; iii. Achieve a standard beyond legal compliance; • Prevention and mitigation objectives were achieved or not. 3. Definitions None. Version 3.1. 7
  • 159. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO SO2 Percentage and total number of business units analyzed for risks related to corruption. 1. Relevance Efforts to manage reputational risks arising from corrupt practices by employees or business partners require a system that has supporting procedures in place. This measure identifies two specific actions for ensuring the effective deployment of the reporting organization’s policies and procedures by its own employees and its intermediaries or business partners. Risk analysis is an important and necessary management approach that helps to assess the potential for incidents of corruption within the organization. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify business units analyzed for organizational risks related to corruption during the reporting period. This refers to either a formal risk assessment focused on corruption or the inclusion of corruption as a risk factor in overall risk assessments. 2.2 Report the total number and percentage of business units analyzed for risks related to corruption. 3. Definitions None. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include monitoring reports. 5. References • O ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of Foreign Public Officials in International Business Transactions, 1997. • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000. • I nter-American Convention Against Corruption, 1996. • U nited Nations Convention Against Corruption, 2003. • B usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003. 8 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 160. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP SO3 Percentage of employees trained in organization’s anti-corruption policies and procedures. 1. Relevance Efforts to manage reputational risks arising from corrupt practices by employees or business partners require a system that has supporting procedures in place. Training is an important element of such a system as it builds internal awareness and capacity necessary to prevent incidents of corruption. This measure reveals the proportion of the organization’s employees that can reasonably be assumed to be aware of the anti- corruption issues. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total number of employees, distinguishing between management and non- management employees, using the data from LA1. 2.2 Report separately the percentage of total number of management and non-management employees who have received anti-corruption training during the reporting period. 3. Definitions None. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include training records. 5. References • O ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of Foreign Public Officials in International Business Transactions, 1997. • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000. • I nter-American Convention Against Corruption, 1996. • U nited Nations Convention Against Corruption, 2003. • B usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003. Version 3.1. 9
  • 161. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO SO4 Actions taken in response to 5. References incidents of corruption. • U nited Nations Convention Against Corruption, 1. Relevance 2003. Corruption can be a significant risk to an organization’s • O ECD Convention on Combating Bribery of reputation and business. It is broadly linked to Foreign Public Officials in International Business contributing to poverty in transition economies, Transactions, 1997. damage to the environment, abuse of human rights, abuse of democracy, misallocation of investments, • I nter-American Convention Against Corruption, and undermining the rule of law. Organizations are 1996. increasingly expected by the marketplace, international norms, and stakeholders to demonstrate their adherence • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, to integrity, governance, and good business practices. Revision 2000. This Indicator demonstrates specific actions taken to limit exposure to sources of corruption and reduce the • A nti-Corruption Instruments and the OECD risk of new instances of corruption. For stakeholders, Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, 2003. there is an interest in both the occurrence of incidents, but also how the organization chooses to respond. • B usiness Principles for Countering Bribery, 2003. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report actions taken in response to incidents of corruption, including: • T he total number of incidents in which employees were dismissed or disciplined for corruption; and • T he total number of incidents when contracts with business partners were not renewed due to violations related to corruption. 2.2 Report any concluded legal cases regarding corrupt practices brought against the reporting organization or its employees during the reporting period and the outcomes of such cases. 3. Definitions None. 4. Documentation Potential information sources include legal department records of cases brought against the reporting organization, its employees, business partners, or contractors; minutes of the proceedings of internal disciplinary hearings; and contracts with business partners. 10 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 162. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP SO5 Public policy positions and 3. Definitions participation in public policy Public policy development development and lobbying. Organized or coordinated activities to effect government policy formulation. 1. Relevance This Indicator provides information that allows Lobbying organizations to compare public policy positions Refers to efforts to persuade or influence persons with formal sustainability policies and objectives. This holding political office, or candidates for such office, to information provides insight into the extent to which sponsor policies, and/or to influence the development publicly-expressed positions on sustainability are of legislation or political decisions. In this Indicator, consistently embedded across the organization and this can relate to lobbying governments at any level or aligned across different units. This allows a comparison international institutions. of organizational priorities (particularly when making comparisons within the same sector) at the same time as 4. Documentation the particular policy positions help to clarify the strategic relevance of sustainability issues for the organization. It Potential information sources include the public policy also helps to provide transparency for lobbying activities statements of the reporting organization; internal for those concerned with the integrity of the practices minutes of government relations committees or and potential impacts on stakeholders. departments; statements of positions adopted by the reporting organization in relevant trade associations; 2. Compilation and records of interactions with public policy-makers. 2.1 Participation refers to efforts where the 5. References organization has taken a formal position or activities where participation has been formally • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, recognized. While this could include activities Revision 2000. through trade associations, roundtables, task forces, and other forms of lobbying with public • O ECD Principles of Corporate Governance, 2004. policymakers, the disclosure relates to the position of the organization and not that of the bodies in which it is involved. 2.2 Report the significant issues that are the focus of the reporting organization’s participation in public policy development and lobbying. This refers to participation at the level of the organization rather than individual operations. 2.3 Report the core positions held on each of the reported issues above and explain any significant differences between lobbying positions and stated policies, sustainability goals, or other public positions. Version 3.1. 11
  • 163. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO SO6 Total value of financial and in- Related institutions kind contributions to political parties, Any bodies established with the primary purpose of arranging official or unofficial funding support for politicians, and related institutions by political parties, their elected representatives, or persons country. seeking political office. This definition also includes think-tanks, policy organs, trade associations, and other 1. Relevance support organizations that are linked to the creation The purpose of this Indicator is to reflect the scale of of support for political parties, their representatives, or the reporters’ engagement in political funding and to candidates for office. ensure transparency in political dealings and relationships with the reporting organization. Many countries have 4. Documentation legislation that sets limits on official expenditure by Potential information sources include the accounting parties and political candidates for campaigning purposes. records of external payments and public disclosure statements. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify the total monetary value of financial and 5. References in-kind contributions committed by the reporting • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, organization during the reporting period to Revision 2000. political parties, politicians, and related institutions. The value of in-kind contributions should be estimated. 2.2 Calculate contributions in accordance with national accounting rules (where these exist). 2.3 Report the total monetary value broken down by country for those countries where: • The organization has major operations and/or sales; • The organization holds a significant share of the market in comparison to other organizations; or • The sums contributed are significant compared to the total amount contributed globally. 3. Definitions Contributions Contributions can include donations, loans, sponsorships, purchase of tickets for fundraising events, advertising, use of facilities, design and printing, donation of equipment, retainers or jobs for elected politicians or candidates for office, etc. 12 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 164. Indicator Protocols Set: SO IP SO7 Total number of legal actions for Anti-trust and monopoly practices anti-competitive behavior, anti-trust, and Actions of the reporting organization that may result in collusion to erect barriers to entry to the sector, unfair monopoly practices and their outcomes. business practices, abuse of market position, cartels, 1. Relevance anti-competitive mergers, price-fixing, and other collusive actions which prevent competition. Mergers and acquisitions can affect consumer choice, pricing, and other factors that are essential to efficient 4. Documentation markets. Legislation has been introduced in many countries that seeks to control or prevent monopolies, Potential information sources include the legal with the underlying assumption that competition department records and public records. between enterprises also promotes economic efficiency and sustainable growth. Legal action indicates a 5. References situation in which the market actions or status of • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, the organization have reached a sufficient scale to Revision 2000. merit concern by a third party. Legal decisions arising from these situations can carry the risk of significant disruption of market activities for the organization and/ or punitive measures. 2. Compilation 2.1 This Indicator pertains to legal actions initiated under national or international laws designed primarily for the purpose of regulating anti- competitive behavior, anti-trust, or monopoly practices. 2.2 Identify legal actions pending or completed during the reporting period regarding anti-competitive behavior and violations of anti-trust and monopoly legislation in which the reporting organization has been identified as a participant. 2.3 Report the total number of legal actions for anti- competitive behavior, anti-trust, and monopoly practices. 2.4 Report the main outcomes of such actions, including any decisions or judgements. 3. Definitions Anti-competitive behavior Actions of the reporting organization and/or employees that may result in collusion with potential competitors to fix prices, coordinate bids, create market or output restrictions, impose geographic quotas, or allocate customers, suppliers, geographic areas, and product lines with the purpose of limiting the effects of market competition. Version 3.1. 13
  • 165. IP Indicator Protocols Set: SO SO8 Monetary value of significant fines 2.3 Where the reporting organization has not identified any non-compliance with laws or and total number of non-monetary regulations, a brief statement to this fact is sanctions for non-compliance with laws sufficient. and regulations. 2.4 Organizations are encouraged to report fines and 1. Relevance non-monetary sanctions in terms of the focus of laws. The level of non-compliance within the organization helps to indicate the ability of management to ensure 3. Definitions that operations conform to certain performance parameters. From an economic perspective, ensuring None. compliance helps to reduce financial risks that occur either directly through fines or indirectly through 4. Documentation impacts on reputation. The strength of an organization’s Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking compliance record can also affect its ability to expand systems operated by the legal department. Information operations or gain permits. regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting departments. Indicators EN28 and PR9 address compliance with specific aspects of law. An organization’s overall record of 5. References compliance with the range of laws under which it must operate is equally of interest. This Indicator is intended None. to reflect significant fines and non-monetary sanctions under laws or regulations not covered by EN28 and PR9, such as laws and regulations related to accounting fraud, workplace discrimination, corruption, etc. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions levied against the organization for failure to comply with laws or regulations, including: • International declarations/conventions/ treaties, and national, sub-national, regional, and local regulations, and. • Cases brought against the organization through the use of international dispute mechanisms or national dispute mechanisms supervised by government authorities. 2.2 Report significant fines and non-monetary sanctions in terms of: • Total monetary value of significant fines; • Number of non-monetary sanctions; and • Cases brought through dispute resolution mechanisms. 14 © 2000-2011 GRI
  • 166. IP Indicator Protocols Set Product Responsibility (PR) © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 167. © 2000-2011 GRI Version 3.1
  • 168. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP Product Responsibility Performance Indicators Aspect: Customer Health and Safety Aspect: Marketing Communications PR1 Life cycle stages in which health and safety PR6 Programs for adherence to laws, standards, impacts of products and services are assessed and voluntary codes related to marketing Co r e for improvement, and percentage of significant communications, including advertising, Co r e products and services categories subject to such promotion, and sponsorship. procedures. PR7 Total number of incidents of non-compliance PR2 Total number of incidents of non-compliance with regulations and voluntary codes with regulations and voluntary codes concerning marketing communications, concerning health and safety impacts of including advertising, promotion, and Add Add products and services, by type of outcomes. sponsorship, by type of outcomes. Aspect: Product and Service Labeling Aspect: Customer Privacy PR3 Type of product and service information PR8 Total number of substantiated complaints required by procedures, and percentage of regarding breaches of customer privacy and Add Co r e significant products and services subject to losses of customer data. such information requirements. Aspect: Compliance PR4 Total number of incidents of non-compliance PR9 Monetary value of significant fines for with regulations and voluntary codes non-compliance with laws and regulations Co r e concerning product and service information concerning the provision and use of products Add and labeling, by type of outcomes. and services PR5 Practices related to customer satisfaction, including results of surveys measuring Add customer satisfaction. Version 3.1 1
  • 169. IP Indicator Protocols Set: PR Relevance The Product Responsibility Indicator set addresses the effects of products and services management on customers and users. Organizations are expected to exercise due care in the design of their products and services to ensure they are fit for their intended use and do not pose unintended hazards to health and safety. In addition, communications related to both products and services and users need to take into consideration the information needs of customers and their rights to privacy. The Indicators are primarily structured in pairs, with a Core Indicator seeking disclosure on the processes in place to address the aspect, and an additional Indicator to report on degree of compliance. Definitions Type of non-compliance Court judgment on failure to act in accordance with regulations or laws, categorized by the nature of the laws or regulations breached. Product and service information/labeling Information and labeling are used synonymously and describe communication delivered with the product or service describing its characteristics. Customer privacy The right of the customer to privacy and personal refuge, including matters such as the protection of data, the use of information/data only for its original intended purpose (unless specifically agreed otherwise), the obligation to observe confidentiality, and protection from misuse or theft. A customer is understood to include end-customers (consumer) as well as business- to-business customers. Marketing communication The combination of strategies, systems, methods, and activities used by an organization to promote its reputation, brands, products, and services to target audiences. Marketing communications can include activities such as advertising, personal selling, promotion, public relations, and sponsorship. General References • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, Revision 2000. 2 ©2000-2011 GRI
  • 170. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP PR1 Life cycle stages in which health 3. Definitions and safety impacts of products and None. services are assessed for improvement, 4. Documentation and percentage of significant products Potential information sources include the reporting and services categories subject to such organization’s legal and sales departments as well as the procedures. documentation collected through quality management systems. 1. Relevance 5. References This measure helps to identify the existence and scope of systematic efforts to address health and safety across • OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, the life cycle of a product and/or service. Customers Revision 2000. expect products and services to perform their intended functions satisfactorily, and not pose a risk to health and safety. This responsibility is not only subject to laws and regulations, but is also addressed in voluntary codes such as the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises. Efforts made to protect the health and safety of those who use or deliver the product/service have direct impacts on an organization’s reputation, the organization’s legal and financial risk due to recall, market differentiation in relation to quality, and employee motivation. 2. Compilation 2.1 In each of the following life cycle stages, report whether the health and safety impacts of products and services are assessed for improvement: yes no Development of product concept RD Certification Manufacturing and production Marketing and promotion Storage distribution and supply Use and service Disposal, reuse, or recycling 2.2 Report the percentage of significant product or service categories that are covered by and assessed for compliance with such procedures. Version 3.1 3
  • 171. IP Indicator Protocols Set: PR PR2 Total number of incidents of 2.6 R eport the total number of incidents of non- compliance with the health and safety of products non-compliance with regulations and and services, broken down by: voluntary codes concerning the health • I ncidents of non-compliance with regulations and safety impacts of products and resulting in a fine or penalty; services during their life cycle, by type of • I ncidents of non-compliance with regulations outcomes. resulting in a warning; and 1. Relevance • I ncidents of non-compliance with voluntary Protection of health and safety is a recognized goal codes. of many national and international regulations. Failing to comply with legal requirements indicates 3. Definitions either inadequate internal management systems and procedures, or lack of implementation. In addition to None. direct financial consequences, ongoing compliance failure poses increased financial risk due to damage 4. Documentation to both reputation and employee motivation. For Potential information sources include the reporting an organization, the number of incidents of non- organization’s legal and RD departments as well as compliance should remain as low as possible. The trends documentation collected through quality management revealed by this Indicator will indicate improvements or systems. deterioration in the effectiveness of internal controls. 5. References 2. Compilation None. 2.1 This Indicator addresses the life cycle of the product or service once it is available for use and therefore subject to regulations concerning the health and safety of products and services. 2.2 Where the reporting organization has not identified any non-compliance with regulations and voluntary codes, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient. 2.3 Identify the total number of incidents of non- compliance with regulations and voluntary codes concerning the health and safety of products and services during the reporting period. 2.4 This Indicator refers to incidents of non-compliance within the reporting period. If a substantial number of incidents relate to events in preceding years, this should be indicated. 2.5 Incidents of non-compliance in which the organization was determined not to be at fault are not counted in this Indicator. 4 ©2000-2011 GRI
  • 172. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP PR3 Type of product and service 3. Definitions information required by procedures, None. and percentage of significant products 4. Documentation and services subject to such information Potential information sources include legal and sales requirements. departments and the documentation collected through quality management systems. 1. Relevance Accessible and adequate information on the 5. References sustainability impacts of products and services (positive • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, and negative) is necessary for customers and end users Revision 2000. to make informed purchasing choices, and for these preferences to be reflected in the market. Providing appropriate information and labeling with respect to sustainability impacts is directly linked to compliance with certain types of regulations and codes (such as national laws or the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises) and, potentially, with strategies for brand and market differentiation. This measure provides an indication of the degree to which information and labeling addresses a product’s or a service’s impact on sustainability. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report whether the following product and service information is required by the organization’s procedures for product and service information and labeling: yes no The sourcing of components of the product or service Content, particularly with regard to substances that might produce an environ- mental or social impact Safe use of the product or service Disposal of the product and environmental/social impacts Other (explain) 2.2 Report the percentage of significant product or service categories covered by and assessed for compliance with such procedures. Version 3.1 5
  • 173. IP Indicator Protocols Set: PR PR4 Total number of incidents of 2.5 eport the total number of incidents of non- R compliance with regulations concerning product non-compliance with regulations and and service information and labeling, broken down voluntary codes concerning product and by: service information and labeling, by type • I ncidents of non-compliance with regulations of outcomes. resulting in a fine or penalty; 1. Relevance • I ncidents of non-compliance with regulations The display and provision of information and labeling for resulting in a warning; and products and services are subject to many regulations and laws. Non-compliance indicates either inadequate • Incidents of non-compliance with voluntary internal management systems and procedures or codes. ineffective implementation. In addition to direct financial consequences, such as penalties and fines, 3. Definitions non-compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer None. loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents of non-compliance should remain as low as possible. 4. Documentation The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of Potential information sources include the reporting internal controls. organization’s legal and technical departments as well as documentation collected through quality management 2. Compilation systems. 2.1 This Indicator refers to incidents of non- 5. References compliance decided within the reporting period. If a substantial number of incidents relate to events None. in preceding years, this should be indicated. 2.2 Where the reporting organization has not identified any non-compliance with regulations and voluntary codes, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient. 2.3 Identify the total number of incidents of non- compliance with regulations and voluntary codes concerning product and service information and labeling during the reporting period. 2.4 Incidents of non-compliance in which the organization was determined not to be at fault are not counted in this Indicator. 6 ©2000-2011 GRI
  • 174. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP PR5 Practices related to customer 4. Documentation satisfaction, including results of surveys Potential information sources include the reporting organization’s customer relations and RD departments. measuring customer satisfaction. 1. Relevance 5. References Customer satisfaction is one measure of an organization’s • UNIFEM UNGC Women’s Empowerment sensitivity to its customers’ needs and, from an Principles: Principles 5 7, 2010. organizational perspective, is essential for long-term success. In the context of sustainability, customer satisfaction provides insight into how the organization approaches its relationship with one stakeholder group (customers). It can also be used in combination with other sustainability measures. Customers’ needs and preferences may differ by gender and other diversity factors. Used in combination, customer satisfaction can provide insights into the degree to which an organization considers the needs of other stakeholders. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report on organization-wide practices in place to assess and maintain customer satisfaction, such as: • Frequency of measuring customer satisfaction; • Standard requirements regarding methodologies of surveys; and • Mechanisms for customers to provide feedback. 2.2 Report the results or key conclusions of surveys (based on statistically relevant sample sizes) conducted in the reporting period that were related to information about: • The organization as a whole; • A major product/service category; or • Significant locations of operation. 2.3 For any survey results reported, identify the product/service category or locations of operations to which they apply. 3. Definitions None. Version 3.1 7
  • 175. IP Indicator Protocols Set: PR PR6 Programs for adherence to laws, • The subject of stakeholder questions or public debate. standards, and voluntary codes related to marketing communications, including 2.4 Report how the organization has responded to questions or concerns regarding these products. advertising, promotion, and sponsorship. 1. Relevance 3. Definitions Marketing communications are designed to influence None. opinions and purchasing decisions. The growth of consumer activism shows that stakeholders consider 4. Documentation marketing communications a significant issue when Potential information sources include the reporting they: organization’s legal, sales, and marketing departments. • Do not conform to generally accepted ethical or 5. References cultural standards; • I nternational Chamber of Commerce • Are irresponsible in relation to privacy intrusion recommendations (i.e., the ICC International Code of and dual standards; Advertising Practice) and related codes of conduct. • Are irresponsible in their attempts to influence • O ECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, vulnerable audiences such as children; and Revision 2000. • Are irresponsible in portraying gender roles in • Section J of The UN Beijing Platform For Action, ways that are not respectful. 1995. Marketing approaches that are seen as inappropriate can incur risks for organizations, including alienation of customers and other stakeholders, damage to reputation, financial costs, and legislative action. In addition to frameworks of national or international law, voluntary and self-regulatory codes (such as the ICC International Code of Advertising Practice or the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises) seek to express concepts of responsibility in marketing communications. The adoption of such self-disciplinary codes or rules can assist organizations in ensuring that their marketing communications practices conform to generally accepted standards. 2. Compilation 2.1 Report any codes or voluntary standards relating to marketing communications applied across the organization. 2.2 Report the frequency with which the organization reviews its compliance with these standards or codes. 2.3 Report whether the organization sells products that are: • Banned in certain markets; or 8 ©2000-2011 GRI
  • 176. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP PR7 Total number of incidents of 3. Definitions non-compliance with regulations and None. voluntary codes concerning marketing 4. Documentation communications, including advertising, Potential information sources include the reporting promotion, and sponsorship, by type of organization’s legal, sales, and marketing departments. outcomes. 5. References 1. Relevance None. Non-compliance indicates either inadequate internal management systems and procedures or ineffective implementation. In addition to direct financial consequences such as penalties and fines, non- compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents of non-compliance should remain as low as possible. The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of internal controls 2. Compilation 2.1 This Indicator refers to incidents of non-compliance within the reporting period. If a substantial number of incidents relate to events in preceding years, this should be indicated. 2.2 Where the reporting organization has not identified any non-compliance with regulations and voluntary codes, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient. 2.3 Identify the total number of incidents of non- compliance with regulations concerning marketing communications during the reporting period. 2.4 Incidents of non-compliance in which the organization was determined not to be at fault are not counted in this Indicator. 2.5 Report the total number of incidents of non- compliance with regulations concerning marketing communications, broken down by: • Incidents of non-compliance with regulations resulting in a fine or penalty; • Incidents of non-compliance with regulations resulting in a warning; and • Incidents of non-compliance with voluntary codes. Version 3.1 9
  • 177. IP Indicator Protocols Set: PR PR8 Total number of substantiated 3. Definitions complaints regarding breaches of Breach of customer privacy customer privacy and losses of customer Covers any non-compliance with existing legal data. regulations and (voluntary) standards of which the reporting organization is a member regarding the 1. Relevance protection of customer privacy. Protection of customer privacy is a generally recognized goal in national regulations and organizational policies. Substantiated complaint Non-compliance indicates either inadequate internal Written statement by regulatory or similar official body management systems and procedures or ineffective addressed to the reporting organization that identifies implementation. This Indicator provides an evaluation breaches of customer privacy, or a complaint lodged of the success of management systems and procedures with the organization that has been recognized as relating to customer privacy protection. In addition to legitimate by the organization. direct financial consequences such as penalties and fines, non-compliance poses a risk to reputation and customer 4. Documentation loyalty and satisfaction. An organization’s incidents of non-compliance should remain as low as possible. Information can be drawn from departments responsible The trends revealed by this Indicator can indicate for customer service, public relations, and/or legal improvements or deterioration in the effectiveness of concerns. internal controls. 5. References 2. Compilation None. 2.1 Identify the total number of complaints regarding breaches of customer privacy during the reporting period. 2.2 If a substantial number of these breaches relate to events in preceding years, this should be indicated. 2.3 Report the total number of substantiated complaints received concerning breaches of customer privacy, categorized by: • Complaints received from outside parties and substantiated by the organization; and • Complaints from regulatory bodies. 2.4 Report the total number of identified leaks, thefts, or losses of customer data. 2.5 Where the reporting organization has not identified any substantiated complaints, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient. 10 ©2000-2011 GRI
  • 178. Indicator Protocols Set: PR IP PR9 Monetary value of significant fines for non-compliance with laws and regulations concerning the provision and use of products and services. 1. Relevance The level of non-compliance within an organization is an indicator of the ability of management to ensure that operations conform to certain performance parameters. From an economic perspective, ensuring compliance helps to reduce financial risks that occur either directly through fines or indirectly through impacts on reputation. The strength of an organization’s compliance record can also affect its ability to expand operations or gain permits. 2. Compilation 2.1 Identify administrative or judicial sanctions levied against the organization for failure to comply with laws or regulations, including international declarations/conventions/ treaties, and national, sub-national, regional, and local regulations concerning the provision and use of the reporting organization’s products and services. Relevant information for this Indicator includes but is not limited to data from PR2, PR4, and PR7. 2.2 Report total monetary value of significant fines. 2.3 Where the reporting organization has not identified any non-compliance with laws or regulations, a brief statement to this fact is sufficient. 3. Definitions None. 4. Documentation Data sources include audit results or regulatory tracking systems operated by the legal department. Information regarding monetary fines can be found in accounting departments. 5. References None. Version 3.1 11
  • 179. Applying the Report Content Principles TP TP Technical Protocol Applying the Report Content Principles © 2011 GRI 1
  • 181. Applying the Report Content Principles TP Index Technical Protocol – Applying the Report Content Principles: an overview 2 Introduction 2 What does the Technical Protocol – Applying the Report Content Principles cover? 2 Audience 2 Materiality in the context of the GRI Reporting Framework 3 Sustainability Reporting and Companies 3 Defining report content: the process 4 Step 1: Identification – identify relevant topics 5 Step 2: Prioritization 7 Basic features of the Prioritization step 7 Analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and ‘Significance to the Organization’ 7 Determining Materiality and relative reporting priority 9 Step 3: Validation – checking the Completeness of the material Aspects 10 Review 11 Conclusion 12 Glossary of Terms 13 1
  • 182. TP Technical Protocol Technical Protocol – Applying the Report Content Principles: an overview Introduction The Protocol is designed to be used in conjunction with the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, the Sector A reporting organization has to consider many topics Supplements and other Technical Protocols1. It proposes when compiling a sustainability report. In order to a generic approach on how to apply the ‘Reporting provide a balanced and reasonable representation of Guidance for Defining Content’2 and the ‘Reporting its sustainability performance, topics that are relevant Principles for Defining Content’ that are outlined in the and material for an organization should be covered in its GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines. Knowledge of report. the GRI Reporting Framework is a prerequisite for using the Protocol. Definitions of key terms used throughout Identifying the topics that are relevant for a sustainability this Protocol can be found in the Glossary of Terms, on report, and prioritizing those topics that are material, is page 13. a challenge for most reporting organizations. The range of topics in a sustainability report varies, depending In applying the Protocol, the reporting organization will on the definition of report content and the topics that be able to provide an explanation, and documentation, are identified as material. Material topics include those on how it has applied the ‘Reporting Guidance for that reflect the organization’s significant economic, Defining Content’ and the ‘Reporting Principles environmental and social impacts; and topics that for Defining Content’, as required by the Standard would substantively influence the assessments and Disclosures 3.5-3.73 in the GRI Sustainability Reporting decisions of stakeholders. Guidelines. Defining report content correctly is crucial in making sustainability reporting a valuable exercise, for reporting Audience organizations and report users. The Technical Protocol is intended primarily for the use of those involved in preparing, approving and What does the Technical Protocol – assuring sustainability reports. The Protocol is also of value for others, internal and external to the reporting Applying the Report Content Principles organization, who would like to learn more about the cover? process for defining report content outlined by the GRI Reporting Framework, including for analytical, research This Technical Protocol provides process guidance on and/or educational purposes. The Protocol is designed how to define the content of a sustainability report. This for use by organizations of any size, sector, or location. includes deciding on the Scope of a report, the range of topics covered, each topic’s relative reporting priority and level of coverage, and what to disclose in the report about the process for defining its content. It is important to note that the process of defining report content is dependent on the individual characteristics of a reporting organization. It is a highly iterative and complex process. The Protocol aims to help reporting organizations visualize the process as a series of steps. 1 For more information on the GRI Reporting Framework visit: www.globalreporting.org 2 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp.7-13. 3 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp.21-22. 2 © 2011 GRI
  • 183. Applying the Report Content Principles TP meet the needs of the present without compromising Materiality in the context the needs of future generations. These material topics of the GRI Reporting will often have a significant financial impact in the near- term or long-term on an organization. They will therefore Framework also be relevant for stakeholders who focus strictly on the financial condition of an organization. Material topics for a reporting organization should include those topics that have a direct or indirect impact Many topics that attract significant stakeholder interest on an organization’s ability to create, preserve or erode in an organization, or represent major economic, economic, environmental and social value for itself, its environmental, or social impacts, result in financial stakeholders and society at large. consequences within a time frame that will be relevant for at least some participants in capital markets.4 The operations and activities of an organization lead to positive and negative economic, environmental and The threshold for defining material topics to report social impacts. Some of these sustainability impacts will should be set to identify those opportunities and risks be visible to stakeholders, who will express an interest which are most important to stakeholders, the economy, in them directly. But not all sustainability impacts will environment, and society, or the reporting organization, be recognized by stakeholders. Some impacts may be and therefore merit particular focus in a sustainability slow and cumulative. Others will occur at a distance from report. stakeholders, so that causal links may not be clear. Sustainability Reporting and Companies Sustainability impacts create both opportunities and There may be overlap between the content of a risks for an organization. The ability of an organization sustainability report and the content of existing to recognize opportunities and risks, and act effectively statutory reporting requirements for companies, in in relation to them, will determine whether the terms of: organization creates, preserves or erodes value. • Sustainability performance indicators correlated to By following the ‘Reporting Guidance for Defining key value drivers or financial metrics Content’, and applying the ‘Reporting Principles for • Qualitative risks and opportunities within a time Defining Content’ in the GRI Sustainability Reporting frame, relevant for the purposes of statutory Guidelines, the reporting organization should be able to reporting requirements report on those topics that demonstrate its impacts, to recognize and set out to address opportunities and risks, Sustainability reporting should address all material and to measure and understand its value in financial and sustainability topics that are relevant in understanding non-financial terms. how a company can create, preserve or erode value over time. Economic, environmental and social impacts The materiality focus of sustainability reports is broader can become important over an extended time period. than the traditional measures of financial materiality. In Reports must be able to reflect both immediate, financial reporting, materiality is commonly thought of acute topics and foreseeable longer-term topics. A as a threshold for influencing the economic decisions sustainability report therefore covers a wider range of of those using an organization’s financial statements, topics than statutory reporting requirements, including investors in particular. The concept of a threshold is also but not limited to: important in sustainability reporting, but it is concerned • Impacts on stakeholder groups that are of high with a wider range of impacts and stakeholders. significance to them Materiality for sustainability reporting is not limited only to those sustainability topics that have a significant • Opportunities to contribute to broader sustainability financial impact on the organization. Determining objectives materiality for a sustainability report also includes • Opportunities to adapt to planned changes in considering economic, environmental, and social policies and regulatory frameworks impacts that cross a threshold in affecting the ability to These impacts could come in a range of forms, including but not limited to: 4 • Significant ongoing impacts on short-term financial indicators (e.g., cash flow) • Sudden changes in the financial position of an organization due to the realization of an opportunity or risk • Cumulative effects over time resulting in financial consequences that are not material in the short-term, but may be material for long-term investors 3
  • 184. TP Technical Protocol Defining report content: the process Topics GRI REPORTING FRAMEWORK Categories This chapter describes the process that reporting STANDARD DISCLOSURES organizations should go through in order to answer the Aspects question of ‘what to report’. Strategy and Management Approach and The process begins with the identification of relevant Profile Performance Indicators topics. Relevant topics are then prioritized as material Aspects, which are then validated. The end result of this process is a list of material Aspects and related Standard Disclosures which should be disclosed in the organization’s sustainability report. Figure 1: GRI Reporting Framework Terminology The reporting organization’s senior decision-makers Having followed the process steps, it is vitally important should take ownership of the process for defining report that all reporting organizations undertake a review of content, and should approve any associated strategic their sustainability report. decisions. The four ‘Reporting Principles for Defining Content’ Figure 1 depicts the terminology used in the GRI featured in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Reporting Framework. Knowledge of this terminology should be used in the process for defining report is important in understanding the process for defining content: ‘Materiality’, ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’, report content. ‘Sustainability Context’ and ‘Completeness’.5 Each Reporting Principle features three components: The three process steps for defining report content are a definition, an explanation, and tests. All three depicted in Figure 2. They are: components need to be considered in the process. 1. Identification Figure 2 indicates which of these Reporting Principles 2. Prioritization is significant in the different process steps. ‘Stakeholder 3. Validation Inclusiveness’ is applied to varying degrees throughout the whole process. Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators Report IDENTIFICATION PRIORITIZATION VALIDATION Sustainability Materiality Completeness Context Stakeholder Inclusiveness REVIEW Figure 2: Defining report content – the process 5 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 8-13. 4 © 2011 GRI
  • 185. Applying the Report Content Principles TP It is important to note that the process for defining Step 1: Identification – identify relevant report content is iterative and dynamic, rather than linear and static. The reporting organization repeats the topics process for each reporting period, thereby refining the reporting process. Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators Documentation of the process is crucial, including its Report methodologies, assumptions and the decisions taken. Accurate records facilitate analysis and assurance, help IDENTIFICATION PRIORITIZATION VALIDATION to fulfill the Standard Disclosures 3.5-3.8 in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines6, and enable the Sustainability Materiality Completeness reporting organization to explain and defend its chosen Context approach. Stakeholder Inclusiveness Inevitably, the process for defining report content REVIEW requires subjective judgments. The reporting organization should be transparent about its judgments. The aim of the Identification step is to create a shortlist This will enable internal and external stakeholders to of relevant topics that should be assessed for inclusion in understand the process. an organization’s sustainability report. This Technical Protocol is based on the assumption that Relevant topics are those that may reasonably be the reporting organization determines the Report Scope considered important for reflecting the organization’s in conjunction with determining the Report Boundary - economic, environmental, and social impacts, or the range of entities whose performance is represented influencing the decisions of stakeholders. All such topics in the report (e.g., subsidiaries, joint ventures, sub- potentially merit inclusion in a sustainability report. contractors, etc). Reporting organizations should apply a wide-ranging The ‘Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting’7 and the radar to identify all relevant topics. All Aspects and GRI Boundary Protocol8 offer guidance on how to set the related Standard Disclosures identified under each Boundary for a sustainability report and how to describe Category in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines the chosen Boundary to report users. It is referenced at and applicable Sector Supplements should be the relevant stages in the following process description. considered relevant. They have been developed through GRI’s multi-stakeholder processes and are generally applicable for reporting an organization’s sustainability performance. Alongside these, any other topic outside the GRI Reporting Framework that meets the definition for relevant topics should be included in the shortlist. In order to factor in sustainability impacts and reasonable stakeholder expectations and interests when defining relevant topics, the reporting organization needs to define the range of entities, or groups of entities, that fall within the Report Boundary. To do so, the reporting organization needs to determine which entities it controls or significantly influences. The Reporting Principles 1. ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ and 2. ‘Sustainability Context’ are the most relevant Principles for the Identification step, and must be applied. In assessing the range of potentially relevant 6 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22. 7 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 17-19. 8 The Boundary Protocol is available for free download from www.globalreporting.org. 5
  • 186. TP Technical Protocol topics, it is vital to use the tests that underlie these two • Organizational performance in relation to Principles 9. information about economic, environmental, and social conditions in relevant locations, e.g., These two Reporting Principles involve different points discussing water consumption in relation to of departure. available supply in a particular location 1. ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ emphasizes attentiveness • Organizational performance in relation to other to topics raised through the range of stakeholder actors. For example, relating resource usage, engagement. In order to compile a report that employment creation or wages to that of other provides a balanced and reasonable representation organizations of the reporting organization’s performance, and can inform the assessment and decision-making Further perspectives for analyzing significant of stakeholders, the reporting organization must economic, environmental, and social impacts may understand the reasonable expectations and include, but are not limited to: interests of those stakeholders, and be able to • The scale of impact and its current and future describe the process of engagement. implications The reporting organization needs to identify its • Comparison of impacts to relative scale; absolute stakeholders, and learn about their expectations and norms; global vs. local limits interests, in order to take a well-informed decision on Report Scope. The Principle underlines the • The consequences of impacts usefulness of stakeholder engagement in informing • Size and type (positive/negative) of contribution decision-making during the reporting process. including externalities 2. ‘Sustainability Context’ emphasizes the necessity of • The accumulative severity of impacts over time considering actual impact on sustainability. Impacts can be considered in absolute and relative terms. • Analysis of the absolute and relative significance of the organization’s impacts in terms of overall The Principle is intended to assess the organization’s economic, environmental and social trends contribution to the environmental and social trends that are the focus of sustainability concerns. Time horizons and criteria play a crucial role in Understanding the organization’s impacts and evaluating impacts. The accumulation of impacts dependencies on ecosystem services can also be over time, and generational repercussions, should seen as part of ‘Sustainability Context’. be evaluated. It is also important to document how The tests for this Principle10 will guide the reporting the trends that are then identified are prioritized and organization. In using the tests the organization’s tracked in future reports. actions are not limited to but may include the review of documents and information sources that assist in The organization’s analysis of its impacts should determining and analyzing its significant economic, be systematic and consider the precautionary environmental and social impacts. principle. In addition, where practicable the reporting organization should apply a scientific and These documents and information sources may internationally validated approach to measurement, include, but are not limited to: and rely on proven expertise and authoritative • Authoritative research and forecasts on economic, research. environmental, and social topics, for example, those published by local and international public After applying these two Principles to the range of institutions/governmental organizations potential topics to consider, the organization should have identified a shortlist of relevant topics that • Relevant national and international public can then be assessed for materiality and relative policy targets and indicators on economic, reporting priority. environmental, and social topics 9 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12. 10 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 12. 6 © 2011 GRI
  • 187. Applying the Report Content Principles TP Step 2: Prioritization The methodology applied in the Prioritization step varies according to the individual organization. Specific circumstances such as business model, sector, Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators geographic, cultural and legal operating context, ownership structure, and size and nature of impacts Report affect how an organization prioritizes the topics and Aspects it covers in its sustainability report. What IDENTIFICATION PRIORITIZATION VALIDATION is important, given this variation, is the need for an organization to develop a rational process, the ability to Sustainability Materiality Completeness Context document it, and the ability to replicate the process in Stakeholder Inclusiveness subsequent reporting cycles. REVIEW The GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines require disclosure on these areas under Standard Disclosure 3.511. The Prioritization step involves examining all identified Analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and topics that could be included in a sustainability report, ‘Significance to the Organization’ assessing which topics are material, and deciding the level of coverage and detail they will be afforded; the It is important to note that while each Aspect should relative reporting priority. be assessed on ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ and ‘Significance to the Organization’, these viewpoints In the Prioritization step, analysis should be undertaken overlap to some extent with respect to internal on the Aspect level. The step also involves deciding how stakeholders. The interests and expectations of to represent the reporting organization’s performance in stakeholders that are invested specifically in the success material topics in the report. of the organization (e.g., of workers, shareholders, and suppliers) should inform the analysis of both viewpoints. Basic features of the Prioritization step The Prioritization step should include the following features as a minimum: 1. An assessment of the Aspects based on analyzing the: • Significance to Stakeholders; and • Significance to the Organization. An analysis of Aspects using these viewpoints will help the reporting organization to combine findings from stakeholder engagement (on how stakeholders perceive impacts) with an assessment of organizational priorities. 2. Determining materiality and relative reporting priority. Depending on the Aspect, this determination should involve qualitative analysis and discussion, or quantitative assessment, or both, on the basis of criteria. It is important to note that the fact that a topic is difficult to quantify does not mean that the topic is not material. The reporting organization needs to establish the thresholds that render an Aspect material, and support its decision-making about relative reporting priority. Establishing thresholds should include consideration of time horizons. The thresholds and underlying criteria need to be clearly defined, documented and communicated. 3. A systematic approach. The Prioritization assessment should be systematic, documented and replicable, and used consistently from year to year. Changes to the assessment approach, and their implications, should be documented. 4. Visual communication. The reporting organization should be able to communicate the results of its Prioritization step in a simple visual manner, explaining the relationship of the selected Aspects to the analysis of the two viewpoints stated above. The representation of Aspects within this visual explanation should be supported by evidence or a documented rationale. 11 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22. 7
  • 188. TP Technical Protocol SIGNIFICANCE TO STAKEHOLDERS into a series of decisions on what to include and exclude from its report. The analysis of this viewpoint should include, but is not limited to, assessment of the views expressed by Consideration of the Aspects identified by stakeholders stakeholders during the reporting period. may include but is not limited to: Stakeholder views can be drawn from existing, • Each stakeholder group’s perception of the ongoing engagement mechanisms, as well as from organization’s impact on that stakeholder group stakeholder engagement that is initiated specifically • Each stakeholder group’s perception of the group’s for defining sustainability report content. Throughout dependency on the organization the engagement process the Reporting Principle of ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ is applied in detail. • The geographical location of stakeholders, and the significance of the Aspect to their region The nature of the organization’s impact should inform • The diversity and range of stakeholders who express the geographic focus of engagement, and the process of interest and/or are affected engagement should be appropriate to the stakeholder group. Stakeholder engagement should identify the • The expectations of stakeholders regarding action interests of stakeholders who are unable to articulate and response to an Aspect their views (e.g., future generations, fauna, ecosystems, • The expectations of stakeholders regarding etc). These views could be presented by proxies. The transparency on a particular Aspect reporting organization should identify a process for taking such views into account in determining In addition, prioritizing stakeholders requires analysis of materiality. The organization should identify the interests how stakeholders relate to the reporting organization. of stakeholders with whom it may not be in constant or This process may include, but is not limited to, the obvious dialogue. degree to which stakeholders: The stakeholder engagement should be two-way in • Are interested in or affected by the organization’s nature, systematic and objective. Some engagement impacts processes with specific stakeholder groups, such as • Have the ability to influence outcomes within the workers and communities, should be independent of organization management and include mechanisms for stakeholders to express collective views relevant to their location. • Are invested in the success/failure of the organization An organization should also be able to identify and consider their key stakeholders and their respective The GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines require concerns, and how their views may affect decisions on disclosure on stakeholder engagement under Standard the report content. Disclosures 4.14-4.1712. The reporting organization should be able to describe how stakeholders are The engagement process should be sensitive to Aspects identified and prioritized, how their input has been that are important to key stakeholders while recognizing used or not used, and how different expectations and gaps between the perceptions of the organization interests are assessed, as well as the organization’s and stakeholders. Aspects of high significance to key rationale behind the chosen approach. stakeholders should be considered material, especially those Aspects that concern the stakeholders’ own The analysis of ‘Significance to Stakeholders’ must interests. include use of the tests that relate to stakeholders for the Reporting Principle of ‘Materiality’13. The analysis requires the reporting organization to translate the varied opinions of different stakeholders 12 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 24. 13 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 8. 8 © 2011 GRI
  • 189. Applying the Report Content Principles TP SIGNIFICANCE TO THE ORGANIZATION The definition of thresholds has a significant effect on a The analysis should include but is not limited to: sustainability report. It is important that the thresholds are clearly defined, documented and communicated by • Current and future financial and non-financial the reporting organization. implications In defining thresholds, the organization needs to make a • Impacts on the strategies, policies, processes, decision on how to address Aspects that weigh more in relationships and commitments of the organization one viewpoint than the other. Emerging issues – Aspects • Impacts on competitive advantage/management that might become relevant over time – are an example excellence of this. An Aspect does not need to weigh heavily in both viewpoints to be deemed a priority for reporting. The aim of the analysis is to prioritize those Aspects The Aspect’s weight within one viewpoint is more that might positively or negatively influence the important than convergence between the different organization’s ability to deliver on its vision and/or viewpoints, and the establishing of a lowest common strategy. denominator should be avoided. In addition, as noted To prioritize these Aspects for reporting, the earlier, Aspects of high significance to key stakeholders organization’s assessment can include but is not limited concerning their own interests should be considered to: material for reporting. • The likelihood of risks or opportunities arising from After the decision on which Aspects should be an Aspect considered material, the reporting organization needs to make an assessment of relative reporting priorities. • The likelihood of a potential long or short term Depending on the relative reporting priority assigned, impact the coverage of material Aspects in the report varies. The • Severity of impact reporting organization can then decide on the level of coverage for the individual Aspects. • How critical the impact is for the long-term performance of the organization In Figure 3, the area between the two axes includes • Ability/maturity of the organization to respond the Aspects identified during the Identification step. Here, the Aspects are placed with respect to the • Preparedness considerations of stakeholders and the organization. • Opportunity for the organization to grow or gain All the Aspects within the chart should be considered for advantage from the impact reporting. The thresholds, represented by the red arcs, are set by the organization. Where an Aspect sits within Elements of this information might be available through defined thresholds will determine the level of coverage established internal policies, practices and procedures the Aspect should receive in a sustainability report. (e.g., strategy, KPIs, risk assessments, and financial reports), as well as regulatory disclosure. The analysis of ‘Significance to the Organization’ must include use of the tests that relate to organizational Significance to Stakeholders factors for the Reporting Principle of ‘Materiality’14. Determining materiality and relative reporting e priority ag er ov After completing the analysis of ‘Significance to fC lo Stakeholders’ and ‘Significance to the Organization’, the ve Le reporting organization will be able to visually represent an Aspect with respect to both viewpoints. The organization should now define thresholds that render an Aspect material. The analysis of the two viewpoints should be reflected in these thresholds. Significance to the Organization Aspects of high significance to either Stakeholders or to the Organization should be considered for reporting Figure 3: Relative reporting priority 14 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12. 9
  • 190. TP Technical Protocol An organization could consider the following as Step 3: Validation – checking the examples of how it may address content and coverage Completeness of the material Aspects levels according to relative reporting priority: • Aspects with relatively low reporting priority may Topics, Categories, Aspects, Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Indicators be Aspects reported to fulfill regulatory or other reporting requirements. It may be decided to not Report include them in the report. IDENTIFICATION PRIORITIZATION VALIDATION • Aspects assigned medium-level reporting priority may be considered for inclusion in the report, but Sustainability Materiality Completeness given less attention and content. Context Stakeholder Inclusiveness • Aspects deemed high-level may be reported on in great detail, be given more attention, or form a REVIEW theme for the report itself. At this stage in defining report content, the reporting The Validation step requires all identified material process should revisit the range of entities, or groups of Aspects to be assessed against the Reporting Principle entities, that fall within the Report Boundary. To do so, of ‘Completeness’ prior to gathering the information to the organization needs to determine the level of impact be reported. This ensures that Aspects identified in the of the entities it controls or has significant influence Prioritization step are checked against the dimensions upon, to determine their relative importance. of Scope, Boundary and Time. If necessary, adjustments should be made to the selection and coverage of the Alongside this, the reporting organization needs to material Aspects. decide on the depth of information in its report; for which of its entities should it include Performance The reporting organization can also take the approach Indicators, Disclosure on Management Approach or a of assessing the Performance Indicators for materiality narrative disclosure covering strategies and dilemmas. during the Validation step. If a Performance Indicator is See the ‘Reporting Guidance for Boundary Setting’ and deemed material, yet the Aspect it belongs to was not the GRI Boundary Protocol for further guidance and identified as material, the Aspect should be reconsidered definitions. for its materiality. At the end of the Prioritization stage the reporting Validation should be undertaken with the aim of organization will have established all the Aspects to be ensuring a report provides a reasonable and balanced included in the report and the level of coverage that representation of the organization’s sustainability each Aspect will be afforded. performance, including both its positive and negative contributions. The Validation step involves assessing the material Aspects against: 1. Report Scope – the range of sustainability topics covered in a report 2. Report Boundary – the range of entities whose performance will be represented by the report 3. Time – the completeness of selected information with respect to the reporting period The four tests featured in the Reporting Principle of ‘Completeness’15 should guide the reporting organization during the Validation of its report content. See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, p. 13. 15 10 © 2011 GRI
  • 191. Applying the Report Content Principles TP Conducting these tests will help ensure that report should be subject to the same Reporting Principles content has been decided on properly. and have the same technical rigor as GRI’s Standard Disclosures. It is critical for the material Aspects identified for inclusion in the report to be signed off by the relevant After the Validation step, the reporting organization internal senior decision-makers at the reporting should have authorized its chosen material Aspects to organization. Some organizations may choose to be included in the report. The organization can now involve external stakeholders in this authorization. The start to gather the information to be reported, and Validation process should be documented. assemble the report. In gathering the information, the organization will need to determine the Aspects for Once the report content has been signed off, the which it already has management and performance identified material Aspects require translating into information available, and those for which it still needs disclosure items to report against. to establish management approaches and performance measurement systems.17 Many of the Aspects identified will correspond to Aspects in the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines and Sector Supplements. These documents set out Review Disclosures on Management Approach and Performance Once a sustainability report has been compiled and Indicators under each of the Aspects. presented, it is vitally important that the reporting organization reviews it. In compiling a report it is Performance Indicators, as defined in the GRI Reporting crucial to follow the three steps of 1. Identification, 2. Framework, are the result of a unique engagement Prioritization and 3. Validation. Reviewing a report is of process and may be considered authoritative: the equal importance to the following of these three steps. best expected practice for a globally consistent way of measuring and monitoring performance on each Aspect. Review takes place after the report has been released Performance Indicators include Core and Additional and the organization is preparing for the next report Indicators. cycle. A wide-ranging radar should be utilized for the review. The findings will inform and contribute to the Core Indicators are generally applicable Indicators in Identification step for the next reporting cycle. the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and are assumed to best capture the measuring of material The Principles of ‘Stakeholder Inclusiveness’ and Aspects for most organizations. There may be cases ‘Sustainability Context’, and their associated tests in the where an Aspect is considered material, but a specific GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines18, should inform Indicator could be deemed not material in the context the review of a sustainability report. They serve as checks and circumstances. regarding the presentation and evaluation of report content, as well as checks for the reporting process as a An organization should report on Core Indicators whole. unless they are deemed not material on the basis of the Reporting Principles for Defining Report Content.16 The reporting organization can choose to engage Additional Indicators may also be determined material. internal and external stakeholders to check whether the report content provides a reasonable and balanced A reporting organization may identify material Aspects picture of the organization’s sustainability performance, that are not addressed in the GRI Reporting Framework. and if the process by which the report content was To address these Aspects the organization may apply derived reflects the intent of the two Reporting alternative indicators, or develop their own indicators. Principles. Organization-specific indicators included in the report 16 If a Core Indicator is not reported and the reporting organization plans to declare an Application Level A or A+, the organization must explain the reason for the Indicator’s omission. See the GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines and www.globalreporting.org for further information on the GRI Application Levels and background information on reasons for omission. 17 If an Aspect has been identified as material and the reporting organization lacks sufficient information to report on it, the sustainability report should state what action will be taken to resolve the information deficit, and the timeframe for doing so. 18 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 11-12. 11
  • 192. TP Technical Protocol Conclusion This Technical Protocol provides process guidance on how to define the content of a sustainability report. This includes deciding on the Scope of a report, the range of topics covered, each topic’s relative reporting priority and level of coverage, and what to disclose in the report about the process for defining its content. Defining report content is a process that varies with an organization’s individual circumstances and relies on informed judgment. As the Protocol cannot address all variations, the GRI website features a collection of examples from reporting organizations that describe the process by which they defined their report content, required by Standard Disclosures 3.5 – 3.719. The online examples can be found at: www.globalreporting.org The Report Content and Materiality Protocol is intended to help organizations optimize the quality and value of their sustainability reporting. With a clear idea of what is involved in defining report content, organizations are able to focus sustainability reports on material sustainability topics. Identifying and prioritizing material topics helps organizations to identify opportunities and anticipate risks, and enables greater understanding of their ability to create, preserve or erode economic, environmental and social value for itself, its stakeholders and society at large. 19 See GRI Sustainability Reporting Guidelines Versions 3.1 and 3.0, pp. 21-22. 12 © 2011 GRI
  • 193. Applying the Report Content Principles TP Glossary of Terms Additional Indicators Indicator Protocol Additional Indicators are those Indicators identified in An Indicator Protocol provides definitions, the GRI Guidelines that represent emerging practice compilation guidance, and other information to or address topics that may be material to some assist report preparers, and to ensure consistency in organizations but not generally for a majority. the interpretation of the Performance Indicators. An Indicator Protocol exists for each of the Performance Aspects Indicators contained in the Guidelines. The general types of information that are related to a Performance Indicator specific Indicator category (e.g., energy use, child labor, customers). Qualitative or quantitative information about results or outcomes associated with the organization that is Categories comparable and demonstrates change over time. Broad areas or groupings of sustainability topics. The Precautionary Principle categories included in the GRI Guidelines are: economic, environmental, and social. The social grouping is The Precautionary Principle refers to the approach categorized in terms of Labor Practices, Human Rights, taken to address potential environmental impacts. See Society, and Product Responsibility. A given category Rio Declaration on Environment and Development may have several Indicator Aspects. (1992), United Nations Conference on Environment and Development. ‘Principle 15: In order to protect Core Indicator the environment, the precautionary approach shall be widely applied by States according to their capabilities. Core Indicators are those Indicators identified in the GRI Where there are threats of serious or irreversible Guidelines to be of interest to most stakeholders and damage, lack of full scientific certainty shall not be used assumed to be material unless deemed otherwise on the as a reason for postponing cost effective measures to basis of the GRI Reporting Principles. prevent environmental degradation.’ Ecosystem dependencies Report Boundary For detailed information on ‘dependencies’, see the TEEB Boundary refers to the range of entities (e.g., subsidiaries, (The Economics of Ecosystems and Biodiversity) study joint ventures, sub-contractors, etc) whose performance discussions at www.teebweb.org. is represented in the report. In setting the Boundary for its report, an organization must consider the range of Entity entities over which it exercises control (often referred An organization or sometimes an operation that is to as the ‘organizational boundary’ and usually linked to considered for inclusion or exclusion from a reporting definitions used in financial reporting) and over which boundary, no matter whether it is a legally constituted it exercises influence (often called the ‘operational body. boundary’). In assessing influence, the organization will need to consider its ability to influence entities upstream GRI Reporting Framework (e.g., in its supply chain) as well as entities downstream (e.g., distributors and users of its products and services). The GRI Reporting Framework is intended to provide The Boundary may vary based on the specific Aspect or a generally accepted framework for reporting on type of information being reported. an organization’s economic, environmental, and social performance. The Framework consists of the Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, the Indicator Protocols, Technical Protocols, and the Sector Supplements. 13
  • 194. TP Technical Protocol Report Scope • Performance Indicators that elicit comparable information on the economic, environmental, and Scope refers to the range of sustainability topics covered social performance of the organization. in a report. The sum of the topics and Indicators reported should be sufficient to reflect significant economic, Topics environmental, and social impacts. It should also enable stakeholders to assess the organization’s performance. The largest group of subjects within the terminology In determining whether the information in the report used in the GRI Reporting Framework (see Figure 1 in is sufficient, the organization should consider both this Technical Protocol). the results of stakeholder engagement processes and broadbased societal expectations that may not have surfaced directly through stakeholder engagement processes. Reporting Principle Concepts that describe the outcomes a report should achieve and that guide decisions made throughout the reporting process, such as which Indicators to respond to, and how to respond to them. Sector Supplements Sector Supplements are versions of the GRI Guidelines tailored for particular sectors. Some sectors face unique issues. Sector Supplements capture these issues, which may not be covered in the original Guidelines. Sector Supplements feature integrated commentary and new Performance Indicators, ensuring that sustainability reports cover key sectoral concerns. Stakeholders Stakeholders are defined broadly as those groups or individuals: (a) that can reasonably be expected to be significantly affected by the organization’s activities, products, and/or services; or (b) whose actions can reasonably be expected to affect the ability of the organization to successfully implement its strategies and achieve its objectives. Standard Disclosures The Guidelines present topics and information for reporting that are material to most organizations and of interest to most stakeholders. These are captured in three types of Standard Disclosures: • Strategy and Profile Disclosures set the overall context for reporting and for understanding organizational performance, such as its strategy, profile, governance, and management approach; • Disclosures on Management Approach cover how an organization addresses a given set of topics in order to provide context for understanding performance in a specific area; and 14 © 2011 GRI
  • 195. Applying the Report Content Principles TP Legal Liability This document, designed to promote sustainability Further information on the GRI and the reporting, has been developed through a unique Sustainability Reporting Guidelines may be multi-stakeholder consultative process involving obtained from: representatives from reporting organizations and www.globalreporting.org report information users from around the world. While the GRI Board of Directors encourage use of the GRI info@globalreporting.org Sustainability Reporting Guidelines (GRI Guidelines) by all organizations, the preparation and publication of reports based fully or partially on the GRI Guidelines is the full responsibility of those producing them. Neither the GRI Board of Directors nor Stichting Global Reporting Initiative can assume responsibility for Global Reporting Initiative any consequences or damages resulting directly or PO Box 10039 indirectly, from the use of the GRI Guidelines in the preparation of reports or the use of reports based on the 1001 EA Amsterdam GRI Guidelines. The Netherlands Tel: +31 (0) 20 531 00 00 Copyright and Trademark Notice Fax: +31 (0) 20 531 00 31 This document is copyright-protected by Stichting Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). The reproduction and distribution of this document for information and/or © 2000-2011 Global Reporting Initiative. use in preparing a sustainability report is permitted All rights reserved. without prior permission from GRI. However, neither this document nor any extract from it may be reproduced, stored, translated, or transferred in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) for any other purpose without prior written permission from GRI. Global Reporting Initiative, the Global Reporting Initiative logo, Sustainability Reporting Guidelines, and GRI are trademarks of the Global Reporting Initiative. 15